Instruction

Manual
Model SIH1100
ICS Operation and Monitoring
Release : R2
Function Manual
IM 33G2C20-11E

IM 33G2C20-11E
4th Edition

 Preface
The Information and Command Station (ICS) is a human interface of the integrated
production control system, CENTUM CS.
The ICS visualizes and displays various information necessary for understanding
operation conditions, making it easy to operate and monitor a plant.
Product Covered by This Manual
This manual covers the following products:
SIH1100/SHW1100/SIU1100
SIH4110/SHW4110/SIU4110
SIH4120/SHW4120/SIU4120
SIH4180/SIU4180
SIH4410/SHW4410/SIU4410
SIH4420/SHW4420/SIU4420
SIH4430/SHW4430/SIU4430
SIH4440/SHW4440/SIU4440
SIH5111

Standard Operation and Monitoring Functions

Half Size Panel Display Package
Graphic 4 Times Size Panel Display Package
Computer Window Package
Control Drawing Status Display Package
Logic Chart Status Display Package
SEBOL Status Display Package
SFC Status Display Package
Operator Utility

Manual Configuration
The purpose of this manual is to help users understand operation and monitoring
functions of the ICS and make the best use of them.
This manual consists of :
Part A INTRODUCTION TO THE ICS
This section provides general information on the ICS and its position in the CENTUM CS.
Part B GENERAL FUNCTIONS
This section explains common functions of the ICS.
Part C DETAILED FUNCTIONS
This section explains main functions necessary for operation of a plant.
Part D ICS SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
This section explains setting of operating environment and system maintenance of
operation and monitoring functions.
Part E DESKTOP ICS
This section explains functions specific to the desktop ICS.
Appendix
This section explains ICS display update periods.

FD No. IM 33G2C20-11E-CS
4th Edition: Apr. 2000 (YG)
All Rights Reserved, Copyright 1995, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
IM 33G2C20-11E

 Applicable Readers
This manual is created for people who have a basic knowledge of operation and
monitoring work in the integrated production control system, the workstation (WS) and
operation of a keyboard and a mouse.
Trademarks
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries and
licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
Motif and OSF/Motif are trademarks of Open Software Foundation, Inc.
X-Window and X Window System are trademarks of the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX Corporation.
HP and HP9000 are registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machine Corporation.
SUN is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Other brand and product names are registered trademarks of their respective holders.

ii

IM 33G2C20-11E

 Document Map
System Concept and Design Manuals

System
Overview (TI)

ICS Operation
and Monitoring
Function Manual

FCS Control
Function Manual

ICS Management
Information
Function Manual

Advanced
Control Function
Manual

User Program
Function Manual

Other Software
Operation
Manuals of ICS

Subsystem
Communication
Function Manual

Communication
Unit Function
Manual

ICS
Startup Operation
Manual

Other Software
Operation
Manual of FCS

Other Function
Manuals

System
Configuration
Manual

Builder Common
Operation Manual

FCS Builder
Operation Manual

Builder Operation
Manuals of Other
Units and Functions

Engineering Manuals

ICS Builder
Operation Manual

Recipe Management
/ Batch Control
Function Manual

Graphic Builder
Operation Manual

Test Function
Manual

Installation and
Maintenance Manuals

Self
Documentation
Manual

Installation
Guidance (TI)

Operation Manuals
ICS Operation
Manual

ICS Hardware
Manual

FCS Hardware
Manual

Message Manual

Peripherals
Manual

Node Device
Manual

(Note) ICS: Information and Command Station,

Hyper Information and Command Station(HICS), and
PC-based Information and Command Station(PICS)
FCS: Field Control Station

Recommended Readings
TI 33G1B10-01E
IM 33G3C10-11E
IM 33G4C10-11E
IM 33G2H20-11E

IM 33G2C20-11E

Communication and
Network Device
Hardware Manual

Related Device
Manual

System Overview
Field Control Station Function Manual
System Generation Function Manual
ICS Operation Manual

iii

 Notice
Regarding This Manual
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.

This manual should be passed on to the end user.

Read this manual carefully and fully understand how to operate this product before
you start operation.
Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual, including,
but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form
without Yokogawas written permission.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
If any question arises or errors are found, or if there is any information missing
from this manual, please inform Yokogawas documentation department responsible for this manual or the nearest Yokogawa sales office, or use the form in the
back of this manual to inform us accordingly.

Regarding Protection, Safety, and Prohibition Against Unauthorized Modification

1. For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it, be
sure to follow the instructions on safety described in this manual when handling
the product. In addition, if you handle the product in contradiction to these
instructions, our company does not guarantee safety.
2. The following safety symbol marks are used on the product concerned and in this
Manual :
Les symboles suivants touchant la scurit sont utiliss sur le produit concern et
dans ce manuel.

CAUTION
This marking on the product indicates that the operator must refer to an
explanation in the instruction manual in order to avoid injury or death of
personnel or damage to the instrument. The manual describes that the operator
should exercise special care to avoid electric shock or other dangers that may
result in injury or the loss of life.
ATTENTION
Ce symbole marqu sur le produit indique que loprateur doit se reporter au
manuel dinstruction pour viter tout accident corporel ou tout dgt matriel.
Le manuel dinstruction indique que loprateur doit faire particulirement
attention pour viter tout choc lectrique ou autre accident pouvant entrainer un
accident ou la mort.

iv

IM 33G2C20-11E

CAUTION
A CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure, practice,
condition or the like, which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could
result in damage to or destruction of part or all of the product.
CAUTION
Le symbole CAUTION annonce un risque Il dsigne une procdure, une
marche suivre ou autre qui, ntant pas correctement observe, peut entainer
un dommage ou une destruction partielle ou totale du produit.
Protective ground terminal
In order to provide protection against electrical shock in case of a fault. This
symbol indicates that the terminal must be connected to ground prior to
operation of equipment.
Borne de connexion la terre de protechon
Ce symbole indique que la borne doit tre relie la terre de protechon avant
toute utilisation du matriel, dans le but de se protger dune lectrocution en
cas de dfaillance.
Function ground terminal
In order to provide protection against noise.
This symbol indicates that the terminal must be connected to ground prior to
operation of equipment.
Borne de connexion la terre sans bruit
Ce symbole indique que la borne doit tre relie la terre sans bruit avant
toute utilisation du materiel, dans le but de se protger du bruit.
Indicates the AC power supply.
Ce symbole indique quil sagit dune Source dAlimentation Alternative.
Indicates the DC power supply.
Ce symbole indique quil sagit dune Source dAlimentation Continue.
Indicates the power switch state ON.
Ce symbole indique que le commutateur de mise soustension est en position de
Marche.
Indicates the power switch state Stand - by.
Ce symbole indique que le commutateur de mise soustension est en position de
Veille.
Indicate the power switch state OFF.
Ce symbole indique que le commutateur de mise soustension est en position de
Arret.

IM 33G2C20-11E

The symbolic conventions below are used only in the manual.

Les conventions suivantes sont utilises uniquement dans le manuel dinstruction.
IMPORTANT
Indicates that operating the hardware or software in this manner may damage it
or lead to system failure.
IMPORTANT
Indique que manipuler le matriel ou le logiciel de cette manire peut
lendommager ou provoquer larrt du systme.
NOTE
Draws attention to information essential for understanding the operation and
features.

NOTE
Attire lattention sur une information essentielle pour la comprehension des
oprations effectuer ou des caractristiques.
3.
4.
5.

If protection / safety circuits are to be used for the product or the system controlled by it, they should be installed outside of the product.
When you replace parts or consumables of the product, use those specified by our
company.
Do not modify the product.

Regarding Force Majeure

1. Yokogawa Electric Corporation does not make any warranties regarding the
product except those mentioned in the WARRANTY that is provided separately.
2. Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability to any party for any loss or
damage, direct or indirect, caused by the use or any unpredictable defect of the
product.
Regarding Software Supplied by YOKOGAWA
1. Yokogawa makes no other warranties expressed or implied except as provided in
its warranty clause for software supplied Yokogawa.
2. Use this software with one specified computer only.
You must purchase another copy of the software for use with each additional
computer.
3. Copying this software for purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited.
4. Store the streamer or tape (original medium) in a secure place.
5. Reverse engineering such as the disassembly of software is strictly prohibited.
6. No portion of the software supplied by Yokogawa may be transferred, exchanged,
or sublet or leased for use by any third party without prior permission by
Yokogawa.

vi

IM 33G2C20-11E

 Note
Appearance and Accessories
After you received this product, check the following:
Appearance
Standard accessories
If coating falls off, a product is broken, or accessories are missing, contact our
representative from which you purchased this product or our sales department.
If the label on the power distribution board is filthy or falls off, order a label (part
number: T9029BX).
: Label attached to the power distribution board
Model and Suffix Codes
Model and suffix codes are put on the nameplate attached to this product. Check them
against model and suffix codes listed on this manual to confirm whether a product you
ordered is delivered. If you have any questions, contact our representative from which
you purchased this product or our sales department.

IM 33G2C20-11E

vii

 Documentation Conventions
Throughout this manual, the following conventions of notation clarify the input device
(keyboard, touch panel, or mouse) used.
Characters or symbols enclosed in
denote keys on the ICS operation keyboard.
key.
Example:To change to the next page, press the
Characters enclosed in < > represent keys on the engineering keyboard.
Example:To enter %, press the <%> key while pressing the <SHIFT> key.
Characters enclosed in [ ] indicate in ICS softkey, command for a window or menu,
or an item on worksheets of various types.
Example:Press on the [START] softkey to save the data.
An underline boldface font denotes the format of the data you enter on a panel.
Example:The cursor appears, prompting input.
FIC100.SV=50.0
This manual uses the following conventional symbols.

TIP
Gives information that complements the present topic.

See Also
Gives the reference locations for further information on the topic.
Operation with the mouse is shown.
Indicates operation using a touch screen function.
The input operation from the keyboard is shown.
Indicates operation with a track ball.
The display status of the panel is shown.
Figures of Simulated
The figures that appear in this manual of simulated may sometimes be emphasized
or simplified, or may fail to show the entire image for reasons of convenience in
explaining them.
The display position or character (large/small letter, etc.) of the CRT chart shown in
this manual might be different from that of actual CRT display within the range not
to give obstacles of the function understanding and operation monitoring.

viii

IM 33G2C20-11E

Contents

Contents

Preface ............................................................................................................................. i
Document Map ............................................................................................................. iii
Notice ............................................................................................................................. iv
Note ............................................................................................................................... vii
Documentation Conventions ..................................................................................... viii
Part A Introduction to the ICS

A1.Equipment Overview
1.1
1.2

Features ......................................................................................................... A1-1

Roles and Functions ..................................................................................... A1-3

A2.ICS Equipment
2.1
2.2

System Configuration of Human Interface ................................................. A2-1

Components of Human Interface ................................................................. A2-3

Part B General Functions

B1. ICS Component Names
1.1
1.2

ICS Configurations ........................................................................................ B1-1

Keyboard and Mouse .................................................................................... B1-2

B2. CRT Display Configurations

2.1
2.2
2.3

Panel Display Types ...................................................................................... B2-1

Panel Display Configurations and Functions ............................................... B2-3
Window Display Configurations .................................................................. B2-6

B3. Display Elements

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6

Display Element Overview ........................................................................... B3-1

Tags ................................................................................................................ B3-2
Instrument Faceplates .................................................................................... B3-4
Data Items .................................................................................................... B3-16
Function Block Modes and Statuses .......................................................... B3-18
Hierarchical Plant Configuration ................................................................ B3-21

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9

Overview ....................................................................................................... B4-1

Tag Names ..................................................................................................... B4-2
Panel Names .................................................................................................. B4-5
Window Names ............................................................................................. B4-6
Panel Set Names ............................................................................................ B4-6
System Function Key Names ....................................................................... B4-6
Operation Group Names ............................................................................... B4-7
User Program Names .................................................................................... B4-7
File Names ..................................................................................................... B4-7

B4. Naming Rules

IM 33G2C20-11E

ix

B5. One-touch Operations

5.1
5.2
5.3

Overview ....................................................................................................... B5-1

Functions Executable with One-touch Operation ........................................ B5-2
Means for One-touch Operation ................................................................. B5-14

B6. Operator Input

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

Overview ....................................................................................................... B6-1

Data Input Operation Procedures ................................................................. B6-4
Data Input Methods ....................................................................................... B6-6
Data Input Processing ................................................................................. B6-13

B7. Operation on Stacked-CRT

7.1
7.2
7.3

Panel Operation on Stacked-CRT ................................................................. B7-1

Operation on Upper CRT .............................................................................. B7-3
Panel Call from Upper CRT ......................................................................... B7-4

B8. Panel Copying

8.1
8.2
8.3

Overview ....................................................................................................... B8-1

Hard Copy Function ...................................................................................... B8-2
Image File ...................................................................................................... B8-4

B9. Printing Configurations .......................................................................................... B9-1

B10. Built-in Speaker ................................................................................................... B10-1
B11. ICS Capacities ......................................................................................................B11-1
Part C Detailed Functions
C1.Operation Panels
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13

Overview ....................................................................................................... C1-1

Panel Access .................................................................................................. C1-4
Overview Panel ........................................................................................... C1-13
Control Group Panel ................................................................................... C1-22
Tuning Panel ................................................................................................ C1-27
Trend Group Panel ...................................................................................... C1-35
Trend Point Panel ........................................................................................ C1-47
Operator Guide Message Panel .................................................................. C1-53
Graphic Panel .............................................................................................. C1-59
Alarm Summary Panel ................................................................................ C1-61
System Alarm Message Panel ..................................................................... C1-68
Computer Message Summary Panel ........................................................... C1-69
Half Size Panel ............................................................................................ C1-73

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6

Overview ....................................................................................................... C2-1

Message Window ........................................................................................ C2-12
Faceplate Window ....................................................................................... C2-22
Trend Window ............................................................................................. C2-25
Tuning Trend Window ................................................................................ C2-29
Process Window .......................................................................................... C2-34

C2.Windows

IM 33G2C20-11E

Contents

2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12

Overview Window ....................................................................................... C2-37

Graphic Window ......................................................................................... C2-40
Help Window ............................................................................................... C2-43
Confirmation Window ................................................................................. C2-47
Menu Window ............................................................................................. C2-49
Computer Window ...................................................................................... C2-52

C3.Message Outputting
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

Overview ....................................................................................................... C3-1

Message Output Formats .............................................................................. C3-5
Acknowledgment of Messages ..................................................................... C3-9
Sequence Message ....................................................................................... C3-11
Alarm Messages .......................................................................................... C3-16

C4.Alarm Processing
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

Overview ....................................................................................................... C4-1

Process Alarms .............................................................................................. C4-2
Annunciator Messages ................................................................................ C4-18
System Alarms ............................................................................................. C4-21

C5.Process Reporting
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5

Overview ....................................................................................................... C5-1

Process Status Report Menu Panel ............................................................... C5-8
Process Status Report .................................................................................. C5-13
Historical Message Report Menu Panel ..................................................... C5-19
Historical Message Report .......................................................................... C5-24

C6.Trend Recording
6.1
6.2
6.3

Overview ....................................................................................................... C6-1

Data Acquisition Function ............................................................................ C6-4
Handing Data Acquired by Other Stations ................................................... C6-9

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11

Overview ....................................................................................................... C7-2

Common Attributes ....................................................................................... C7-7
Display of Characters and Graphics ............................................................. C7-9
Data Display ................................................................................................ C7-12
Graphic Computation .................................................................................. C7-19
Operating and Switching Graphic Panels .................................................. C7-20
Modification ................................................................................................ C7-28
Coordinate Modification ............................................................................. C7-31
Def. Communication Table ......................................................................... C7-33
Display of Panels 1.5 or 4 Times Larger in Size ....................................... C7-35
Graphic Numbers ........................................................................................ C7-37

C7.Graphics

C8.Operation Group
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
IM 33G2C20-11E

Overview ....................................................................................................... C8-1

Group Identifier ............................................................................................. C8-3
Operating Modes ........................................................................................... C8-4
Behavior of Process Alarms ......................................................................... C8-6
Messages and Electronic Sounds .................................................................. C8-7
Specifying the Range of Pages ..................................................................... C8-8
Setting Modes Using the System Maintenance Function ............................ C8-8
Example of Configured Operation Group .................................................... C8-9
xi

C9.Security
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7

Types of Security Functions ......................................................................... C9-1

Keylock Mode Switch and Security ............................................................. C9-3
Security Levels for Operation and Monitoring of ICS Functions ............... C9-4
Security Based on Importance of a Tag ....................................................... C9-8
Security against Data Entry .......................................................................... C9-9
Security Provided by Checking Users ........................................................ C9-10
Security for Operator Utility ....................................................................... C9-11

Part D ICS System Maintenance

D1.System Maintenance
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9

Overview ...................................................................................................... D1-1

System Maintenance Menu Panel ................................................................ D1-7
System Status Overview Panel .................................................................. D1-10
System Alarm Message Panel .................................................................... D1-18
Control Station Status Display Panel ........................................................ D1-23
Own Station Status Display Panel ............................................................. D1-32
Equalization Function Panel ...................................................................... D1-44
Operating Preferences Setup Panel ........................................................... D1-47
Date and Time Setup Panel........................................................................ D1-53

D2.Status Display Panel

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5

Control Drawing Status Display Panel ........................................................ D2-2

Sequence Table Status Display Panel .......................................................... D2-8
Logic Chart Status Display Panel .............................................................. D2-19
SEBOL Status Display Panel ..................................................................... D2-25
SFC Status Display Panel .......................................................................... D2-35

D3.Operator Utility
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18

xii

Overview ...................................................................................................... D3-1

Shared Setup Items ....................................................................................... D3-6
Operator Utility Menu Panel ....................................................................... D3-7
Operation Mark Definition Panel ................................................................ D3-8
Function Key Assignment Panel .................................................................. D3-9
Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Assignment Panel ...................................D3-11
Extension Key Assignment Panel .............................................................. D3-13
Trend Pen Assignment Panel ..................................................................... D3-15
External Recorder Output Assignment Panel ............................................ D3-18
Trend Data Save Panel ............................................................................... D3-20
Trend Reference Pattern Registration Panel ............................................. D3-21
Panel Display Sequence Definition Panel ................................................. D3-23
Panel Set Definition Panel ......................................................................... D3-25
Overview Assignment Panel ...................................................................... D3-27
Control Group Assignment Panel .............................................................. D3-30
Help Window Information Definition Panel ............................................. D3-32
Help Message Edit Panel ........................................................................... D3-34
Voice Input Panel ....................................................................................... D3-35

IM 33G2C20-11E

Contents

D4.Workbench
4.1
4.2
4.3

Overview ...................................................................................................... D4-1

Message Window ......................................................................................... D4-4
Configuration Files ....................................................................................... D4-5

Part E Desktop ICS

E1. Overview ................................................................................................................... E1-1
E2. Operation Keyboard ............................................................................................... E2-1
E3. Operation on Instrument Faceplate ...................................................................... E3-1
3.1
3.2

Display ........................................................................................................... E3-1

Operation ....................................................................................................... E3-2

E4. Function Keys .......................................................................................................... E4-1

E5. Operating Preferences Setup Panel ....................................................................... E5-1
E6. Own Station Status Display Panel ......................................................................... E6-1
6.1
6.2

Display Format .............................................................................................. E6-2

Voice Output Function .................................................................................. E6-2

E7. Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Functions .......................................................... E7-1

E8. Application Capacities ............................................................................................ E8-1
Appendix
Appendix1. ICS Display Update Periods ............................................................... App.1-1
Index
Readers Comment Form
Revision Record

IM 33G2C20-11E

xiii

Part A
Introduction
to the ICS
This part is an overview of the Information and Command Station (ICS) of the
CENTUM CS, an integrated production control system.

Content
1. Equipment Overview
1.1
1.2

Features ..................................................................................................... A1-1

Roles and Functions .................................................................................. A1-3
1.2.1 Roles and Position of the ICS ...................................................... A1-3
1.2.2 ICS Functions ............................................................................... A1-3

2. ICS Equipment
2.1
2.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

System Configuration of Human Interface .............................................. A2-1

Components of Human Interface .............................................................. A2-3

A-i

1. Equipment Overview

1.

Equipment Overview
The Information and Command Station (ICS) is a human interface (HMI) of the
CENTUM CS. This chapter describes ICS features, roles, and functions.

1.1

Features
The ICS is a human interface which has operation and monitoring functions necessary
for plant operation. It visualizes and offers information necessary for understanding
operation conditions of a plant, thus reducing operation errors.
The ICS can have engineering function for system generation and maintenance work,
and communication function with a supervisory computer.
Multiwindow requiring no panel changes

Attractive highresolution graphic

panels
Monitoring function applicable to small-to large-scale
applications

User
Friendly

Window for other systems

(single window)
Open architecture

Comprehensive
guidance function

Convenient touch targets

Excellent
Operationability

Integrated
Operator
Console

ITV window
Integration of information by
multiwindow

Functionally organized keyboard

Intuitive panel switching

ICS Features
Intelligent alarms such as AI
alarm

Voice output unit

Color hard copy
Printer

Abundant
Peripheral
Equipment

Extension keys

Intelligent
Functions
Human
Engineering
Structure

Large screens

Ergonomics-based
structure

Related panel calling

Integration of operation and

engineering functions

Visual display
matching data volume

Flexible, environment-adaptable CRT

configuration

Figure A1.1.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

ICS Features

A1-1

The ICS is a powerful, user friendly interface. An operation function, a graphic function,
a database function, a user C language function, an engineering function and other
various functions can be installed.
The main product concepts of the ICS are:
Integrated Operation and Engineering Functions
The operation and engineering functions, which were previously performed at
separate hardware, can be used at one station.
High Resolution Display Panel
The size of the CRT is 21 inch, and its resolution is 1,280 x 1,024 dots.
Open Operating System and Adopting Standard Communication Function
The ICS uses C language to develop user programs. It employs the UNIX system
and X Window as a platform OS. This allows users to use various software for
communication, and a standard communication network such as Ethernet.
User Friendly Human Interface Functions
The ICS offers an easy-to-use operation panel for operation. The touch panel
function make it easy to display various windows on the operation panel.
The ICS employs Motif as Graphical User Interface (GUI), by which its display and
operation are standardized. Visual engineering operation simplifies and fasten the
engineering work.
Improved Operationability
The ICS has a function to display the four panels on one CRT making the size of a
panel one-fourth. This improves operation and monitoring, thus reducing operators
burden.

Figure A1.1.2

A Single ICS with Four Panels Display

Improvement of Hardware Reliability

The ICS has a mirrored disk and memory with ECC.
Powerful Support for CIM
The ICS has a communication gateway unit (CGW) function to connect it to a
supervisory computer. It is supplied with a bus converter unit (BCV) to connect it to
CENTUM CS, CENTUM-XL, or XL.

A1-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Equipment Overview

1.2

Roles and Functions

1.2.1

Roles and Position of the ICS

The ICS offers the following functions in the CENTUM CS.
An operation function and a human interface
An engineering function and a human interface
A communication function with a supervisory computer
This manual explains the operation function. As for the engineering function and
communication function with a supervisory computer, see separate Instruction Manual.
The ICS is connected to a field control station (FCS) via V-net (real-time control
network), working as a human interface for a plant and devices.

Figure A1.2.1

1.2.2

ICS in a CENTUM CS System

ICS Functions
The ICS offers the following functions: (See Figures A1.2.2 to A1.2.4)
An operation function consists of the following:

IM 33G2C20-11E

Operation Function (in narrow meaning)

This function is mainly used for operation and monitoring of plants.

System Maintenance Function

This function is used for system diagnostics and maintenance. Operators use the
function to monitor operating conditions of the ICS or the FCS, and to equalize
data of the FCS.

Operator Utility Function

This function is used to define or change specifications such as trend recording
points assignment.

A1-3

ICS Function Configuration

Operation Functions
Operation and
Monitoring Functions
Copying Panels

Operation Panel Display Functions

Window Functions
Trend Recording Functions
Graphic Functions

Process Reports
Alarm and Message Output
Operation Groups

Batch Functions
Management Information Function (MIF)

Security

Voice Output Functions

User C Programming Language

Optional Functions

System Maintenance Functions

ITV Windows, etc.

System Status Overview Display

System Alarm Message Display
Control Station Status Display
Own Station Status Display
Equalization Functions
Operating Preferences Setup
Date and Time Setup

Operator Utility Functions

Operation Mark Definition

Function Key Assignment / Auxiliary Contact Input/
Output Assignment / Extension Key Assignment
Trend Pen Assignment
External Recorder Output Assignment
Trend Data Save
Trend Reference Pattern Registration
Panel Display Sequence Definition
Panel Set Definition
Overview Assignment
Control Group Assignment
Help Window Definition / Help Message Edit
Voice Input

Engineering Functions

Supervisory Computer
Communications Functions

Figure A1.2.2

A1-4

ICS Function Configuration

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Equipment Overview

Application Functions

Supervisory
Computer
Communications

Communications
User C-language Programming
Multi-media Support
Operation Management Functions
Recipe Management Functions

Large Screen

ITV
Window Operation Functions
CRT

Printer
Trends

Operation
Keyboard

Graphics

Overview

Control
Group

Alarm Message Function / Utility

Tuning

Hard Disk

Engineering Functions
Builder / Maintenance Function
Test Function
System Maintenance Function
Self-documentation Function

Engineering
Keyboard

Common Functions
Tag Name Management
Operation Groups
Security Function

Process Data

ITV: Industrial TV

Figure A1.2.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

ICS Function Overview

A1-5

Functions Common to ICSs

Tag Operation
Up to 16 digits can be specified to support a large system.
Plant names are employed to enable integrated operation of multiple plants

Window Operation
Effective operation and monitoring by multi-window
Half size panels enable effective CRT use through simultaneous display
of multiple panels.

One Touch Operation

By pressing one key, various functions can be used.

Integration of Multiple ICSs

Integrated operation of multiple plants and areas by operation groups
User-defined operations by panel set
Sharing trend data
Networking peripheral equipment

Security
Keylock mode switch is available.
Security level can be set for a CRT, instrument, or panel by changing the
keylock mode switch key.
The range of process data input can be restricted by setting instrument
function level.

Figure A1.2.4

A1-6

Functions Common to ICSs

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. ICS Equipment

2.

ICS Equipment
This chapter describes the ICS and peripheral devices which consist of the CENTUM
CS system.

2.1

System Configuration of Human Interface

(1) Outline
A human interface which connects plant equipment and an operator consists of the ICS
and peripheral devices.
The ICS has the following types.
Table A2.1.1

Types and Models of ICS

Name
Standard ICS
Stacked-CRT ICS
Desktop ICS

Model
AIH21C
AIH21C/WP
AIH00D

CRT Size
21 inches
21 inches
17 or 21 inches (option)

The following is an example of a system configuration with ICSs as the human

interface.

Figure A2.1.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

System Configuration with Human Interface

A2-1

(2) Number of Peripheral Devices Connectable to ICSs

The following peripheral devices can be connected to ICSs.
Table A2.1.2

Number of Peripheral Devices Connectable to ICSs

Printer

Name

Model

Standard
ICS

AIH21C

StackedCRT ICS

AIH21C/
Up to 4
WP

Desktop
ICS

AIH00D

(Note)

*1

Color
Hard
Copy

Voice
Output
Unit

Recorder
Output *1

Extended CommuFunction nication

Keys *1
Port *1

ITV

MMA

Up
p to 32
points

Up
p to 96
points

1 *11

1 *11

1
1

1 *1

The total of printers and communication ports must be equal to or fewer than 4.
Recorder output and the extension keys use one communication port respectively.
For details, see the following manuals:
Information Command Unit Hardware Manual (Console) (IM33G6B30-01E)
Information Command Unit Hardware Manual (Desktop) (IM33G6B40-01E)

*1

A2-2

Requires an RS71 communication card.

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. ICS Equipment

2.2

Components of Human Interface

(1) ICS
The ICS is the core of the human interface.
The following three types are available:
Standard ICS with 21 CRT
Stacked-CRT ICS with 21 CRT
Desktop ICS with 17 or 21 CRT
(2) External Auxiliary Storage
A floppy disk, magnetic cartridge tape drive, or external disk drive can be connected to
the ICS as an external auxiliary storage to store data such as process data or trend data.
(3) Peripheral Devices
(a) Serial printer (YPR112: RS-232-C interface)
The serial printer is a dot-matrix printer that is connected to an ICS for printing
messages and other information.
Number of alphanumeric characters printed: 180/line
Paper width: 16 (approximately 406mm)
(b) Color hard copy unit (YPR512)
The YPR512 outputs color hard copies of display panels.
Printing method: thermal transfer printing
Colors: 8 or 16 colors
Paper: A4 size cut sheet
Printout time: 90 or 120 sec
(c) Voice output unit (/VU)
The voice output unit outputs previously registered voice messages in response to voice
output requests the FCSs. It is used to inform operators of alarms or operator guide
messages.
Total registration time: 290 sec
Maximum word/phrase number: 255
Number of sentences that can be output: 100
(d) External recorder output (optional)
The ICS can output analog signals (1 to 5 V DC) to external analog recorders.
Maximum number of outputs: 32
Updating period: 10 sec

IM 33G2C20-11E

A2-3

(e) Extension keys (optional)

Extension keys can be used as external installation keys.
Maximum number of signals:
96 is total of both input and output signals.
(The number of inputs and outputs can be specified every 16 signals.)
(f) Auxiliary contact input/output
The ICS provides auxiliary contact input/output signals as external input/output.
Number of signals:
2 each for input and output signals
(g) Use of communication port
A communication port is used to connect a remote maintenance support system.

A2-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

Part B
General Functions
This part describes general information of the ICS such as component names, displayed
items, and basic operations. For detailes, see Part C DETAILED FUNCTIONS and
Part D ICS SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.

Content
1. ICS Conponent Names
1.1
1.2

ICS Configurations ................................................................................... B1-1

Keyboard and Mouse ................................................................................ B1-2
1.2.1 Operation Keyboard ..................................................................... B1-2
1.2.2 System Maintenance Panel .......................................................... B1-4
1.2.3 Engineering Keyboard .................................................................. B1-6
1.2.4 Mouse ........................................................................................... B1-6
1.2.5 Track Ball ..................................................................................... B1-7

2. CRT Display Configurations

2.1
2.2
2.3

Panel Display Types ................................................................................. B2-1

Panel Display Configurations and Functions ........................................... B2-3
Window Display Configurations .............................................................. B2-6

3. Display Elements
3.1
3.2

3.3

3.4
3.5

3.6

IM 33G2C20-11E

Display Element Overview ....................................................................... B3-1

Tags ........................................................................................................... B3-2
3.2.1 Tag Names .................................................................................... B3-2
3.2.2 Tag Comments ............................................................................. B3-2
3.2.3 Tag Marks ..................................................................................... B3-3
Instrument Faceplates ............................................................................... B3-4
3.3.1 Overview ...................................................................................... B3-4
3.3.2 Instrument Faceplate Types ......................................................... B3-4
3.3.3 Working with Instrument Faceplates ......................................... B3-11
3.3.4 Faceplate Block .......................................................................... B3-14
Data Items ............................................................................................... B3-16
Function Block Modes and Statuses ...................................................... B3-18
3.5.1 Function Block Statuses ............................................................. B3-18
3.5.2 Block Modes ............................................................................... B3-18
3.5.3 Block Statuses ............................................................................ B3-19
3.5.4 Alarm Statuses ............................................................................ B3-20
Hierarchical Plant Configuration ............................................................ B3-21

B-i

4. Naming Rules
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9

Overview ................................................................................................... B4-1

Tag Names ................................................................................................ B4-2
Panel Names .............................................................................................. B4-5
Window Names ......................................................................................... B4-6
Panel Set Names ....................................................................................... B4-6
System Function Key Names ................................................................... B4-6
Operation Group Names ........................................................................... B4-7
User Program Names ................................................................................ B4-7
File Names ................................................................................................ B4-7

5. One-touch Operations
5.1
5.2

5.3

Overview ................................................................................................... B5-1

Functions Executable with One-touch Operation .................................... B5-2
5.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................... B5-2
5.2.2 Panel Set ....................................................................................... B5-6
5.2.3 Panel Display Sequence ............................................................... B5-8
5.2.4 System Function Key ................................................................. B5-10
Means for One-touch Operation ............................................................. B5-14
5.3.1 Function Key .............................................................................. B5-14
5.3.2 Softkey ........................................................................................ B5-15
5.3.3 Touch Target/Push Button ......................................................... B5-16

6. Operator Input
6.1
6.2
6.3

6.4

Overview ................................................................................................... B6-1

Data Input Operation Procedures ............................................................. B6-4
Data Input Methods .................................................................................. B6-6
6.3.1 One-line Input ............................................................................... B6-6
6.3.2 Two-line Input .............................................................................. B6-7
6.3.3 Menu Selection Input ................................................................... B6-7
6.3.4 Group Setting Input ...................................................................... B6-8
6.3.5 Window Input ............................................................................... B6-9
6.3.6 Page Number Input .................................................................... B6-10
6.3.7 Name Input ................................................................................. B6-11
Data Input Processing ............................................................................. B6-13

7. Operation on Stackes-CRT
7.1
7.2
7.3

Panel Operation on Stacked-CRT ............................................................. B7-1

Operation on Upper CRT ......................................................................... B7-3
Panel Call from Upper CRT ..................................................................... B7-4

8. Panel Copying
8.1
8.2
8.3

Overview ................................................................................................... B8-1

Hard Copy Function .................................................................................. B8-2
Image File ................................................................................................. B8-4

9. Printing Configurations ......................................................................... B9-1

10. Built-in Speaker ................................................................................... B10-1
11. ICS Capacities ..................................................................................... B11-1

B-ii

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. ICS Component Names

1.

ICS Component Names

This chapter describes the ICS configuration and functions.

1.1

ICS Configurations
The ICS is composed of one or two CRT displays, an operation keyboard, mouse,
engineering keyboard, and intelligent part. It is available in the following types
depending on the CRT display specification.
ICS:

one 21 CRT

Stacked-CRT ICS:

two 21 CRTs

Desktop ICS:

one 17 CRT; one 21 CRT

and are functionally identical except for the CRT configuration and some display
capabilities and operations.
CRT display:
Key board:

Displays panels and windows. This part also allows for screen
touch operations.
Consists of an operation keyboard, mouse, and engineering
keyboard. This is the part where operations necessary for running
and monitoring the process are done.

Intelligent part:

Performs graphic and data processing in the ICS.

The following Figure shows an external view and the components of the ICS.

Figure B1.1.1 ICS External Views and Component Names

For the desktop ICS, see Part E DESKTOP ICS.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B1-1

1.2

Keyboard and Mouse

1.2.1

Operation Keyboard
The operation keyboard, shown in the following figure, is used for process operations
and plant monitoring. It has dust and moisture-proof flat keys, and a function-oriented
approach to key layout, based on a one-touch operation concept. The operation keyboard
is described on the next few pages.

Figure B1.2.1 Operation Keyboard Layout

B1-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. ICS Component Names

(a) Function keys

There are 64 one-touch function keys on the operation keyboard. They are user-assignable. The function keys are typically used to initiate application programs and to call up
panels and windows for viewing. Each function key has a lamp and room for a
description of the keys assigned function.
(b) Control keys
The control keys are mainly used to change control setpoints and manipulated output
values. They are also used in the block mode. They can operate up to eight blocks
simultaneously.
(c) Panel call keys
The panel call keys are used to select for viewing a desired panel from the various panel
types.
(d) Data entry keys
The data entry keys are used to specify tag names and to enter data.
(e) Keylock mode switch
The keylock mode switch is located in the upper left corner of the operation keyboard. It
is used to select the range of operations allowed via the operation keyboard. Strictly
speaking, the range of operations differs depending on how the security level is set and
how an operation group is specified.
MODE-OFF:

the operator can use only such operation and monitoring

functions as defined during system generation.

MODE-ON:

the operator can use, for example, a function that changes the
control parameters in addition to the functions available with
Mode-OFF.

MODE-ENG:

the operator can use all of the functions available with the ICS,
including the system maintenance functions.

Furthermore, the following types of the keys are available to operate this switch.
Operator key:

this key allows the operation mode to be used within the range of
operator mode. That is, operation mode cannot be changed to
engineer mode.

Engineer key:

this key may be used in all operation modes.

Table B1.2.1 Keylock Mode Switch Selections

Key
Position

Operation
Mode

OFF

Operator mode

ON

Operator mode

ENG

Engineer mode

Enabled Functions
Restricted operation functions
Operation and monitoring functions
including control parameter changes
All functions

Operator
Key

Engineer
Key

(f) Status display LED indicators

The status display LEDs indicate the ICS power, system operation, and battery
operation statuses.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B1-3

(g) Confirmation keys

Used to confirm operations.
:

Confirmation and execution

Cancellation

(h) Cursor keys

Used to move the cursor upward, downward, left, and right.
(i) Display key
Used to view selected items.
(j) Alarm acknowledgment key
Used to acknowledge an alarm upon alarm output.
(k) Buzzer reset key
Used to stop the buzzer occurred upon alarm output and so on.
(l) Scroll keys
Used to scroll a displayed panel.
(m) Panel auxiliary keys
Keys which are helpful for easy operation in the ICS. For details, see the ICS Operation
Manual (IM 33G2H20-11E).
.

1.2.2

System Maintenance Panel

The system maintenance panel is located in the upper right of the operation keyboard.
Press the PUSH on the system maintenance panel to open the cover, and you can see
the following switches :

Power switch
: Power is ON
: Standby
This local power switch is used to turn on the power or set the ICS in standby.
When turning the switch to standby, the ICS is automatically shut down. The main
power breaker switch is located at the power distribution board of the station
control nest (SCN) in front of the ICS.

See Also

See the Information Command Unit Hardware Manual (IM 33G6B30-01E) for details.

B1-4

DUMP & RESTART / RESTART switch

OFF:
During normal operation
RESTART:
Uses when restarting a system (The CPU is being reset.)
DUMP & RESTART: After starting crash dump, the CPU is being rest.

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. ICS Component Names

IMPORTANT

Avoid turning the switch to the RESTART or DUMP & RESTART position. When
turning it to the position, data may be lost because the ICS is not shut down.

EXEC switch
This switch is used to execute RESTART or DUMP & RESTART. Turn the DUMP
& RESTART / RESTART switch to the DUMP & RESTART or RESTART
position before using this EXEC switch.

MANUAL switch
This switch is used to start a system manually. During normal operation, users do
not need to use it. Use the switch when installing OS or starting a system when a
trouble emerges.

TIP

The main power breaker for the ICS is located behind the stations front inside cover,
beneath the keyboards. It must be turned on for the POWER switch to be effective.

Figure B1.2.2 System Maintenance Panel Layout

IM 33G2C20-11E

B1-5

1.2.3

Engineering Keyboard
The engineering keyboard is used for system configuration and utility operations. It is
normally stored inside the keyboard desk drawer below the operation keyboard. As
shown in the following figure, the keys are very similar to a typewriters keys.

Figure B1.2.3 Engineering Keyboard Layout

1.2.4

Mouse
The ICS uses a three-button optical mouse. The mouse is used mainly to select items
displayed on the CRT display panel. The current mouse position is indicated by cursor
( ) on the panel (displayed as ( ) on the title bar). The button on the left, called the
button 1, is the one most frequently used. The following figure shows the mouse in
overhead and side views.

Figure B1.2.4 Mouse

B1-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. ICS Component Names

1.2.5

Track Ball
The track ball, which has the same function as the mouse, is used in the desktop ICS.
This device can be used along with a mouse. The button numbers in the following figure
correspond to those on the mouse.

Figure B1.2.5 Track Ball

IM 33G2C20-11E

B1-7

2. CRT Display Configurations

2.

CRT Display Configurations

This chapter describes the types and configurations of the CRT display.

2.1

Panel Display Types

The following types of panels can be viewed on the main panel area of the ICS screen.

(1) Full Size Panel

A full size panel is displayed on the entire face of the CRT main panel. It is the basic
ICS display panel.
Panel size:

1280943 dots

Number of panel displayed simultaneously: Max. 1

Character size: 1224 dots
58 dots, ASCII

TIP

Other than the above, a 1616 dot character (used in the graphic panels only) and an
816 dot character (used for graphic panels and instrument faceplate scales only) are
also available.
(2) Half Size Panel
A half size panels height and width are half the full size panels height and width.
Unless the position is specified on the graphic panel, the half size panels are displayed
in the upper left part of the main panel, one overlapping the other in order of their
priority.

Figure B2.1.1
Panel size:

Display Positions of Full Size and Half Size Panels

640442 dots

Number of panels displayed simultaneously: Max. 4

Character size: 816 dots
58 dots, ASCII

IM 33G2C20-11E

B2-1

(3) Panels Displayed at Magnifications of 1.5x or 4x

A panel may be magnified on the graphic panel. An area 1.5 or 4 times larger than the
full size panel is displayed using the large panel scroll function.
Quad size
4 times height
4 times width
1.5 times larger

Figure B2.1.2

Large Graphic Panel Scroll Function (Example of 4x Magnification)

TIP

To view 1.5xor 4x panels on the ICS, not only the basic software packages but also the
SIH4120 Graphic 4 Time Size Panel Display Package, an optional software package,
must be installed in the ICS.

B2-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. CRT Display Configurations

2.2

Panel Display Configurations and Functions

(1) Panel Configuration

The ICS features a high resolution CRT with touchscreen functions, and can provide full
graphic displays in 16 colors. The panel display is composed of the following areas.
Each area is described in subsequent paragraphs.
System message area
Main panel area
Window area
Softkey label area
Entry area

Figure B2.2.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Panel Display Configuration

B2-3

(2) System Message Area

The system message area collectively displays alarms and messages about the monitored
processes and about the system itself. This area is always displayed in a fixed position
and it is not erased by another window. By monitoring it, the operator can always know
current system status. In addition, the operator can use this area to call alarm detail
windows or message windows. These windows are called by simply touching the alarm
and message symbols. The following figure shows the system message area layout.

Figure B2.2.2

System Message Area Layout

The following table details the system message areas display elements.
Table B2.2.1
Callout

Display Symbol

System Message Area Display Elements

Name

Color

Low priority
alarm
Medium priority
alarm

Process
alarm window
touch target

Red
(flashes)

High priority alarm

Description
Indicates a process alarm occurred. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the symbol flashes. When the alarm is acknowledged, the
symbol stops flashing. If no process alarm exists, no symbol is
displayed. The alarm summary panel call key blinks depending
upon the symbols blinking state. There are different symbols
depending on the priority of the alarm as follows.
high priority alarm (left side)
medium priority alarm (middle)
low priority alarm (right side)
Touching the area causes the process alarm window to appear.

nn
Alarm
page number

System alarm
(character string)

System alarm
window
touch target
System alarm
message
Operator
guide message window
touch target

Displays the page number of the overview panel containing the

occurring alarm. If an alarm exists on more than one page, the first
page number is displayed. If no alarm exists, no page number is
displayed.
Indicates a system alarm exists. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the
Yellow
symbol flashes. When the alarm is acknowledged, the symbol stops
(flashes) flashing. The symbol is not displayed if no system alarm exists. Touching the area causes the system alarm window to be displayed.
Displays a system alarm message (up to 20 characters). The leading
unacknowledged alarm in the system alarm message panel is disYellow
played. If no system alarm exists, no message is displayed.
Red

Notifies the operator that an operator guide message has been generated. If the message is not acknowledged, the symbol flashes.
Green
When it is acknowledged, the symbol stays lit. If there is no operator
(flashes)
guide message, the symbol no longer appears. Touching the area
causes the operator guide message window to appear.

nnnn
6

Message number

Shows that a request to display a help window has been issued.

Help window
touch target

Yellow

If the window is not displayed, the symbol lights up. When the
window appears, the symbol goes out.
Touching the touch target causes the help window to appear.
The help message number follows the symbol.

B2-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. CRT Display Configurations

CMP
7

YY.MM.DD
Aug.DD.YY
DD.Aug.YY
MM.DD.YY
DD.MM.YY

Computer
message
window
touch target

Yellow

Workbench
mark

Cyan

XX:XX
XX:XX
XX:XX Date and time
XX:XX
XX:XX

Touching the touch target causes the computer message window to

appear.

Tag mark

Process
alarm
message

Indicates that a package is running on the workbench panel while

the operation panel is being displayed.
Always displays date and time (year: Gregorian calendar).

White

There are five formats. Date and time is displayed by the user
specified format at the system generation time.
Displays process alarm or annunciator messages with a tag mark.
The leading unacknowledged alarm in the alarm summary panel is
displayed. Tag name, tag comment, and alarm status are displayed.

Character
string
10

Shows that a request to display a computer message window has

been issued. If the window is not displayed, the symbol lights up.
When the window appears, the symbol goes out.

White

If alarms are no acknowledged, the tag mark lights up. If there is no

alarm or message, the tag mark no longer appears.
The tag mark indicates a process status with an alarm indication
color.

Character string
11

Name of displayed panel

Displays the name of the panel that is currently being displayed.

White

Displays either the user-defined panel name, if any, or the systemspecified panel name.

(3) Main Panel Area

The main panel area displays the various operation and function panels.

See Also
See Part C DETAILED FUNCTIONS.
(4) Window Area
The window area displays previously defined separate panels over the current panel. The
window function allows required information to be displayed promptly without erasing
or changing the currently displayed panel. This direct, easy access to required
information helps plant operations run more smoothly. The window function is described
further shortly.
(5) Softkey Label Area
Operators use the softkey label area to retrieve panels and operate functions. Softkey
labels are easily activated to respond to use via the touch screen operation and the
mouse operation. On a graphic panel, the user can allocate functions for switching
panels or opening windows, making it possible to create the panels appropriate for
system operation.
(6) Entry Area
The entry area is used for entering a panel name or window name from the keyboard,
and normally appears as a gray band. However, data is required to be entered when the
touch screen operation is used and an entry window opens.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B2-5

2.3

Window Display Configurations

See Also

See Chapter 2 of Part C, Windows.

Up to ten windows can be simultaneously displayed in the main panel area. For
example, the windows function enables operators to cause messages and instrument
faceplates to appear independent of the main panel. The following figure shows the
various functions and formats available for a window. Some windows do not have every
function shown.
Close box: Closes the window (causes the window to disappear)
Title bar: Indicates window name.
Used for window activation.
Activation is the operation to enable the panel operations of various
specifications such as page specification in the on-screen window
(specification acceptable status).
When a window is active, the title bar in the window is highlighted.
Drag the title bar to move the window.
Menu bar: Activates a subfunction or retrieves a menu in the window.
Scroll bar: Causes window content to slide horizontal or vertical to enable viewing
of other positions of the window.
Resize corner:
Changes the window size.
Command line: Contains push buttons for confirmation or data entry fields for
retrieval.

Figure B2.3.1

B2-6

Window Configuration

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

3.

Display Elements
This chapter describes basic CENTUM CS operation panel display elements.
However, for details of sections 3.3 to 3.5, see the Field Control Station Function
Manual (IM 33G3C10-11E).

3.1

Display Element Overview

The following table shows operation panel display elements.
Table B3.1.1

Display Elements

Display Element

Tag name

Data format
Characters
used

Up to 16 digits
Standard-width alphanumerics and hyphen (-)
(First character must be alphanumeric.)

Data format
Characters
used

24 characters

Tag comment
Tag mark
Block mode
Block status
Alarm status

Engineering
g
g
unit
Instrument
faceplate

Alphanumerics
4 types corresponding to tags level of importance
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
For details, refer to instrument faceplates or tables of
data items.

Data item

IM 33G2C20-11E

Specification

Data format
Types
Data format
Label

6 digits
256 types
Instrument faceplates corresponding to function
blocks are provided.
8 characters text (6 characters for the motor instrument block)

Reference
Section
3.2.1

3.2.2
3.2.3
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.4

33
3.3

B3-1

3.2

Tags

3.2.1

Tag Names

(1) Overview
Tag names are assigned to identify the FCS function blocks. The function blocks must be
assigned a tag name in order for the ICS to recognize them as operated or monitoring
objects. Hence, the objects with no tag names are not operated or monitored. There is oneto-one correspondence between these tag names and the function blocks. The objects to be
operated or monitored by the ICS are these function blocks (FCS control blocks).
(2) Entry Format
There are the following types of tag names.
User-defined tag names.
These tag names are defined by the user, based on naming rules.
(Example) FIC100
System-specified tag names
Function blocks are given tag names assigned as default values by the system
previously. Among them, for the user definable tag name, if a tag name is not specified
by the user, the system-specified tag name (system default tag name) is given.
(Example) %SW0100
Tag names can be given plant names as the supervisory control units. Refer to section
4.2 Tag Names for the entry format and naming rule of the tag names.

TIP
Do not specify the same tag name twice.

3.2.2

Tag Comments
Tag comments provide notes or explanations for each tag. Tag comments are defined in
the FCS builder during system configuration. They are displayed along with tag names
in the function blocks as required.

B3-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

3.2.3

Tag Marks

(1) Overview
Tag marks are assigned to every tag to show the process status and the importance of the
tag. Tag marks change according to the importance level of tag.
(2) Tags Importance and Corresponding Symbols
There are the following types of tag marks corresponding to a tags level of importance.
Table B3.2.1
Tag Mark

Tag Mark Types

Tag Information

Important tag

General tag

First Auxiliary tag

Second Auxiliary tag

Symbol

(3) Display Colors

The tag mark shows the alarm status of each function block using a corresponding alarm
color. Almost all tag mark colors can be defined by the user. The following table shows
the relationship between the tag mark display colors and alarm statuses.
Table B3.2.2
Color
Blue
Red
Yellow
Green
White

IM 33G2C20-11E

Tag Mark Colors

Process Status

Alarm output off.

Alarm has occurred.
Alarm has occurred.
Normal
Tag with unassigned alarm status

Alarm Status Example

AOF
LO, HI, IOP, LL, HH, OOP
DV, VEL, VEL-, MLO, MHI
NR
-

B3-3

3.3

Instrument Faceplates

3.3.1

Overview
Instrument faceplates display the statuses and data of function blocks. They are
displayed on the control group panel, tuning panel, and faceplate window. It can be
roughly classified into the types of faceplates show in the following table.
Table B3.3.1

Instrument Faceplates Types

Type of Instrument
Faceplate
Analog
Discrete
Trend

3.3.2

Use

Reference

PID control block, selector block, etc

Motor, switch instrument block, batch status indicator block, contact input/output, etc

3.3.2 (1)

Instrument faceplate trend, etc

3.3.2 (3)

3.3.2 (2)

Instrument Faceplate Types

Instrument faceplate configurations include analog, discrete and trend faceplate designs.

(1) Analog Display Instrument Faceplate

Analog instrument faceplate types are used:
PID (regulatory) control blocks, and
Selector switch blocks.
The designs for these instrument faceplates are shown in the following figure.

Figure B3.3.1
B3-4

Example of Analog Display Instrument Faceplate

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

This subitem deals with a PID control block as an example and introduces the function
for showing its own data on the faceplate.
An instrument faceplate consists of these areas: analog display area, status display area,
and comment area.

Figure B3.3.2

Display Format of Instrument Faceplate (PID Control Block)

(a) Status display area

Tag Mark: The tag mark shape shows the tag importance level. The color of the tag
mark shows the alarm status of the function block.

See Also

See section 3.2.3 Tag Marks.

Cascade Mark: When this mark appears, the represented function block is on the
secondary side or inside of a cascade loop. In other words, it is being
controlled by another function block in a cascade control loop.
Remote Cascade Mark: When this mark appears, it indicates that the function block
is being controlled by a supervisory computer. The block
mode of the function block can be remote cascade (RCAS)
or remote output (ROUT).
Mode/block status, alarm status, and alarm off status:
These indicate the related statuses depending upon the status of the instrument.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B3-5

(b) Analog display area

Instrument faceplate scale: The scale and scale divisions which are specified in the
builder are displayed.
The number of scale divisions: 8
Scale: Up to seven digits. Negative indications are also
possible.
Index markers ( ) : Index markers appear on the upper and lower left side of the
instrument faceplate bar.
Pointers: The setpoint pointer ( on the right side of the bar scale) indicates the
current setpoint value (SV) of the function block. The output pointer ( on
the left side of the bar scale) indicates the function blocks current manipulated output value (MV). Both pointers change color to indicate function
block operation status. When values can be changed by the operator, they
are displayed in red. Otherwise, they are displayed in yellow, when not be
changed. When the setpoint value or manipulated output value is in
clamped status (status that the value is outside the scale range), the right
setpoint value pointer indicates [
pointer indicates [
Table B3.3.2

], or left manipulated output value

].

Pointer Display Colors

Pointer
Setpoint pointer
Manipulated output pointer

Manual
Operation

Automatic
Operation

Cascade
Operation

Remote Cascade or
Remote Output

Yellow
Red

Red
Yellow

Yellow
Yellow

Yellow
Yellow

Bar display: The bar display shows the current process value (PV). The bar changes
color to indicate the current alarm status. (If an input-or output-open,
high or low limit, or plus or minus-deviation errors occur, the bar
changes to the corresponding alarm color.) When a failure occur in the
input or function block, the bar turns into the alarm color beyond
100.0% or below 0.0%. In this case, the length of the bar above 100.0%
or below 0.0% is truncated at maximum indication and is not propor
tional to the actual value.
Instrument Faceplate Comment: The instrument faceplate comment is used to show
the direction in which the manipulated output is
changing. There are nine possible comment choices:
No display
OPN-CLS
CLS-OPN
OPN-C-OPN
CLS-O-CLS
OPN-C-CLS
OPN-O-CLS
CLS-O-OPN
CLS-C-OPN

B3-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

(c) Comment area

Tag name: Tag name assigned to each function block is displayed.
Tag comment: The tag comment defined for the function block in the builder is
displayed.
(d) Operation marks
Operation marks are user-defined comments that operators assign to instruments.
Operation marks are used to catch operator attention. Several different marks can be
defined using the operator utility function. Operation mark color, the comment, and
whether operation for the function block is enabled or disabled are specified in the
operator utility. Defined marks can be assigned or removed on the tuning panel.

Figure B3.3.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Operation Mark Display

B3-7

(2) Discrete Display Instrument Faceplate

Two display formats are used for discrete display instrument faceplates: an instrument
image format corresponding to motors an valves and control device image format used
for lamps and switches. The instrument-image discrete instrument faceplate, like the
analog display instrument faceplate, indicates the alarm status and operation status
(modes) with a color used for the scale bar (which depends on the alarm color). The
control device image discrete display instrument faceplate changes color according to
which operating status it is in, for example, whether the corresponding valve is opened
or closed.
A high speed display of 200 milliseconds is available for motors when only one
faceplate is accessed.
The following types of function blocks use the discrete display instrument faceplate.
Motor instrument block

Instrument image format

Switch instrument block

Batch status indicator block

control device image format

Contact input/output block

The following figure shows typical examples of discrete display instrument faceplates.

Figure B3.3.4

B3-8

Display Format of Discrete Display Instrument Faceplates

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

(a) Digital display area

The manipulated output status is displayed by mark, and the answerback status for it
is displayed by mark.
Moreover, the operation disabled frame is displayed to the instrument faceplate button,
and the button will be double pushed type button when the manipulated output is
operated.
(b) Analog display area
Feedback input value, scale: Bar indicating the feedback input value and scale.
Feedback input value: Displays actual feedback input in a bar format.
(c) Comment area
Instrument faceplate label: Comment for making operations easy.
Maximum number of characters: 8
Number of label colors: 16
Two types are available: lit and unlit
Unlit (instrument image format)
Answerback value: alarm color
Manipulated output value: red/yellow
(changes depending upon the mode of the instrument)
Lit (control device image format)
Answerback value: alarm color
Manipulated output value: User-defined color
Manipulated output value: Displays status of manipulated output value. Color
changes depending upon block mode
Answerback value: Displays answer back statuses. Color changes depending upon
block mode.
Operation disabled frame: For security or confirmation in operation of instrument
faceplate.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B3-9

(3) Trend Instrument Faceplate

The trend instrument faceplate displays a trend graph in the instrument faceplate area.
Data acquisition starts when the instrument faceplate is displayed.
An instrument faceplate trend is treated as a tuning trend. When the reserve function is
active in the tuning trend, the acquired data can be used for the instrument faceplate
trend.

Figure B3.3.5

Display Format of Trend Instrument Faceplate

Acquisition period:

1 sec

Panels which can display this faceplate:

Control group panel and graphic panel

Maximum number of displayed faceplates: 4 per panel

B3-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

3.3.3

Working with Instrument Faceplates

(1) Mode Change Operations

Modes represent the operating statuses of function blocks. The control keys on the
operation keyboard can be used to cycle through the MAN, SEMI, AUT and CAS
modes. Selecting a mode not applicable to the function block in question will result in
an operator error. There may also be some modes to which a direct transition is not
possible.

Figure B3.3.6

Function Block Mode Transitions, and Corresponding Operations

Note: The SEMI (semi automatic) modes are used with a batch control or a batch
status indicator block.
(2) Data Value Increase/Decrease Operations
Analog display instrument faceplate
The increase key
and decrease key
are used to change data values in a
smooth, continuous fashion. They are located at the top of the operation keyboard, below
the instrument faceplates on the panel display. Up to eight function blocks can be
operated at the same time. Selecting the speed up key
which data changes by four times.

IM 33G2C20-11E

increases the rate at

B3-11

Sets rate at which increase/decrease keys change data values

Target key

Increase
key

Speed up key

Decrease
key

Cascade
key

Auto key
Manual key

Figure B3.3.7

Control Operation Keys on Operation Keyboard

Discrete display instrument faceplate

This faceplate is operated in a similar manner as the analog display instrument faceplate
except that it allows the operator to also change data by directly selecting the pushbutton
on the faceplate.
TIP

Depending on the security level, an instrument faceplate may be shown along with an
operation disabled frame attached to it.
(3) Data Input Operations in Entry Window
An instrument faceplate allows the operator to use the softkey label area to open entry
windows for data input.

Figure B3.3.8
B3-12

Entry Window Opened in an Instrument Faceplate

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

(4) Changing Data Item in Entry Window

The entry window opened from an instrument faceplate automatically shows a data item
appropriate for the current mode of the faceplate. If the data item shown is not the
desired one, select the
key, type in the correct data item name, and then change
the setting of the new data item.

Figure B3.3.9

Changing Data Item in Entry Window Called from Instrument

Faceplate

(5) Moving the Faceplate Window

A faceplate window can be moved horizontally or vertically at the operators discretion.
It moves horizontally in conjunction with the position of a softkey to enable proper
operation of the instrument faceplate.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B3-13

3.3.4

Faceplate Block
The faceplate block is a function block which has a human-machine interface function.
It allows the operator to identify multiple blocks with a tag. The following types of
faceplate block are provided:
Analog
Sequence
Hybrid

Figure B3.3.10

Examples of Faceplate Block

The following paragraphs describe each faceplate block.

(1) Analog Faceplate Block
This faceplate block is used to identify control loops of a multi-block configuration with
a single tag.
The block includes the following kinds:

B3-14

Double-pointer indicating station block: used to indicate the process value (PV)
and set the setpoint value (SV)

Double-pointer operation station block: used to set the process value (PV) and
manipulated output value (MV)

Triple-pointer operator station block: used to indicate the process value (PV) and
to set the setpoint value (SV) and manipulated output value (MV)

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

(2) Sequence Faceplate Block

This faceplate block is used for pushbutton operation from the ICS as a human-machine
interface of the sequence control function and to display and operate the sequence
process. This block includes the following kinds:

Five-pushbutton switch block, extend five-pushbutton switch block:

Used for five-lamp indication and push-button operation

10-pushbutton switch block, extend 10-pushbutton switch block:

Used for ten-lamp indication and push-button operation

Batch status indicator block:

Used to display the sequence process

(3) Hybrid Faceplate Block

This function block has functions of both the analog faceplate block and sequence
faceplate block. This block includes the following kinds:

Basic operator station block, extend operator station block:

A faceplate block which has the functions of both the triple-pointer operator
station block and five-pushbutton switch block

Pushbutton switch block with input indicator, extend pushbutton switch block with
input indicator:
A faceplate block which has the functions of both the five-pushbutton switch
block and analog signal one point indication

(4) Label Color

The colors of labels on the faceplate blocks can be specified on the tuning panel on a
block basis.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B3-15

3.4

Data Items
Data items are codes used to identify the block modes, block statuses, and control
parameters of a function block. These codes are used as display elements on instrument
faceplates and on various operation panels.
Sometimes, the same data item code has different meanings between different function
blocks. The following table lists data items for a PID control block.
Table B3.4.1

Data Items for PID Control Blocks (1/2)

Abbreviation
(data item)

B3-16

Name

Entry

Range

Default

MODE

Block mode

O / S (MAN)

ALRM

Alarm status

NR

AFLS

Alarm flashing STS

AF

Alarm detection specification

AOFS

Alarm suppression specification

PV

Process value

Data with the same units as for

PV

RAW

Raw input data

IN coupling destination unit

SL

PVP

Oldest velocity alarm sampling

Data with the same units as for

PV

SUM

Summed value

SV

Setpoint value

Data with the same units as for

PV

SL

CSV

Cascade setpoint value

Data with the same units as for

PV

SL

RSV

Remote setpoint value

Data with the same units as for

PV

SL

DV

Control deviation

Data with the same units as for

PV

VN

I / O compensation

0
MSL

MV

Manipulated output value

Data with the same units as for

MV

RMV

Remote manipulated output

value

Data with the same units as for

MV

MSL

RLV1

Reset signal value 1

Data with the same units as for

MV

MSL

RLV2

Reset signal value 2

Data with the same units as for

MV

MSL

HH

High high limit alarm setpoint

SH

Low low limit alarm setpoint

SL to SH

SL

PH

High limit alarm setpoint

SL to SH

SH

PL

Low limit alarm setpoint

SL to SH

SL

VL

Velocity limit alarm setpoint

(SH - SL)

SH - SL

DL

Deviation alarm setpoint

SL to SH

LL

(SH - SL)

SH - SL

MH

Manipulated output high limit

setpoint

MSL to MSH

MSH

ML

Manipulated output low limit

setpoint

MSL to MSH

MSL

SVH

Setup high limit setpoint

SL to SH

SH

SVL

Setup low limit setpoint

SL to SH

SL

Proportional band

0 to 1000%

100%

Integration time

0.1 to 10,000 sec

20 sec

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

Table B3.4.1

Data Items for PID Control Blocks (2/2)

Abbreviation
(data type)

Name

Range

Default

0 to 10,000 sec

0 sec

0 to (SH - SL)

0.0

0 to (SH - SL)

0.0

-10.000 to 10.000

1.000

Compensation bias

0.000

PMV

Preset manipulated output

value

MSL to MSH

MSL

TSW

Tracking switch

Control switch

0, 1

PSW

Preset MV switch

0, 1, 2, 3

RSW

Pulse reset switch

0, 1

BSW

Backup switch

0, 1

OPHI

Output high limit index

MSL to MSH

MSH

OPLO

Output low limit index

MSL to MSH

MSL

OPMK

Operation mark

SAID

System application ID

UAID

User application ID

0, 1

CSW

TYPE

Function block type

OMOD

Block mode (lowest priority)

CMOD

Block mode (highest priority)

Differentiation time

GW

Gap width

DB

Dead band

CK

Compensation gain

CB

0 to 255

SH

Scale high limit

Data with the same units as for

PV

SL

Scale low limit

Data with the same units as for

PV

MSH

MV scale high limit

Data with the same units as for

MV

MSL

MV scale low limit

Data with the same units as for

MV

DR

Control action direction

0 (direct)/1 (reverse)

RAW1

Raw input data (RL1)

RL1 coupling destination unit

RAW2

Raw input data (RL2)

RL2 coupling destination unit

RAW3

Raw input data (BIN)

BIN coupling destination unit

RAW4

Raw input data (TIN)

TIN coupling destination unit

RAW5

Raw input data (TSI)

TSI coupling destination unit

RAW6

Raw input data (INT)

INT coupling destination unit

: Always accepts entry

: No entry allowed
SH: PV scale high limit
MSH: MV scale high limit

IM 33G2C20-11E

Entry

Accepts entry under specific conditions

SL:
MSL:

PV scale low limit

MV scale low limit

B3-17

3.5

Function Block Modes and Statuses

3.5.1

Function Block Statuses

The function block statuses displayed on the operation panels are classified into the
following types.
Block Mode: The block mode status information is relevant to the control and output
statuses of the function blocks.
Block Status: The block status information displays the operation status of the
function blocks. In combination with the block mode, it provides the overall operation status information for the function blocks.
Alarm Status: The alarm status information displays the process alarm status.
Conforming these types of status display by the instrument faceplate, tuning panel, etc.
allows you to know the control status of the function block.

3.5.2

Block Modes
The block modes are listed in the following table. Block modes indicate control and
output statuses of a function block. Not all modes are valid for every function block.
Table B3.5.1
Abbreviation

B3-18

Block Modes
Mode Name

Description

O/S

Out of service

No functions are operating.

Control computations and output operations are halted
(includes conditional state).

IMAN

Initialization manual

TRK

Tracking

Control computation stops and a specified output value is

forced.

MAN

Manual

Control computation stops and a manually manipulated

value is output.

AUT

Automatic

CAS

Cascade

PRD

Primary direct

Control computation stops and values set up by the primary

block of the cascade are directly output.

RCAS

Remote cascade

Control computation is executed using values that are remotely set up by the supervisory computer and the result is
output.

ROUT

Remote output

Control computation stops and output manipulated values

that are remotely set up by the supervisory computer are
directly output.

Control computation is executed and the result is output.

Control computation is executed using values set up by the
primary block and the result is output.

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

3.5.3

Block Statuses
The block status information displays the operation status of the function blocks.
Together with the block mode, it provides the overall operation status information for
the function blocks.
Block status is only provided for restricted function blocks. The following table lists the
most common block statuses.
Table B3.5.2

Common Block Status List

Abbreviation

Description

ANCK
SIM

Simulation status

Output is bypassed
Execution of normal operation

NR

Normal status

PAUS

Pause status

Run state and DV DL

0 < PV < PH - DL
Temporary stop

PALM

Pre-alarm status

CTUP

Time up status

No answerback check is made

RUN state and 0 < DV DL

RUN state and DV = 0

RUN

Timing
Counting

STOP

Stop status

ERR

Input code error

RUN state and DV 0

Timer starts
Counter is activated
Timer stops
Counter stops
BCD code is a meaningless pattern

LO

Low limit alarm status

PH - DL PV PH

HI

High limit alarm status

OFF
LOCK

Off-service status alarm

Interlock status

PV PH
Output action is stopped
Forced output of the predefined output signals

NOTE: DV:
DL:
PV:
PH:
PL:

IM 33G2C20-11E

Name
Answerback check-masking
status

Count up status

Deviation alarm
Deviation alarm low limit
Process value
High limit alarm
Low limit alarm

B3-19

3.5.4

Alarm Statuses
The alarm status information displays the process status detected by the function block.
Effective alarm statuses differ between function blocks. Some function blocks have no
alarm status. If more than one alarm occurs at a time, the alarm having the higher
priority is displayed.
Table B3.5.3

Common Alarm Status List

Abbreviation

Name

NR

Normal

OOP

Output open alarm

IOP

High input open

alarm

Description
No alarm occurs.
The output data status becomes PTPF owing to a failure or disconnection in the final control elements or process input / output
equipment, or when output destination data is abnormal.
Normally, the output function stops.
The input data status becomes BAD owing to a failure or
disconnection in the detecting elements or process input /
output equipment, or when input source data is abnormal.
Normally, processing that uses an input signal stops.
(In the case of open-circuiting of the input, the input exceeds its
high limit.)

B3-20

IOP-

Input exceeds its low limit owing to open-circuiting of the input.

Low input open alarm The input data status becomes BAD and normally, processing
that uses an input signal stops.

HH
LL
HI
LO

High high alarm

Low low alarm
High alarm
Low alarm

DV+

Deviation alarm +

DV-

Deviation alarm -

The negative deviation of the process value from the setpoint

value is smaller than the deviation alarm setpoint.

VEL+

Velocity alarm +

The positive variation of the input signal within the specified period is larger than the velocity limit alarm setpoint.

VEL-

Velocity alarm -

The negative variation of the input signal within the specified

period is smaller than the velocity limit alarm setpoint.

MHI

Output high alarm

The output signal increases beyond the output high limit value,
but actually it is limited to the high limit value.

MLO

Output lower alarm

The output signal decreases below the output low limit value,
but actually it is limited to the low limit value.

CNF

Connection failure
alarm

The output destination or input source function block is in the

O/S mode. This alarm indicates function blocks that are still
active in the control system when it is temporarily out of service
owing to maintenance. Normally, an IOP or OOP occurs
simultaneously with this alarm.

The process value exceeds the high high limit alarm setpoint.
The process value exceeds the low low limit alarm setpoint.
The process value exceeds the high limit alarm setpoint.
The process value exceeds the low limit alarm setpoint.
The positive deviation of the process value from the setpoint
value is larger than the deviation alarm setpoint.

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

3.6

Hierarchical Plant Configuration

(1) Overview
In an integrated plant control system, the decision making starts from company level of
the management plan / profit plan / investment plan, passes through factory level of the
production plan / manufacturing instruction / quality control and finally reaches the
device / equipment level of the temperature / flowrate control, and information and
instruction flow between these levels.
There are such hierarchical models of a company activity as ISO CIM (Computer
Integrated Manufacturing) model and ISA SP88 plant model, etc. . The following figure
shows SP88 plant model. Frequently its higher level is defined by the business
requirements of a company activity and its lower level is related much with the plant
operation and monitoring. The plant hierarchy related to the CENTUM CS is its lower
level.

Figure B3.6.1

Hierarchical Plant Configuration

On the other hand, the DCS treats the element of the function block or process I/O
named the tag as information or function unit. There may be too many tags in the
current control system to treat them on the single level. By classifying these elements
into running status / operating status / equipment status allows the treatment on a group
basis. By containing this group into the above-mentioned hierarchical model, the entire
plant can be hierarchically systematized to the end element.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B3-21

The features of configuration and the hierarchy of a plant may vary depending upon the
users application. The CENTUM CS allows users to configure hierarchical plant
systems by themselves, taking into account the features of their own applications; thus it
provides an operator friendly environment. The following table shows an example of key
components of a hierarchy.
Table B3.6.1

Example of a Hierarchy

Company
Site (factory)
Area
Cell (train/system)
Unit (device)
Equipment module (equipment)
Function block (instrument)
Elements

For example, the user can configure a hierarchical plant system like that illustrated in the
following figure.

Figure B3.6.2

Example of a Hierarchical Plant Configuration

TIP

B3-22

(1)

In a hierarchical configuration, a subordinate element can relate to only one superordinate element. It cannot link with multiple super-ordinate elements. Also, the
relationship between sub- and super-ordinate elements must not be upside down
(reversed).

(2)

The plant hierarchy should be specified as required. Some elements can be ignored.

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

(2) Types of Hierarchical Plant Configurations

There are following types of hierarchical plant configurations: Fixed and selectable.
Fixed configuration
A fixed plant configuration can be specified with the plant hierarchy definition builder of
the ICS builder. For details, see the ICS Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L10-11E).
Configuration which can be selected from multiple options
The user can select the necessary configuration from alternatives which the user has
already defined. For example, this type is selected when the recipe management function
is used in batch control. In this case, unlike a fixed configuration, this type of
configuration is specified by a dedicated builder.
(3) Example of Hierarchizing Plant System
The following figure shows an example of hierarchical plant configuration. This factory
(SITE-A) comprizes production divisions (AREA-*) and each production division has
two or more trains (CELL-*). The train consists of two or more devices (UNIT-*) and
the device is configured by the equipments (EQUIP-*). Each elements of the plant
classified in relation to this element (tag) is allocated.
The operator who monitors production division (AREA-A1) mainly monitors the train
(CELL-1) when the production phase proceeds to a certain step, and if an error occurs,
he concentrate his attention on the device (UNIT-01). The monitoring range can be
specified by train name or device name which is the element of the objective
hierarchical plant configuration. Thus the hierarchical plant configuration is effective to
specify the operator oriented operations and monitoring ranges.

Figure B3.6.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Hierarchizing in Plant System

B3-23

(4) Alarm Management Function Utilizing Hierarchical in Plant Configuration

The ICS is notified of the process alarm to be detected by the control function of the control
station in the format such as the tower top temperature HI alarm. The messages notified
each time of event occurrence have been classified with the control station number set as
the key. To classify these messages in logical operation / monitoring basis, specify
Plant ID = UNIT-01 (UNIT-01: Example of plant hierarchy name)
to each block using the control drawing builder. The function block can be built-in the
hierarchical plant configuration by adding the hierarchical plant information.
Alarm summary panel
The alarm summary panel is used to display the occurring status of process alarm which
occurred in the function block in time series, and it is used to monitor the process status.
The alarm notified from the control station is preserved in the alarm summary buffer
accompanied with the hierarchical plant information.
The search display can be performed by plant hierarchy by giving the plant hierarchy
name as an argument when the panel is displayed. In the displayed alarm summary panel
(see Figure B3.6.4), only the alarm of the tag attributed to the specified plant hierarchy
name is displayed. Giving higher level plant hierarchy name allows the messages of all
the subordinate tags to be displayed.
If the plant hierarchy name is allocated as argument for the function key
: .AL plant hierarchy name ( : space)
if the subordinate occurs an alarm, the blinking notification with function key LED is
enabled.

Figure B3.6.4

B3-24

Alarm Summary Panel Switching

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Display Elements

Historical report panel

The message notified the ICS is preserved in order of occurrence in a historical file. The
message to which the hierarchical plant information is added allows the search by the
plant hierarchy name in the historical report panel. By specifying the plant hierarchy
name in the search setting window of the historical report menu panel, only the message
occurred from the function block which attributes to a specific equipment can be
displayed / printed out.
For the operation recording of the function block, since it is stored in the historical file
with the type added by the plant name, it is search object.
(5) Application of Plant Hierarchy
An example of the application of the alarm management function which uses the
hierarchical plant configuration was shown in (4) above. Here, other examples are
enumerated.
Message function
Filtering of message by hierarchy name (Only the messages concerning the specified
hierarchy become effective).
Alarm summary panel
Operator guide message panel
Overview panel
Function key (LED) definition
Historical report
Expansion security function (expansion security is an optional function)
The plant hierarchy can be specified to describe as a key word for specifying the range
of monitoring or operating for each operator.
Message monitor of CS batch (CS batch is an optional function)
Integration of information, operation and management of each product and phase.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B3-25

4. Naming Rules

4.

Naming Rules
This chapter describes the basic names which are necessary for monitoring and operating
a system.

4.1

Overview

(1) Item and Types

In the CENTUM CS, operation and monitoring items such as function blocks, panels,
and windows have identifying names. These names are composed of alphanumeric characters, with varying numbers of digits.
Table B4.1.1

Names and Numbers of Digits

Name Type
Tag name
Panel name
Window name
Panel set name
System function key name
Operation group name
Program name
File name

Operation and Monitoring Item

Function blocks of a control station
Any panel
Any window
Panel sets
System function key functions
Operation groups
User programs
File names

Max. Number
of Characters

Reference
Subsection

16
16
16
8
4
2
8
14

4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9

(2) Name Entry Method

Observe the following rules when naming items:
Names must be composed of alphanumeric characters, as follows:
A through Z
a through z
0 through 9
An underscore (_) is allowed.
A name can only be used once in the same ICS.
A name must begin with an uppercase character (A-Z).

IM 33G2C20-11E

B4-1

4.2

Tag Names

(1) Overview
Names assigned to FCS function blocks are called tag names. There are the following
tag name types.
User-defined tag names: freely specified by the user based on the rules.
System tag names: tag names assigned as default values by the system previously.
For the user-defined tag name, if a tag name is not specified by the user, the systemspecified tag name is given.
A plant name may be added to a tag name as a high order control unit.
(2) User-defined Tag Names
Tag names specified by the user arbitrarily based on the naming rules. The tag names
follow the abovementioned name entry method and the following rules.
Table B4.2.1

Format of User-defined Tag Name

Format of User-defined
Tag Name

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Maximum of 16 standard-width alphanumeric characters

xxxxxxxx

A hyphen (-) can be used (but inhibited to begin with (-) ). However,
tag name beginning with a hyphen (-) or a number (0 - 9) cannot be
used in computational expressions. Define an alias to allow them to
be used.

(3) System Tag Names

(a) Overview
System-specified tag names assigned as default values by the system. If a tag name is
not specified by the user, this system tag name is given according to the following
format.
Table B4.2.2

Formats of System Tag Name

Format of System
Tag Name
% *1
AA *2

%AAxxxxx[Sddssee]
System tag name
Code representing function type

xxxxx *3
[]
S
dd
ss
ee

Element number (serial number) of each function block type

Station specification (only when required)
Station number specification
Domain number
Station number
Area number

*1: Use a period (.) when entering from an operation keyboard.

*2: For the type codes assigned to function blocks, refer to the next table.
*3: The numeric range of an element number varies between function blocks and control stations.

(b) Type codes

The type codes in system tag numbers represent tag functions.
Table B4.2.3
Code
BL
UT
DV
Z
Y

B4-2

Type Codes of CS Based Function Block

Corresponding Function Block

Control block
Unit instrument block
Device block (for electrical use)
Process input / output block
Process input / output block

Code
SW
GS
AN

Corresponding Function Block

Common switch block
Global switch block
Annunciator block

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Naming Rules

Table B4.2.4

Type Codes of XL Based Function Block (Internal Instruments)

Corresponding Instrument or
Element

Code

Corresponding Instrument or
Element

Code

LP
SD

Feedback control instrument

Batch status indicator

TM
CT

Sequence element instrument (timer)

Sequence element instrument (counter)
Sequence element instrument
(code output)

SU

Switch instrument

CO

DI

Sequence element instrument

(contact input)

CI

Sequence element instrument

(code input)

DO

Sequence element instrument

(contact output)

AN

Sequence element instrument

(annunciator)

SW

Sequence element instrument

(internal switch)

ST

Sequence element
(sequence table)

(c) Station name

The station name should be specified so that the user can identify the control station
where the specified tag name is included. The station name can be omitted from the
system tag name when searching for a tag in the ICS. However, this search method cannot be used in the user program. Once a station name has been specified, the control
station of that name is the object of a tag search until a change is made. When specifying a station alone, use the format shown in the following table.
Table B4.2.5

Formats of Station Name

Format of Station Name

% *1
SN
yyyyyyyy

%SNyyyyyyyy
System name
Station name specification code
Station name, area name

*1: Use a period (.) when entering from an operation keyboard.

Control station
name
Area
name

Area
name

Tag name

Tag name

Tag name

Tag name

Station name

Tag name

Figure B4.2.1

Panel name

Window name

Tag Names and Station Names

(4) Plant Names

Tag names can have plant names as high order control units. They are not usually used.
The plant names are used to integrate the monitoring of multiple plants. However, these
names do not have to match actual plant names. In the case of a tag name with a plant
name, any tag number can be assigned as long as it is specific to the corresponding
plant.
Once the plant name has been specified, the plant of that name is the object of a tag
search until a change is made.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B4-3

Table B4.2.6

Formats of Plant Name

Format of Plant Name

% *1
PL
xxxxxxxx

%PLxxxxxxxx
System name
Station name specification code
Plant name (up to eight characters)

*1: Use a period (.) when entering from an operation keyboard.

When a tag name has a plant name included, the display format and the number of digits
displayed on the CRT are specified in the system constant definition builder. The following items are specified.
Table B4.2.7

Format of Tag Names

Format of Tag Name

Tag
Tag + Plant
Plant + Tag
(Note)

Description
Displays tag name
Displays tag name and
plant name in order
Displays plant name and
tag name in order

Example
FIC100
FIC100AB
ABFIC100

With the example, the following tag name and plant name are assumed.
Tag name: FIC100
Plant name: AB

(5) Number of Digits to be Displayed on the Panel

Specify a number from 0 to 24. (default: 8)
The number of digits of the tag name to be displayed is specified here.
If the tag name extends beyond the tag name display area in the display of
instrument faceplates, the overflow is displayed in the tag comment display area.
As a result, the tag comment is displayed after the overflow of the tag name. If the
tag comment overflows, the comment is simply truncated.
12 digits

10 digits
Display field for
tag name (up to 16 digits)
and
tag comment (up to 24 digits)

On a full size panel

Display field for

tag name (up to 10 digits)
and
tag comment (up to 10 digits)
On a half size panel

Figure B4.2.2

Display Field for Tag Name and Tag Comment of Instrument

Faceplates

Note:
When the length of a tag name is ten characters or less, the first two digits in the
display field are secured as the display area for the cursor and that tag name is
displayed from the third digit in the display field.
When the length of a tag name is eleven or twelve characters, that tag name shares
the display field with the cursor; namely, the cursor is displayed on the tag name.
When the length of a tag name is greater than twelve up to sixteen, that tag name
shares the display field with the cursor and the excess characters in the tag name
continue in the tag comment display field.
The above also applies to a tag name displayed on a half size panel. For instance, the
cursor is displayed on part of a tag name of ten characters.

B4-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Naming Rules

4.3

Panel Names
All operation panels have a system-specified name. Some of the panels can also be
named by the user. When a panel is given a user-defined name, it can be retrieved by
that name.
Maximum number of digits: 16
Table B4.3.1

Panel Names
Panel Type

System-specified Name

Erase panel
Overview panel
Control group panel
Tuning panel
Graphic panel
Alarm summary panel
Operator guide message panel
Trend group panel
Trend point panel *1

.ER
.OVxxxx
.CGxxxx
Tag name
.GRxxxx
.AL
.OG
.TGxxxx

Process report panel

Operator utility menu panel
System status overview panel
Hard copy panel
Workbench panel
Computer message summary panel (optional)

.PR

User-defined

.TPxxxx

.SM
.IM

.CM

: can be assigned
Blank: cannot be assigned
xxxx: A 4-digit serial number that indicates the panel page number.
*1 : The trend point panel name for the first pen in the first trend group is TP0001.
According to the pen order after TP0001, a pen number becomes a trend point panel name. The trend
point panel name for the first pen of the second trend group is TP0009. A trend point panel name is
assigned to a pen even if a tag is not assigned to that pen.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B4-5

4.4

Window Names
All windows have a system-specified name, and entering that name will retrieve it.
Some windows can also be named by the user.
Maximum number of digits: 16
Table B4.4.1

Window Names
Window Name *2

Window Type
Process alarm
Computer message
Message
g
window
System alarm
Operator guide message
Faceplate window
Trend window *1

.AW
.CM
.SY
.GM
Tag name
.TGxxxx
.TPxxxx

User-defined

Process window *1
Overview window *1

Tag name

Help window *1

.HWxxxx

Graphic window *1
Computer window

.GWxxxx

.CWxxxx

.OVxxxx

: can be assigned
Blank: cannot be assigned
xxxx: A 4-digit serial number that indicates the window number.
*1 : The trend, process, and overview windows are windows dedicated to the system that correspond to
operation and monitoring panels. Also, there are help and graphic windows dedicated to the system
that correspond to operation and monitoring panels. These windows have the same names as the
panel names.
They are called by specifying the function or parameters.
*2 : Some of the windows called on panels do not have specified names. For such windows, names
related to the panels on which they are called are assigned.

4.5

Panel Set Names

User defined combinations of function panels can be assigned. Up to 200 panel sets can
be defined for each ICS. A name can be assigned to each set at the time it is defined,
using the following guidelines:
Alphanumeric characters of up to eight digits can be used.
The default names are the 3-digit numbers 001 through 200.

4.6

System Function Key Names

System function keys are virtual keys not physically provided on the standard keyboard.
The functions of these keys are made available for use by assigning them to the physical
function keys on the keyboard. They can also be assigned to softkeys.
Alphanumeric characters of up to four digits can be used.

See Also
See Section 5.3.1 Function Key.

B4-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Naming Rules

4.7

Operation Group Names

Operation and monitoring devices can be combined to form an operation group to operate each operation and monitoring line separately. Each group of these groups can be
named by specification with the ICS builder (operation group definition builder).
Alphanumeric characters of up to two digits can be used.

4.8

User Program Names

ICS user programs are assigned names which can range from 1 to 8 alphanumeric
characters. A hyphen can also be used in the name, but not as the first character.

4.9

File Names
Proper file management imposes the following special file naming rules since it employs
the UNIX system:
A file name can be 1 to 14 characters.
Any character except a slash (/) can be used.
It is recommended that the space, tab, backspace, and the following characters not be
used:
?@#$^&*()[]\|;<>
If a space or tab is used in a directory or file name, the name must be enclosed in
quotes in the command line.
File names must not begin with a plus sign (+), a minus sign (-), or a period (.).
The UNIX system distinguishes between upper and lower case.
For example, the system recognizes draft and DRAFT as separate file names.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B4-7

5. One-touch Operations

5.

One-touch Operations
The ICS allows the user to perform one-touch operations for various functions.

5.1

Overview

(1) Executable Functions with One-touch Operation

To reduce the operators work, the ICS allows many functions to be executed at the
touch of a single key or touch target. The following table shows the functions available
with one-touch operations and where the functions can be assigned.
Table B5.1.1
Function
Code

Functions of One-touch Operations

Executable Function

Function Key Graphic Panel

Sequence
Message

Calling up panels and windows

App.

App.

App.

Calling up panel sets

App.

App.

App.

Starting panel display sequences

App.

App.

App.

Executing system function keys

App.

App.

N/A

Starting user programs

App.

App.

App.

Signal notification to user programs

App.

App.

App.

Starting, stopping, and resuming trending

App.

App.

App.

Executing operation sequence commands

App.

App.

N/A

F
I

Executing programs by file name (display of non-standard panel)

Instrument command operation

App.
N/A

App.
App.

App.
N/A

Calling up an entry window

N/A

App.

N/A

Calling up a menu window

N/A

App.

N/A

Calling up an entry window for group setting data

N/A

App.

N/A

Calling up a menu window for group setting data

N/A

App.

N/A

Changing graphic display data

N/A

App.

N/A

LED flashing/lit/off

N/A

N/A

App.

Starting standard batch report

App.

App.

App.

Data item dependent menu

N/A

App.

N/A

App.: Available N/A: Not available

For example, in a plant where operation is organized around the graphic panels, onetouch operations on the full size panel touch area and softkey label areas can be used.
This minimizes the operating steps needed to call up windows and switch panels,
making for smoother operation.
These functions can also be performed through sequence messages (request messages).
(2) One-touch Operation Procedures

See Also
See Section 5.3 Means for One-touch Operation.
One-touch operation functions can be assigned to the following items:
Function keys
Softkeys
Touch targets/Push buttons

IM 33G2C20-11E

B5-1

5.2

Functions Executable with One-touch Operation

This section describes the functions executable with a one-touch operation which are
listed in Table B5.1.1.

5.2.1

Overview
Although one-touch operation functions can be executed with function keys, sequence
messages, and touch targets, push buttons, softkeys in the graphic panel, this section
describes those functions executed, for example, with a touch target which is hereinafter
called the touch A.

(1) Calling Up Panels and Windows (O)

Touching the touch A calls a panel or window which has been specified in advance.
(2) Calling Up Panel Sets (P)
Touching the touch A simultaneously displays multiple panels which have been
predefined. For details of panel set functions, see Subsection 5.2.2 Panel Set.
(3) Starting Panel Display Sequences (Q)
Touching the touch A executes a panel display sequence function. For details on the
panel display sequence, see Subsection 5.2.3 Panel Display Sequence.
(4) Executing System Function Keys (K)
Touching the touch A executes a system function which has been specified in advance.
For details on system function key, see Subsection 5.2.4 System Function Key.
(5) Starting User Programs (U)
Touching the touch A starts a user program. It can also start a user program by sending a
parameter to the program upon specifications.
Example:
To start user program setpro1: U

setpro1

To start user program ackha by sending the parameter 1200: U

: space
ackha

1200

(6) Signal Notification to User Programs (S)

The function Starting User Programs (U) described above starts stopped programs, but
touching the touch A for Signal Notification to User Programs (S) transmits a signal to
running programs. This signal is for notification only. This function cannot send a
detailed parameter, such as the parameter 1200, that is sent in Starting User Programs
(U). What processing is performed upon receiving this signal must be specified in the
program which receives the signal.

TIP
In graphic operations, parameters can be sent to programs since a signal is transmitted to
the panel linked C.

B5-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. One-touch Operations

(7) Starting, Stopping, and Resuming Trending (T)

Touching the touch A either starts, stops, or resumes a trend group where trend
acquisition has been predefined.
(8) Executing Operation Sequence Commands (D)
Operation sequence, a graphic function, is executed. Touching the touch A executes one
of the following specified functions.
See Also
See Operation Sequence Support Package Manual (IM 33G2N21-11E).

Execution/cancellation of operation sequence

The operator must in advance select operation units and specify commands for each unit
selected. When execution is assigned to the touch A, touching the target executes the
specified commands for each unit. To cancel specifications (selection of units and
commands), the operator must cancel them prior to execution. Once an operation has
been executed, it cannot be canceled. It is recommended that in actual use both
execution and cancellation functions be assigned to separate keys.
Example:
To execute operations for selected unit: D

@EXEC

To cancel selection of units and commands: D

@CANCEL

: space

Command execution
The operator must in advance select operation units. When execution is assigned to the
touch A, touching the target executes the specified commands for each unit.
Example:
To enter data 1 as the setpoint value (SV) for a selected unit: D
To enter data 1 in all items for a selected unit: D

*.SV=1

*.*=1

: space

(9) Executing Programs by File Name (F)

This function is used to call panels other than those which have been prepared in the
system in advance, for example, a customized panel which has no default panel name.
(10) Instrument Command Operation (I)
The operator must in advance specify operation details for instruments. Touching the
touch A executes the specified operations. For example, this function makes a change of
mode and data modification easier. This function is used in the graphic builder.
Example:
To set the AUT mode after confirmation of FIC100: FIC100.MODE, C=AUT

IM 33G2C20-11E

B5-3

(11) Calling Up Data Entry Window (Z)

Touching the touch A calls up the data entry window for changing the data items of a
predefined tag. However, the data entry window provides only the current data to be
changed and an area for entering updated data. Therefore, comments must be defined in
advance with the graphic builder for changing operations.
(Example of graphic panel)
SV
=237M3/H
DATA =

(12) Calling Up Menu Window (M)

Touching the touch A calls up menu windows predefined in the graphic panels. On the
menu windows, the user can assign desired items which may be frequently changed such
as tag modes and data values. For details on menu windows, see the Graphic Builder
Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E).
(13) Calling Up Data Entry Window for Group Setting Data (G)
This is a graphic function which can call up the same data entry window as (11)
abovementioned when executing group data setting. Refer to the Graphic Builder
Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E) for details of the group setting data.
(14) Calling Up Menu Window for Group Setting Data (H)
Use the function of (12) Calling Up Menu Window described above for group setting.
Touching the touch A which is the touch area of the group setting data allows the menu
window to be called up. The menu window must be specified for each group data.
(15) Changing Graphic Display Data (C)
This function is used to execute the graphic builder function to the def. communication
table. Touching the touch A changes the communication table prepared in the graphic
builder. This function allows the user to change displayed process data and modification
conditions only without changing graphic images. For details on the def. communication
table, see the Graphic Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E).
(16) LED Flashing/Lit/Off (E)
When an associated sequence message is activated, this function changes the status of
the LED lamps. This function is defined in the sequence message request function.
Example: To define this function so that the 21st LED is lit when the 3rd sequence
message (%PR0003) is activated and the 21st LED is off when the 7th sequence
message (%PR0007) is activated, specify the following data for the related number of
the sequence message request.

B5-4

21

ON

21

OFF

: space

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. One-touch Operations

(17) Starting Standard Batch Report (L)

This function is used to print out the standard batch report. The standard batch report
can be assigned to the function key and started with the sequence message, scheduler, or
product control panel.
(18) Data Item Dependent Menu
This menu is used in the CS batch control function. It enables the data item menu
window on the tuning panel to display on a graphic panel. Specify menus in the menu
window in the CS batch builder in advance. It is recommended that this function be used
where numeric values are restricted or where a user-defined mode is used.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B5-5

5.2.2

Panel Set

See Also
See Section 3.13 of Part D, Panel Set Definition Panel.

The panel set function allows the user to retrieve and display two or more operation
panels or windows onto two or more CRTs at any one time. This function allows the
operator to view the desired set of panels with a one-touch operation.
(1) Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of the panel set function.
Table B5.2.1

Specifications of Panel Set Function

Item

Specification

Number of panel sets

200 per ICS

Number of panels per set

4 panels per set

Number of specified ICSs (on which panels are

displayed)

The same as the number of ICSs within an operation group specified by the builder

Type of panels that can be displayed

Any panel that can be displayed on the CRT

(full size panel, half size panel or window)

Panel set definition

Through the panel set definition panel (operator

utility)

Note:

Up to four panels and windows can be displayed simultaneously. The number of CRTs to display
panels is not restricted.

(2) Execute of the Function

The following paragraph describes how to execute the panel set function.
Execution with the panel set key
Select the panel set key

dedicated for the ICS.

TIP
When a panel set is displayed with the panel set key
, the function retrieves a
panel set by referring to the first panel defined in each panel set. This means that, when
is pressed, such a set of panel is addressed as one where the on-screen panel is
specified as the first panel.
Execution with a function key
The operator must in advance assign the display function of a panel set to a function
key.
Selecting the defined function displays the assigned panel set.

B5-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. One-touch Operations

(3) Transfer of the Name of a Panel Set to Other ICSs

Operating a panel set function causes the name of the operated panel set to be sent to the
ICSs in an operation group. The ICS that has been notified of the panel name retrieves
and displays that panel.
STN30
.OV0020

STN31
.GR0011

Panels called as
a panel set

.TG0010

.GR0001

Panel set name

[02]

Function key for No. 2 panel set

STN30
Panel Set Name
02

.TG0010

.0V0020 .2

: space
STN31
Panel Set Name
02

Figure B5.2.1

.GR0001

.GR0011 .2

Example of Panel Set Definition

(4) Panel Set Name

See Also
See Section 4.5 of Part B, Panel Set Names.
The user can specify a name for each panel set. This name is useful for assignment of
the function to a function key.
Alphanumeric characters of up to eight digits can be used.

TIP
Panel set names can be used to assign functions to a builder, but these names cannot be
used for execution of the functions. (If the operator enters this name from the keyboard
of the ICS, the function will not be executed.)

IM 33G2C20-11E

B5-7

5.2.3

Panel Display Sequence

See Also
See Section 3.12 of Part D, Panel Display Sequence Definition Panel.

The panel display sequence function automatically displays specified panels in a preset
order. This is helpful in standardizing the operation procedures of the ICS.
(1) Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of the panel display sequence function.
Table B5.2.2

Specifications of Panel Display Sequence Function

Item

Specifications

Number of panel display sequence settings

32 per ICS

Number of steps (panels)

30 steps per sequence

Type of panels that can be displayed (Note)

Any panel that can be displayed on the ICS

(full size panel, half size panel, or window)

Panel display sequence definition

Through the panel display sequence definition

panel (operator utility)

Note:

The

key works only on the full size panel. Selecting the

key while other

types of panels are displayed does not allow the panel display sequence to be executed.

(2) Startup of the Function

Use any one of the following procedures to start the sequence for predefined panels in
the specified order and time.
Startup with the NEXT key
This method allows the panel display sequence to be triggered by selecting the
key while the first panel that belongs to the sequence is displayed.
Startup with function keys
This method allows the panel display sequence to be triggered when the function key to
which the sequence startup function has been assigned is selected.
Startup by sequence messages
This method allows the panel display sequence to be triggered by the event started by
the request message from an FCS.

TIP

1.
2.

B5-8

The LED on the

key blinks when the panel display sequence function is
started.
No input operations are accepted when the panel display sequence function is
started.

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. One-touch Operations

(3) Panel Switching

Steps to in subitem (2) above, Start of the Function are used just to trigger the
panel display sequence. To keep the sequence active and switch to another panel once
the sequence is initiated, the following procedure may be used.
Predefinition of display time of each panel
Predefine the display time of each panel using the operator utility. Each panel automatically switches to the specified panel according to the specified time. The time can be
specified for each panel.
Switching with the
Select the

key

key to view the next panel. Unless the display time is specified in

advance, the panel does not change until the operator selects the

key.

(4) Output of Hard Copy

The operator can generate a hard copy of the displayed panel by specifying it on the
panel display sequence definition panel in the operator utility. On this panel, specify the
hard copy output in the next line of specification of the display panel whose hard copy
you desire to generate. Then, a hard copy of the desired panel will be generated when
the related panel is displayed in the panel display sequence function.

See Also
See Chapter 8, Panel Copying.
Example:
Display
order
1
2
3
4
5

Display panel
name
.CG0001
Display of page 1 of the control group panel is specified.
@HDCP
Generation of a hard copy is specified.
.OV0003
Display of page 3 of the overview panel is specified.
:
:

The above specification displays the first page of the control group panel on the CRT,
automatically generates a hard copy of page 1, and then displays the third page of the
overview panel, when the related panel display sequence is started.
(5) Termination
Sequence operations that are under execution will be repeated until they are forcibly
terminated. To force termination, use any of the following procedures:
Select the panel erase key

while the sequence is running.

Switch from the current panel or window.

Select any key unrelated to the current sequence.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B5-9

5.2.4

System Function Key

The system function keys are software functions that have no permanently associated
physical keys on the keyboard. Instead, they provide functions that become available for
use if and when they are assigned to function keys, softkeys or touch targets.
The following table shows the types of system function keys, and the functions they
provide.
Table B5.2.3

System Function Keys

Name

Prohibits panel switching from another CRT

VOIC

Stops voice output upon acknowledgement while in progress

ACKN

Same function as alarm acknowledge key

BUZZ

Same function as buzzer reset key

LED
R

SETD

Performs data setting operation

SCNC

Cancels data setting operation

RECF

Displays previously displayed panels one at a time in order

RECB

Displays previously displayed panels one at a time in reverse order

FACE

Displays last displayed faceplate window

TRDW

Displays last displayed trend group window

TRPW

Displays the last displayed trend point window

PROC

Displays last displayed process window

GRPW

Displays last displayed graphic window

OVRW

Displays last displayed overview window

CRDW

Moves window down in display order (topmost to bottommost)

CRUP

Moves window up in display order (bottommost to topmost)

ERFS

Erases the full size panel currently on the screen

ERWD

Erases all half size panels and windows (a full size panel remains on the
screen)

HALF

Changes from full size panel to half size panel

FULL

Changes from half size panel to full size panel

FOCS

Moves input focus between the full size panel and the topmost window

TSCH

Switches on/off of the touch screen function

NXTU

Goes to next page on upper CRT of stacked-CRTs

PRVU

Goes to previous page on upper CRT of stacked-CRTs

ACKA

Simultaneously executes acknowledgement on both the upper and lower

CRTs in the stacked-CRT

PULS

Holds output signals in the on state for approx. one sec.

(Notes) R:

B5-10

Function

ISOL

If this function is assigned to a function key, the LED operation will be reserved.
ACKN, BUZZ: For output from extension keys
PRVU can turn back 8 pages.

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. One-touch Operations

(1) ISOL
ISOL prohibits panel switching from another CRT.
It prohibits the panel set function from switching a panel from another CRT, and also
prohibits a message from interrupting the panel display. Use ISOL by assigning it to a
function key. The LED of the function key is reserved. When the panel switching is
prohibited, the LED lamp is lit.

TIP
At the ISOL status, the following cases are regarded as operation on other CRTs, not on
the own CRT, even if they are operated on it :
when having specified the own CRT number by using the calling up panels and
windows with an one-touch operation ;
when having executed the panel set on which Yes is specified for notification to
other CRTs.

(2) VOIC
VOIC stops voice output upon acknowledgment while in progress. Since the buzzer reset
key
cannot stop voice output, this function must be assigned to stop voice
output in progress.
(3) ACKN
ACKN is the same function as the alarm acknowledge key
used upon acknowledgment with the extension keys.

. This function is

(4) BUZZ
BUZZ is the same function as the buzzer reset key
. This function is used to
stop the buzzer but not voice output from the ICS. Usually used when resetting the
buzzer with the extension keys.
(5) SETD
SETD is used for the group setting function which is a graphic function. This function
starts to update process data which are already set. For details of the group setting
function, see the Graphic Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E).
(6) SCNC
SCNC is also used for the group setting function which is included in the graphic
functions. This function cancels the setting data although SETD updates data. For details
of the group setting function, see the Graphic Builder Operation Manual
(IM 33G4L50-11E).

IM 33G2C20-11E

B5-11

(7) RECF
RECF displays previously displayed panels one at a time in reverse order. Up to eight
previous panels can be displayed from a specified panel.

(8) RECB
RECB displays previously displayed panels one at a time in order from the currently
displayed panel. Up to eight previous panels can be displayed from the currently
displayed panel.

(9) FACE
FACE displays the last displayed faceplate window.
(10) TRDW
TRDW displays the last displayed trend group window.
(11) TRPW
TRPW displays the last displayed trend point window.
(12) PROC
PROC displays the last displayed process window.
(13) GRPW
GRPW displays the last displayed graphic window.
(14) OVRW
OVRW displays the last displayed overview window.
(15) CRDW
CRDW moves the window down in the display order (topmost to bottommost).
The top window becomes the back window.

B5-12

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. One-touch Operations

(16) CRUP
CRUP moves window up in display order (bottommost to topmost).
The back window becomes the top window.
(17) ERFS
ERFS erases the full size panel currently on the screen.
(18) ERWD
ERWD erases all half size panels and windows (a full size panel remains on the screen).
(19) HALF
HALF changes from a full size panel to a half size panel. This function is available
when the half size panel has already been prepared.
(20) FULL
FULL changes from a half size panel to a full size panel. This function is available only
for the active status panels among the half size panels being displayed.
(21) FOCS
FOCS moves the input focus between the full size panel and the topmost window (half
size panel or window).
(22) TSCH
TSCH switches the touch screen function on/off. This is the same function as provided
on the operating preferences setup panel in system maintenance.

See Also
See Section 1.8 of Part D, Operating Preferences Setup Panel.

This function also displays the on/off state of the touch screen with the LED.
ON: LED off
OFF: LED on
(23) NXTU
NXTU goes to the next page on the upper CRT of stacked-CRTs.
(24) PRVU
PRVU goes to the previous page on the upper CRT of stacked-CRTs.
(25) ACKA
ACKA simultaneously executes acknowledgment on both the top and bottom CRTs of
the stacked-CRT.
(26) PULS
PULS holds output signals in the on state for approximately one sec. This function can
be assigned for the head signal of the contact outputs. It is helpful for resetting the
buzzer.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B5-13

5.3

Means for One-touch Operation

The following are the means for one-touch operation:
Function keys
Softkeys
Touch targets/Push buttons

5.3.1

Function Key

See Also
See Section 3.5 of Part D, Function Key Assignment Panel.
(1) Execution with a Function Key
Function keys are flat keys provided on the operation keyboard. The user can assign
desired functions to these keys.

See Also
See Figure B1.2.1.

On the surface of a function key, there is an LED lamp which blinks to notify the
operator of an alarm or operation timing. Also, labels with the names of the assigned
functions are provided.
Number of function keys: 64 per ICS
Definition: function key assignment panel (in the operator utility)
(2) Functions that can be Assigned to LEDs
The function listed below can be assigned separately to the LEDs on the function keys.
Tag alarm display
Alarm display on control group panel
Alarm display on overview panel
Alarm display on graphic panel
Alarm display on alarm summary panel (based on an area, station or plant)
For to above, the LED blinks if the corresponding tag or panel is in the alarm state;
it is lit upon acknowledgment, and it goes off upon normal recovery.
Flashing/lit/off by sequence message
When a sequence message is generated, the LED enters the assigned state (flashing,
lit, or off).

B5-14

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. One-touch Operations

Lit/off with a system function key

The ISOL function of the system function keys is used. When the function key to which
this function is assigned is selected, the panel displayed on the related CRT is reserved;
thereby preventing the panel from being switched from another CRT as long as this
function is activated. Selecting this function key once more cancels the reservation. The
LED is lit when the function is activated (panel switching is prohibited) and it is off
when the function is canceled.

5.3.2

Softkey

See Also
See the Graphic Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E).

A softkey is actually a type of push button. Softkeys are located below the operation
panel. The operator can assign each function of one-touch operations as described above
to these softkeys displayed on the graphic panel. Up to eight softkeys can be assigned
for each graphic panel.

Figure B5.3.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Graphic Panel

B5-15

5.3.3

Touch Target/Push Button

See Also
See the Graphic Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E).

Any of the function of one-touch operations as described so far in this chapter can be
implemented by the use of a touch target or push button, which is one of the functions
available with the ICS graphics.
Touch targets, when selected using a touch screen operation or the cursor key, execute
their allocated functions. Push buttons here refer to the graphical representation of
physical push buttons provided on an operation console, which are implemented on
graphic panels to provide the same functions as the physical push buttons. Push buttons
can be located at user-defined positions, while softkeys are placed in fixed positions at
the bottom of a graphic panel.

B5-16

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Operator Input

6.

Operator Input
This chapter describes the operator input operations common in the ICS.

6.1

Overview
Input operations are procedures used by the operator to enter settings and commands
through the various ICS operation panels.

(1) Input Operations

(a) Input operation locations on the ICS
The basic input operations are performed by opening entry window as needed and
entering the appropriate values. These input operations are classified into the types
described in the following table according to the location where input operation is
performed, i.e, according to the elements that configure a panel.
Table B6.1.1

Operation Panels and Operation Locations

Category

Description
The operation panels through which entries can be made are:
1. Tuning panel
2. Control group panel
3. Graphic panel

Full size
panel

4. Trend group panel

5. Trend point panel
6. Process report
7. Operator utility
8. System maintenance

Half size
panel

When in panel active status, the same operations can be performed as

on the full size panels.
The main input operations on the window are to confirm contents.
See Chapter 2 of Part C, Windows.
The input operations are possible on the following.
1. Message window

Window

2. Faceplate window
3. Help window
4. Confirmation window
5. Menu window
6. Computer window
Instrument faceplate operations can be performed on the following panels:

Instrument
faceplate

1. Control group panel

2. Tuning panel
3. Faceplate window

IM 33G2C20-11E

B6-1

(b) Operator input operations

Operator input operations at the operation panels can be performed by any of the
procedures described in the following table.
Table B6.1.2

Input Operations

Category

Description

Selecting an input item opens an entry window, displaying an entry winEntry window dow on the panel.
input
Data is input from the keyboard to the entry window.
Direct input

Selecting an input item causes an entry area to appear directly on the

panel.
Data is input from the keyboard to the entry area.

Menu window input

Selecting an input item displays a menu for the input item.

Selecting the data to be input from this menu enters that data.

(c) Data input methods

There are many methods for input of data from operation panels.
Table B6.1.3

Data Input Methods

Category

Description

One-line
input

The value to be set is input so as to overwrite the current value displayed in the entry area.

Two-line
input

The value to be set is input while viewing the current value displayed at
the top of the entry area.

Menu selection input

Select the item to be input from the predefined data in the menu window
displayed for the input operation.

Group setting Enables multiple input data to be treated as a data group and dealt with
input
as a group by a preset sequence of input operations.
There are the following methods:
Window input Entry window input: Faceplate window
Direct input: Help window
Page number
Page change display for multi-page operation panels.
input
Name input

B6-2

Input a tag name, panel name, or window name to call up that tag,
panel or window on the CRT.

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Operator Input

(2) Input Acceptance and Importance Order

Often, multiple windows are open on the CRT. This can create a situation in which more
than one window is potentially available for input operations. A highlighted (brighter)
title bar indicates the window currently ready for input operations. This is called the
active window. If no window with a highlighted title bar is on display, the main panel
accepts the input.

Figure B6.1.1

Input Acceptance Priority

(3) Input Operation Rules

There are several general rules for input operations, described next.
(a) To complete an input operation, use one of the following keys.
Select the entry key

on the operation keyboard

Select the <Return> key on the engineering keyboard

(b) To clear input data while entry is in progress, select the
To cancel the input operation itself, select the

key.
key.

(c) Selecting a different panel or closing a window while an input operation is in

progress aborts the input operation. This means the interrupted input operation has
no effect.
(d) Calling up another entry window while an input operation is in progress clears the
entry window currently being used, and aborts the input operation.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B6-3

6.2

Data Input Operation Procedures

(1) Entry Window Input

The following procedures are used to input from the entry window.
Touch a target defined for input, or move the cursor [] to a touch target
defined for input and select the display key
softkey defined for input.

, or select a button or

The entry window opens and is ready for data input.

Input data from the keyboard into the entry window.
Select the entry key

The data in the entry window is set up and display on the panel.
If the input operation requires confirmation, a confirmation window
appears.
Select the confirmation button [

], or cancel button [

] in the window,

or select the confirmation key

, or cancellation key
operation keyboard, to answer yes or no for confirmation.

, on the

When the confirmation is completed, the confirmation window disappears.

Select the clear key

Figure B6.2.1

B6-4

to close the entry window.

Input from Entry Window (Tuning Panel)

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Operator Input

(2) Direct Input

When direct input is needed, a message requesting the input appears on the panel. The
panel then goes in a state ready to accept the input.
Direct input operation examples are:
Page number input
Name input
Input of a message number in a help window
Use the following procedures for direct input:
When triggered by a keyboard input, or a push button or softkey operation,
a panel or window goes into a ready for input state.
Input data through the keyboard.
The data should appear on the panel.
Select the entry key

The ready for input state is then cancelled and the data is input.

Figure B6.2.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

Direct Input (Page Number Input)

B6-5

6.3

Data Input Methods

6.3.1

One-line Input

(1) Overview
One-line input is used to input new data for a data item whose current value is not being
periodically updated. This is due to the fact that when new data is input, the current
value is overwritten.

Figure B6.3.1

One-line Entry Area

(2) Input Operation

A cursor ( _ ) indicates the data input position. As data is input from the keyboard,
each character is displayed at the current cursor position. The cursor moves to the
right.
After the allowed number of characters is input, the cursor stops moving.
on the operation keyboard. Move
To edit the input, use the backspace key
the cursor back to the position at which a character needs to be changed, and reenter
the data correctly.
To complete the input, use one of the following keys:

Select the entry key

on the operation keyboard, or

Select the <Return> key on the engineering keyboard.

If the input data is in error, an error message is displayed. The system then waits for
the data to be reentered.
(3) To Cancel Input
Select the data key
on the operation keyboard to clear the data being input.
This returns the system to the initial state in effect immediately after the start of input.

B6-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Operator Input

6.3.2

Two-line Input

(1) Overview
Two-line input is used with entry window. When new data is input with this method, the
current value is not overwritten. It can be viewed while the user is entering data.

Figure B6.3.2

Two-line Entry Window

(2) Operation
Procedures for data input and cancelling input operation are identical to those used for
one-line input.

6.3.3

Menu Selection Input

(1) Overview
The menu is a type of window. When data is input by menu selection, the data values
are predefined. They are then selected for input by manipulations in the window.

Figure B6.3.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Menu Selection Input

B6-7

(2) Input Operation

Use the touch screen drag operation or the cursor keys to select the desired item from
the menu and select the display key
selected data item to the entry window.

on the operation keyboard to input the

(3) To Cancel Input

Select the clear key
on the operation keyboard, or select the close box on the
window using the touch screen function or the cursor keys to disappear the window.

6.3.4

Group Setting Input

(1) Overview
In normal data input, each time an input operation is completed (or after confirmation, if
applicable), the system processes the operation. It automatically executes the required
communications and data processing, such as changing the database values. This type of
input is called individual setting input.
In contrast, for certain types of data, such as batch data, it is necessary to be able to
enter changes to a group of data items on the screen, and then have the system process
them together as a group. This type of input is called group setting input. Group
setting input can be performed from a graphic panel or from a tuning panel (for array
data).
(2) Input Operations
These operating panels which can execute group setting are provided with softkeys for
operating commands. Select the setting command softkey after data input is completed.
(3) To Cancel Input
To abort a setting operation while in progress, select the cancel key.

TIP
Group setting/group cancellation functions are provided as a system function key.

Group setting: SETD

Cancellation of setting: SCNC

B6-8

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Operator Input

6.3.5

Window Input

(1) Overview
There are two types of data input operations using windows:
Input operations in which the entry window is called up (i.e., a faceplate window)
Input operations that involve direct input (i.e., a help window)
(2) Input via Entry Window Call Up
An entry window is called up by selecting the window softkey area. In a faceplate
window, selecting the softkey causes an entry window to open to be ready for data input.

Figure B6.3.4

Input via Window (Entry Window Call Up)

TIP
Use the

key to change an input item.

(3) Direct Input

To input data directly into a window such as a help window, first change the window
status to active
A block cursor ( ) indicates the data input position. As data is entered from the
keyboard, each character is displayed at the current cursor position. The cursor moves to
the right.
To edit the input, use the backspace key
on the operation keyboard. Move the
cursor back to the position at which a character needs to be changed, and reenter the
data value correctly.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B6-9

If the current window becomes inactive as a result of changing to another window, the
ready-for-input state is canceled. This causes the block cursor to appear as a void square
( ).

Figure B6.3.5

6.3.6

Input via Window (Direct Input)

Page Number Input

(1) Input Operation

When the currently displayed full size panel consists of multiple pages, select the page
to place the screen in a page number input state. Next, use the [0] to [9]
key
keys on the numeric keypad to enter the desired page number. Select the entry key
on the operation keyboard to go to that page.

Figure B6.3.6

Page Number Input

(2) Page Number Input from Half Size Panels

When a half size panel is in the active status, the page number input operation just
described can be performed.

B6-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Operator Input

6.3.7

Name Input

(1) Overview
The name input function is used to enter a tag name, panel name, or window name to
call up the corresponding panel. Data input is always regarded as name input if data are
entered when no entry window is shown on the operation panel before the page key
is selected.
The first character of the name input must be a letter, number, or period. For more
information on naming rules, refer to Chapter 4, Naming Rules.

Figure B6.3.7

Name Input

(2) Specifying Function and Parameters

There are some cases in which two or more panels or windows are available for the
same item. For example, when a tag name is input, a tuning panel, and faceplate window
are available for retrieval. In a case like this, the user can specify a function to select
which panel or window should be displayed.
Example:
To call a faceplate window: Tag name
Tag name
To call a full size tuning panel: Tag name

-W
-F

: space

It is also possible in some cases to append a parameter after a name. For example, the
operator can specify an area name as a parameter for an alarm summary panel. This
causes the alarm summary panel for the designated area to be displayed.
Example: .AL

IM 33G2C20-11E

area name

B6-11

Table B6.3.1

List of Panel/Window Names for Name Input

Name Input Format

Panels / Windows Displayed

Tag name

Tag Name

Faceplate window

Tag name

-W

Tag name

-F

Full size tuning panel

Tag name

-H

Half size tuning panel

Tag name

-S

Tuning panel with the same size as the one already opened

Tag name

DATA

Process window
Full size panel
Panel name

Panel name

Panel name

-F

.OVXXXX: Overview panel

.CGXXXX: Control group panel
.GRXXXX: Graphic panel
.TGXXXX:
TGXXXX: Trend group panel
.TPXXXX: Trend point panel
.AL: Alarm summary panel
.OG: Operator guide message panel
.CM: Computer message summary panel

Half size panel

Panel name
Panel name

-H

Panel Name

.OVXXXX: Overview panel

.CGXXXX: Control group panel
.GRXXXX: Graphic panel
.TGXXXX: Trend group panel
.TPXXXX: Trend point panel
.AL: Alarm summary panel
.OG: Operator guide message panel
.CM: Computer message summary panel

The panel of the same size as the one already opened

Panel name
Panel name

-S

.OVXXXX: Overview panel

.CGXXXX: Control group panel
.GRXXXX: Graphic panel
.TGXXXX: Trend group panel
.TPXXXX: Trend point panel
.AL: Alarm summary panel
.OG: Operator guide message panel
.CM: Computer message summary panel

Window
Panel name

-W

Window name .OVXXXX: Overview panel

.TGXXXX: Trend group panel
.TPXXXX: Trend point panel
.CM: Computer message summary panel
Window

Window Name

: space

B6-12

Window name

Window name .GWXXXX: Graphic window

.HWXXXX: Help window
.CWXXXX: Computer window
.GM: Operator guide message window
.AW: Process alarm window
.SY: System alarm window

XXXX : page number

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Operator Input

6.4

Data Input Processing

Any data entered in an entry area are checked immediately after the entry key has been
selected. According to the result of the checking, data input may be disabled or enabled
with confirmation operation. If the data are found normal, they are accepted as is.

(1) Input is Disabled

If input data are invalid or unacceptable, an error message appears, disabling input.
The primary reasons for the disabled input are :
Input is prohibited by the security setting.
The data cannot be input because of the operation group setting.
The data are out of range.
The mode does not allow entry.
(2) Confirmation Message
If, for example, the input data value is out of the specified range, a confirmation
message appears, prompting the operator to confirm the value. If the operator confirms
the value, it is accepted. The primary reasons for the prompted confirmation are :
Out-of-limit data
Input of out-of-range data
e.g., input of data exceeding the limit of PH~PL, HH~LL, MH~ML or
SVH~SVL
Change in the mode status
Important tag operation

IM 33G2C20-11E

B6-13

7. Operation on Stacked-CRT

7.

Operation on Stacked-CRT
Basic operations are the same as these of a single CRT. This chapter describes the
operations specific to a stacked-CRT.

7.1

Panel Operation on Stacked-CRT

(1) Displaying the Operation Panel from the Lower CRT on the Upper CRT
To display an operation panel displayed on a lower CRT on the upper CRT, select the
panel shift key

Figure B7.1.1

Panel Operation on Stacked-CRT (Display with Panel Shift Key)

(2) Exchange of Panels between Upper and Lower CRT

To reverse the upper and lower CRT display of panels, select the panel exchange key
.

Figure B7.1.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

Panel Operation on Stacked-CRT (Exchange of Panels)

B7-1

(3) Allowable Panels Operated

The two panel switching operations just described for stacked-CRT can only be used for
operation panels. Windows called onto a full size panel and system maintenance panels
cannot be switched in this manner.

TIP
Panel switching with the panel shift or exchange keys applies only to a stacked-CRT
ICS. Neither operation is allowed between two independent ICS.

B7-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Operation on Stacked-CRT

7.2

Operation on Upper CRT

(1) Operations Practical on Upper CRT

The upper CRT on stacked-CRT is equipped with a touch screen, but no keyboard. The
operating functions that are effective when using the upper CRT as a monitoring facility
are listed next.
Panel switching with panel shift and exchange keys
Related panel display with panel set
Panel call with one-touch operation

See Also
See Chapter 5, One-touch Operations.

Paging for the upper CRT with the NXTU and PRVU system function keys.

See Also
See Chapter 5, One-touch Operations.

Panel display with panel display sequence

Panel switching from the upper to the lower CRT
(2) Input Operation on Upper CRT
An operator cannot perform the following operations on the upper CRT:
Confirmation or acknowledgment is not allowed.
Entry windows cannot be called.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B7-3

7.3

Panel Call from Upper CRT

Panel access from the panel displayed on the upper CRT can be specified with the ICS
configuration definition builder.

(1) When Accessed Panels are to be Displayed on the Lower CRT:

When the operator accesses a specified panel from the alarm summary panel, operator
guide message panel, or overview panel (full size panels), the upper CRT continues to
display the panel and the lower CRT displays the panel to be accessed. When the
operator accesses a panel from other panels (including half size panels of the alarm
summary panel, operator guide message panel, and overview panel), the upper CRT
displays the panel to be accessed. However, if it is already specified in the definition of
the panel access destination of each panel which panel is to display an accessed panel,
that specification has priority.

B7-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

8. Panel Copying

8.

Panel Copying
A panel copying function is provided for the process to save the status of operations.

8.1

Overview
An ICS has the following panel copying functions.

(1) Hard Copy Function

This function prints a panel image displayed on CRT directly onto a color hard copy
unit.
It first saves the image as an image file before printing it.
(2) Image File Function
This function displays on a CRT and prints saved panel images.

Figure B8.1.1 Panel Copying Function

IM 33G2C20-11E

B8-1

8.2

Hard Copy Function

(1) Function
The hard copy function prints a panel image as it is viewed. It first saves the image as
an image file before printing it. The function outputs the image to a color hard copy unit
or printer when neither is busy. It is also possible to print hard copies on color hard copy
units attached to other ICS. They must first be defined using the ICS builder.
Table B8.2.1

Specifications for Hard Copy Output

Item

Specification

Output formats and colors

8 or 16 colors
Normal or reverse output

Panel interlocking duration

One second maximum

Required time for printout

Approximately 90 sec (in FAST mode)

Approximately 120 sec (in SLOW mode)

Print size

Approximately 216mm x 173mm

Note:

8 colors for FAST, 16 colors for SLOW

The following table shows how display colors on a CRT appear on the printed copy.
Table B8.2.2

Colors of Hard Copy Output (for 8-colors Normal Specification)

Color on CRT
Black

Black

Red

Red

Green, spring green

Green

Yellow, orange, yellow green

Yellow

Blue

Blue

Magenta

Magenta

Cyan, steel blue, deep sky blue

Cyan

White, pink, gray, violet

White

Table B8.2.3

Colors of Hard Copy Output (for 8-colors Reverse Specification)

Color on CRT

Hard Copy Color

Black

White

Red

Red

Green, spring green

Green

Yellow, orange, yellow green

Yellow

Blue

Blue

Magenta

Magenta

Cyan, steel blue, deep sky blue

Cyan

White, pink, gray, violet

Black

*:

B8-2

Hard Copy Color

Colors changed due to reverse output

IM 33G2C20-11E

8. Panel Copying

Table B8.2.4

*:

Colors of Hard Copy Output (for 16-colors Reverse Specification)

Color on CRT

Hard Copy Color

Black

White

Red

Red

Green

Green

Yellow

Yellow

Blue

Blue

Magenta

Magenta

Cyan

Cyan

White

Black

Steel blue

Light steel bule

Pink

Black

Spring green

Spring green

Orange

Orange

Yellow green

Yellow green

Violet

Dark red

Deep sky blue

Deep sky blue

Gray

Black

Colors changed due to reverse output

(2) Operation
To make hard copies, select the
key on the operation keyboard. Output
specifications for making hard copies comply with the settings provided in the image file
operation window.

See Also
See Section 8.3, Image File.

TIP
If the copy key
on the operation keyboard is selected while setting Device to
FILE in the image file operation window, the panel images are not output as hard copy;
they are stored in the image file only.

IM 33G2C20-11E

B8-3

8.3

Image File

(1) Function
Panel images generated through use of the hard copy function are saved to an auxiliary
storage device (hard disk). Then the hard copy file function allows the operator to
retrieve these saved images to be printed or displayed on a CRT.
Table B8.3.1

Output Specifications for Hard Copy Files

Item

Specification

Number of saved panels

5 panels per ICS

Required time for panel call

Approximately 10 seconds

TIP
To save panel images in an image file, select the
of the ICS.

key on the operation keyboard

(2) Image File Operation Window

Selecting the image file key
operation window.

Figure B8.3.1

B8-4

on the operation keyboard displays an image file

Display Format of Image File Operation Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

8. Panel Copying

(3) Operation
(a) Displaying
To display a saved panel image:
Select the image file key

to display the image file operation window.

Select the panel to be displayed and the device to which the panel is output.
Select the [DISPLAY] button to display the panel on a CRT.
Example: Select .GR0100 for OUTPUT and FILE for the Device and then select
[DISPLAY]. The main panel part of GR0100 is displayed on the CRT as an IMAGE
PANEL.

TIP
Only the main panel part of the related panel can be displayed on the CRT as the
IMAGE PANEL. To view the system message area at the top of the panel, use the scroll
keys on the operation keyboard.
(b) Printing
To print a saved panel image:
Select the image file key

to display the image file operation window.

Select the panel to be printed and the device to which the panel is output.
Select the

IM 33G2C20-11E

button to print.

B8-5

9. Printing Configurations

9.

Printing Configurations
When a message printout is requested, it is sent to a particular printer class name. Each
class name provides printouts to a corresponding printer. The following figure shows the
relationship between print requests, classes of printers, and printing devices.
Class Name

Print Request

Printer Logical Name

RS port

Message

Master
Msg 1

Operation related message

Process alarm message
System alarm message

Printer

Backup

prt01
prt02

Backup
prt03
Master

Squence message
Msg 3

Operator guide message

lbp00

Backup

lbp01

Master
Msg 4

Process Report

RS71 card

prt00

Master
Msg 2

(Port + Type)

PRT

Device of output destination

Backup

lbp02

Master

lbp03

Backup

Centronics port

Master

lbpcn

Printer

LBP
Backup
Hard Copy

prtcn

Master

Device of output destination

Hard copy

chucn

CHU
Backup

Other ICS
LBP
ICS2 lbpcn
Centronics port
Hard copy
ICS3 chucn
Centronics port

Figure B9.1

System Configuration for Printing

The operation group definition builder is used to specify the relationship between the
print requests and printer classes for message outputs. Print requests for other types are
specified when the operator executes a print command.
Message output destination definitionOperation group definition builder
Selection of process report output destinationProcess status report menu panel
Selection of hard copy output destinationSpecification of hard copy output
destination device

IM 33G2C20-11E

B9-1

The printer class indicates the relationship between the printing devices and the application status (master / backup). Furthermore, it can be used to specify the printing devices
of another station.
Definition of printer names to class namesICS configuration definition builder
Switching master/backup for each outputSystem maintenance function
Msg 1 to Msg 4 are used to output messages.
PRT is used to output process report.
LBP is used to provide printout to a laser printer.
CHU is used to provide printout to a color hard copy unit.
A printer name is a composite name combining the type of the printer and the name of
the connection port, indicating the name of the printer actually being used.
Definition of the connection status for each port of RS71 card or each Centronics
portICS configuration definition builder
prt corresponds to a serial printer.
lbp corresponds to a laser printer.
chu corresponds to a color hard copy printer.
00 to 03 denotes the port numbers on an RS71 card, and cn denotes the Centronics
port. Consequently, lbpcn means a laser printer connected to the Centronics
(parallel) port.

B9-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

10. Built-in-Speaker

10. Built-in-Speaker
The ICS produces audible sound types through its built-in speaker:
electronic sounds: alarms and messages
operation sounds: key and touch screen operations
Electronic sounds are defined using the operation group configuration builder at system
configuration. Tones and volumes for each ICS are set up or changed using the system
maintenance functions.

See Also
See Section 1.8 of part D, Operating Preferences Setup Panel.
Table B10.1

Electronic Sounds

No.

Initial Setup

Type

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Not assigned
Confirmation message
Message for invalid operation
Guide message
Process alarm, high priority alarm
Process alarm, medium and low priority alarms
System alarm message

Continuous
Continuous
Intermittent
Continuous
Continuous
Intermittent
Continuous

Tone
Electronic sound:
Electronic sound:
Electronic sound:
Electronic sound:
Buzzer
Buzzer
Bell

brrr
beep
paaa
bing-bong

The operation sound types are as follows:

ON
Continuous:

OFF

Sound
Action

ON
Intermittent:

OFF

Sound
Action

Figure B10.1
Table B10.2

Continuous and Intermittent Sounds

Operation Sounds
Item

Key operation sound

Touch screen operation sound

IM 33G2C20-11E

Tone
Light clicking sound
Heavy clicking sound

B10-1

11. ICS Capacities

11. ICS Capacities

The following table shows the combined total allowable number of stations (including
ICSs) that can be connected in a CENTUM CS system.
Table B11.1

Number of Stations Connectable to the CENTUM CS

Item
Up to 64

Number of stations per system

Up to 256
(including stations connected via gateways)

Table B11.2

Capacity
p
y

ICS Application Capacities

Item

Specification

Number of tags

100,000 (panel names or function block names, for example)

Number of trend pens

Overview panels

Number of
panels

Number of
windows

IM 33G2C20-11E

Specification

Number of stations per domain

6,400
32 pages (8 columns 4 rows = 32 display blocks /
page)

Control group panels

Tuning panels
Trend group panels
Trend point panels
Alarm summary panel
Operator guide message
panel

800 pages (8 instrument faceplates / page)

Depends on the number of tags (1 tag / page)
800 pages (8 pens / page), 50 blocks
6400 pages (1 pen / page)
200 messages / ICS (20 messages/page)

Graphic panels
Graphic windows
Help windows
Other windows

800 pages
500 / ICS
500 / ICS
Depends on the system. Not defined by the users.

40 messages / ICS (10 messages/page)

B11-1

Part C
Detailed Functions
This part details the functions necessary for actual plant operation, for example, on the
operation panels and windows.

Content
1. Operation Panels
1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

Overview ................................................................................................... C1-1

1.1.1 Features ......................................................................................... C1-1
1.1.2 Operation Panel Types ................................................................. C1-2
1.1.3 Panel Name ................................................................................... C1-2
1.1.4 Position of Operation Panels in the Panel System ...................... C1-3
Panel Access ............................................................................................. C1-4
1.2.1 Panel Display Function Summary ............................................... C1-4
1.2.2 Standard Panel Access ................................................................. C1-5
1.2.3 User-defined Panel Access ......................................................... C1-11
Overview Panel ....................................................................................... C1-13
1.3.1 Using the Overview Panel ......................................................... C1-13
1.3.2 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-15
1.3.3 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-15
1.3.4 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-15
1.3.5 Display Format ........................................................................... C1-16
1.3.6 Acknowledgment of Alarms ...................................................... C1-20
1.3.7 Panel Access ............................................................................... C1-20
Control Group Panel ............................................................................... C1-22
1.4.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-22
1.4.2 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-23
1.4.3 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-23
1.4.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C1-24
1.4.5 Alarm Occurrence and Acknowledgment .................................. C1-25
1.4.6 Panel Access ............................................................................... C1-26
Tuning Panel ........................................................................................... C1-27
1.5.1 Types of Faceplate ..................................................................... C1-27
1.5.2 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-28
1.5.3 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-28
1.5.4 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-28
1.5.5 Display Format ........................................................................... C1-29
1.5.6 Softkeys ...................................................................................... C1-30
1.5.7 Panel Access ............................................................................... C1-34

C-i

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

1.10

1.11
1.12

1.13

C-ii

Trend Group Panel .................................................................................. C1-35

1.6.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-36
1.6.2 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-36
1.6.3 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-36
1.6.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C1-37
1.6.5 Softkeys ...................................................................................... C1-41
1.6.6 Trend Operation Window .......................................................... C1-43
1.6.7 Panel Access ............................................................................... C1-46
Trend Point Panel .................................................................................... C1-47
1.7.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-48
1.7.2 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-48
1.7.3 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-49
1.7.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C1-49
1.7.5 Softkeys ...................................................................................... C1-52
1.7.6 Panel Access ............................................................................... C1-52
Operator Guide Message Panel .............................................................. C1-53
1.8.1 Types of Message ....................................................................... C1-53
1.8.2 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-54
1.8.3 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-54
1.8.4 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-54
1.8.5 Display Format ........................................................................... C1-55
1.8.6 Softkeys ...................................................................................... C1-57
1.8.7 Acknowledgment of Messages .................................................. C1-57
1.8.8 Change of Display ...................................................................... C1-57
1.8.9 Panel Access ............................................................................... C1-58
Graphic Panel .......................................................................................... C1-59
1.9.1 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-59
1.9.2 Panel Access ............................................................................... C1-60
Alarm Summary Panel ............................................................................ C1-61
1.10.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-62
1.10.2 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-62
1.10.3 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-62
1.10.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C1-63
1.10.5 Softkeys ...................................................................................... C1-65
1.10.6 Acknowledgment of Messages .................................................. C1-66
1.10.7 Display of Messages .................................................................. C1-66
1.10.8 Change of Display ...................................................................... C1-66
1.10.9 Panel Access ............................................................................... C1-67
System Alarm Message Panel ................................................................ C1-68
Computer Message Summary Panel ....................................................... C1-69
1.12.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-70
1.12.2 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-70
1.12.3 Panel Call ................................................................................... C1-70
1.12.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C1-71
1.12.5 Softkeys ...................................................................................... C1-72
1.12.6 Acknowledgment of Messages .................................................. C1-72
1.12.7 Change of Display ...................................................................... C1-72
Half Size Panel ........................................................................................ C1-73
1.13.1 Types .......................................................................................... C1-73
1.13.2 Panel Specifications ................................................................... C1-80
1.13.3 Panel Name ................................................................................. C1-80
1.13.4 Panel Calling and Closing .......................................................... C1-81
1.13.5 Display Format and Location ..................................................... C1-82
1.13.6 Operation .................................................................................... C1-83

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows
2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

IM 33G2C20-11E

Overview ................................................................................................... C2-1

2.1.1 Window Types ............................................................................. C2-1
2.1.2 Position of Windows in the Panel System ................................... C2-3
2.1.3 Window Names ............................................................................ C2-4
2.1.4 Opening or Closing the Window ................................................. C2-5
2.1.5 Window Configuration and Location .......................................... C2-7
2.1.6 Window Display Priority Order ................................................. C2-11
2.1.7 Window Frame ........................................................................... C2-11
2.1.8 Panel Access ............................................................................... C2-11
Message Window .................................................................................... C2-12
2.2.1 Types of Message Window ........................................................ C2-12
2.2.2 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-12
2.2.3 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-12
2.2.4 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-13
2.2.5 Process Alarm Window .............................................................. C2-14
2.2.6 System Alarm Window .............................................................. C2-16
2.2.7 Operator Guide Message Window ............................................. C2-18
2.2.8 Computer Message Window ...................................................... C2-20
Faceplate Window ................................................................................... C2-22
2.3.1 Types of Faceplate Window ...................................................... C2-22
2.3.2 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-23
2.3.3 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-23
2.3.4 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-23
2.3.5 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-24
Trend Window ........................................................................................ C2-25
2.4.1 Types of Trend Window ............................................................ C2-25
2.4.2 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-27
2.4.3 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-27
2.4.4 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-28
2.4.5 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-28
Tuning Trend Window ............................................................................ C2-29
2.5.1 Types of Tuning Trend Window ............................................... C2-29
2.5.2 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-30
2.5.3 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-30
2.5.4 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-31
2.5.5 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-31
2.5.6 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-32
Process Window ...................................................................................... C2-34
2.6.1 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-34
2.6.2 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-34
2.6.3 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-35
2.6.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-35
2.6.5 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-36
Overview Window .................................................................................. C2-37
2.7.1 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-37
2.7.2 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-37
2.7.3 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-38
2.7.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-38
Graphic Window ..................................................................................... C2-40
2.8.1 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-40
2.8.2 Configuration .............................................................................. C2-40
2.8.3 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-41
2.8.4 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-41
2.8.5 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-42
2.8.6 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-42
Help Window .......................................................................................... C2-43
2.9.1 Types of Help Window .............................................................. C2-43
2.9.2 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-44
2.9.3 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-44
2.9.4 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-44
2.9.5 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-46
2.9.6 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-46

C-iii

2.10 Confirmation Window ............................................................................ C2-47

2.10.1 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-47
2.10.2 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-47
2.10.3 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-47
2.10.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-48
2.10.5 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-48
2.11 Menu Window ........................................................................................ C2-49
2.11.1 Types of Menu Window ............................................................ C2-49
2.11.2 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-49
2.11.3 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-50
2.11.4 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-50
2.11.5 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-51
2.11.6 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-51
2.12 Computer Window .................................................................................. C2-52
2.12.1 Window Specifications ............................................................... C2-52
2.12.2 Window Name ............................................................................ C2-52
2.12.3 Opening or Closing the Window ............................................... C2-52
2.12.4 Display Format ........................................................................... C2-53
2.12.5 Window Operation ..................................................................... C2-54

3. Message Outputting
3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.5

Overview ................................................................................................... C3-1

3.1.1 The Nature of Output Messages .................................................. C3-1
3.1.2 Message Annunciation ................................................................. C3-3
3.1.3 Message Storage ........................................................................... C3-4
Message Output Formats .......................................................................... C3-5
3.2.1 CRT Output .................................................................................. C3-5
3.2.2 Printer Output ............................................................................... C3-8
Acknowledgment of Messages ................................................................. C3-9
3.3.1 Message Types and the Methods for Acknowledging Them ...... C3-9
3.3.2 Method of Acknowledgment ...................................................... C3-10
Sequence Message .................................................................................. C3-11
3.4.1 Printed Message ......................................................................... C3-12
3.4.2 Operator Guide Message ............................................................ C3-13
3.4.3 Voice Message ........................................................................... C3-14
3.4.4 Request Message ........................................................................ C3-15
Alarm Messages ...................................................................................... C3-16

4. Alarm Processing
4.1

4.2

4.3

4.4

C-iv

Overview ................................................................................................... C4-1

4.1.1 What Is Alarm Function? ............................................................. C4-1
4.1.2 Types of Alarm ............................................................................ C4-1
Process Alarms .......................................................................................... C4-2
4.2.1 Alarm Processing ......................................................................... C4-2
4.2.2 Alarm Actions .............................................................................. C4-6
4.2.3 Rewarning Alarm ....................................................................... C4-10
4.2.4 Representative Alarm ................................................................. C4-11
4.2.5 Priority ........................................................................................ C4-11
4.2.6 Operations when a Process Alarm Occurs ................................ C4-13
4.2.7 Alarm SuppressionAlarm-Output-Off Mode (AOF) ......... C4-17
Annunciator Messages ............................................................................ C4-18
4.3.1 What Is an Annunciator Message? ............................................ C4-18
4.3.2 Message Format ......................................................................... C4-19
4.3.3 Rewarning Alarm ....................................................................... C4-20
System Alarms ........................................................................................ C4-21
4.4.1 What Is a System Alarm? .......................................................... C4-21
4.4.2 Operations when a System Alarm Occurs ................................. C4-21

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting
5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

Overview ................................................................................................... C5-1

5.1.1 Function Components ................................................................... C5-1
5.1.2 Operating Panel Hierarchy and Component Panel ...................... C5-2
5.1.3 Shared Operations ........................................................................ C5-4
5.1.4 Search Setting Window ................................................................ C5-5
Process Status Report Menu Panel ........................................................... C5-8
5.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................... C5-8
5.2.2 Setting Output Report Conditions ................................................ C5-9
5.2.3 Specifying Search Conditions .................................................... C5-10
5.2.4 Specifying Destination Printer ................................................... C5-12
Process Status Report .............................................................................. C5-13
5.3.1 Instrument Status Report Panel .................................................. C5-13
5.3.2 Annunciator Status Report Panel ............................................... C5-15
5.3.3 Process I/O Status Report Panel ................................................ C5-16
5.3.4 Software I/O Status Report Panel .............................................. C5-17
Historical Message Report Menu Panel ................................................. C5-19
5.4.1 Overview .................................................................................... C5-19
5.4.2 Setting Output Report Conditions .............................................. C5-20
5.4.3 Specifying Search Conditions .................................................... C5-21
5.4.4 Specifying Destination Printer ................................................... C5-23
Historical Message Report ...................................................................... C5-24
5.5.1 Historical Message Report Panel ............................................... C5-24

6. Trend Recording
6.1

6.2

6.3

Overview ................................................................................................... C6-1

6.1.1 Types ............................................................................................ C6-1
6.1.2 Trend Recording Data Flow ......................................................... C6-2
6.1.3 Display Formats for Acquired Data ............................................. C6-2
Data Acquisition Function ........................................................................ C6-4
6.2.1 Recorded Data and Data Acquisition Format .............................. C6-4
6.2.2 Data Acquisition Methods ............................................................ C6-4
6.2.3 Trend Recording Memory Capacity ............................................ C6-6
6.2.4 Trend Block and Trend Group Number(Page Number) .............. C6-6
6.2.5 Batch Trend .................................................................................. C6-7
6.2.6 Saved Trend .................................................................................. C6-8
6.2.7 Effect of Power Failure on Trend Recording .............................. C6-8
Handling Data Acquired by Other Stations ............................................. C6-9

7. Graphics
7.1

7.2

7.3

7.4

IM 33G2C20-11E

Overview ................................................................................................... C7-2

7.1.1 Graphic Components .................................................................... C7-2
7.1.2 Panel Name ................................................................................... C7-5
7.1.3 Sizes of Panels Displayed ............................................................ C7-5
7.1.4 Panel Call ..................................................................................... C7-6
Common Attributes ................................................................................... C7-7
7.2.1 Color ............................................................................................. C7-7
7.2.2 Line ............................................................................................... C7-7
7.2.3 Interior Style ................................................................................. C7-8
Display of Characters and Graphics ......................................................... C7-9
7.3.1 Text ............................................................................................... C7-9
7.3.2 Polymarker .................................................................................. C7-10
7.3.3 Pattern Block .............................................................................. C7-11
Data Display ............................................................................................ C7-12
7.4.1 Process Data Bar ........................................................................ C7-12
7.4.2 Process Data Character .............................................................. C7-14
7.4.3 Graphic Data ............................................................................... C7-15

C-v

7.5
7.6

Graphic Computation .............................................................................. C7-19

Operating and Switching Graphic Panels ............................................... C7-20
7.6.1 Touch Target and Push Button .................................................. C7-20
7.6.2 Softkey and Instrument .............................................................. C7-22
7.6.3 Display Window ......................................................................... C7-24
7.6.4 Group Setting ............................................................................. C7-25
7.6.5 Message ...................................................................................... C7-27
7.7 Modification ............................................................................................ C7-28
7.7.1 Functions .................................................................................... C7-28
7.7.2 Number of Modification Conditions .......................................... C7-30
7.8 Coordinate Modification ......................................................................... C7-31
7.9 Def. Communication Table ..................................................................... C7-33
7.10 Display of Panels 1.5 or 4 Times Larger in Size ................................... C7-35
7.10.1 Panel Size ................................................................................... C7-35
7.10.2 Scrolling ...................................................................................... C7-35
7.10.3 Number of Graphics ................................................................... C7-36
7.11 Graphic Numbers .................................................................................... C7-37

8. Operation Group
8.1

8.2
8.3

8.4
8.5

8.6
8.7
8.8

Overview ................................................................................................... C8-1

8.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................... C8-1
8.1.2 Specifications ................................................................................ C8-2
Group Identifier ........................................................................................ C8-3
Operating Modes ....................................................................................... C8-4
8.3.1 Types of Operating Mode ............................................................ C8-4
8.3.2 Grouping by Mode ....................................................................... C8-4
8.3.3 Actions Taken by Stations ........................................................... C8-5
8.3.4 ICS Operations at Time of Operating Mode Change .................. C8-5
Behavior of Process Alarms ..................................................................... C8-6
Messages and Electronic Sounds .............................................................. C8-7
8.5.1 Output of Messages ...................................................................... C8-7
8.5.2 Electronic Sounds ......................................................................... C8-7
Specifying the Range of Pages ................................................................. C8-8
Setting Modes Using the System Maintenance Function ........................ C8-8
Example of Configured Operation Group ................................................ C8-9

9. Security
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7

C-vi

Types of Security Functions ..................................................................... C9-1

Keylock Mode Switch and Security ......................................................... C9-3
Security Levels for Operation and Monitoring of ICS Functions ........... C9-4
Security Based on Importance of a Tag ................................................... C9-8
Security against Data Entry ...................................................................... C9-9
Security Provided by Checking Users .................................................... C9-10
Security for Operator Utility ................................................................... C9-11

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.

Operation Panels
The ICS has several different operation panel types. Together, these panels enable
efficient process operation and monitoring. This chapter describes each operation panel
type in detail.

1.1

Overview

1.1.1

Features
The features of the operation panels as follows:
The hierarchical structure which corresponds to the information management of the
control system can be organized with these panels.
Simple switching panels with one-touch action through touch panels, softkeys,
function keys, and panel push buttons is available.

See Also

See Section 5 of Part B, One-touch Operations.

The operation panels can be systematized according to the operation system.
In addition to the standard panel functions, operation panels have a half size panel
function and a multiwindow function. There functions allow the operator to display
required data on the screen without switching between operation panels.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-1

1.1.2

Operation Panel Types

The following table lists the operations panels found in the ICS.
Table C1.1.1

Operation Panel Types

Panel Name

Description

Overview panel

1.3

Control group panel

Displays an overview of the statuses of up to eight function

blocks by using instrument faceplates, allowing the operator
to implement the operation and monitoring of setpoints, manipulated output values and block modes.

1.4

Displays detailed information on a single, particular function

block, allowing the operator to change or set control
parameters.

1.5

Trend group panel

Displays trend recording (acquisition) data graphically with

eight pen traces.

1.6

Trend point panel

Displays trend recording (acquisition) data graphically with a

single pen trace.

1.7

Operator guide
message panel

Displays operator guide messages in the order they are

generated.

1.8

Graphic panel

Serves as a key panel that plays a major role in running,

operating and monitoring a process, showing the status of a
plant or system graphically. Panel is designed to meet with
the user system.

1.9

Alarm summary panel

Displays process alarms in the order they are generated,

allowing the operator to acknowledge each of them.

1.10

System alarm message

panel

Displays system alarms in the order they are generated,

allowing the operator to acknowledge each of them.

1.11

Computer message
summary panel

Displays messages sent from other computers.

Half size panel

Displays each of the operation panels listed here in a size

reduced in area to a quarter of the original size.

Tuning panel

1.1.3

Reference

Has 32 separate display blocks that show the status of

alarms or the condition under which the process is running.

1.12
1.13

Panel Name
Each operation monitoring panel has its name specific to the system. For some panels,
the user can also freely define panel names. The following table shows the specific panel
name of each panel and whether the panel name is user-definable.
Table C1.1.2

Panel Names and User-definable Names

Panel

User-definable

.ER

Overview panel

.OVxxxx

Control group panel

.CGxxxx

Tuning panel

Tag name

Graphic panel

.GRxxxx

Alarm summary panel

.AL

Operator guide message panel

.OG

Trend group panel

.TGxxxx

Trend point panel

.TPxxxx

Process status report menu panel

.PR

System status overview panel

.SM

Hard copy panel

.IM

xxxx: page

C1-2

Panel Name

Erasure panel

: Available

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.1.4

Position of Operation Panels in the Panel System

The ICS operation panel hierarchy is configured as shown in the following figure. A
simple one-touch operation in any panel easily switches it to related panels.
Moreover, for the graphic panels user definable hierarchical structure allows the user to
construct the panel system to meet with the operation system.
System alarm
message panel

Alarm
summary
panel

Overview
panel

Computer
message
summary panel

Control group
panel

Tuning panel
Operation
and
Monitoring
Functions
From each
panel

Management /
Maintenance
Functions

Figure C1.1.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Graphic panel

Trend group
panel

Graphic panel

Trend point
panel

Graphic panel

Half size panel

Trend
window

Process
window

Faceplate
window

Overview
window

Process
report

Operator guide
message panel

Operator
utility

Graphic
window

Help
window

Confirmation
window

System
maintenance

Menu
window

Workbench

Message
window

Computer
window

System
generation
builder

Position of Operation Panel in the Panel System (Conceptual

Configuration)

C1-3

1.2

Panel Access
Operation panels can be accessed in several different ways. There are a number of
standard methods, as well as user-defined panel access. In addition to full size panels,
half size panels are also available on an ICS.

1.2.1

Panel Display Function Summary

The following table summarizes the display functions available for operation panels.
Table C1.2.1

Display Functions of Panels on the ICS

Function

Description

Reference

Refers to the function of system-specified panel access that

is fixed in the system (cannot be changed by the user).
Panels can be accessed in the following ways with:
Standard
panel
access

1. Panel call key

1.2.2

2. Page keys or page selection

3. Touch targets on a panel
4. Panel name entry
5. Higher order panel key
Refers to the function which allows the user to specify
certain panels.

Panel
Access

Panels can be accessed in the following ways with:

User-defined panel
access

1. Higher order panel key

1.2.3

2. Touch targets on a panel

3. Function keys
4. Panel display sequence
5. Panel set

Panel
Copying

Panel
access on
stackedCRT

Refers to the function which allows panels to be accessed

from the upper CRT to the lower or exchanged between the
two CRTs.

7
Part B

Hard
copies

Refers to the function to print the contents of a panel with a

color hard copy unit.

8.2
Part B

Image files

Refers to the function to save the contents of a panel as an

image file on a hard disk.

8.3
Part B

From each panel, the operator can retrieve related or predefined windows, as well as half
size panels.
Table C1.2.2

Panel Access and Panel Size

Access by

Full Size

Half Size

Window

Panel call key

Page keys or page selection

Touch target on a panel

Panel name entry

Higher order panel key

Function key

Panel display sequence

Panel set

: Available

C1-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.2.2

Standard Panel Access

This section describes the panel access function which has been prepared in the system
previously.

(1) Overview
Operation panels are retrieved by using the panel call keys, or by entering the
appropriate panel name. The panel system is in a hierarchical structure. The operator
may access to lower order panels by touching the appropriate touch target. When access
to higher order panels, a higher order panel key is available. When switching between
panels of the same type, the operator can simply specify the appropriate page number.
The functions of system-specified panel access that are fixed in the system are shown
below.
(a) Using panel call keys
Selecting any of the panel call keys on the operation keyboard switches the user to the
corresponding panel.
(b) Specifying a page number
Selecting the page keys accesses the user to the next or previous page in a panel series.
A page number can also be directly entered for access to the specified page in a panel
series.
(c) Using touch targets
Selecting an appropriate touch target with the cursor or touch screen function accesses
panels from higher order to lower order panels.
(d) Panel name entry
Entering an appropriate panel name when the data entry key is ready for name input
directly accesses a user to the specified panel.
(e) Selecting the higher order panel key
Selecting the higher order panel key
on the operation keyboard accesses the
user to the corresponding higher order panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-5

(2) Access Using Panel Call Keys

(a) Panel call keys
The panel call keys (see Table C1.2.3) and panel auxiliary keys (see Table C1.2.4) allow
the operator initially to call a panel or to switch panels with one touch.
Table C1.2.3
Key

Panel Call Keys

Panel Called or Function

Key

Panel Called or Function

Alarm summary panel

Shift (displays the same panel on the upper CRT as on the lower CRT)

Operator guide message

panel

Exchange (exchanges the panels between upper and lower CRTs.

Overview panel

Panel set

Control group panel

Workbench

Tuning panel

Panel display sequence startup and

progress

Trend group panel

Call and deletion of help window

(Trend point panel)

Graphic panel

System status overview panel

Process status report menu

panel

Operator utility menu panel

(Historical message panel)

Higher order panel

Table C1.2.4

Panel Auxiliary Keys

Key

Description
Call up image file operation window
Initiates hard copy
Alters cursor operation mode
Cancels operation and deletes entry area
Selects the previous page
Selects the next page
Clears the panel

TIP
Panel switching with the panel call key is available on the full size panel.

C1-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

(b) System for standard panel switching

The following figure shows how each panel call key works in standard panel switching.

Figure C1.2.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Operation Panel System and Standard Panel Switching

C1-7

(3) Access by specifying a Page Number

(a) Using page keys
and

When a panel has two or more pages, the operator can select the page keys
to access to the next or previous page in a panel series if the panels are
included in the same panel category.
(b) Entering a page number

When the main panel has two or more pages, selecting the page keys
prompts
the user for page number input. Enter the appropriate page number with the numeric
keys, as shown in the following figure.

Figure C1.2.2

Entering a Page Number

It is also practical to switch panels in half size panels by entering the appropriate page
number. While the half size panel is active, enter a page number to switch to the desired
page.

C1-8

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

(4) Access Using Touch Targets

(a) Source and object panels
The following table lists the source and object panels.
Table C1.2.5

Panels Displayed by Touch Targets (Standard Panel Switching)

Operation Panel Name

Panels Displayed by Touching Touch Targets

Each panel switches following the order of priority shown below:

Alarm summary panel

1. The user-defined higher order panel specified for the function

block with alarms
2. Control group panel
3. Tuning panel

Control group panel

Tuning panel

Trend group panel

Trend point panel

The panels listed next have user-defined panel switching:

Overview panels
Graphic panels
Alarm summary panels
Operator guide message panels
(b) Switching from an alarm summary panel
Select the appropriate touch target to switch to a higher order panel or control group
panel containing the tags with alarms. If the tags with alarms are not assigned to a
higher order panel or control group panel, the tuning panel is retrieved.

Figure C1.2.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Switching from an Alarm Summary Panel

C1-9

(c) Switching from a control group panel

Select the appropriate touch target to switch to the corresponding tuning panel.

Figure C1.2.4

Switching From a Control Group Panel

(d) Switching From a Trend Group Panel

Select the appropriate touch target to switch to the corresponding trend point panel.

Figure C1.2.5

Switching From a Trend Group Panel

(5) Access by Entering a Panel Name

Each operation panel is given a panel name. The operator can retrieve the desired
operation panel by simply entering this panel name. For further information, use the
following reference.

See Also
See section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.

(6) Access by Selecting the Higher Order Panel Key

When the currently displayed panel is associated with higher order panels, the operator
can retrieve them by selecting the higher order panel key
Table C1.2.6

Switching with the Higher Order Panel Key (Standard Panel

Switching)

Operation Panel Name

C1-10

Panels Displayed with Higher Order Panel Key

Tuning panel

Control group panel

Trend point panel

Trend group panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.2.3

User-defined Panel Access

(1) Overview
In addition to the panel access defined by the system, the ICS also provides user-defined
panel access capabilities. With user-defined panel access, a user can configure a panel
system specific to the individual system.
There are the following methods for user-defined panel access.
(a) The higher order panel key
Selecting the higher order panel key
on the operation keyboard accesses the
operator to the higher order panel specified by the user.
(b) Touch targets
The user can define specified panels as touch targets in each display element that makes
up a panel.
(c) Function keys
The user can assign the desired panels to function keys. Selecting the function key
retrieves the panel assigned to it.
(d) Panel display sequence
Panels are retrieved in the order defined by the panel display sequence.
(e) The panel set function

See Also
See Sub section 5.2.2 of Part B, Panel Set.

With this function, the user can retrieve and display a set of up to four operation panels
or windows onto CRTs.
(2) Access by selecting the Higher Order Panel Key
(a) Operation panels available as higher order panels
Selecting the higher order panel key
accesses to the higher order panel
predefined for the currently displayed panel.
Table C1.2.7

Operation Panels Available as Higher Order Panels

Operation panels available as higher order

panels

IM 33G2C20-11E

Overview panel
Control group panel
Tuning panel
Trend group panel
Graphic panel

C1-11

(b) Order of priority in panel access

The builder-defined order of priority takes precedence over all others. However, if the
current display is switched from a control group panel to a tuning panel, the subsequent
display goes back to the control group panel when switched.
(3) Access Using Touch Targets
(a) Access from overview panels
Panels can be specified for each display block. To access to a specified panel, select the
appropriate touch target, using the cursor or touch screen function. By default, specified
panels agree with the display blocks of the overview panel.
(b) Access from an operator guide message panel
Panels can be specified in the message displayed on an operator guide message panel.
The operator can access to a specified panel by selecting the appropriate touch target.
(c) Access from an alarm summary panel
The operator can access to a specified panel in the function block (tag) with alarms by
selecting the appropriate touch target. If no user-defined panels are specified, the system
default panels appear. The default panels will either be the control group panel
containing the tags with alarms, or the tuning panel.
(d) Access from graphic panels
Each of the touch targets and softkeys on a graphic panel can be assigned a panel name.
(4) Access Using Function Keys

See Also
See Chapter 5 of Part B, One-touch Operations.

Each of the function keys on an operation keyboard can be assigned an appropriate

panel name. Selecting the function key retrieves the panel with a one-touch operation.
(5) Access Using Panel Display Sequence Function
For details, refer to Section 5.2.3 of Part B, Panel Display Sequence.
(6) Access Using the Panel Set Function
For details, refer to Section 5.2.2 of Part B, Panel Set.
(7) Access to Another CRT
If specified, display on another specified CRT is also available.

C1-12

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.3

Overview Panel
An overview panel has various functions, for example, process status overview,
acknowledgment of alarm status, and access to related panels. It is also used as a menu
panel when it is the highest order panel in the panels to monitor the entire plant.

Figure C1.3.1

1.3.1

Example of Overview Panel

Using the Overview Panel

(a) Overview panel hierarchy
An overview panel can be assigned to a display block in another overview panel. This
allows an overview panel to be used as a menu panel of two or more overview panels.
Overview panel
Page 1
One-touch panel
access

Overview panel

Overview panel

Overview panel

Page 2

Page 3

Page 32
One-touch panel
access

Various
panels

Figure C1.3.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

Overview Panel Hierarchy

C1-13

(b) Alarm listings on overview panels

The display blocks of an overview panel may be used as annunciator indicator lamps.
When a process alarm occurs in a function block or panel assigned to a display block,
the color of the background or characters of the display block changes and blinks
according to the alarm status. Since the display block is a touch target, the operator can
immediately touch it to access to the panels (must be assigned previously) requiring
alarm processing.

Figure C1.3.3

C1-14

Example of Alarm Display and Panel Switching

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.3.2

Panel Specifications
The following table lists overview panel specifications.
Table C1.3.1

Overview Panel Specifications

Item

Capacity

Specification

Number of display blocks

Total number of pages

32 per page (8 columns 4 rows)

Maximum of 32 pages (1024 display blocks) / ICS
Assignable elements as a display block:
1

Panel elements

Panels

Annunciators

Comments

Display blocks for which no alarm occurrence notification has been specified do not blink

Display
p y
Panels to be displayed by
touching a display block

Order of priority of panels displayed using the panel call key

1.3.3

Function blocks

User-definable
1

The panel with the lowest page number with unacknowledged alarms.

The panel with the lowest page number with alarms.

The panel with the last previously displayed page or

the first page.

Panel Name

See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.
The user can freely define not only a system-specified panel name, but also a desired
panel name.
System-specified panel name.
.OVxxxx

xxxx: page

User-defined panel name

Alphanumeric characters of up to 16 digits can be used.

1.3.4

Panel Call
This section describes how to call up the overview panel.
If any element of the assigned elements on the overview panel is in the alarm state, the
system message area indicates the number of the related page of the overview panel.
Alarm page number

93.04.11 14:33

Figure C1.3.4

IM 33G2C20-11E

System Message Area upon Alarm Occurrence

C1-15

(1) Panel Call with the Panel Call Key

is selected, the overview panel actually
When the overview panel key
displayed is based on page priority order as follows:
1.

The overview panel with the lowest page number containing unacknowledged
alarm is retrieved.
The overview panel with the lowest page number containing acknowledged alarm
is retrieved.
The last previously displayed overview panel or the first overview panel page is
retrieved.

2.
3.

(2) Panel Call with a Panel Name

System-specified panel name
.OVxxxx

xxxx: page,

.OVxxxx

-F

.OVxxxx

-H

.OVxxxx

-S

: space

(-F is omissible)

User-defined panel name

(3) Panel Call with One-touch Operation
The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

1.3.5

Display Format
An overview panel consists of 32 display blocks. Function blocks (tags) or display
panels are assigned to each block. Display blocks indicate alarm status, and can have
touch targets built-in for retrieving panels as required. The overview panel is often used
as the highest order panel for processes such as continuous or batch processes in which
graphic panels are mainly used. It is also used as a status overview display panel for
each process or each piece of equipment.
The following figure shows the display format of the overview panel.

Figure C1.3.5
C1-16

Display Format of Overview Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

(1) Display Block Types

There are the following display block types on an overview panel.
Function block (tag)
Panel
Annunciator
Comment
(2) Display Block Configuration
The following table shows the relationship between assignable elements and
configuration elements for the display blocks. Furthermore, the display elements
correspond to the contents listed in the table below as shown in the following figure.
First line

Comment (comment or name)

Second line

Data

Third line

Alarm status (indicated with an alarm status, tag marks)

Alarm status (indicated in alarm-specified colors)

Panels to be displayed (panels to be assigned or panel elements)

Table C1.3.2
Display Block
Type
Function
blocks

Assignable Elements and Configuration Elements for the Display

Blocks
Assignment
Element
One function
block (tag)

Comment
Tag comment
or name

Data
Process value
(PV) of an assigned tag

Control group
panel

Indication of
Alarm Status
Alarm (ALRM)
Tag mark

Overview
panel

Panels

Graphic panel
(tag specified
for alarm corPanel comrespondence
ment or name
blinking)
Alarm summary panel (plant,
station and
area correspondence)

Annunciator
message

Comments

Comment

User-defined
comment

*:

Control group
panel
Overview
panel

Specified data

Alarm-specified
colors
Alarm summary panel

Annunciator

Faceplate
window

Graphic panel

Other panels
Annunciators

Panels to be
Displayed*

Predefined
panel

Alarm-specified Faceplate
colors
window

Predefined
panel

Basically, user-definable. If omitted, display block element becomes display destination

(3) Details of Display Blocks

Communication Error
The background of a display block which fails to communicate with the FCS (the
communication link has been broken) while displaying data on the ICS will be shaded in
gray.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-17

 Function Blocks
a. Function blocks
The background color for this display block type represents the alarm status of the
assigned function block (tag). The color blinks to notify the operator of newly occurred
alarms. The display color depends upon the alarm colors defined by the builder. The tag
comment or number, PV, block mode, and alarm status are displayed as shown below.
FLOW CONTROL 2
50.0M3/H
MAN

LL

Process value (PV)

Block mode and alarm status
Tag name

02FIC003
12.0M3/H
MAN

Tag comment

NR

Process value (PV)

Block mode and alarm status

b. Annunciators
The display block displays a tag name or annunciator message and the on/off state of the
annunciator message or data of the specified tag.
The background color for this display block type is either green for normal operation or
red if an alarm is occurred. For newly occurred alarms, the background color blinks to
notify the operator of an alarm.
Tag name

AN11
0

LINE PRESS ABNL

50.0M3/H

Annunciator message on/off status (1 = on; 2 = off)

Annunciator message
Data of the specified tag

Panels
Various panels are assigned to this display block. A panel comment or name, and an
alarm status (for control group panels) are displayed.
a. Control group panels
When a control group panel is assigned to a display block, the background color of the
block is black. The panel comment or name, the data value of a user-defined or arbitrary
character string, tag marks are displayed. The color of each tag mark represents the
alarm status for that tag. The mark blinks to notify the operator of newly occurred
alarms that require acknowledgment.
.CG0001
50.0M3/H

C1-18

Panel name
Data of the specified tag

Tag mark

TANK A

Panel comment

FLOW CONTROL

Arbitrary character string

Tag mark

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

b. Overview, graphic, and alarm summary panels

The display block displays a panel comment or panel name and data of the specified tag.
The background color of the display blocks for these panels is either green for normal
operation, or red if an alarm has been occurred. The display block blinks to notify the
operator of newly occurred alarms that require no acknowledgment.
Graphic panels
When the blinks with an alarm is specified, the alarm is notified to the overview panel.
Alarm summary panels
Monitoring section can be specified on the basis of a plant or area.
OVERVIEW 1
50.0M3/H

Panel comment
Data of the specified tag

.OV0002

Panel name

ALARM 1

Panel comment

12.0%

Data of the specified tag

Panel name

%AL
12.0%

GRAPHIC
50.0M3/H

.GR0001

Data of the specified tag

Panel comment
Data of the specified tag

Panel name

c. Other panels
The color of the background is always white.
The display block displays a panel comment or panel name and data of the specified tag
or arbitrary character string.
.TG0001
FLOW TREND

.TP0001
50.0M3/H

Arbitrary character string

Panel name
Data of the specified tag

Panel comment

TREND
33.5M3/H

IM 33G2C20-11E

Panel name

Data of the specified tag

C1-19

 Comments
A comment of up to 16 characters may be assigned to this display block. All three lines
are used to display the specified comment. Characters appear in white.
Cont Mon Pnl

1.3.6

Specified comment

Acknowledgment of Alarms
When the function block, annunciator message, and control group panel are assigned in
the display block, an alarm can be acknowledge on the overview panel.
To acknowledge an alarm, select the alarm acknowledge key
keyboard.

1.3.7

on the operation

Panel Access

Figure C1.3.6

Panel Access

(1) Access to Panels

Selecting a display block with a cursor or touch screen operation displays the panel
which the user defined.
The following panels can be accessed. Also, half size panels and windows can be
defined.
Overview panel
Control group panel
Tuning panel
Graphic panel

C1-20

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Trend group panel

Trend point panel
Alarm summary panel
Operator guide message panel
(2) Access to Panels of Other CRTs
The operator can view on other CRTs a panel accessed from the overview panel on the
current CRT. This allows the user to monitor and control the detailed phases of the
process while viewing the entire process at the same time.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-21

1.4

Control Group Panel

Up to eight instrument faceplates can be displayed simultaneously on each control group
panel. This panel allows the user not only to monitor but also to operate the faceplates.
This lets the operator monitor data values and statuses of multiple instruments at the
same time.

Figure C1.4.1

1.4.1

Example of Control Group Panel

Panel Specifications
The following table lists control group panel specifications.
Table C1.4.1

Control Group Panel Specifications

Item

p
y
Capacity

Number of faceplates displayed

Total number of pages
Display elements
Panels displayed by touching an
instrument faceplate tag name /
comment

Specification
8 per page (a maximum of 4 faceplates per instrument faceplate trend)
Maximum of 800 pages / ICS
Various instrument faceplate types
Tuning panel for the relevant tag
See Section 1.5, Tuning Panel
1

The panel with the page number containing the

tag when a tuning panel or faceplate window is
on display

The panel with the page number containing the

first pen trace when a trend group panel is on
display

Display
Order of priority of panels displayed using the panel call key

The panel with the last previously displayed page

or the first page.
Displays no function blocks except the ones in an
operation group.
3

Operation group setting

C1-22

No operation is allowed on the function blocks set

up for monitoring only.

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.4.2

Panel Name

See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.

The user can freely define not only a system-specified panel name, but also a desired
panel name.
System-specified panel name
.CGxxxx

xxxx: page

User-defined panel name

Alphanumeric characters of up to 16 digits can be used.

1.4.3

Panel Call
This section describes how to call up the control group panel.

(1) Panel Call with the Panel Call Key

is selected, the control group panel actually
When the control group panel key
displayed is based on page priority order as follows:
1.

If a tuning panel or faceplate window is displayed, the control group panel page
containing the tag is retrieved.

2.

If a trend group panel is currently on display, the control group panel page
containing the tag represented by the first pen trace is retrieved.

3.

The last previously displayed control group panel or the first control group panel
page is retrieved.

(2) Panel Call with a Panel Name

System-specified panel name
.CGxxxx

xxxx: page,

.CGxxxx

-F (-F is omissible)

.CGxxxx

-H

.CGxxxx

-S

: space

User-defined panel name

(3) Panel Call with One-touch Operation
The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-23

1.4.4

Display Format
The control group panel uses instrument faceplates to display the control status of each
tag (function block) assigned to it. Each instrument faceplate corresponds to a function
block in the Field Control Station (FCS). The faceplate is a visual representation of a
function blocks control statuses.
Up to eight instrument faceplates can be displayed simultaneously on each control group
panel. This lets the operator monitor or change process values, setpoint values,
manipulated output values, and block modes while viewing two or more instrument
faceplates that may interact with each other.
The following figure shows the display format of the control group panel.

Figure C1.4.2

Display Format of Control Group Panel

(1) Parameter Display Area

This area displays the current PV, SV, MV for each displayed instrument faceplate. The
parameter display area is different depending upon the type of instrument faceplate.
(2) Instrument Faceplates
Display of instrument faceplates allows the operator to graphically monitor the control
status. Alarm statuses are displayed with sound and in color. The instrument faceplate
types are listed as follows.
Analog : PID control block, selector block
Discrete : motor, switch instrument block, batch status indicator block, contact input/
output
Trend : instrument faceplate trend

C1-24

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

All of these instrument faceplates are identical to those displayed on corresponding

faceplate windows. For details on each instrument faceplate, see Section 3.3 of Part B
Instrument Faceplates.
(3) Entry Window
The entry window is used to modify parameters such as SV and MV. To display the
entry window for data modification, select the softkey label area corresponding to the
desired instrument.
(4) Softkeys
The softkeys are used to call the entry window for the corresponding faceplate.
(5) Operation Marks

See Also
See Section 3.4 of Part D, Operation Mark Definition Panel.
The operation mark is used to notify the operator of the status, such as running, failure,
or maintenance. The color and comment (status description) of the operation mark can
be freely defined by the user. The user is also allowed to freely attach and remove the
operation mark on-line.

1.4.5

Alarm Occurrence and Acknowledgment

(1) Alarm Occurrence

The control group panel notifies the operator of the status of instruments as below along
with sound.
Color change and flashing of tag mark
Depending on the status of the tag, the color of the tag mark changes to the alarm
color which is defined by the builder.
The tag mark also starts flashing if an alarm is occurred.
Instrument faceplates
The faceplate indicates the status of the instrument, such as the block mode or alarm
status. Also, upon an alarm, the color of the bar changes to the alarm color specified
by the builder.
(2) Acknowledgment of Alarms
Selecting the alarm acknowledge key
the alarm and the tag mark stops flashing.

IM 33G2C20-11E

on the operation keyboard acknowledges

C1-25

1.4.6

Panel Access

Figure C1.4.3

Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel

To call a tuning panel, select the tag name or comment on the control group page by
using either the cursor keys or touch targets.

Figure C1.4.4

Access to Tuning Panel

(2) Access to a Higher Order Panel

If the user has specified it, selecting the higher order panel key
operation keyboard accesses the predefined higher order panel.

C1-26

on the

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.5

Tuning Panel
A tuning panel displays all of the attributes and statuses of each instrument. It allows for
not only monitoring but also modification of modes and parameters.

Figure C1.5.1

1.5.1

Example of Tuning Panel

Types of Faceplate
The instrument faceplate types that can be depicted on a tuning panel are listed as
follows.
Analog :

PID control block, selector block

Discrete :

motor, switch instrument block, batch status indicator block, contact

input/output

Trend :

instrument faceplate trend

All of these instrument faceplates are identical to those displayed on corresponding

faceplate windows. For details on each instrument faceplate, see Section 3.3 of Part B
Instrument Faceplates.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-27

1.5.2

Panel Specifications
The following table lists tuning panel specifications.
Table C1.5.1

Tuning Panel Specifications

Item

p
y
Capacity

Number of function blocks

displayed
Total number of pages
Display elements
Panel access

Display

Data
display

Tuning
trend

Displayed data
Indication of
which parameters can be
changed
Display colors for
graphs

One per page

Same as the number of function blocks (tags)
Instrument faceplate, various parameters, tuning trend
Status display panel (when sequence tables for example are
defined)
See Chapter 2 of Part D, Control Status Report Dis
play
Depending upon the type of faceplate
Parameters with an equal sign ( = ) can be changed.
Parameters with a colon ( : ) cannot be changed.
1

Process value (PV), computed value (CPV), feedback

input data (FV): Cyan

Setpoint value (SV), switch position (SW): White

Manipulated output value (MV): Magenta

Through the tuning trend window
3

Method of displaying graphs

Operation group setting

1.5.3

Specification

See Section 2.5, Tuning Trend Window

Displays no function blocks except the ones in an operation
group.
No operation is allowed on the function blocks set up for
monitoring only.

Panel Name

See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.

The panel name corresponds to the tag names of an instrument faceplate.

1.5.4

Panel Call
This section describes how to call up the tuning panel.

(1) Panel Call with the Panel Call Key

When the tuning panel key
is selected, the tuning panel actually displayed is
based on page priority order as follows:
1. If a faceplate window is displayed, the tuning panel for the tag is retrieved.

C1-28

2.

If a trend group panel is on display, then the tuning panel for the function block
(tag) of the identified pen trace, is retrieved.

3.

The last previously displayed tuning panel is retrieved.

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

(2) Panel Call with a Panel Name

The panel name of the tuning panel corresponds to the tag name.
Tag name

-F (-F is omissible)

Tag name

-H

Tag name

-S

: space

The faceplate window is displayed by specifying the following:

Tag name
Tag name

-W

(3) Panel Call with One-touch Operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

1.5.5

Display Format
The tuning panel is an operation panel that shows the control status of each function
block (such as the regulatory control or sequence control block) in the control station.
This panel is also used to display adjust or set the current values of various setpoints and
control parameters. The tuning panel comprises various parameters, an instrument
faceplate, and the tuning trend window.
The following figure shows the display format of the tuning panel.

Figure C1.5.2

Display Format of Tuning Panel

(1) Parameters
This area displays the current parameters for each displayed instrument faceplate. The
parameters are different depending upon the type of instrument faceplate.
(2) Tuning Trend Window
For details, see Section 2.5, Tuning Trend Window.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-29

(3) Operation Mark

The operation mark is used to notify the operator of a status, such as running, failure, or
maintenance. The color and comment (status description) of the operation mark are
predefined by the user. The user is allowed to freely attach and remove the operation
mark in this panel even if the plant operation is on-line. A security function with the
keylock mode switch is available to restrict the addition or removal of operation marks.
(4) Entry Window
The entry window is used to modify parameters. To display the entry window, select the
softkey label area.

1.5.6

Softkeys
The softkeys are used to set the modes of each instrument to the related modes. For
details on their function, see the Field Control Station Function Manual (IM33G3C1011E).

(1) Softkeys
PRD

Figure C1.5.3
[PRD] :

CAL

OPEMARK

Example of Softkeys

Sets the primary direct mode. Selecting this displays PRD on the
faceplate. Selecting PRD displays a confirmation window. To reset the
mode to the original, enter the name of the mode in the entry window.

Figure C1.5.4

C1-30

AOF

Primary Direct Indication Displayed on Instrument Faceplate

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Figure C1.5.5
[AOF] :

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Confirmation Window

Sets the alarm off mode (AOF), that is the mode to suppress the alarm.
Selecting this displays AOF in the instrument faceplate and turns the tag
mark blue. Selecting AOF displays a confirmation window. To reset the
mode to the original, enter the name of the mode in the entry window.

Figure C1.5.6

AOF Displayed on Instrument Faceplate

Figure C1.5.7

Example of Confirmation Window

C1-31

[CAL] :

C1-32

Sets the CAL mode. Selecting this displays CAL on the tuning panel
and the instrument faceplate. Furthermore, on the instrument faceplate, the
color of the bar indicating the process value turns cyan. Selecting CAL
displays a confirmation window. To reset the mode to the original, enter
the name of the mode in the entry window.

Figure C1.5.8

Example of CAL Displayed on Instrument Faceplate

Figure C1.5.9

Example of Confirmation Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

[OPEMARK] : Calls the operation mark menu window where the operator can attach or
remove the operation mark.

Figure C1.5.10 Example of Operation Mark Menu Window

(2) Softkeys for Calling the Status Display Panel
The tuning panel of a function block which has a status display panel has softkeys a
little different from the general tuning panels.
The following figure shows an example of softkeys for a sequence table block.
PRD

Figure C1.5.11

AOF

CAL

OPEMARK

Softkeys for a Sequence Table Block

[SEQ TBL] : switches to the sequence table status display panel.

See Also
See Section 2.3 of Part D, Sequence Table Status Display Panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-33

1.5.7

Panel Access

Figure C1.5.12 Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel
For a sequence table block, sequence logic diagram block, SFC block or SEBOL block,
selecting the softkey accesses the user to a status display panel.
(2) Access to a Higher Order Panel
The tuning panel having been accessed from the control group panel is returned to the
control group panel.
(3) Page Change
The page of a tuning panel is changed in the order defined in the control group panel.
For instrument faceplates not assigned in the control group panel, page changing is not
executed.

C1-34

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.6

Trend Group Panel

See Also
See Section 1.7, Trend Point Panel and Chapter 6, Trend Recording.

A trend group panel is used to record time series changes to various instrument faceplate
data, and to display the data graphically. Up to eight process data items can be displayed
simultaneously.

Figure C1.6.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Trend Group Panel

C1-35

1.6.1

Panel Specifications
The following table lists trend group panel specifications.
Table C1.6.1

Trend Group Panel Specifications

Item

Capacity

Specification

Number of pen traces

displayed

8 / page (displayed on the same coordinates)

Total number of pages

Maximum of 800 (50 blocks) ; 320 pages (20 blocks) are used
with the own ICS.

Display elements

Tag name, date item, tag comment

Numerical data, engineering unit

Trend graph

Faceplate window (must be called)

5 Trend operation window (must be called)

Panel access
Trend point panel
Displayed data
Numerical data (PV, SV, MV, etc.)
Reference
Current time
time of display

Displayed
element
Displayed
graph

Display

Numerical data (corresponding to the displayed data)

1

Analog trend graph

Discrete trend graph

Rotary trend recording: Displays the current time to the right of

the data.

Trend
graph
Display style

Batch trend recording: Displays the starting time for acquisition

to the left of the data.
Displays analog data with the data span coordinated in the
range of 0 to 100% on the data axis and displays discrete data
(ON / OFF switches, etc.) in their fixed positions.

Data sampling
1 sec, 10 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, and 10 min
period
The number of pages retained: Up to 30 / ICS
Retention of display

1.6.2

Retains the information on magnification / movement along the

data axis, magnification along the time axis, turning pen traces
on or off, and display of reference patterns.

Panel Name
See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.
The user can freely define not only a system-specified panel name, but also a desired
panel name.
System-specified panel name
.TGxxxx

xxxx: page

User-defined panel name

Alphanumeric characters of up to 16 digits can be used.

1.6.3

Panel Call
This section describes how to call up the trend group panel.

(1) Panel Call with the Panel Call Key

When the trend group panel key
is selected, the trend group panel actually
displayed is based on page priority order as follows:
C1-36

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.

If a faceplate window is on display, the trend group panel with the lowest page
number containing the tag is retrieved.
However, the panel access to the trend group panel from the faceplate window
depends on the trend pen assignment of the own station. For a tag contained in
other station trend, this panel accessing cannot be activated automatically. If any
trend pens of other station trend have been assigned in the own station pen
assignment, the corresponding trend group panel is accessed.

2.

If a control group panel is displayed, then the trend group panel with the lowest
page number containing the tag furthermost on the left of the control group panel
is retrieved.

3.

The last previously displayed trend group panel page is retrieved.

(2) Panel Call with a Panel Name

System-specified panel name
.TGxxxx

xxxx: page,

.TGxxxx

-F (-F is omissible)

.TGxxxx

-H

.TGxxxx

-S

: space

User-defined panel name

(3) Panel Call with One-touch Operation
The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

1.6.4

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the trend group panel.

Figure C1.6.2
IM 33G2C20-11E

Display Format of Trend Group Panel

C1-37

(1) Trend Graph

Figure C1.6.3

Display Format of Trend Graph

Trend graph
Displays a trend graph of the assigned data. Up to eight data can be depicted. Graphs are
displayed in a different color for each data.
Pen 1: red
Pen 2: green
Pen 3: yellow
Pen 4: magenta
Pen 5: cyan
Pen 6: white
Pen 7: pink
Pen 8: yellow green
There are the following trend graph types displayed on a trend group panel.
Analog trend graph: This graph displays analog data with the span coordinated
within the range of 0 to 100% on the data axis.

C1-38

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Discrete trend graph: This graph displays each ON/OFF data item in steps of 6% of
the vertical span in a fixed position on the trend graph for an
ON/OFF switch.
Time axis
Indicates the axis at the time when data are acquired. The time on this axis changes
depending upon the motion of the trend graph.
Color: blue
Time
Time when data are acquired.
Color: white
Indication of time change or power failure
This element is displayed when the time is changed or a power failure occurs after data
acquisition.
Color: white
Data axis
Data axis for displaying a trend graph. Five graph display ranges are prepared.
Color: blue
Data axis scale indication
Scale of the data axis. The displayed scale is the scale of the pen selected with the
[ PEN SELn ] softkey.
Color: the color of the pen selected
Date and time acquired
The time when the data are currently being acquired.
Color: white
Index mark
Displays the data of the time indicated by the index mark. When the operator moves the
index mark, the time axis in cyan is also moved and the data of the time indicated by the
index mark is displayed for numerical data.
Color: cyan
Acquisition in progress
This mark indicates that data acquisition is in progress. It appears while data are being
acquired.
Color: cyan

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-39

TIP
Upon power failure, the recovery start and end times are acquired and displayed as
missing data.
Data display span
Indicates span of the data display. To modify the span, use the softkeys.
11 Data axis scroll bar
The data axis is valid for all trend group graphs as well as the individual graphs of each
pen. Use the scroll bar to scroll the entire graph. To scroll the individual graph of each
pen, use the corresponding softkey. This means that if the entire graph is scrolled 10%,
and the first pen trace is also scrolled 10%, the first pen trace is actually scrolled 20%.
The operator can scroll the display either by using the scroll keys, or by selecting the
data axis. The point on the data axis that is touched becomes the higher limit of the
display, scrolling the display area.

Time axis scroll bar

Use this bar to scroll the time axis.
All the trend group graphs (a group of eight pens) are scrolled.
12

(2) Numerical Data

Figure C1.6.4

C1-40

Display Format of Numerical Data

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Pen number
Pen number of the data to be displayed. It is displayed in the same color as the trend
graph.
Tag name
Displays the tag name and data item to be displayed on the trend graph.
Color: white
Tag comment
Displays a tag comment corresponding to the tag name .
Color: white
Data
Displays data for the time indicated by the index mark.
The tag name and data item specified in are displayed.
Color: white
Data display span
Displays the span of the data display. The same as item in section (1) above.

1.6.5

Softkeys
The following figures show the softkeys on the trend group panel.
FUNCTION

1H

PAUSE

Default setting

PEN SEL1

PEN ON

BIAS

BIAS

After switching

Figure C1.6.5

Examples of Softkeys

[FUNCTION] : Calls up the trend operation window.

[
nH] : Changes the display time width on the time axis.
nM] Selecting the [
nH] and [
nM] softkey magnifies or reduces the trend
[
graph along the time axis on a trend group basis. Magnifications of 1x, 2X,
or 4X of the time axis span can be selected in turn.
(Example)
If the time axis span is magnified at a full scale of 60 minutes two times
(2X), the graph is displayed with the time axis span of 120 minutes.
1H: 14:20-14:30-14:40-14:50-15:00-15:10-15:20
2H: 13:20-13:40-14:00-14:20-14:40-15:00-15:20

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-41

14:20

1H

Figure C1.6.6

Table C1.6.2

15:20

13:20

2H

15:20

Example of Magnification along the Time Axis

Time Axis Magnification of a Trend Graph

Display Time Scan

Sampling
Samp
i g Period

Initial Value

2 Times

4 Times

6 min

12 min

24 min

1 sec
10 sec

1 hr

2 hr

4 hr

1 min

6 hr

12 hr

24 hr

2 min

12 hr

24 hr

48 hr

5 min

30 hr

60 hr

120 hr

10 min

60 hr

120 hr

240 hr

Reference point of display

Magnification or reduction is implemented with the reference point at the edge of the
graph furthermost to the right (the latest time).
[

n ] : Changes the display width along the data axis.

Selecting the [
n] softkey magnifies or reduces the trend graph display
along the data axis. Select the desired magnification of either X1, X2, X5, or
X10, as it appears in turn. According to the selection, the scale display of the
data axis is also changed. An entire trend graph (a group of eight pen traces)
can be magnified or reduced. An individual pen trace (a single recording
point) can also be magnified or reduced.
This means that if the entire graph is magnified two times, and any one of
the pen traces is also magnified two times, then the resulting magnification
of the pen trace is four times the original.
(Example) If the data axis has a 0 to 100% span, the axis changes with the
reference point at 50% of the span, as shown in the following figure.
1:
0 to 100 %
2:
25 to 75 %
5:
40 to 60 %
10:
45 to 55 %
100%

Figure C1.6.7

C1-42

0%

75%

25%

Example of Magnification along the Data Axis

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Reference point of display

Magnification or reduction is implemented with the reference point at the center of the
data axis.
] / [
[
] : Moves the index mark.
[PAUSE] :

Temporarily pauses/restarts updating of the graphic display.

Data acquisition does not stop during a pause.
Scrolling the trend graph to an earlier time automatically sets up
dating in the pause mode. When the pause is cancelled, the
reference point of the display automatically returns to the current
time.

[/] :

Alternates between the two softkey modes.

[PEN SELn] :

The operator can specify whether or not to display the trend graph
(to turn the pen trace on or off) using the [PEN ON] and [PEN
OFF] softkeys for the pen trace selected with the [PEN SELn]
softkey.
The scale of the pen selected here is displayed as the scale display
of the data axis.

[PEN ON] / [PEN OFF]: Use these keys to select whether to display a trend graph.
What can be displayed is a trend graph selected with [PEN
SELn].
[BIAS],[BIAS]: Moves the display area of the data axis in increments of 10%.
To scroll the entire graph, use the scroll bar.

1.6.6

Trend Operation Window

Selecting the [FUNCTION] key displays the trend operation window.

Figure C1.6.8

IM 33G2C20-11E

Trend Operation Window 1

C1-43

Figure C1.6.9
[DSP_INIT]:

Trend Operation Window 2

Initializes the panel state.

[P_NO ON] / [P_NO OFF]: Displays the pen numbers on the trend graphs. Selecting
[P_NO OFF] in the trend operation window changes the
indication to [P_NO ON] and the pen numbers appear on
the trend graphs.

Figure C1.6.10 Example of Pen Numbers Show in the Window

C1-44

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

[START]:

Starts acquisition of batch trend data. For rotary trend recording, this
button is not provided.
Selecting [START] displays a confirmation window.

Figure C1.6.11
[STOP]:

Confirmation Window

Stops trend data acquisition. Selecting [STOP] displays a confirmation

window.

Figure C1.6.12 Confirmation Window

[CONTINUE]: Restarts trend data acquisition. Selecting [CONTINUE] displays a
confirmation window.

Figure C1.6.13 Confirmation Window

[GRP_SAVE]: Saves trend data currently displayed on a trend group basis. Selecting
[GRP_SAVE] displays a confirmation window.
The following figure shows the confirmation window when data are
saved in group 49.

Figure C1.6.14 Example of Confirmation Window

[BLK_SAVE]: Saves trend data currently displayed on a trend block basis. Selecting
[BLK_SAVE] displays a confirmation window.
The following figure shows the confirmation window when data are
saved in block 4.

Figure C1.6.15 Example of Confirmation Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-45

1.6.7

Panel Access

Figure C1.6.16 Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel
To access a panel touch the related tag name or tag comment on the screen.
(2) Faceplate Window
By selecting the touch target just to the right of the data item of a desired pen trace (for
a function block or tag), the operator can call up a faceplate window.
(3) Access to the Higher Order Panel
If the user has already specified such, selecting the higher order panel key
the operation keyboard accesses the predefined higher order panel.

C1-46

on

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.7

Trend Point Panel

See Also
See Section 1.6, Trend Group Panel and Chapter 6, Trend Recording.

A trend point panel displays one of the eight process data items assigned to a trend
group panel. It records time series changes in a tags data and displays the data on a
trend graph. This panel is suited for monitoring the plant status.

Figure C1.7.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Trend Point Panel

C1-47

1.7.1

Panel Specifications
The following table lists trend point panel specifications.
Table C1.7.1

Trend Point Panel Specifications

Item

p
y
Capacity

Specification

Number of pen traces

displayed
Total number of pages

Display elements

1 / page (2 / page when set with a reference pattern)

Maximum of 6400
1 Tag name, date item, tag comment
2

Numerical data

Trend graph

Faceplate window (must be called)

Numerical data (PV, SV, MV, etc.)

4

Panel access
Displayed data
Reference
Current time
time of display
Displayed
element
Displayed
graph

Numerical data (corresponding to the displayed data)

1 Analog trend graph
2 Discrete trend graph

Uses two graphs, one for display of all data and the other for
magnified data.

Display

Rotary trend recording: Displays the current time to the right of

the data.

Trend
graph
Display style

Batch trend recording: Displays the starting time for acquisition

to the left of the data.
Displays analog data with the data span coordinated in the
range of 0 to 100% on the data axis and displays discrete data
(ON / OFF switch, etc.) in the fixed position.
Graphs set with reference patterns always display them together.

Data sampling
1 sec, 10 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, and 10 min
period
The number of pages retained: Up to 30 / ICS
Retention of display

1.7.2

Retains the information on magnification / movement along the

data axis, magnification along the time axis, and turning pen
traces on or off.

Panel Name

See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.

The user can freely define not only a system-specified panel name, but also a desired
panel name.
System-specified panel name
.TPxxxx

xxxx: page

User-defined panel name

Alphanumeric characters of up to 16 digits can be used.

TIP
The use of user-defined names for panels must be specified in a custom order.

C1-48

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.7.3

Panel Call
This section describes how to call up the trend point panel.

(1)Panel Call from the Trend Group Panel

The desired trend point panel is retrieved by selecting the appropriate touch target on the
trend group panel.
(2) Panel Call with a Panel Name
System-specified panel name
.TPxxxx

xxxx: page,

.TPxxxx

-F

.TPxxxx

-H

.TPxxxx

-S

: space

(-F is omissible)

User-defined panel name

(3) Panel Call with One-touch Operation
The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

1.7.4

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the trend point panel.

Figure C1.7.2

Display Format of Trend Point Panel

The display format of trend point panels is almost identical to that of trend group panels.
For details, refer to the display format of trend group panels.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-49

(1) Display Area for All Data

This area displays all the trend graphs. Only monitoring is possible in this display area.
Operations cannot be carried out.

Figure C1.7.3

Display Format of Display Area for All Data

Unlike other areas, this area does not display a polyline graph but a graph which plots
the maximum and minimum values within a specified interval. It does not always
provide a continuous graph.

: Acquired data (magnified display)

1

and

: Acquired data sampling time

: Sampling interval for acquisition at

: Sampling interval for acquisition at

Sampling data acquired at are plotted as dots in the display area for all data since all
the values of the sampled data within the specified interval are the same.
Sampling data acquired at are plotted as a vertical line between the maximum and
minimum values within the specified interval in the display area for all data, since the
sampling data within the interval varies.

C1-50

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

(2) Display Area for Magnified Data

This area displays a magnified section of display area for all data.

Figure C1.7.4

Display Format of Display Area for Magnified Data

There are the following trend graph types displayed on the display area for magnified
data same as the trend point panel.
Analog trend graph: This graph type displays acquired data with the span coordinated within the range of 0 to 100 percent on the data axis.
Discrete trend graph: This graph displays each ON/OFF data item in a six percent
segment of the span in a fixed position on the trend graph for
an ON/OFF switch.
(3) Numerical Data
This area displays data such as the tag name, data item, and instantaneous value. The
data at the time indicated by the index marker are displayed.
Tag name

Pen number

Data item

1 02FIC007 PV
Flow control 7
50 M3/H

Tag comment
Engineering unit
0-

100

Data value

Figure C1.7.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

Data display span

Display Format of Numerical Data

C1-51

1.7.5

Softkeys
The following figures show the softkeys on the trend point panel.
INITIALZ

1H

PAUSE

Default setting
PEN SEL1

PEN ON

BIAS

BIAS

After switching

Figure C1.7.6

Examples of Softkeys

The softkeys of a trend point panel are identical with those of a trend group panel. For
details on softkeys, see Subsection 1.6, Trend Group Panel.

TIP
This panel does not allow for the starting/stopping of data acquisition and storing of
acquired data. These operations must be done on a trend group panel since it is a higher
order panel.

1.7.6

Panel Access

Figure C1.7.7

Panel Access

(1) Faceplate Window

By selecting the touch target just to the right of the data item of a desired pen trace (for
a function block or tag), the operator can call up a faceplate window.
(2) Access to the Higher Order Panel
Selecting the higher order panel key
on the operation keyboard accesses the
trend group panel corresponding to the pen which is currently displayed.
(3) Access to the Tuning Panel
Selecting the tuning panel key
while the trend point panel is displayed accesses
the tuning panel corresponding to the tag which is displayed on the trend point panel.

C1-52

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.8

Operator Guide Message Panel

See Also
See Subsection 2.2.7 of Part B, Operator Guide Message Window.

An operator guide message panel displays messages predefined by the user in the order
in which they are occurred. This panel is helpful when notifying the operator of the
progress of control and operation since the user can freely define the message. Upon
message occurrence, the LED of the operator guide message panel key
with an audible alarm, notifying the operator of a message.

Figure C1.8.1

1.8.1

blinks

Example of Operator Guide Message Panel

Types of Message
There are the following message types.
Guide Messages
:These messages require only the operators acknowledgment. Used in ordinary
operations.
Interactive Messages
:These messages require that the acknowledged result is recognized by the control
station. For details on interactive messages, see the SEBOL Function Manual (IM
33G3C20-11E).

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-53

1.8.2

Panel Specifications
The following table lists operator guide message panel specifications.
Table C1.8.1

Operator Guide Message Panel Specifications

Item

Capacity

Specification

Number of messages displayed

Up to 10 / page

Total number of
messages

40 / ICS

Display
elements

Display order number

Operator guide message mark

Date and time of operator guide message occurrence

Operator guide message

User-defined panels
Operator guide messages
In time series order starting with the latest message
When there are more than 40 messages, they are deleted starting with
the earliest that was acknowledged ; or
4

Panel access
Displayed data
Order of display
Display
Retention of
messages
Number of characters permitted
for a message
Colors for
messages

1.8.3

If none of the messages have been acknowledged, they are deleted

starting with the earliest ones.
1

Guide message: Up to 70 characters on one line

Interactive message: Up to seven lines but 200 characters or fewer

User-definable

Panel Name

See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.

Only system-specified panel name is available. The user cannot define the name.

1.8.4

Panel Call
This section describes how to call up the operator guide message panel.
Upon occurrence of an operator guide message, a buzzer sounds and an operator guide
message mark appears in the system message area.

Figure C1.8.2

System Message Area upon Message Occurrence

The flashing LED of the operator guide message panel key indicates that there are
unacknowledged messages.
(1) Panel Call with the Panel Call Key
Selecting the operator guide message panel key
causes messages to be
displayed in order of occurrence with the latest message on the top line.

C1-54

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

(2) Panel Call with a Panel Name

.OG
.OG

-F (-F is omissible)

.OG

-H

.OG

-S

: space

(3) Panel Call with One-touch Operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

1.8.5

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the operator guide message panel.

Figure C1.8.3

Display Format of Operator Guide Message Panel

Date and time of operator guide message occurrence

Display order number

2 09.19 16:18:33
Temperature too high in the reactor!
Operator guide message mark
(for guide message)

Operator guide message

Example of Guide Message Display

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-55

Date and time of operator guide message occurrence

Tag name (SEBOL/SFC block, unit instrument)

Dialog name

Display order number

09.19 16:18:14
SBP201 : Stop
Reactor operating condition abnormal!
Pressure and temperature beyond the limits!
PIC100
11kpa
Spec :
3.5kpa
TIC200
125 C
Spec : 120.0 C

Operator guide
message

Operator guide message mark

(for interactive message)

Example of interactive Message Display

The operator guide message panel displays the items described below.
Display order number
1 to 40
Color: white (fixed)
Operator guide message mark
A system-specified mark which indicates that an occurred message is an operator
guide message. The color of the mark can be defined by the user. This mark is
displayed at the beginning of the message. It blinks until acknowledged.
Date and time of operator guide message occurrence
Indicates the time and date when a message is occurred. The display format is
common to the system. It can be defined by the user.
Color: white (fixed)
Operator guide message
Notifies the operator of a system message with an audible alarm.
Color: User-defined color
Number of messages on the current panel / Number of messages occurred
The number of messages on the current panel appears as a numerator. The number of
messages occurred appears as a denominator.

C1-56

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.8.6

Softkeys
The following figure shows the softkeys on the operator guide message panel.
ACK_W

DELETE

PAUSE

Figure C1.8.4 Softkeys

[ACK_W] : Calls up the operator guide message window to acknowledge and delete an
operator guide message.

See Also
See Subsection 2.2.7, Operator Guide Message Window.

[DELETE] : Deletes the acknowledged operator guide message on the panel.

Use the alarm acknowledge key
on the operation keyboard or use
the operator guide message window to acknowledge the message.
[PAUSE] :

1.8.7

Pauses updating of the display of an operator guide message for five

seconds. This function is canceled automatically after 5 seconds. Operator
guide messages occurred during the pause appear upon resumption of the
display.

Acknowledgment of Messages
There are the following types of acknowledgment operations for the operator guide
message panel: group acknowledgment and individual acknowledgment. When
generating the system, the user specifies either of the operations with the ICS builder.
Note that the specification is reflected in other messages, such as process messages,
system alarm messages, and computer messages, as well.
In case of the acknowledgment of a guide message, the same message on the same ICS
can be acknowledged entirely by operation one time regardless of presence of the
display.
For the interactive message, only the individual acknowledgment can be applied.
For details on acknowledgment, see Section 3.3, Acknowledgment of Messages.

TIP
An interactive message is acknowledged in the operator guide message window; there is
no operation in the operator guide message panel.

1.8.8

Change of Display

(1) Scroll Operation

If all the messages cannot be contained on a single page, More is displayed in the
bottom right corner of the panel. The messages can be scrolled by the scroll operation.
(2) Page Change
Although the scroll operation changes messages one by one, the page change operation
changes the display on a page basis (20 messages).

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-57

1.8.9

Panel Access

Figure C1.8.5

Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel

Access to the user-defined panel
The user-defined panel is accessed.
(2) Access to Panels of Other CRTs
The operator can display a panel retrieved from the operator guide message panel on
other CRTs, leaving the operator guide message panel displayed on the CRT. The
retrieved panel can be any user-defined panel. This function must be defined in the
builder.

C1-58

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.9

Graphic Panel
A graphic panel is a custom, graphical representation of a plant or control system used
to help monitor and operate the plant. On this panel, the operator can draw graphics
freehand and view data. In addition to these display related functions, it is also possible
for the operator to execute such functions that open windows, call panels, or run
programs by using push buttons or touch targets. For more information, see Chapter 7,
Graphics.

Figure C1.9.1

1.9.1

Example of Graphic Panel

Panel Call
This section describes how to call up the graphic panel.

(1) Panel Call with the Panel Call Key

Selecting the graphic panel key
retrieves the last graphic panel that the
operator has viewed or the first page of the panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-59

(2) Panel Call with a Panel Name

System-specified panel name
Unlike other panels, graphic panels have various sizes. The following table lists the
panel call commands for each size.
Table C1.9.1

Panel Call Commands

Panel size

Call command

Half size

.GRxxxx -H

Full size (Detail size)

.GRxxxx

1.5 times larger

.GRxxxx

Quad size

.GRxxxx

4 times width

.GRxxxx

4 times height

.GRxxxx

The panel of the same size as the one already

opened

.GRxxxx -S

Note: xxxx: page

: space

User-defined panel name

Entering the user-defined panel name displays the related graphic panel.
(3) Panel Call with One-touch Operation
The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

1.9.2

Panel Access
The graphic panel allows the operator to access panels or windows which the user
specifies.

Figure C1.9.2

C1-60

Panel Access

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.10 Alarm Summary Panel

See Also
See Chapter 4, Alarm Processing.

An alarm summary panel displays process alarms occurred in an operation group

(including annunciator messages). Alarms are displayed in the order in which they
occurred.

Figure C1.10.1 Examples of Alarm Summary Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-61

1.10.1 Panel Specifications

The following table lists alarm summary panel specifications.
Table C1.10.1 Alarm Summary Panel Specifications
Item

Capacity
p
y

Specification

Number of
alarms
displayed

20 / panel

Total number of
alarms

200 / ICS
1

Display
elements

Display

Panel access
Displayed data
Order of display
Retention of
alarm

Alarm action

Display order number

Tag mark

Date and time of alarm occurrence

Tag name/tag comment or

Alarm status

Current PV (displayed with the [CURRENT] key)

User-defined higher order panel

Control group panel containing function blocks with alarms

Annunciator message

Process alarm
In time series order starting with the latest alarm
Deletes alarms starting with the earliest that was acknowledged when
the number of alarms exceeds 200.
For function blocks (tags) associated with alarms before the ICS has
been started, no alarms are displayed.
Complies with the order of priority of function blocks.

1.10.2 Panel Name

See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.

Only system-specified panel name is available. The user cannot define the name.

1.10.3 Panel Call

This section describes how to call up the alarm summary panel. Upon alarm occurrence,
a message that an alarm has been occurred is displayed in the system message area
along with an alarm mark.

Figure C1.10.2 System Message Area upon Alarm Occurrence

The flashing LED of the alarm summary panel key
unacknowledged alarms.

indicates that there are

(1) Panel Call with the Panel Call Key

Select the alarm summary panel key
latest message on the top line.
C1-62

causes messages to be displayed with the

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

(2) Panel Call with a Panel Name

.AL
.AL

-F (-F is omissible)

.AL

-H

.AL

-S

: space

(3) Panel Call with One-touch Operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

1.10.4 Display Format

The following figure shows the display format of the alarm summary panel.

Figure C1.10.3 Display Format of Alarm Summary Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-63

Current alarm status

Tag mark

3 Mar. 17 18:24:34 02FIC008

Display order number

Flow Control 8

LO

33.0M3/H

NR

Tag name

Date and time of

alarm message occurrence

Alarm status

Tag comment

Current PV

Current alarm status

Tag mark

2 Mar. 17 18:24:54 02FIC008

Display order number

Flow Control 8

LO RECOVER

33.0M3/H

NR

Tag name

Date and time of

alarm message occurrence

Tag comment

Alarm status

Current PV

A blank tag mark () indicates that the alarm status has recovered to the normal (NR)
state.
Tag mark

5Mar. 17 18:23:47 Plfy tnk lvl err

ALM

Display order number

Date and time of
alarm message occurrence

Annunciator message

Alarm status

The information displayed on an alarm summary panel for each alarm is described
below.
Display order number
1 to 200
Color: white (fixed)
Tag mark
Displays alarm status in an alarm color.
Date and time of alarm message occurrence
Indicates the time and date when an alarm message is occurred. The display format is
common to the system. It can be defined by the user.
Color: white (fixed)
Tag name
Name of the tag where the alarm was occurred.
Color: white (fixed)
Tag comment
Comment of the tag where the alarm was occurred.
Color: white (fixed)

C1-64

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Alarm status
Displays the current alarm status.
Color: white (fixed)
Current PV
Displays the current PV in an engineering unit when [CURRENT] is selected.
Color: white (fixed)
Number of alarms on the current panel / Number of alarms occurred
Displays number of alarms on the current panel and number of alarms occurred as a
denominator.
For annunciator messages, instead of the tag name and tag comment , an
annunciator message is displayed.

1.10.5 Softkeys
The softkey labels of the alarm summary panel are different depending upon the alarm
acknowledgment method.
ALL

CURRENT

IMPORTAN

PAUSE

Figure C1.10.4 Softkeys for Group Acknowledgment

ALL

IMPORTAN

ACK_W

CURRENT

PAUSE

Figure C1.10.5 Softkeys for Individual Acknowledgment

[ALL] :

Displays all occurred messages including process alarm messages and

annunciator messages.

[IMPORTAN] : Displays high priority alarms only.

[CURRENT] : Current process values in the engineering units of the analog data in all
occurred alarms. Also displays the alarm status at that time.
[PAUSE] :

Pauses updating of the display of an alarm message for five seconds.

This function is canceled automatically after 5 seconds. Alarm messages
occurred during the pause appear upon resumption of the display.

[ACK_W] :

Calls up the process window to acknowledge and delete an alarm

message.

See Also
See Subsection 2.2.5, Process Alarm Window.

TIP
In the system maintenance functions, the user can select messages to be displayed in
their order of priority on the alarm summary panel.

See Also
See Section 1.6 of Part D, Own Station Status Display Panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-65

1.10.6 Acknowledgment of Messages

There are the following types of acknowledgment operations for the alarm summary
panel: group acknowledgment and individual acknowledgment. When generating the
system, the user specifies either of the operations with the ICS builder. Note that the
specification is reflected in other messages such as system alarm messages and operator
guide messages, as well.
Alarm messages for the same instrument will be group acknowledged at one time
including those not shown on the panel. Acknowledged alarm messages that have
returned to normal will be deleted, leaving just messages in alarm only.
For details on acknowledgment, see Section 3.3, Acknowledgment of Messages.

1.10.7 Display of Messages

(1) Displaying Rewarning Alarms
Rewarning alarms are those alarms marked with an exclamation point (!). Rewarning
alarms appear on the alarm summary panel as defined in the alarm action table.
Rewarning alarms appear for those alarms with the highest precedence when more than
one alarm has been occurred in the same function block.
Only one rewarning alarm is displayed for each function block. When subsequent rewarning alarms occur, the preceding one is erased.
(2) Selective Display
When the one-touch operation function is used, the user can retrieve and display the
related alarms by specifying the plant name, station name, and area name.
(Example) When accessing an alarm summary panel which displays only the alarm
messages of AREA1 (area name), if the following is assigned to a function key, the
alarm summary panel which displays the corresponding alarm message is accessed by
selecting the corresponding key.
O . AL AREA1
: space

1.10.8 Change of Display

(1) Scroll Operation
If all the messages cannot be contained on a single page, More is displayed in the
bottom right corner of the panel. The messages can be scrolled by the scroll operation.
(2) Page Change
Although the scroll operation changes messages one by one, the page change operation
changes the display on a page basis (20 messages).

C1-66

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.10.9 Panel Access

Figure C1.10.6 Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel
Access to the user-defined panel
The user-defined panel is accessed.
Access to control group panels including tags where alarms are occurred.
Unless the accessed panel is user-defined, control group panels, including tags where
alarms are occurred, are accessed. If the tags are not assigned to the control group
panel, the tuning panels are accessed.
(2) Access to Panels of Other CRTs
The operator can display a panel retrieved from the alarm summary panel on other
CRTs, leaving the alarm summary panel displayed on the CRT. The retrieved panel can
be other panel such as control group panel, tuning panel. This function must be defined
in the builder.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-67

1.11 System Alarm Message Panel

A system alarm message panel notifies the operator of an abnormality in system
hardware or a communication error.

Figure C1.11.1

Examples of System Alarm Message Panel

For details on the system alarm message panel, see Section 1.4 of Part D, System
Alarm Message Panel.

C1-68

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.12 Computer Message Summary Panel

This panel displays messages form the computer on the ICS.

See Also
See Section 2.2.8, Computer Message Window.

Figure C1.12.1 Examples of Computer Message Summary Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-69

1.12.1 Panel Specifications

The following table lists computer message summary panel specifications.
Table C1.12.1 Computer Message Summary Panel Specifications
Item
Capacity

Specification

Number of messages displayed

20 messages/panel

Total number of messages

200 messages/ICS

Display elements
Display

Display order number

Computer message mark

Date and time of message occurrence

Computer message

Order of display

In time series order starting with the latest message

Retention of messages

Deletes messages starting with the earliest that

was acknowledged when the number of messages
exceeds 200.

1.12.2 Panel Name

See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.
Only system-specified panel name is available. The user cannot define the name.

1.12.3 Panel Call

This section describes how to call up the computer message summary panel.
(1) Panel Call with a Panel Name
A computer message summary panel can be called using just the system-specified name
only.
.CM
.CM

-F (-F is omissible)

.CM

-H

.CM

-S

: space

(2) Panel Call with One-touch Operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

C1-70

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.12.4 Display Format

The following figure shows the display format of the computer message summary panel.

Figure C1.12.2 Display Format of Computer Message Summary Panel

2 94.03.11 13:45:10 Com text error

Computer message mark
Display order number

Computer message
Date and time of message occurrence

The computer message summary panel displays the following information:

Display order number
1 to 200
Computer message mark
This mark indicates that the occurred message is a computer message. This mark is
specific to the system.
Message occurrence: blinks in user-defined color
Acknowledgment:

lit

Date and time of message occurrence

The computer message display is updated in the order of message occurrence. This item
displays the time and date when a message was occurred. The display format is a
system-specified format which the user can select.
Color: white (fixed)
Computer message
Displays a message from the computer.
Color: white (fixed)

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-71

1.12.5 Softkeys
The softkey labels of the computer message summary panel are different depending
upon the message acknowledgment method.
PAUSE

DELETE

Figure C1.12.3 Softkeys for Group Acknowledgment

ACK_W

PAUSE

Figure C1.12.4 Softkeys for Individual Acknowledgment

[PAUSE] :

Pauses updating of the display of a computer message for five seconds.

This function is canceled automatically after 5 seconds. Computer
messages occurred during the pause appear upon resumption of the
display.
[DELETE] : Deletes the acknowledged computer messages on the panel. Use the alarm
acknowledge key
on the operation keyboard, or use the computer
message window to acknowledge the message.
[ACK_W] : Calls up the computer message window to acknowledge and delete a
computer message.

See Also
See Subsection 2.2.8, Computer Message Window.

1.12.6 Acknowledgment of Messages

There are the following types of acknowledgment operations for the computer message
summary panel: group acknowledgment and individual acknowledgment. When
generating the system, the user specifies either of the operation with the ICS builder.
Note that the specification is reflected in other messages, such as process alarm
messages, system alarm messages, and operator guide messages, as well.
For details on acknowledgment, see Section 3.3, Acknowledgment of Messages.

1.12.7 Change of Display

(1) Scroll Operation
If all the messages cannot be contained on a single page, More is displayed in the
bottom right corner of the panel. The messages can be scrolled by the scroll operation.
(2) Page Change
Although the scroll operation changes messages one by one, the page change operation
changes the display on a page basis (20 messages).

C1-72

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.13 Half Size Panel

Each operation panel can be displayed as a half size panel as well as a full size panel. A
half size panel has an area one-fourth the size of a full size panel. Although there may
be a little variation, a half size panel has the same display format as a full size panel.

1.13.1 Types
Half size panels of the following full size panels are provided:
Overview panel
Control group panel
Tuning panel
Trend group panel
Trend point panel
Alarm summary panel
Operator guide message panel
Graphic panel (user-definition is available)
Computer message summary panel (Optional package)
Computer window (Optional package)
Half size panels are, as a rule, system-specified panels, which the user cannot freely
define. The one exception is the graphic panel, which the user can freely define.
The following figures are examples of half size panels for each full size panel listed
above. Although there may be a little variation due to the size restriction, the half size
panel has the same display format as a full size panel.
Overview panel

Figure C1.13.1 Example of Overview Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-73

 Control group panel

Figure C1.13.2 Example of Control Group Panel

Selecting the entry area touch target on the half size control group panel displays
faceplate windows corresponding to the selected tag along with the entry window.
However, operation with the control keys is disabled.

Figure C1.13.3 Entry Window in a Half Size Panel

C1-74

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Tuning panel

Figure C1.13.4 Example of Tuning Panel

The operation of instrument faceplates on a half size tuning panel are the same as those
on a half size control group panel.
Some tuning panels may have control status report display panels depending upon the
type of control block.

Figure C1.13.5 Example of Control Status Report Display Panel (Sequence Table
Block)

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-75

Figure C1.13.6 Example of Control Status Report Display Panel

(Control Drawing)

Figure C1.13.7 Example of Control Status Report Display Panel

(Logic Chart Block)

C1-76

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Trend group panel

Figure C1.13.8 Example of Trend Group Panel

For the half size trend group panel, by selecting the softkey, the display can be switched
to either the tag name or tag comment.
Trend point panel

Figure C1.13.9 Example of Trend Point Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-77

 Alarm summary panel

Figure C1.13.10 Example of Alarm Summary Panel

Operator guide message panel

Figure C1.13.11 Example of Operator Guide Message Panel

C1-78

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

Graphic panel
Unlike other panels, the graphic panel allows the user to define half size panels as well
as full size panels. The graphic panel also allows the user to automatically reduce it to a
half size panel. However, great care must be exercised because the contents of the panel
are not automatically reduced; only the area is reduced to a half size panel. (The size of
the displayed contents remains the same as in a full size panel.)

Figure C1.13.12 Examples of Graphic Panel

TIP
For easy touch operation, a half size panel has a touch area (active area) which is oneline larger. Therefore, the operator cannot specify a touch target on the first line of a half
size graphic panel. A touch target specified on the first line is included in the active area
and thus superseded by the active area.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-79

 Computer message summary panel

Figure C1.13.13 Example of Computer Message Summary Panel

1.13.2 Panel Specifications

The following table lists the specifications of half size panels.
Table C1.13.1 Half Size Panels Specifications
Item
Capacity

Specification

Number of panels registered

The same as the number of pages of the operation

panel used. System-specified and need not be registered (except for graphic panels).

Display elements

As a display element, the panel displays a half size

panel of the operation panel specified.

Display location

Initial location: Upper left of the main panel

On a graphic panel, any location defined by the user

Panel size

640x442 dots

Number of panels displayed

simultaneously

Up to four

Updating interval

4 sec
Overview panel

Display

Control group panel

Tuning panel (including status display panel)
Trend group panel
Reduced to an area
Displayed one-fourth the size
panel
of the original

Trend point panel

Alarm summary panel
Operator guide message panel
Graphic panel
Computer message summary panel
Computer window

1.13.3 Panel Name

See Also
See Section 4.3 of Part B, Panel Names.
The same as that of each full size panel.

C1-80

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.13.4 Panel Calling and Closing

(1) Panel Calling
This paragraph explains how to call up a half size panel.
Panel call with a panel name
Entering the panel name as below displays a half size panel.
Full size panel name of the system-specified -H
(Examples)

Overview panel:

.OVxxxx

-H

Control group panel:

.CGxxxx

-H

Trend group panel:

.TGxxxx

-H

Trend point panel:

.TPxxxx

-H

Alarm summary panel:

.AL

Operator guide message panel:

Graphic panel:

Computer message summary panel:

Computer window:

User-defined name

-H
.OG

.GRxxxx

-H
-H
.CM

.CWxxxx

-H

-H

-H

xxxx: page,

: space

Panel call with one-touch operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.
Panel call with a system function key
Selecting the [HALF] system function key displays a half size panel corresponding to
the full size panel currently displayed on the CRT.
(2) Keeping the Half Size Panel Displayed
Unless an action is taken to close the currently displayed half size panel, it remains on
the screen even if the main panel is switched.
(3) Closing Half Size Panels
There are the following ways to close a currently displayed half size panel:

IM 33G2C20-11E

1.

Select the close box on the top left side of the half size panel.

2.

Select the panel erase key

removes the main panel.

to close the half size panel. This method also

C1-81

1.13.5 Display Format and Location

This section describes display format and location of a half size panel.
(1) Display Format
A half size panel that displays a full size panel reduced to one-fourth the area of the
original (halved in both height and width) has the following controls:
Close box
This is selected to close the half size panel.
Title bar
This is selected to activate the half size panel.
Selecting the title bar and dragging it moves the half size panel.

Figure C1.13.14 Display Format of Half Size Panel

(2) Display Location
Unless specified coordinates are given for the location of half size panels when called
from a graphic panel, they appear in overlapping succession.
System message area

4
Main panel area
Half size panel

Default location

Figure C1.13.15 Default Locations of Half Size Panels

C1-82

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. Operation Panels

1.13.6 Operation
Half size panels also allow the user to call, delete, and move windows. The panel format
is generally the same as that of a full size panel.
(1) Activating and Deactivating Half Size Panels
(a) Activating half size panels
Activating refers to an action that makes a variety of panel operations effective
(accessible) on an on-screen half size panel. Normally, operations used on the screen are
reflected both on a half size panel and on a main panel. To activate a half size panel,
select the title bar of that half size panel using the cursor or touch screen function. The
title bar is highlighted (brighter) in an activated half size panel.
(b) Deactivating half size panels
There are the following different ways to deactivate a half size panel:
1.

Remove the activated half size panel.

2.

Select the

3.

Call the entry window on the main panel.

key.

(2) Input Operation

The operator can perform input operations through an active half size panel. The same
input procedures used for full size panels apply.

See Also
See Chapter 6 of Part B, Operator Input.

(3) Panel Access Operations

When the half size panel is active, using the page keys
higher order panel key

and

and the

, the operator can access the current panel.

Operations specific to the system

Half size panels are accessed by an operation specific to the system, such as the paging
operation.
Access to user-defined panels
A panel with the specified size appears in the case where the user has specified panels to
access to using the builder.
Access to higher order panels
Half size panels are accessed when panels which are provided by the system (for
example, the control group panel for the tuning panel) are called. Half size panels are
accessed when panels which are specified by the user are called.

TIP
For details on panel access, see Section 1.2, Panel Access.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C1-83

2. Windows

2.

Windows
Windows appear in an overlapping succession on a panel to provide functions that
display information whenever it is needed. Thus, the operator can use more than one
window in combination with operation panels (except for a tuning trend window). In
addition, the optional computer window package can be used to open windows on an
ICS from the HP9000 computer.

2.1

Overview
Windows appear in overlapping succession on a panel to display information in a
predetermined area of the panel, without turning off the panel under operation at an
information and command station (ICS). Windows enable you to immediately acquire
information without turning off the main panel.

2.1.1

Window Types

(1) Window Types

The following table shows the types of windows used in combination with operation
panels.
Table C2.1.1

Window Types

Type

Description

Reference

Displays detailed information on the various messages

appearing in the system message area. The types of
messages shown are:
Message window

Faceplate window

Process alarms

System alarms

Operator guide messages

Computer messages

Displays the instrument faceplate of any tag on an on-screen

panel.
Displays data allocated to trend recording in a graph format.
The types of graphs are:

Trend window

IM 33G2C20-11E

Trend graph

Tuning trend graph

2.2

2.3

2.4
2.5

Process window

Displays process data and comments that belong to a designated function block.

2.6

Overview window

Displays the alarm status appearing on an overview panel.

2.7

Graphic window

Used to display either details of a graphic panel or the entire

image.

2.8

Computer window

Serves as a window for human-machine interfacing with an

HP9000 computer and displays control data.

2.12

C2-1

In addition, the following types of windows are available on each panel to support the
operator.
Table C2.1.2

Operator-support Windows

Type

Description

Reference

Help window

Displays messages from the system in response to operator

errors, and guide messages for operating procedures.

2.9

Confirmation window

Used to execute confirmation when entering data, etc. to

function blocks.

2.10

Menu window

Used to make menu driven data entries.

2.11

(2) Window Display when Using a Half Size Panel

Windows can also be viewed from a half size panel. The viewed window is regular size
(not reduced in relation to the half size panel) and can be operated in the same way as a
regular window.

C2-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.1.2

Position of Windows in the Panel System

Windows enable the operator to readily view required information without switching
from the on-screen panel. Thus, the operator can maintain consistency in operation with
no interruption, and can gain direct access to desired operations. The following figure
shows the position of windows in the ICS operation panel system.

Figure C2.1.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Position of Windows in the Panel System (Conceptual Configuration)

C2-3

2.1.3

Window Names

See Also

See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.

Windows have specific names of their own. The name of a window is either systemspecified or user-defined. Whether the user can name a window at the users option
completely depends on the type of window in question. For more information, see the
following table.
Table C2.1.3

Window Types and User Definition

Window Type

Message window

Faceplate window
Trend window

User-definition

Process alarm

.AW

Computer message

.CM

System alarm

.SY

Operator guide message .GM

Tag name
.TGxxxx

.TPxxxx

Process window

Tag name

Overview window

.OVxxxx

Help window

.HWxxxx

Graphic window

.GWxxxx

Computer window

.CWxxxx

Menu window

Confirmation window

: Applicable

C2-4

Window Name

: Not applicable or no window name available

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.1.4

Opening or Closing the Window

The following are the windows subject to user access:
Message window
Faceplate window
Trend window
Process window
Overview window
Graphic window
Help window
Menu window
Computer window (optional)

(1) Opening a Window

Use any of the following procedures to open a window on an operation panel.
Opening a window by name
Enter the window name.
Opening a window by touching the target
Touch the target to open a window allocated to a target. Touch targets can be allocated
to the following operation panels: overview panel, operator guide message panel and
graphic panel. In the case of a graphic panel, the user can also allocate push button and
softkeys.
Opening a window with a function key
Allocate a window name to one of the function keys on an operation keyboard. This
allows the operator to open that window by simply selecting the key, irrespective of
on-screen panels.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-5

 Opening a window with a panel call key

This applies only when opening a help window. Selecting the
operation keyboard opens a help window.

key on the

Whether or not the user can open a particular window depends on the type of window.
For details on the rules, see the following table.
Table C2.1.4

Types of Windows and How to Open Them

Entry of Window
Name

Access by Touch
Target

Use of Function
Key

Message window

Note 1

Faceplate window

Note 2

Trend window

Notes 2 and 3

Process window

Note 2

Overview window

Note 2

Graphic window

Note 2

Help window

Note 1

Computer window

Note 2

Menu window

Note 2

Confirmation window

Type of Window

: Available
: Not available
Note 1: Opened by touching the system message area
Note 2: If allocated to a graphic panel, the window is opened by touching the appropriate area
Note 3: A tuning trend window is not user-accessible because it is interlocked with a tuning panel.

TIP
A window can be displayed in a specified position when accessed using the appropriate
procedure.
(2) Closing a Window
Following any of the procedures below closes a window.
Select the close box in the window with the cursor or by touching the box.
Select the
the panel.

key to close the main panel. This deletes the window along with

Close the main panel (for example, select any of the keys related to switching pages).
Windows belonging to the main panel then disappear along with the panel.

C2-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.1.5

Window Configuration and Location

(1) General Window Configuration

The following figure shows the basic window configuration. All windows do not have
all of the functions shown. For further details, see the following table.

Figure C2.1.2

General Window Configuration

Close box (

): Used to close a window.

Title bar:

Displays a window name.

The bar is used to activate a window.
Dragging the bar moves the window to different positions.

Menu bar: Used to bring up menus in a window.

Scroll bar: Used to scroll in a window.
Resize corner (

): Used to change the window size.

Command line: Used to install software driven buttons for confirmation or acknowledgment or to entry data items to be retrieved.
Table C2.1.5

Window Types and Functions Available

Close
Box

Title Bar

Message window

Faceplate window

Trend window

Process window

Overview window

Graphic window

Computer window
Help window

Window Type

Menu Bar

Scroll
Bar

Resize
Corner

*1

Command
Line
*1

*3

*2

*2

Confirmation window
Menu window
*1
*2
*3

IM 33G2C20-11E

May be displayed depending on message type and setting.

May be displayed depending on the type of window.
Specify presence/absence of scroll bar by user definition.

C2-7

Figure C2.1.3

Example of Windows on a Panel

Some windows display just the same information as previously specified for panels,
while others allow setup by the user from the beginning.
Table C2.1.6

Types of Windows and User Definition

Type of Window

User Definition

Message window

Faceplate window

Trend window

Process window

Overview window
Graphic window
Computer window

Note 1

Help window

Note 2

Confirmation window
Menu window

: Applicable
: Not applicable
Note 1: Defined by the user on a computer and displayed on an ICS.
Note 2: Allows definition of user help messages only.

(2) Window Location

Windows, when opened, appear in fixed positions specified by the system. However, on
a graphic panel, the user can specify the location desired for the display of a faceplate,
trend, or graphic window.

C2-8

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

Figure C2.1.4

IM 33G2C20-11E

Window Locations

C2-9

The positions where windows open are either system-specified or user-defined. The user
may unspecify the position of a window if it is user-defined. However, the user must
always specify the position of a menu window when opening it from a graphic panel.
Table C2.1.7

Default Positions of Windows and User-definable

Type of Window

User-definable

Faceplate window

Trend window

Process window

Message window

Overview window

Help window

Graphic window
Menu window Note 1

Confirmation window

Computer window

: Applicable
: Not applicable
Note 1: Only one which is opened from a graphic panel. The position of a menu window opened from a
tuning panel is system-specified.

If you unspecify the position of a window, it appears in the system-specified default

position.

See Also
See Figure C2.1.4, Window Locations.

TIP
The user can also specify the default position of a half size panel.

C2-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.1.6

Window Display Priority Order

Windows are displayed in succession on a panel.
When the permitted number of on-screen windows is exceeded, windows are deleted in
the order from the window displayed bottommost. (the oldest window is not always
placed at the bottommost, because the window display order can be changed.)
The following table shows the number of windows of the same type that can be
displayed simultaneously.
Table C2.1.8

Number of Windows Displayed Simultaneously

Window Type
Message window*1

Number of Windows

Operator guide message window

Faceplate window
Help window

One o
of each

Confirmation window
Menu window
Trend window
Process window
Overview window

of each
Up to three o

Graphic window
Computer window

Up to four
Max. of ten in all

*1

Except for the operator guide message window

TIP
The number of windows in this table applies to each of the CRT displays in use. For
stacked CRT, you can simultaneously display as many as ten windows each on the upper
and lower CRT screens.

2.1.7

Window Frame
It is possible to call up a window on a panel in order to use it as part of the panel. This
is implemented by specifying the window as unframed when calling it up. The unframed
window is integrated into the panel to form one complete panel. When the panel is
cleared, the window disappears automatically together with the panel. On a control
group panel, for example, a faceplate window is called up as an unframed window for
use on the panel. Similarly, an unframed tuning trend window is called up on a tuning
panel.
This function is also available on a graphic panel for users. For further information, see
the Graphic Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E).

2.1.8

Panel Access
Unlike operation panels, windows are not subject to an accessing operation, though
some windows allow the operator to perform predetermined operations depending on the
type or setting of the window. It is not possible to access from a window to another
panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-11

2.2

Message Window
A message window displays, in the format preset for the window, the messages required
to operate a plant properly. The system indicates, in the system message area on the
CRT screen in the predefined format, that a message has been given. Thus, the operator
can readily know that a message is present, even while monitoring another panel.

2.2.1

Types of Message Window

The types of message window are:
Process alarm window
System alarm window
Operator guide message window
Computer message window

2.2.2

Window Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of a message window.
Table C2.2.1

Message Window Specifications

Item
Capacity

Number of windows registered

Specification
One of each / ICS
Each of the following messages is displayed in a dedicated window:

Display elements

Window location

Process alarm message

System alarm message

Operator guide message

Computer message

Fixed below the system message area

1

Window size *
Display

Number of messages displayed

Order of messages displayed
Message display
updates
Number of windows displayed
simultaneously

3
1
3

: 960 x 142 dots

: 960 x 304 dots

,

: up to five

: one

In time series starting with the latest

Multiple messages: updated each time a message is occurred
Single message: not updated
One

* This window size does not include the header.

2.2.3

Window Name

See Also
See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.
The name of each window is given automatically during system generation; the user is
not allowed to name the windows.

C2-12

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.2.4

Window Operation

See Also

See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window

Retrieve a message window by selecting the appropriate touch target in the system
message area with the cursor or touch screen function.

Figure C2.2.1

Touch Targets for Opening Message Windows

Opening the window with a window name

Opening the window with one-touch operation

The window can be opened with a function key or touch target.

TIP
A window opened from the system message area for individual confirmation always
displays the latest messages. However, a window opened from its associated panel
(alarm summary panel, system alarm message panel, operator guide message panel or
computer message summary panel) displays the message currently selected.
(2) Closing the Window
Select the close box in the message window with the cursor or touch screen function to
delete the window.
(3) Acknowledgment of Message
For a process alarm window, system alarm window, and computer message window, the
user can predefine the way messages are acknowledged by configuring the builder
accordingly during system generation. For further details, see each of the subsections
that discuss these windows.
(4) Deleting Acknowledged Messages
In a system alarm window or an operator guide message window, the operator can select
the [DELETE] button to delete acknowledged messages.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-13

2.2.5

Process Alarm Window

A process alarm window displays the most recently occurred process alarm messages. If
this window is opened while other message window is on the screen, the other message
window is deleted. The process alarm window is interlocked with an alarm summary
panel. Consequently, the results of operation in the process alarm window are also
notified to and reflected upon the alarm summary panel.
Number of messages displayed: Up to five
Acknowledgment:

Specify either group acknowledgment or individual

acknowledgment.
Specify whether or not acknowledgment is required
when group acknowledgment is selected.

TIP

(1)

The information as to whether acknowledgment is specified or not; which acknowledgment is specified; and group acknowledgment or individual acknowledgment is shared by the system alarm, operator guide message and computer
message windows. If the operator wishes to acknowledge messages in a process
alarm window and has set up the window accordingly, then the system alarm,
operator guide message and computer message windows will naturally be specified as those also requiring acknowledgment.

(2)

For group acknowledgment, the process alarm window displays a maximum of

the five most recent process alarm messages at a time. When the acknowledgment
button is activated, on-screen process alarm messages are all acknowledged in a
group. For individual acknowledgment, the window shows only one of the most
recent process alarm messages.

(3)

The acknowledgment operations above are specified in the ICS configuration

definition builder.

(4)

If you have selected individual acknowledgment, the system does not update the
display of messages. If you wish the display to be updated, reopen the window.

Figure C2.2.2

C2-14

Example of Process Alarm Window (with Group Acknowledgment)

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

Figure C2.2.3

Example of Process Alarm Window (with Individual Acknowledgment)

Figure C2.2.4

Example of Process Alarm Window (with No Acknowledgment)

The following figure shows the display format of the process alarm window.

Figure C2.2.5

Display Format of Process Alarm Window

TIP

IM 33G2C20-11E

(1)

You can set up a process alarm window so that it appears automatically when an
alarm occurs. Use the ICS configuration definition builder to set it up.

(2)

You can also open the process alarm window from an alarm summary panel only
when individual acknowledgment is specified.

C2-15

2.2.6

System Alarm Window

A system alarm window displays the most recently occurred system alarm messages. If
this window is opened while other message window is on the screen, the other window
is deleted. The system alarm window is interlocked with a system alarm message panel.
Consequently, the results of operation in the system alarm window are also notified to
and reflected upon the system alarm message panel.
Number of messages displayed: Up to five
Acknowledgment:

Specify either group acknowledgment or individual

acknowledgment.
Specify whether or not acknowledgment is
required when group acknowledgment is selected.

TIP

(1)

The information as to whether acknowledgment is specified or not; which acknowledgment is specified; and group acknowledgment or individual acknowledgment is shared by the process alarm, operator guide message and computer
message windows. If the operator wishes to acknowledge messages in a system
alarm window and has set up the window accordingly, then the process alarm,
operator guide message and computer message windows will naturally be specified as those also requiring acknowledgment.

(2)

The acknowledgment operations above are specified in the ICS configuration

definition builder.

(3)

If you have selected individual acknowledgment, the system does not update the
display of messages. If you wish the display to be updated, reopen the window.

Figure C2.2.6

C2-16

Example of System Alarm Window (with Group Acknowledgment)

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

Figure C2.2.7

Example of System Alarm Window (with Individual Acknowledgment)

Figure C2.2.8

Example of System Alarm Window (with No Acknowledgment)

The following figure shows the display format of the system alarm window.

Figure C2.2.9

Display Format of System Alarm Window

TIP

A system alarm window can also be opened from a system alarm message panel only
when individual acknowledgment is specified.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-17

2.2.7

Operator Guide Message Window

An operator guide message window displays operator guide messages occurred in the
course of sequence control. The user can build message specific executable functions
(such as EXCUTE/DELETE buttons) into this window. A long message may be scrolled
for complete viewing. The operator guide message window is interlocked with an
operator guide message panel. Consequently, the results of operation in the operator
guide message window are also notified to and reflected upon the operator guide
message panel.
Number of messages displayed:

One

Acknowledgment:

Individual acknowledgment only

TIP
The operator guide message window displays only one of the most recent operator guide
messages irrespective of whichever acknowledgment is specified, group
acknowledgment or individual acknowledgment.

Figure C2.2.10 Example of Operator Guide Message Window

C2-18

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

The following figures show the display format of the operator guide message window.

Figure C2.2.11

Display Format of Operator Guide Message Window

For the example of an interactive message above, the setpoint is entered through the
operator guide message window. For details on interactive messages, see the SEBOL
Function Manual (IM 33G3C20-11E).

TIP

IM 33G2C20-11E

(1)

The color of the message displayed is the same as that for an operator guide message
panel (a user-defined color).

(2)

The operator guide message window can always be opened from an operator guide
message panel, independent of how messages are acknowledged in the window.

(3)

Operations on interactive messages are saved as operation records.

C2-19

2.2.8

Computer Message Window

See Also

See Section 1.12, Computer Message Summary Panel.

A computer message window displays messages from other computer systems, and
allows those messages to be acknowledged. If this window is opened while other
message window is on the screen, the other message window is deleted.
Number of messages displayed:
Number of messages held:

Acknowledgment:

Up to five
Maximum of 200. If this number is exceeded, the
excess is deleted, starting with the oldest message
(that has been acknowledged).
Specify either group acknowledgment or
individual acknowledgment.
Specify whether or not acknowledgment is
required when group acknowledgment is selected.

TIP
(1)

The information as to whether acknowledgment is specified or not; which acknowledgment is specified ; and group acknowledgment or individual acknowledgment is shared by the process alarm, system alarm and operator guide message
windows. If the operator wishes to acknowledge messages in a computer message
window and has set up the window accordingly, then the process alarm, system
alarm and operator guide message windows will naturally be specified as those
also requiring acknowledgment.

(2)

For group acknowledgment, the computer message window displays a maximum of

the five most recent computer messages at a time. When the acknowledgment button
is activated, on-screen computer messages are all acknowledged in a group.
For individual acknowledgment, the window shows only one of the most recent
computer messages.

(3)

The acknowledgment operations above are specified in the ICS configuration

definition builder.

(4)

If you have selected individual acknowledgment, the system does not update the
display of messages. If you wish the display to be updated, reopen the window.

Figure C2.2.12 Example of Computer Message Window (with Group Acknowledgment)

C2-20

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

Figure C2.2.13 Example of Computer Message Window (with Individual Acknowledgment)

Figure C2.2.14 Example of Computer Message Window (with No Acknowledgment)

The following figure shows the display format of the computer message window.

Figure C2.2.15 Display Format of Computer Message Window

TIP

A computer message window can also be opened from a computer message summary
panel only when individual acknowledgment is specified.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-21

2.3

Faceplate Window
See Also

See Section 3.3 of Part B, Instrument Faceplates.

Each of the function blocks in a control station has an instrument faceplate. The
instrument faceplate is assembled in a window to form a faceplate window.

2.3.1

Types of Faceplate Window

The types of faceplate window are:
Analog
Discrete
Trend

Figure C2.3.1

C2-22

Examples of Faceplate Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.3.2

Window Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of a faceplate window.
Table C2.3.1

Faceplate Window Specifications

Item
Capacity

Display

Specification

Number of windows registered

Equal to the number of tags.

Display elements

Instrument faceplate

Window location

Default location : On the lower right side of a panel.

On a graphic panel, a window can be displayed in the user-defined
area and moved within a specified range.

Window size *

148x519 dots

Number of faceplates displayed

One per panel

Message display
updates
Number of windows displayed
simultaneously

Updates data in a period of one second.

Allows only one on-screen motor instrument under the INC/DEC key
operation to be displayed in a period as fast as 200ms.
One

* This window size does not include the header.

2.3.3

Window Name
See Also
See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.
The name of a faceplate window corresponds directly to the name of a tag.

2.3.4

Opening or Closing the Window

See Also
See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window

When a new faceplate window is called, it is replaced with the previous faceplate
window.
Opening the window with tag name
Enter the tag name.

Tag name

Tag name

-W (

:space, -W is omissible)

Opening the window with one-touch operation

The window can be opened with a function key or touch target.

TIP
A faceplate window appears in a fixed position designated by the appropriate control
key.
(2) Closing the Window
Select the close box in the faceplate window with the cursor or touch screen function.
IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-23

2.3.5

Window Operation

(1) Working with Instrument Faceplates

For detailed information, refer to subsection 3.3.3 of Part B Working with Instrument
Faceplates.
(2) Moving the Faceplate Window
A faceplate window can be moved horizontally or vertically at the operators direction. It
moves horizontally in conjunction with the position of a softkey to enable proper
operation of the instrument faceplate.

C2-24

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.4

Trend Window
A trend window graphically displays data allocated for trend recording.

See Also
See Chapter 6, Trend Recording.

2.4.1

Types of Trend Window

The types of trend window are:
Trend group window
Trend point window
These windows are functionally dependent on their associated full size panels. In
addition, each of these windows displays either
analog trend graph
discrete trend graph
depending on the data to be allocated.

See Also
See Section 3.3 of Part B, Instrument Faceplates.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-25

Figure C2.4.1

C2-26

Examples of Trend Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.4.2

Window Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of a trend window.
Table C2.4.1

Trend Window Specifications

Item

Capacity

Specification

Number of windows
registered

The same as the number of pages in a trend group or trend

point panel used
(Not user-definable)
Trend window name

Display elements

Trend graph
Time
Default location: On the upper left side of a panel

Window location

Window size *
Reference
time of
display
Displayed
elements
Display

If one-touch operation functions (such as the graphic panel

or function key) are used, this window may be displayed in
any location specified by the user.
724 x 188 dots
Changeable with the resize corner.
Current time
The same as those displayed on a trend group or trend point
panel
8 pens: Defined trend group (.TGXXXX)
1 pen: Defined trend point (.TPXXXX)
Complies with the settings for the data to be displayed.

Trend
graph
g
p

Displayed
graphs

Analog trend graph

Discrete trend graph
One or eight pens

Display style

Displays with the span in a range from 0 to 100% without

magnification/reduction.
Displays data for the indicated time span only.
Neither time axis magnification nor time axis scroll applicable.

Data sampling
The same as the trend panel to be displayed
period
Display
updates
Number of windows displayed simultaneously

Every second
Up to three

* This window size does not include the header.

2.4.3

Window Name

See Also
See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.
The name of a trend window is given automatically during system generation; the user is
not allowed to name it.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-27

2.4.4

Opening or Closing the Window

See Also

See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window
Opening the window with window name
Enter the window name.

Trend group window: .TGxxxx

Trend point window: .TPxxxx

: space

-W
-W

xxxx : page

Opening the window with one-touch operation

The window can be opened with a function key or touch target.

TIP

Opening more than the maximum number of windows (three) that can be displayed at
the same time will delete the extra windows, starting with the bottommost window (the
least recently operated window).
(2) Closing the Window
Select the close box in the trend window with the cursor or touch screen function.
(3) Resizing the Window
Move the resize corner horizontally or vertically as it is selected with the cursor or touch
screen function to reduce or magnify the window size.

2.4.5

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the trend window.

Figure C2.4.2

C2-28

Display Format of Trend Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.5

Tuning Trend Window

See Also

See Section 1.5, Tuning Panel and Section 2.4, Trend Window.
A tuning trend window converts data that belong to individual instrument faceplates
into a trend graph to be displayed on a tuning panel. This window is basically the same
as the trend window discussed in the previous section, except that it acquires only fixed
data items at a fixed interval of time.

2.5.1

Types of Tuning Trend Window

A tuning trend window displays the following types of graphs.
Analog trend graph
Discrete trend graph
Program pattern (for a program set block)

See Also
See Section 3.3 of Part B, Instrument Faceplates.

Figure C2.5.1
IM 33G2C20-11E

Examples of Tuning Trend Window (1/2)

C2-29

Figure C2.5.1

2.5.2

Example of Tuning Trend Window (2/2)

Window Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of a tuning trend window.
Table C2.5.1

Tuning Trend Window Specifications

Item

Capacity

Specification

Number of windows
registered

The same as the number of pages in a tuning panel used (not

user-definable)
1. Trend data graph

Display elements

2. Time
3. Operation softkeys
4. Scroll bars

Window location

Allocated to a fixed position on a tuning panel

Window size *

749x432 dots

Display

Reference
time of
display

Current time

Displayed
element

Three pen traces for PV (or either CPV or FV), SV (or SW), and
MV
Complies with the settings for the data to be displayed.

Tuning
Trend

Displayed
graph

1. Analog trend graph

2. Discrete trend graph
3. Program pattern

Display
style

Three/four

Data sampling period

One second

Display
updates

Every second

* This window size does not include the header.

2.5.3

Window Name
See Also
See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.
A tuning trend window has no specific name because it is configured as an accessory
window belonging to a tuning panel.

C2-30

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.5.4

Opening or Closing the Window

See Also

See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window
The operator cannot directly open the tuning trend window. It is only available in
conjunction with a tuning panel.
(2) Closing the Window
Closing a tuning panel also closes the tuning trend window.

2.5.5

Display Format
A tuning trend window is a window that only appears in conjunction with a tuning panel.
The following figure shows the display format of the tuning trend window.

Figure C2.5.2

Display Format of Tuning Trend Window

Colors Used
PV:
SV:
MV:
Data axis:

IM 33G2C20-11E

Cyan
White
Magenta
Blue

C2-31

2.5.6

Window Operation

(1) Data Axis Magnification/Reduction

Selecting the [
n] softkey magnifies or reduces a tuning trend graph along the data
axis (vertically). Select the desired magnification of either x1, x2, x5, or x10, as it
appears in turn (n = 1, 2, 5, or 10). Magnification or reduction is implemented with the
reference point in the middle of the data axis. The length of the scroll bar changes as the
data axis changes in span.
2

10

60%

75%
2

50%

50%

25%
( 2 magnification)

Figure C2.5.3

40%

( 5 magnification)

Data Axis Magnification/Reduction

TIP
Only an analog trend graph can be enlarged or reduced along the data axis.
(2) Time Axis Magnification/Reduction
Selecting the [
nM] softkey magnifies or reduces a tuning trend graph along the time
axis (horizontally). Select the desired time axis span of either 6, 12, 24, or 48 minutes,
as it appears in turn (n = 6, 12, 24, or 48). Magnification or reduction is implemented
with the reference point at the furthermost right edge of the graph (the most recent time).
6M

12M

24M

48M

6M

5: 54
6: 00
(Time axis span of 6 minutes)

Figure C2.5.4

C2-32

5: 48
6: 00
(Time axis span of 12 minutes)

Time Axis Magnification/Reduction

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

(3) Display Update Pause for Tuning Trend Recording

Use the [PAUSE] softkey to pause or resume updating of a graph. Selecting the
[PAUSE] softkey pauses updating of the display of a trend graph. Selecting the [PAUSE]
softkey once again resumes display of the graph, beginning at the current time. Data
acquisition continues even during the pause. Scrolling the tuning trend graph to an
earlier time automatically sets updating in the pause mode. When the pause is canceled,
the reference point of the display automatically returns to the current time and then
updating resumes.
(4) Starting or Stopping Data Acquisition
In a tuning trend recording, data acquisition is initiated at the same time a tuning panel
is displayed. Data acquisition is interrupted when the panel is closed. However, if the
reserve function is used, data acquisition continues even after the panel is closed. The
operator can view the acquired data in a tuning trend window by redisplaying the
window. Data to be acquired are predefined according to the types of function blocks
used.
(5) Reservation of Data
Selecting the [RESERVE] softkey reserves on-screen tuning trend data. If any tuning
trend data are already reserved, the tuning trend window displays the earlier data when it
is reopened (scroll to an earlier time because the display shows the data for the current
time only at that time). If no data are reserved, the window starts acquiring data when
opened. Up to 16 pen traces can be reserved for tuning trend recording. The reserved
trend data follows the first-in, first-out (FIFO) rule (if the number of reserved trend data
items exceeds 16, then extra data items are deleted, starting with the oldest one; new
data items, in turn, are registered).
Table C2.5.2

Reserve Function Specifications

Item
Reserve function
Number of reserved data
Data sampling period
Data sampling capacity
Data acquisition

Specification
Retains the settings for time and display spans for trend recording
and continues data acquisition even after the panel has been deleted.
Displays acquired data graphically when the panel is displayed again.
16 pen traces / ICS
One second
2880 data / pen
The reserve function, when turned on, acquires data until the
maximum capacity is reached. After that, it deletes acquired data
starting with the oldest and adds new data.

(6) Scrolling
A tuning trend graph can be scrolled along the data axis (vertically) in 10% increments
of the indicated span using the vertical scroll bar. Similarly, use the horizontal scroll bar
to scroll the graph horizontally along the time axis in single datum (two dots) increments
from the current to the least recent time (the time when the tuning panel appeared on the
CRT screen).

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-33

2.6

Process Window
See Also
See Section 1.5, Tuning Panel.
A process window, which works in conjunction with a tuning panel, displays data
belonging to a function block.

Figure C2.6.1

Examples of Process Window

TIP

A process window displays data for an appropriate tuning panel. No user definition is
possible.

2.6.1

Window Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of a process window.
Table C2.6.1

Process Window Specifications

Item
Capacity

Number of windows registered

Specification
The same as the number of pages in a tuning panel used (not userdefinable)
Data in a function block are shown in the same manner as the data
shown on a tuning panel.
Tag name

Display elements

Tag comment
Block mode/data item
Current values of process data

Display

Engineering units
Window location

Default location:On the lower left side of a panel

On a graphic panel, the desired location may be defined

Window size *

225 x 250 dots

Number of windows displayed

simultaneously

Up to three

* This window size does not include the header.

2.6.2

Window Name
See Also

See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.

The name of a process window corresponds to a tag name.
C2-34

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.6.3

Opening or Closing the Window

See Also

See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window
Opening the window with window name
Enter the window name.

Tag name

DATA

: space

Opening the window with one-touch operation

The window can be opened with a function key or touch target.

TIP

Opening more than the maximum number of windows (three) that can be displayed at
the same time will delete the extra windows, starting with the bottommost window (the
least recently operated window).
(2) Closing the Window
Select the close box in the process window with the cursor or touch screen function.

2.6.4

Display Format
A process window displays the current values of process data items belonging to the
function block specified.

Figure C2.6.2

Display Format of Process Window

Colors Used
Tag comment, block mode, data item, and engineering unit: White
Data (mode and process data): Cyan
The sequence in which data are displayed is the same as that for a corresponding tuning
panel. If set to the alarm-output-off (AOF) mode, the window shows the AOF status that
follows the ALRM alarm status indicated.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-35

2.6.5

Window Operation

(1) Viewing Off-window Data

Use the scroll operation to display data that cannot all be seen at one time.
(2) Resizing the Window
Move the resize corner horizontally or vertically as it is selected with the cursor or touch
screen function to reduce or magnify the window size.

Figure C2.6.3

C2-36

Example of a Process Window Enlarged Vertically

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.7

Overview Window
See Also

See Section 1.3, Overview Panel.

An overview window is the result of an overview panel turned into a window.

Figure C2.7.1

Example of Overview Window

TIP
The blank square () denotes a block to which a comment has been allocated.

2.7.1

Window Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of an overview window.
Table C2.7.1

Overview Window Specifications

Item
Capacity

Display
p y

Specification

Number of windows
registered

The same as the number of pages in an overview panel used

Display elements

Displays alarm statuses in the display block of an overview panel

Window location

Default location: On the upper right side of a panel

Window size *

200 x 223 dots

Number of windows
displayed simultaneously

Up to three

* This window size does not include the header.

2.7.2

Window Name

See Also

See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.

The name of an overview window is given automatically during system generation; the
user is not allowed to name it.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-37

2.7.3

Opening or Closing the Window

See Also

See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window
Opening the window with window name
Enter the window name.

.OVxxxx
: space

-W
xxxx : page

Opening the window with one-touch operation

The window can be opened with a function key or touch target.

TIP
Opening more than the maximum number of windows (three) that can be displayed at
the same time will delete the extra windows, starting with the bottommost window (the
least recently operated window).
(2) Closing the Window
Select the close box in the overview window with the cursor or touch screen function.

2.7.4

Display Format

(1) Display Format

An overview window displays the alarm statuses shown on an overview panel.

Figure C2.7.2

Display Format of Overview Window

TIP

The indication for comment allocation represented by the blank square () is not
displayed at locations where no comment has been allocated.

C2-38

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

(2) Status Indication

Depending on the state of a function block that has been allocated, the block changes as
follows.
In normal operation:

Green (lit)

During alarm:

Red (flashing)

With no alarm status indication:

White

Comment:

Indicated with a white frame

TIP
The block, once involved in an alarm state, continues flashing (in green) until it is
acknowledged, even if it has returned to a normal status already. Note, however, that no
acknowledgment is possible in this window.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-39

2.8

Graphic Window
See Also
See Section 1.9, Graphic Panel and Chapter 7, Graphics.
A graphic window displays graphic images in a window. Unlike the trend window or
overview window, a graphic window is not prepared by the system itself for ready use.
It must be configured by the user before it is used.

Figure C2.8.1

2.8.1

Example of Graphic Window

Window Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of a graphic window.
Table C2.8.1

Graphic Window Specifications

Item
Capacity

Specification

Number of windows registered

Up to 500 per ICS

Display elements

The same as for a graphic panel

Window location

On a graphic panel, a window can be displayed on any location specified by the user. It is movable within a predefined range.

Default location:On the upper left side of a panel

Di l
Display
Window size

Specified when the window is created using the graphic builder.

The user can change the size with the resize corner.

Number of windows displayed

simultaneously

Up to three (or only one, if the window is larger than a half size panel
[640 x 442 dots])

TIP
Two or more windows-each size is larger than that of half size panel - cannot be
displayed simultaneously in the resized status. The first window can be displayed and
operated normally, but the second window causes illegal operation, and is displayed by
the produced size. The reducing operation by resize corner is disabled after displaying
the window.

2.8.2

Configuration
A graphic window can be configured using the graphic builder. For details on how to
configure graphic windows, see the Graphic Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E).

C2-40

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.8.3

Window Name

See Also

See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.

A graphic window can be given a desired name other than the system-specified name at
the users option.

2.8.4

Opening or Closing the Window

See Also

See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window
Opening the window with window name
Enter the window name.

.GWxxxx

User-defined name

xxxx : page

Opening the window with one-touch operation

The window can be opened with a function key or touch target.

TIP

Opening more than the maximum number of windows (three) that can be displayed at
the same time will delete the extra windows, starting with the bottommost window (the
least recently operated window).
(2) Closing the Window
Select the close box in the graphic window with the cursor or touch screen function.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-41

2.8.5

Display Format
A graphic window displays the image of a process state graphically.

Figure C2.8.2

Display Format of Graphic Window

Note: The scroll bars appear only when you have specified for the availability of the
bars during window configuration using the graphic builder.

2.8.6

Window Operation

(1) Resizing the Window

Move the resize corner horizontally or vertically as it is selected with the cursor or touch
screen function to reduce or magnify the window size.
(2) Viewing Off-window Data
Use the scroll operation to display data that cannot all be seen at one time. Note that the
scroll bars are available only when so specified using the graphic builder.
(3) Windows that can be Displayed Simultaneously
Up to three windows can be displayed simultaneously. However, when the size of the
window is larger than that of the half size panel, note the following items:
Display by scrolling
Scrolling is enabled for one of the graphic windows (up to three) being displayed. The
window which can be scrolled is the one which has been scrolled at first after displaying
the window. Moreover, since the window is initialized by panel displaying, select new
window to be scrolled.
Reducing window size
Reducing window size is enabled for one of the graphic windows (up to three) being
displayed. This operation can be done by selecting the resize corner. Appling this
operation to the second window will make the illegal operation.

C2-42

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.9

Help Window
A help window displays user-defined help messages, such as a detailed message of an
erroneous operation or operating procedure. These messages can serve as an on-line,
electronic instruction manual in your plant operation.

2.9.1

Types of Help Window

A help window displays the following types of messages:
System help message
This is a detailed message prepared by the system itself against an erroneous operation.
User help message
This is a user-definable message available in addition to the system help messages. A
user help message is useful when registered and used as an on-line, electronic instruction
manual, for example, as a manual containing the procedure for plant operation. Set up
user help messages using the ICS builder or operator utility.

Figure C2.9.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Examples of Help Window

C2-43

2.9.2

Window Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of a help window.
Table C2.9.1

Help Window Specifications

Item

Capacity

Specification

Number of windows registered

Display elements

Up to 500 per ICS

1. Message number or window name
2. Help message

Window location

Default location : Fixed on the bottom of a panel

Window size *1

960x231 dots

Display
Messages

Number of
messages

Up to 500 messages per ICS *2

Number of
characters

Maximum: Up to 70 characters by 21 lines per message

Number of windows displayed simultaneously

One

*1: This window size does not include the header.

*2: This number of messages is user-definable ; no system help messages are included.

2.9.3

Window Name
See Also

See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.

The name of a help window varies with the type of help message it deals with.
(1) System Help Messages
The user is not allowed to give a window name or a message number since system help
messages are subject to control by the system itself by means of system-specified
message numbers.
(2) User Help Messages
The user can name a window showing user help messages, though these messages also
have system-specified numbers of their own. By default, the window operates under a
system-specified name.

2.9.4

Opening or Closing the Window

See Also

See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window
Use one of the following procedures to open a window for help messages.
Opening the window from the system message area
Select the touch target for a help window in the system message area with the cursor or
touch screen function. Help messages then appear in the following order of priority.

C2-44

The help message shown in the system message area.

If there is no such message as noted in step a here, then the most recently displayed help message.
IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

Opening the window with the

key

Select the
key on the operation keyboard. Help messages then appear in the
following order of priority.
a

The help message appropriate for an on-screen panel.

If there is no such message as noted in step a here, then the most recently displayed help message.

Opening the window with window name

Enter the window name to display user help messages.

.HWxxxx

User-defined name
xxxx : message number

Opening the window by the message number

The operator can open the window for a particular message by directly entry the number
appropriate for that message. For further details on window operation, see Subsection
2.9.6, Window Operation.

Figure C2.9.2

Opening a Help Window

(2) Closing the Window

Select the close box in the help window with the cursor or touch screen function.
Select the

IM 33G2C20-11E

key once again while the help window is on the screen.

C2-45

2.9.5 Display Format

The following figure shows the display format of the help window.

Figure C2.9.3 Display Format of Help Window

2.9.6 Window Operation

(1) Viewing Off-window Data
Use the scroll operation to display data that cannot all be seen at one time.
(2) Entering Message Number
Enter a message number on the command line. The help message appropriate for that
number then appears.
Make the help window active.
Enter the message number on the command line.
The designated help window then appears.

TIP
You can enter only a message number on the command line; no window name can be
entered.

C2-46

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.10 Confirmation Window

A confirmation window appears when the system asks the operator to confirm his/her
operation in order to properly operate and monitor a plant. If this window appears, the
operator is not permitted to proceed further unless he/she confirms his/her operation.

Figure C2.10.1 Examples of Confirmation Window

2.10.1 Window Specifications

The following table shows the specifications of a confirmation window.
Table C2.10.1 Confirmation Window Specifications
Item
Capacity

Number of windows registered

Display elements

Display

Specification
System-specified (need not be registered)
Messages for confirmation or acknowledgment
Buttons for confirmation or acknowledgment

Window location

Fixed in the middle of the panel

Window size

396 x 126 dots

Number of windows displayed

simultaneously

One

2.10.2 Window Name

A confirmation window has no specific name.

2.10.3 Opening or Closing the Window

(1) Opening the Window
The system displays a confirmation window as necessary, and it cannot be opened by the
operator.
(2) Closing the Window
A confirmation window closes automatically when the operator confirms his/her
operation.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-47

2.10.4 Display Format

A confirmation window automatically opens when the operator needs to interact with the
system in the course of operation. The types of messages or prompts shown include
general information, progress statuses, queries, warnings, and operating instructions.

Figure C2.10.2 Display Format of Confirmation Window

2.10.5 Window Operation

Select either [ ] or [
] to respond to the message or prompt. The system will not
allow you to proceed any further unless you answer the message or prompt.

TIP
Confirmation can also be performed by selecting
operation keyboard.

C2-48

or

key on the

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.11 Menu Window

A menu window allows the operator to show, with one touch, user-defined menu items
on the CRT screen in a window.

2.11.1 Types of Menu Window

The types of menu windows are:
Window opened from a tuning panel
Window opened from a graphic panel

Figure C2.11.1

Examples of Menu Window

2.11.2 Window Specifications

The following table shows the specifications of a menu window.
Table C2.11.1 Menu Window Specifications
Item
Capacity

Specification

Number of windows registered

System-specified or the same as the number of pages in the graphic

panel used

Display elements

Window name (name plus data item of a tag to which data are
entered)
Menu items

Display

Window location

Default location: On the upper right side of a panel

On a graphic panel, the desired location may be defined.

Window size *

225 x 519 dots

Number of windows displayed

simultaneously

One

* This window size does not include the header.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-49

2.11.3 Window Name

See Also

See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.

The name of a menu window is given automatically during system generation, though it
is the users responsibility to specify menu items. The name is regarded as the name plus
the data item for the tag to which data are entered; the user is not allowed to give it a
name.

2.11.4 Opening or Closing the Window

See Also

See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.

(1) Opening the Window
A menu window is opened with one touch using either of the following procedures.
Opening the window from a tuning panel
Select the [OPEMARK] softkey on a tuning panel. A menu window with an operation
mark then appears.
Opening the window from a graphic panel
Beforehand, specify selection position using the graphic builder. For further details, see
the Graphic Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L50-11E).

TIP
You cannot open a menu window by name.
(2) Closing the Window
A menu window closes when:
you have selected a menu item,
you have selected the close box,
you have closed the main panel from which you opened the menu window, or
you have selected the

C2-50

key on the operation keyboard.

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

2.11.5 Display Format

The following figure shows the display format of the menu window.

Figure C2.11.2

Display Format of Menu Window

2.11.6 Window Operation

(1) Selecting the Menu Item
Items in a menu window can be selected by means of a:
mouse,
cursor key, or
touch screen function.
(2) Viewing Off-window Data
Use the scroll operation to display data that cannot all be seen at one time.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-51

2.12 Computer Window

The computer window is an optional software package that serves as a human-machine
interface with the HP9000 and allows the operator to view control data, such as the data
for planning or data on operation records, on an ICS.

2.12.1 Window Specifications

The following table shows the specifications of a computer window.
Table C2.12.1 Computer Window Specifications
Item
Capacity

Specification

Number of windows
registered

Up to 500 per ICS

Display elements

Number of data displayed 256 data items

Default location: On the upper left side of a panel

Window location

At any position specified by the user (except for full size

panels).

Window size

Full size (1280 x 943 dots)

Half size (640 x 442 dots)
Window (any size of up to 1268 x 915 dots or down to any
desired size)

Number of windows
displayed simultaneously

Up to 9 (one full size, 4 half size, and 4 variable size

windows)

Display

2.12.2 Window Name

See Also
See Section 4.4 of Part B, Window Names.
The computer window allows the user to give it a desired name, in addition to the
system-specified names, at the users option.

2.12.3 Opening or Closing the Window

See Also
See Subsection 2.1.4, Opening or Closing the Window.
(1) Opening the Window
Opening the window with window name
Enter the window name.

.CWxxxx (full size panel)

.CWxxxx -F (full size panel, -F is omissible)

.CWxxxx -H (half size panel)

.CWxxxx -W (window)

User-defined name
: space

xxxx : page

Opening the window with one-touch operation

The window can be opened with a function key or touch target.

C2-52

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Windows

(2) Closing the Window

The computer window closes when:
you have selected the close box with the cursor or touch screen function, or
you have received a request to close the window using the HP9000 application
program.

2.12.4 Display Format

The computer window can be one of the three sizes shown here, with varying formats
depending on the size.

Figure C2.12.1 Display Formats of Computer Window

TIP
A full size or half size panel allows you to specify whether or not a command line
should be included in the panel. No command lines are available in a window.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C2-53

2.12.5 Window Operation

(1) Input Operation
Input operations, such as data entry, can be done in the computer window, irrespective of
the window size. This is similar to input operation in a graphic window.

Figure C2.12.2 Example of Data Entry

(2) Command Line

Input operations can be done through the command line on a full size or half size panel
if you specify the panel as having a command line.

C2-54

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Message Outputting

3.

Message Outputting
The message output function is used to notify the operator of various events. Each
notifying message triggers some predefined action to communicate the event to the
operator.
This chapter describes the message output functions.

3.1

Overview

3.1.1

The Nature of Output Messages

(1) Message Types

Process alarms and operation recording information are transmitted between ICS and
FCS stations in the form of messages.
There are the following types of messages:
System-specified: system alarms, confirmation messages, etc
User-defined messages: printed messages, operator guide messages, etc
When the ICS receives messages sent from an FCS, the ICS carries out some predefined
action. This could be a display, a printout, a buzzer warning, etc., which notifies the
operator that a status change has occurred.
Messages are further classified as shown in the following table in terms of the
information they carry.
Table C3.1.1

Message Types
Type

System-specified

System alarm message

3.5

Process alarm message

3.5

Help message

2.9

Confirmation message

2.10

Operator error message

2.9

Sequence messages

User-defined

Printed message
Operator guide message
Voice message
Request message
Event message

Annunciator message

IM 33G2C20-11E

Reference

3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.5

C3-1

(2) Message Numbers

A four-digit identification number is attached to each message. The following table
shows the relationships between numbers and message types. The last two (or three)
digits of the identification number identify the detailed meaning of the message.
Table C3.1.2

Message Number Summary (System Messages)

Message Type

Description

Message Number*
00xx
01xx

Alarm

Station failure, etc.

02xx
03xx
07xx

Status notification

Control station control status, etc.

04xx

Operation command

Database load, etc.

05xx

Operation recording

FCS load/save, etc.

06xx

Others (alarms)

Printer failure, etc.

08xx

* xx is two-digit number

Table C3.1.3

Message Number Summary (Process Messages)

Message Type

Description

Message Number*
11xx

Alarm

Process alarm, etc.

Sequence

Sequence message

13xx

Status notification

Mode status change

14xx

Voice output

Voice message

15xx

Operation recording

Data input operation recording

16xx

Operation command

Operator guide message

17xx

Request

Request message

18xx

12xx

* xx is two-digit number

Table C3.1.4

Message Number Summary (ICS-related Messages)

Message Type

Description

Message Number*

Trend pen assignment, etc.

2xxx

Builder, maintenance operation

4xxx

Operator error

Operator error message

5xxx

Confirmation

Confirmation message

6xxx

Program

For user programs

7xxx

Computer

Message from another system

8xxx

Help

Help message

9xxx

Operation recording

* xxx is three-digit number

C3-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Message Outputting

3.1.2

Message Annunciation
The ICS uses combinations of the following actions to notify the operator that a message
is received:
Display on the display panel
Electronic buzzer
LED flashing/lit
Printout
The following actions can also be taken if specified accordingly.
Processing for the operation group
Notification to operation groups in other stations
For notifications involved in each message type, see Tables C3.1.5 to C3.1.7.
The following figure gives an overview of actions taken when a message is occurred,
illustrating the typical flow of a message sent from a control station.

Control station

Message
transmission
from control
station

Request message
processing

ICS

Message reception
processing

Message
acceptance
processing

LED/buzzer control
processing

Voice processing
Message buffer

System monitor
Panel control
program

Printout/file
processing

Output to printer or file

Operation recording
Acknowledgment
operation

Figure C3.1.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Panel program

Output to CRT
display

Overview of Message Handling Flow

C3-3

3.1.3

Message Storage
Some messages sent to the ICS are stored to a historical message file and some are not.
The following tables show which message types are stored.
Table C3.1.5

Overview of ICS Messaging (System Messages)

Number

Type

Location
on Panel

Buzzer

Key with
Lit LED

Printout

File

00xx
01xx
07xx

Control station
alarm

sys

02xx

ICS alarm

sys

03xx

Other system
alarms

sys

04xx

System status
notification

sys

05xx

System operation command

sys

06xx

System operation recording

sys

08xx

Others

sys

Table C3.1.6

Overview of ICS Messaging (Process Messages)

Number

Type

Location
on Panel

Buzzer

Key with
Lit LED

Printout

File

11xx

Process alarm

alrm

12xx

Annunciator
message

alrm

13xx

Sequence
message

14xx

Status
notification

15xx

Voice message

Voice

16xx

Process operation recording

17xx

Operator guide
message

opeg

18xx

Message
request

Table C3.1.7

Overview of ICS Messaging (ICS-related Messages)

Number

Type

Location
on Panel

Buzzer

Key with
Lit LED

Printout

File

5xxx

Operator error
message

6xxx

Confirmation
message

7xxx

Message for
user program

8xxx

Computer
message

9xxx

Help message

: Available

: Not available

sys: Denotes the

key. alrm: Denotes the

key. opeg: Denotes the

key.
For the locations of a to f on a panel, see Figure C3.2.1.
C3-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Message Outputting

3.2

Message Output Formats

An occurred message is output to the operator in either of these ways: through the CRT
display or through a printer.

3.2.1

CRT Output

(1) Message Output Format and Location

The ICS displays the occurred messages on the system message area on a CRT. It also
displays detail information on the various panels and windows.
The following figure shows where the messages are output.

Figure C3.2.1

Message Display Locations on Panel

Some messages are given along with an electronic buzzer sound and blinking LED
lamps. These LED lamps, when acknowledged, either remain turned on or turn off.
Keys with flashing LED lamps
: SYSTEM keyblinks if a system alarm occurs.
: Alarm summary panel keyblinks if a process alarm occurs.
: Operator guide message panel key blinks if an operator guide message
occurs

TIP
For details on the locations of windows, see Subsection 2.1.5, Window Configuration
and Location.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C3-5

(2) Message Detail

Detail information for each message type is described in the paragraphs that follow.
(a) Process alarm
Example of indication in the system message area:
This indicates that a process alarm or an annunciator message has been occurred. Details
on the alarm or message are displayed in a process alarm window and on an alarm
summary panel.

See Also
See Subsection 2.2.5, Process Alarm Window.
See Also
See Section 1.10, Alarm Summary Panel.
(b) System alarm message
Example of indication in the system message area:
COM Error
This indicates that a system alarm message has been occurred. Details on the alarm are
displayed in a system alarm window and on a system alarm message panel.

See Also
See Subsection 2.2.6, System Alarm Window.
See Also
See Section 1.11, System Alarm Message Panel.
(c) Operator guide message
Example of indication in the system message area:
This indicates that an interactive message, such as an operation prompt (request), has
been occurred. Details on the message are displayed in an operator guide message
window and on an operator guide message panel.
See Also
See Subsection 2.2.7, Operator Guide Message Window.

See Also
See Section 1.8, Operator Guide Message Panel.
(d) Help message
Example of indication in the system message area: 5364
This indicates the number of an operator error message or help message. Details on the
message are displayed in a help window.
See Also
See Section 2.9, Help Window.

(e) Computer message

Example of indication in the system message area: CMP
This indicates a message request from another system. Details on the message request
are displayed in a computer message window.
See Also
See Section 2.2.8, Computer Message Window.

C3-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Message Outputting

(f) Message window

See Also
See Section 2.2, Message Window.
The message window displays the details of process alarms, system alarms, operator
guide messages and computer messages.
Example 1: Process alarm message
Mar. 03 10:09:03 SI0120

Agitator

NR

Mar. 03 10:09:03 SI0120

Agitator

ANS+ RECOVER

Example 2: System alarm message

0504 Mar. 25 13:53:41 Data Base Load from OPS2

File = OpeconDef.odb

0504 Mar. 25 13:50:41 Data Base Load from OPS2

File = OpeconDef.odb

Example 3: Operator guide message

 Apr. 19 13:28:39
The process of water drainage has completed.
Example 4: Computer message
Rescheduling completed
PV of X 101=0.8 is set
Main pump failed
(g) Help window

See Also
See Section 2.9, Help Window.

The help window displays details of operator error messages and help messages.
Example:
That key is not valid for current panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C3-7

3.2.2

Printer Output

(1) Specification of Printer

The printer to be used and the starting point of printing can be specified on the basis of
an operation group.

See Also
See Chapter 8, Operation Group.

(2) Message Printout Format

The following figure shows the format of a message output to a printer, using a system
alarm message as an example.
*

0303 05.18 13:50:45 FCS020 Fail

Message
Date / time
(month: date:hour:minute:second)
Message number
Message identifier (Note)

Figure C3.2.2

Message Printout Format

Note: The identifiers of messages printed at time of alarm occurrence are prefixed with
an asterisk (* ) to differentiate them from messages for alarm return-to-normal
events.
(3) Message Printout Position
Message printout positions are defined for each operation group in the operation group
definitions. Thus the messages for a given operation group can be easily identified.

See Also
See Chapter 8, Operation Group.

Operation group 1 message

3 tabs
6 tabs

Operation group 2 message

Operation group 3 message
Operation group 4 message

9 tabs

Figure C3.2.3

Message Printout Position

Note: The number of characters for each tab varies with the type of printer connected.

C3-8

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Message Outputting

3.3

Acknowledgment of Messages
Some messages require the operators acknowledgment after they are occurred. These
messages can be acknowledged in the following ways. The user must specify the way
they are acknowledged.
Group acknowledgment
Individual acknowledgment
No acknowledgment

3.3.1

Message Types and the Methods for Acknowledging Them

The following lists the message handling panels and windows where the operator can
specify the method for acknowledging messages. Since the method is specified on an
ICS basis, you cannot specify different methods for messages on the same ICS.
Operator guide message panel
Alarm summary panel
System alarm message panel
Computer message summary panel
Operator guide message window
Process alarm window
System alarm window
Computer message window
Messages on these message handling panels or windows are acknowledged separately on
an individual panel or in an individual window. Note that each panel or window has
different acknowledgment push buttons depending on the method of acknowledgment.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C3-9

3.3.2

Method of Acknowledgment

(1) Display of Messages

Select the message to be acknowledged. The following describes how messages are
displayed according to the method of acknowledgment.
When the window is opened from the system message area
The most recent message or messages are displayed in chronological order.
When individual acknowledgment is selected
The selected message is displayed.
Group acknowledgment
The messages are displayed in chronological order.
(2) Group Acknowledgment
Acknowledges the displayed messages all in a group at one time. Use the softkeys on a
panel or the keys on an operation keyboard to acknowledge the messages. Available key
combinations are:

+ [DELETE]
] + [DELETE]

Acknowledgment only.
]

Acknowledgment only.

(3) Individual Acknowledgment

Selects messages one by one to acknowledge them individually. In a window, only one
message is shown from start to finish. A message in a window is not updated even if
additional information is generated while the window is open. If the display of a
message needs to be updated, reopen the window. On a panel, select the message to be
acknowledged and then acknowledge it.

C3-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Message Outputting

3.4

Sequence Message
This section describes the flow of processing for sequence messages. Sequence message
processing is representative of the processing for the various user-definable message
types.
Sequence messages are communications sent from the FCS sequence control function to
the ICS to request some associated action (event) in that ICS.
A sequence message is sent from an FCS when a set of conditions coded for that
message are satisfied. At the ICS, the incoming messages generate outputs at predefined
destinations. These destinations can be displays, buzzers, printouts, etc., depending on
the individual message.
If operation groups have been set up, these messages will be routed to only those ICSs
in their group. The message formats, message character strings, etc., are specified with
the FCS builder.
Table C3.4.1

Sequence Message Summary

Name

Printed message

Message Format

%PRnnnn
nnnn: 1 to 1000

Function
Mainly for message outputs intended to record process
events on a printer.
Print message character string: 80 standard-width
characters
Process data: Can print up to 3 variables

Operator guide
message

Voice message

%OGnnnn
nnnn: 1 to 512
%VMnnnn
nnnn: 1 to 100

Messages to display operating guidance or phase

progress to the operator on the operator guide
message panel or operator guide window.
Displayed message character string: 70
standard-width characters
Messages that activate ICS voice outputs.
Message from FCS to ICS to activate one of the following functions. (
See also: Chapters 5 of Part B,
One-touch Operations)
O: Call up panels and windows
P: Call up panel sets

Request message

%RQnnnn

Q: Starting panel display sequences

nnnn: 1 to 200

U: Starting user programs

S: Signal notification to user programs
T: Starting, stopping, and resuming trend
E: LED flashing / lit / off
F: Executing programs by file name

Supervisory computer
event message

IM 33G2C20-11E

%CPnnnn
nnnn: 1 to 9999

Message to report event occurrence from FCS to a

supervisory computer connected to the system.

C3-11

3.4.1

Printed Message
Printed messages are those messages which, when generated, are output to a printer
connected to the ICS. A printed message is generated using the sequence control
function. This message, when generated, allows you to send up to three process data
items or two process data items plus one integer constant together with the message to
an ICS. The ICS which receives the message retrieves text to be printed from the file
using the message number, outputs the text to a printer, and stores it in a historical file.
Number of characters in a message: maximum of 80 (including the data)

Figure C3.4.1

C3-12

Flow of Printed Messages

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Message Outputting

3.4.2

Operator Guide Message

An operator guide message notifies the operator of how the process is progressing. It is
used to allow the operator to confirm the state of the process. This message is displayed
on an operator guide message panel and in an operator guide message window, allowing
the operator to acknowledge the message on the panel or window.

See Also
See Section 1.8, Operator Guide Message Panel.
See Also
See Subsection 2.2.7, Operator Guide Message Window.

(1) Generation of Messages

To generate an operator guide message, the sequence control function is used. The ICS
which has received the message displays a corresponding text on an operator guide
message panel and in an operator guide message window.

Figure C3.4.2
IM 33G2C20-11E

Generation of Operator Guide Messages

C3-13

Number of characters in a message: Maximum of 70 standard-width characters

Color of characters: User-defined
(2) Panel Access
Related panels can be specified for each operator guide message. This procedure enables
the operator to access from an operator guide message panel to any of these panels when
a message is generated.

3.4.3

Voice Message
Voice message function allows an ICS to output voice messages in accordance with the
progress of the process. For further details on voice message, see the Voice Output
Function Operation Manual (IM 33G2N15-11E).

C3-14

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Message Outputting

3.4.4

Request Message
Sequence messages are transmitted from an FCS to an ICS. The functions which are
executed when the sequence is received can be specified on the ICS. Using these
functions, the user can implement desired processing at the users discretion against the
events occurring at the FCS.
Request messages are generated using the sequence control function. The ICS which has
received the request initiates the appropriate processing using the message number.

Figure C3.4.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Generation of Request Messages

C3-15

3.5

Alarm Messages
An alarm message notifies the operator of failures or faults involved in a system or a
plant. Alarm messages include:
Process alarm message
Annunciator message
System alarm message
For further details on alarm messages, see Chapter 4, Alarm Processing.

(1) Process Alarm Message

A process alarm message allows the operator to know, through a problem in an
instrument, that there is a failure in the plant. This message is shown on an alarm
summary panel and in a process alarm window. The operator can also recognize an
alarm status on other panels, such as a control group panel, overview panel or graphic
panel, by allocating instruments to these operation panels. For more information on the
process alarm message, see Section 4.2, Process Alarms.

See Also
See Section 1.10, Alarm Summary Panel.

See Also
See Subsection 2.2.5, Process Alarm Window.

(2) Annunciator Message

Like a process alarm message, an annunciator message also notifies the operator of a
plant failure, except that it allows the user to predefine, at the users discretion, the
information that should be carried by the message. This message is output to the same
destination as the process alarm message. For more information on the annunciator
message, see Section 4.3, Annunciator Messages.
(3) System Alarm Message
A system alarm message notifies the operator of a hardware failure or communication
failure in the system. This message is shown on a system alarm message panel and in a
system alarm window. For more information on the system alarm message, see Section
4.4, System Alarms.

See Also
See Section 1.11, System Alarm Message Panel.

See Also
See Subsection 2.2.6, System Alarm Window.

C3-16

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

4.

Alarm Processing
This chapter describes the actions and processing involved in alarms raised in a plant
operation. Also refer to Section 1.10, Alarm Summary Panel, and Section
1.11,System Alarm Message Panel.

4.1

Overview

4.1.1

What Is Alarm Function?

Traditionally, most methods for indicating alarms on an instrumentation panel have been
implemented using annunciator units, usually arranged in blocks on an instrumentation
panel on the basis of a process group or process equipment. Consequently, the operator
can know the overall process visually by viewing all of the annunciator units across the
instrumentation panel. If a new alarm occurs, a buzzer sounds and a lamp turns on to
alert the operator, with the lamp for the annunciator responsible for the alarm point
starting to blink. Thus, the operator can know the details on the alarm from the position
of the annunciator and the remarks (the name of the tag and type of service in the
process) indicated on that annunciator. The importance of alarms differs depending on
the type of process and the way the system is operated. Some alarms are identified by
the action or color. According to the alarm annunciated, the operator makes a decision
on what countermeasure to take against the failure. In addition to these basic alarm
functions, the CENTUM CS system offers the functions described in the subsequent
paragraph.

4.1.2

Types of Alarm
The following types of alarm are handled by the CENTUM CS system.

(1) Process Alarm

Notifies the operator that the process has failed. This alarm is given if a tag (instrument)
fails due to a failure in the plant. The type of the alarm and information that it carries
are predefined by the system.
(2) System Alarm
Notifies the operator of a hardware failure in the system. The type of the alarm and
information that it carries are predefined by the system.
(3) Annunciator Message
Unlike the process alarm that notifies of an instrument failure, this message allows the
user to freely specify information to be carried and the time it is to be given.
The process alarm and annunciator message are output to an alarm summary panel,
while the system alarm is sent to a system alarm message panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C4-1

4.2

Process Alarms
See Also

See Section 1.10, Alarm Summary Panel.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03

10:09:03
10:09:03
10:08:30
10:07:34
10:07:34
10:07:11
10:07:11
10:05:23

Figure C4.2.1

4.2.1

SIO120
SIO120
SIO120
LIC110
LIC110
FI200
FI200
MLD300

Agitator
Agitator
Agitator
Reactor level
Reactor level
Transfer line
Transfer line
Additive A (manual)

NR
ANS+
ANS+
NR
DV+
NR
LL
H

RECOVER

RECOVER
RECOVER

Example of Process Alarms

Alarm Processing

(1) Flow of Alarm Signal

A process alarm is handled in the flow shown in the following figure.
Display on panel

FCS
Input
signal

Input
processing

Panel control
processing

ICS

TIC100 HI

Flashing of LED lamps

Message
Transmission

Message
acceptance
Receiving processing

LED/buzzer control
processing

Emission of electronic
buzzer sound

Judgment
processing
Printing
Printout/file
processing
Storage to a file

Figure C4.2.2

C4-2

Flow of an Alarm Signal

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

(2) Information Output on an Alarm

The data items shown in the following figure are output to a CRT display or a printer by
the alarm annunciation function when an alarm is raised or the system recovers from an
alarm status. Each data item is displayed and given its functionality as defined in the
figure. The figure provides an example of the flow when a process alarm is raised.

Status character string definition

(user-defined alarm status)

Determination of
the type of tag
mark (1 to 4)

Process alarm for block

Reference

Example:TIC100 entrance temp

HI alarm
Display of message

TIC100 entrance temp

HI

Process alarm

AcknowledgOccurrence ment
Recovery

Printing

Alarm priority
definition action
1 to 5

Storage to file

Reference

Alarm action

Determination of
alarm processing
level
Reference

Alarm processing
table definition
level 1 to 16

Rewarning alarm

Action upon recovery

Buzzer sound
Reference

Figure C4.2.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Operation group-action
definition alarm tone
and type

Information Given by Alarm Message

C4-3

(3) Annunciation of Alarm

A process alarm detected in an FCS is transferred to an ICS, undergoes alarm processing
on the ICS, and is then notified to the operator by means of:
Display to a panel or window
Change in display color and blinking
Flashing of LED lamp on the alarm summary panel key
Sound of an alarm buzzer
Output to a printer
Storage to a historical message file
The location and type of panel or window where alarms are output in the form of a
message are:
System message area (the topmost section of the screen)
Alarm summary panel
Process alarm window
Since an alarm summary panel specifically shows the chronological order of messages,
the process reporting function must be used in order to know the current status of a
particular message.
In addition to those three display media discussed above, other media that indicate an
alarm status by a change in the color of a tag mark or by blinking the tag mark are
described below.
The confirmation status is shown by blinking and the color shows the most important
alarm display color among the alarms occurred in a block.
For a tag mark on an instrument faceplate
Faceplate windows
Tuning panels
Control group panels
Overview panels
Graphic panels
(those where blinks with an alarm has been specified)

C4-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

(4) Message
A high limit alarm is given as the result of alarm processing if the alarm setpoint (PH) is
exceeded during monitoring of the process value using a PID block, i.e., a regulatory
control block.
02.14

08:24:58 TIC100

Inlet Temp.

HI

Tag mark Date and time Tag name Tag comment Alarm status
of alarm message
occurrence

Alarm processing has two functions: the alarm detection function that detects errors in
parameters, such as a process value (PV) or a manipulated output value (MV), and the
alarm annunciation function that notifies the ICS of a failure as a process alarm.

Alarm setpoint

Process data

Alarm
detection
function

Rewarning timer

Alarm status

Designation of
alarm detection

Status of alarm
acknowledgment

Alarm
annunciation
function

Alarm message

Designation of
the AOF state

Acknowledgment
operation

Figure C4.2.4

Alarm Processing

The alarm detection function differs depending on the control function which a particular
function block has. Each of the regulatory control, sequence control and computation
blocks has a specific alarm status of its own, which is monitored at regular intervals.
Whenever any change is found, notification is sent to the operator. For an alarm status
summary for each function block, see the Field Control Station Function Manual
(IM 33G3C10-11E).

IM 33G2C20-11E

C4-5

4.2.2

Alarm Actions
A process alarm, unlike other alarm messages, provides alarm actions taken according to
the condition under which the alarm is raised or the recovers from the alarm, whether it
is acknowledged or not, and to the importance of the instruments involved. Process
alarms for the on-screen instruments under alarm can all be acknowledged in a group.
The panels and window that allow group acknowledgment are:
Alarm summary panel

Overview panel

Control group panel

Tuning panel

Graphic panel (one where blinks with an alarm have been specified)
Process alarm window (if specified as one requiring acknowledgment)
In a process alarm window, individual acknowledgment can also be made if specified as
such. In that case, the window shows only one message. For stacked-CRT, the user can
specify individual acknowledgment also for the upper CRT. Every acknowledgment
action taken by the operator is notified to the FCS, where the status of alarm
acknowledgment (a blinking alarm) is monitored. Consequently, the status of alarm
acknowledgment can equally be identified from every ICS within the system, from
whichever ICS the acknowledgment has been made, irrespective of the operation group
specified.
(1) Types of Alarm Actions
An alarm indicator basically starts flashing at the same time an alarm is occurred and
stops flashing when the alarm is acknowledged. Alarm actions are classified into the
following types according to the different way the indicator flashes in response to the
occurrence of or recovery from an alarm or the acknowledgment of an alarm.
Locking
The indicator continues flashing until an alarm is acknowledged even if the system
has recovered from the alarm already.
Non-locking
The indicator stops flashing when the system recovers from an alarm even if the
alarm has not been acknowledged yet.
Self-acknowledgment
The system itself acknowledges an alarm at the same time the alarm is raised,
making it unnecessary for the indicator to blink.

C4-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

The following figure shows the timing chart for alarm actions.
Acknowledgment
Acknowledgment
with
key
with
key
Stop of buzzer
Stop of buzzer
with
key
with
key

Locking

Alarm signal

Symbolic representation

Alarm sound
Non-locking
Occurrence

Recovery

Acknowledgment
with
key

Stop of buzzer
with
key

Alarm signal
Note

Symbolic representation
ON

ON

Alarm sound

Self-acknowledgment
Acknowledged by the system itself
Alarm signal

Symbolic representation

Alarm sound

Note: Indicates the timing in synchronization with the alarm actions.

Colors used
Status of
acknowledgment

Alarm color
Blinks

Normal color
Lit

Blinks

Lit

Symbol

Figure C4.2.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

Timing Chart for Alarm Actions

C4-7

(2) Action upon Recovery from Alarm

A notification that a particular instrument has recovered from all of the relevant alarms
to return to the normal (NR) state is given at the same time the alarm is raised, involving
one of the three alarm actions described here. Specify the required alarm action in
combination with one of the alarm actions discussed in subitem 2 above. However, note
that this only applies to high priority alarms.
Ongoing-alarm-dependent (CENTUM XL like)
Continues the action which an alarm has been taking so far when the instrument
recovers from all of the relevant alarms. Upon return of the instrument to the normal
state, the alarm continues flashing if it was blinking before or remains turned off if it
was off already.
Non-locking (return-to-normal annunciation)
An alarm indicator starts flashing to indicate the NR state when the instrument has
recovered from all of the relevant alarms. It stops flashing even if the alarm has not
yet been acknowledged when a new alarm occurs. This alarm action is used to notify
the return of a particular instrument to the normal state.
Self-acknowledgment
The system itself acknowledges an alarm at the same time the instrument returns to
the normal state, making it unnecessary for the indicator to blink to indicate the NR
state.
Each type of alarm action can be combined with one or more of the actions upon
recovery from an alarm as follows.
Locking alarm action

Ongoing-alarm-dependent

Non-locking

Non-locking alarm action

Ongoing-alarm-dependent

Non-locking

Self-acknowledgment alarm action

C4-8

Ongoing-alarm-dependent

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

The following figures show the timing chart for these combination of alarm actions.
Combination with locking alarm action
Acknowledgment

Acknowledgment

Alarm status
Symbolic representation*1

Noraml status
1 CENTUM XL like
Representation of the NR state*2
2 Non-locking
Representation of the NR state
: Alarn buzzer output
*1: Indicates the timing in synchronization with the alarm action.
Colors used
Status of
acknowledgment

Alarm color
Blinks

Normal color
Lit

Blinks

Lit

Symbol

*2: Indicates the timing of the NR state in synchronization with alarm action.
Colors used
Status of
acknowledgment

NR state color
Blinks

Lit

Symbol

Figure C4.2.6

Locking Alarm Action in Combination with Return-to-normal

Annunciation Alarm Action

Combination with non-locking alarm action

Acknowledgment

Acknowledgment

Alarm status
Symbolic representation*1

Noraml status
3 CENTUM XL like
Representation of the NR state
4 Non-locking
Representation of the NR state
: Alarn buzzer output
*1: See Figure C4.2.6

Figure C4.2.7

Non-locking Alarm Action in Combination with Return-to-normal

Annunciation Alarm Action

Combination with self-acknowledgment alarm action

The following combination is available; however, this is exactly the same as the case
where just the self-acknowledgment alarm action alone is specified.
Self-acknowledgment + CENTUM XL like
IM 33G2C20-11E

C4-9

4.2.3

Rewarning Alarm
A rewarning alarm repeats the output of a process alarm message in a given cycle
between the time when an alarm occurs and the time when it is settled, whether it is
acknowledged or not. When a specified period of time elapses after the occurrence of an
alarm, a rewarning alarm is given if the alarm condition still persists. The rewarning
alarm can remind the operator of the fact that a high priority alarm still continues.
Whether or not to raise the rewarning alarm is defined by means of the alarm priority.
However, this applies only to high priority alarms. Using the alarm priority, specify the
alarm you want to raise for rewarning as the high priority alarm.
The interval at which a rewarning alarm is raised must be specified using the area
common definition builder for each control area.
The following figure shows the timing chart for a rewarning alarm.

Figure C4.2.8

Timing Chart for Rewarning Alarm

Another function of the rewarning alarm is to give a high priority alarm at the time an
FCS is initialized. Note that an FCS has a function to suppress (mask) the output of
alarms at the time initialization of the station starts. The following specification is
possible for each control area.
Suppress those process alarms which have occurred before the FCS shuts down so
they will not be output when the FCS starts initializing. Output only new alarm
messages as they are occurred after initialization. (Default specification)
If, in this specification, an alarm that has occurred before the FCS shuts down belongs to
the instrument to which the priority requiring a rewarning alarm has been applied, a
corresponding alarm message is also given at the time the FCS starts initializing. Alarm
priority for an instrument is defined in the alarm processing for function blocks. The
alarm messages subject to rewarning are those which belong to the instrument allocated
with high priority alarms and any annunciator messages. It is necessary, however, that
the user specify the high priority alarms as those requiring the issuance of rewarnings
for the definition of alarm priority.

C4-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

4.2.4

Representative Alarm
A representative alarm combines several alarms into a group to collectively annunciate
the status of alarms within the group. The function blocks that have such a capability
are:
Representative alarm block (ALM-R)
Valve monitoring block (VLVM)
Note that a representative alarm block also has the capability to suppress alarms.
For further details on the functions of a representative alarm, see the Field Control
Station Function Manual (IM 33G3C10-11E).

4.2.5

Priority

(1) Importance of Tags and Alarm Action

Function blocks and annunciators having tag names can each be given a level of
importance for the tag and a level of alarm processing (the alarm class). The type of tag
mark to be used depends on the importance of the tag in question; the type of alarm
action to be taken depends on the level of alarm processing set on an instrument. Alarm
actions, such as display on a panel, the sounding of buzzers, or acknowledgment of
alarms, can separately be specified for each alarm class.
Table C4.2.1

Tag Importance and Alarm Actions (in Initial State)

Tag
Importance

Tag Mark

Alarm Type

Alarm-processing Level

Type of
Alarm Action

Important tag

High priority
alarm

Locking

General tag

Medium priority
alarm

Locking

Auxiliary tag

Low priority
alarm

Non-locking

Auxiliary tag

Journal alarm

Self-acknowledgment
(Self-recovery)

Furthermore, corresponding to the alarm type, ICS executes the following alarm actions.
Table C4.2.2 Alarm Actions Based on Priority (in Initial State)
CRT
Display

Printout

High priority
alarm

Medium priority
alarm

Low priority
alarm

Alarm Type

File

Rewarning

Electronic
buzzer
Locking
sound 1

Electronic
buzzer
Locking
sound 2

Electronic
buzzer
Non-locking
sound 2

Journal alarm

Self-acknowledgment

Reference
alarm

Self-acknowledgment

: Applicable

IM 33G2C20-11E

Alarm
Sound

Alarm Action

: Not applicable

C4-11

(2) Tag Mark Response to Process Alarm Acknowledgment

The following table shows the way tag marks are indicated at the time of an alarm in
relation to the return of an instrument to a normal state and the operators
acknowledgment of the alarm.
Table C4.2.3

Figure C4.2.9

C4-12

Tag Marks and Acknowledgment Actions

Tag Marks and Process Alarms

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

4.2.6

Operations when a Process Alarm Occurs

When a process alarm is detected by the FCS and sent to the ICS, an alarm buzzer
sounds, and then the lamp (LED) on the
key and the process alarm mark in the
system message area start flashing. If the function block with the alarm has been
allocated to the on-screen panel, the corresponding display element blinks in the alarm
color.

(1) Display of Detailed Information on an Alarm

Display of alarm
Details on an alarm can be displayed on an alarm summary panel or in a process alarm
window.

See Also

See Section 1.10, Alarm Summary Panel and Section 2.2, Message Window.

Figure C4.2.10 Display of Detailed Information on Process Alarm

Figure C4.2.11

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Alarm Summary Panel

C4-13

Figure C4.2.12 Example of Process Alarm Window

Note :

denotes an annunciator message.

TIP

You can view both process alarms and annunciator messages on an alarm summary
panel or in a process alarm window.
Message format
1 03 17

17:49:35 02FIC005 Flow control 5

Tag mark Date and time Tag name

Tag comment
of alarm message occurrence
Display order number

8 03 17

17:47:53

Tank A high temp!

Tag mark Date and time

Annunciator message
of alarm message occurrence
Display order number

NR

Alarm status

ALM

Alarm status

Displayed information
The following alarm detection function items are shared by each function block. The use
or nonuse of each of these items can be defined for each function block using the
detailed specification definition panel.
Input open check (IOP, IOP-)
Input value error check (IOP)
Input high high limit/low low limit check (HH, LL)
Input high/low limit check (HI, LO)
Input velocity check (VEL, VEL-)
Deviation check (DV+, DV-)
Output open check (OOP)
Output fail check (OOP)
Output high/low limit check (MHI, MLO)
Connection fail check (CNF)
Control failure check (for PI-BLEND block only)

C4-14

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

In addition, the specification of the presence or absence of alarm detection can be

changed from another function block (specifically, the sequence control block) for each
of the alarms given to a particular instrument. For further details on the alarm detection
function discussed above and those specific to a particular function block, see the Field
Control Station Function Manual (IM 33G3C10-11E).
(2) Acknowledgment of Message
A process alarm can be acknowledged by selecting the alarm acknowledge key
with one of the following panels on display:

Alarm summary panel

Overview panel

Control group panel

Tuning panel

Graphic panel (if configured for blinks with an alarm)

When the operator acknowledges a process alarm, its display in the system message area
is erased. Previously acknowledged alarms currently on display are erased upon return to
normal status. If an unacknowledged alarm returns to normal status before being
acknowledged, selecting the alarm acknowledge key

IM 33G2C20-11E

erases the alarm.

C4-15

Figure C4.2.13 Operations when a Process Alarm is Occurred

C4-16

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

4.2.7

Alarm SuppressionAlarm-Output-Off Mode (AOF)

(1) Alarm-output-off Mode

The alarm-output-off mode (AOF) temporarily changes the way a process alarm is
notified, with the alarm detection function turned on, to a method with a lower priority
on alarm action (i.e, with a minimal requirement to notify of process alarms). This mode
sets any process alarm, including the IOP and OOP alarms, subject to alarm suppression.
The condition in which an alarm is suppressed is referred to as the AOF state. The AOF
state can be set either in a group for all of the alarms involved or separately for each of
the alarms, from one function block to another. The AOF mode can be turned on or off
through an operator concerned operation or through another function block (specifically,
the sequence control block). However, an operator concerned operation applies only to
turning on or off the AOF mode for alarms in a group. The operator can turn the mode
on or off for each instrument on the ICS. The tag mark for a function block with the
AOF mode turned on then turns blue. The alarm action for an instrument under alarm
suppression follows the alarm processing rule (system-specified) shown in the following
table as well as the rule set for regular operation.
Table C4.2.4

Alarm Actions Under Suppression

Alarm Type

CRT Display

Printout

Storage to
File

Alarm Action

Rewarning

Action Upon
Return to
Normal

Electronic
Sound

High priority
alarm

Self-acknowledgment

Alarm
dependent
(CENTUM XL
like)

Medium priority alarm

Self-acknowledgment

Low priority
alarm

Self-acknowledgment

Journal alarm

Self-acknowledgment

Reference
alarm

Self-acknowledgment

: Applicable

: Not applicable

(2) Suppression of Alarm Indication According to Alarm Priority

Using the system maintenance function, the user can select the desired display mode of
an alarm summary panel to control alarm indication by setting either high, medium, or
low priority to the alarm in question. One of the following modes can be selected for
displaying alarms on each ICS in the system.
All of the alarms (default mode)
The representative alarm for a tag
Displays the alarm with the highest priority out of those for a particular
instrument (tag) (the desired priority must be specified by the user for each
type of function block).
High priority alarms only
High and medium priority alarms

IM 33G2C20-11E

C4-17

4.3

Annunciator Messages
An annunciator message, like a process alarm, is displayed on an alarm summary panel
or in a process alarm window. The message is identical to a process alarm in terms of
alarm action and priority. This section deals only with those matters in which an
annunciator message differs from a process alarm. For basic information common to
both the annunciator message and the process alarm, see Section 4.2, Process Alarms.

4.3.1

What Is an Annunciator Message?

An annunciator message is given as a user-defined message by means of the sequence
control function. For example, the following messages may be generated as a result of
the occurrence of or recovery from an alarm.

Mar. 03 09:48:09 Transfer tank L

Mar. 03 09:50:46 Transfer tank L

ALM (upon occurrence of an alarm)

NR (upon recovery from an alarm)

The details carried by the message can be specified using the annunciator message
definition panel. The user can also define the security level or tag name for an
annunciator switch.
Number of characters permitted in a message: Up to 24 standard-width characters
(1) Messaging Action
When the annunciator switch is turned on using the sequence control function, an
annunciator message that has been generated is sent to the ICS. The message is then
shown on an alarm summary panel and output to a printer as well. Note that when an
annunciator message is generated, an electronic buzzer sounds.

Figure C4.3.1

C4-18

Generation of Annunciator Message

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

(2) Security Level

The security level determines whether or not to authorize operation or monitoring of the
annunciator switch for each mode of operation set by the operator or engineer key.
Select one of the eight levels shown in the following table. The default value is 4. The
specification is enabled only for the security level with the tag name. For the security
level without tag name, the default value 4 is used. When the value other than default is
used, always specify the tag name.
Table C4.3.1

Security Level

Level
Leve

Monitoring

Operation

OFF

ON

ENG

OFF

ON

ENG

(3) Display of Help Messages

A help message, if previously specified for an appropriate annunciator message, can be
displayed on a tuning panel by selecting the
screen. The user must specify this, as necessary.

4.3.2

key while the panel is on the

Message Format
11 Mar. 03 09:48:09 Transfer tank L
Tag mark Date and time Annunciator message
of alarm message occurrence
Display order number

ALM
Alarm status

The major function blocks that can transmit annunciator messages are:
PG-L13 (13-zone program set blockturning on only)
ALM-R (Representative alarm block)
ST16, ST16E (Sequence table block, Rule extension block)
LC16, LC64 (Logic chart block)
VLVM (16-value monitor block)
The following computation blocks allow annunciator messages to be linked with the
output, these messages being output depending on the result of the computation.
AND, OR (Logical product block, Logical sum block)
NOT (Negation block)
SRSn-S, SRSn-R (Set-dominant flip-flop block, Reset-dominant flip-flop block)
(n = 1 or 2)
WOUT (Wipeout block)
OND, OFFD (On-and off-delay timer blocks)
TON, TOFF (Rise trigger block, Fail trigger block)
GT, GE, EQ (Comparator blocks)
IM 33G2C20-11E

C4-19

Figure C4.3.2

Example of Alarm Summary Panel

.AW
Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03
Mar. 03

09:02:38
09:02:10
09:01:50
09:01:29
09:01:16

Figure C4.3.3

4.3.3

CAUT PRCS TKA HT

PRFCN TK LVL ERR
XRF LI LVL ERR
CAUT PRCS TKA HT
XRF LI LVL ERR

NR
ALM
NR
ALM
ALM

Example of Process Alarm Window

Rewarning Alarm
An ongoing annunciator message can be regenerated and made to blink again, if
necessary, by issuing a rewarning (event triggered rewarning) through a sequence table
or a logic chart. The following figure shows the timing chart for the rewarning action.
State of ongoing alarm

Rewarning command

Generated message

Generated message

Recovery message

Indication on ICS
Acknowledgment

Figure C4.3.4

Acknowledgment

Rewarning Alarm Action for Annunciator Message (Event

triggered)

An annunciator message can serve as both an event triggered rewarning and a timer
triggered rewarning which cyclically performs checks, as explained in Section 4.2.3,
Rewarning Alarm, each functioning independently. However, avoid specifying both of
these functions for the same annunciator message. Otherwise, confusion may result.

C4-20

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

4.4

System Alarms

4.4.1

What Is a System Alarm?

A system alarm, unlike the alarms or messages that notify of process related failures
discussed in Section 4.3 and the preceding sections, notifies of hardware related
malfunctions in equipment, such as an FCS or ICS, in the system, or failures in the
communication link.

4.4.2

Operations when a System Alarm Occurs

(1) Occurrence of Alarms

When a system alarm occurs, an electronic buzzer sounds and then the lamp (LED) on
the

key and the system alarm mark in the system message area start flashing.

See Also
See Section 1.11, System Alarm Message Panel, and Section 2.2, Message Window.
A system alarm is stored to a file in the hard disk and output to a printer.

Figure C4.4.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Display of Detailed Information on System Alarm

C4-21

Figure C4.4.2

Example of System Alarm Message Panel

.SY
0303 Feb.
0065 Feb.
0081 Feb.
0081 Feb.
0083 Feb.

22
22
22
22
22

14:03:59
11:39:19
11:39:19
11:39:19
11:39:19

OPS2
FCS1
FCS1
FCS1
FCS1

Fail
RBS Fail
RIO1 NODE 02 RBS RIGHT
IOM Fail
RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 02 SLOT 02
IOM Fail
RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 02 SLOT 01
IOM Configuration Error RIO1 NODE 01 UNIT 02 SLOT

DELETE

Figure C4.4.3

Example of System Alarm Window

The following table shows the changes in the status of the lamp (LED) on the system
key.
Table C4.4.1

System Alarm in Relation to Lamp on System Key

State of System Alarm

State of Lamp on System Key

Unacknowledged system alarm present

Flashing

Acknowledged system alarm present

Lit

No system alarm present

Off

(2) Message Format

A system alarm message is indicated in the following format.
180303 Feb. 22 11:25:56

FCS1

Fail

Message number Date and time System alarm message

System alarm mark
of alarm message occurrence
Display order number

C4-22

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Alarm Processing

(3) Display of Information

The details of a system alarm message can be confirmed by examining the information
carried by the message and the FCS or own ICS status. The following figure illustrates
the flow of operations involved.

Figure C4.4.4

IM 33G2C20-11E

System Alarm Acknowledge Operations

C4-23

(4) Acknowledgment of Message

The display of a system alarm message in the system message area is turned off when
the message is acknowledged by the operator. Acknowledged messages are deleted when
the system recovers from an alarm. Unacknowledged alarm messages present after
recovery from an alarm are removed when the

Figure C4.4.5

C4-24

key is selected.

Operations when a System Alarm is Occurred

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

5.

Process Reporting
The process report function is used to display and print out the current statuses of
function blocks, computing elements, etc. It is also used to display and print out process
related messages stored in the ICS historical message file. This chapter describes the
process report function.

5.1

Overview

5.1.1

Function Components
The process report function acquires records related to the system operating status. That
information can then be sent to the CRT or printer in response to operator requests.
There are the following different types of process report functions.
Process status report
The process status report shows the current system and process status. There are several
types of process status reports: instrument status, annunciator status, process I/O status,
software I/O status.
Historical message report
The historical message report provides a summary display of historical messages. For
example, this report shows the process alarms stored in the auxiliary storage medium
(the hard disk) on the ICS according to the search conditions.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-1

5.1.2

Operating Panel Hierarchy and Component Panel

(1) Panel Call

Panel call with the panel call key
Selecting the

key calls up the process status report menu panel.

Panel call with a panel name

Enter the panel name. The process status report menu panel then appears.

.PR

(2) Operating Panel Hierarchy

Selecting the process report panel
key on the operation keyboard displays the
process status report menu. This is the menu panel for the process report functions. It is
used to move to the individual operating panels, as shown in the following figure.

Figure C5.1.1

C5-2

Operating Panel Hierarchy for Process Report

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

(3) Operating Panels

There are the following types of process report operating panels.
The functions and roles of each panel are shown below.
(a) Menu panel
The menu panels are used to carry out the report output operations.
(b) Report panel
The report panels are used to display the report results on the CRT, and send them to a
printer. These are shown in the following table, along with the functions and roles of
each panel.
Table C5.1.1
Category

Process Report Function Operating Panels

Panel Name

Description

Reference

Specifies the search conditions for

outputting the following types of reports,
and switches to the historical message
report menu panel
Process status report
menu panel

1. Instrument status report

5.2

2. Annunciator status report

3. Process I/O status report
4. Software I/O status report
Process
P
status
report

Historical
message
report

IM 33G2C20-11E

Instrument status
report panel

Displays and prints the status of function

blocks that are assigned tag names (PID
control block, batch status indicator block,
sequence element block, etc.)

5.3.1

Annunciator status
report panel

Displays and prints the annunciator message statuses

5.3.2

Process I/O status

report panel

Displays and prints the statuses of contact

input/output

5.3.3

Software I/O status

report panel

Displays and prints the statuses of I/O such

as the common switches, global switches,
and annunciator messages, etc.

5.3.4

Historical message
report menu panel

Sets up the search conditions for outputting

the historical message report

5.4

Historical message
report panel

Displays and prints the historical message

report

5.5.1

C5-3

5.1.3

Shared Operations

(1) Switching between Panels

The softkeys at the bottom of each operating panel can be used to switch between the
process report panels.
Table C5.1.2
Symbol
Symbo

Softkeys for Switching between Process Report Panels

Key Name

Function
Fu
ctio

[PROCESS]

Process status
report menu

Switches to the process status report menu panel

[HISTORY]

Historical message report

menu

Switches to the historical message report menu panel

[MORE]

Calls up the search setting window

Search settings With any of USERS1 through USERS3 selected, selecting
the [MORE] key displays the selected users settings.

(2) Search Condition Settings and Report Output

There are several operations that are shared by the various report functions.
For descriptions of individual panel operations, see the appropriate sections in this
chapter.
Table C5.1.3
Category

Function Operation Softkeys

Symbol
Symbo

Key Name

Function
Fu
ctio
Command to start search.

[DISPLAY]

Search start

Command to start print

Operations

Search
condition
settings

Prints the information displayed on the CRT

(The printout outputs the full results of the
search; you cannot specify a more restrictive
print range.)

[PRINT]

Print start

[ALARM]

Alarm occurred

Commands that only those function blocks in

the search results which are currently in
alarm are to be selected and displayed

[OPM]

With operation
mark

Commands that only those function blocks in

the search results which have the operation
marks are to be selected and displayed
Calls up the search setting window

[MORE]

C5-4

This key is selected after the search conditions have been set.

Search setting

With any of USERS1 through USERS3 selected, selecting the [MORE] key displays
the selected users settings.

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

5.1.4

Search Setting Window

(1) Overview
The search setting window is used to enter detailed specifications for search conditions
when generating reports. It is called up by selecting the [MORE] key on the menu panel.
The search setting window has the following display states:
If any of the [USERS1] through [USERS3] buttons are selected, the corresponding
user-defined conditions are displayed.
If none of the [USERS1] through [USERS3] buttons are selected, a search setting
window that operates independently is displayed.

Figure C5.1.2

Example of Search Setting Window

(2) Detailed Search Conditions

In the detailed specification, the user can enter multiple stations and multiple tags as
search conditions. Areas, character strings in messages, and message numbers can also
be specified. Multiple specifications are allowed in each item.
When multiple specifications are entered in a single item, an OR operation is
performed. This means that the item condition is satisfied if any of the specified
individual conditions are satisfied.
Between items, an AND operation is performed. This means that the overall condition is satisfied only if all of the specified conditions are satisfied.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-5

Table C5.1.4

Specifications for Detailed Search Conditions

Item
Title

Specification
Specify a title to be displayed in the user-defined conditions of the
process status report menu panel

[Title]

Up to 1 (16 characters/title)

Station/area

Specify a station name, area name, or plant name

[Stn/Area]

Up to 5 conditions (8 characters/condition)

Plant ID

Specify a plant name in the plant hierarchical structure.

[PlantID]

Up to 3 conditions (16 characters/condition)

Specify a tag name

Tag

Up to 6 conditions (16 characters/condition)

[Tag]

System element names (.xxxxxxx, %xxxxxxx) may also be

specified

Batch ID

Specify a batch name which is specified in the CS Batch.

[BatchID]

Up to 3 conditions (16 characters/condition)

User

Specify a user name

[User]

Up to 3 conditions (16 characters/condition)

Input an alarm name or data status

Alarm
[Alarm]

If * is specified, entities currently in alarm become the target of

the search
Up to 5 conditions (8 characters/condition)
Performs a pattern search for a specified character string
Up to 2 conditions (24 characters/condition)
The character strings searched are as follows:
Process status report
1. Instrument report characters

Message
[Message]

The character string after tag name, tag comment, status,

mode, operation mark comment, etc.
2. Annunciator character strings
Historical message report
Historical message report character string
Message after message number or time (message number or
time is excluded)
Effective for historical message report

Message number

Input a historical message number. For details of message

number, refer to the ICS Messages (IM 33G2H02-11E)

[Message No.]

Up to 5 conditions (4 characters/condition)
0 to 9, and * can be used

Up to 3 (USERS1 to USERS3) search conditions specified here can be registered by the

user.

TIP

The items, plant ID, batch ID and user are dependent upon the hierarchy of plants
discussed in Section 3.6 of Part B, Hierarchical Plant Configuration.

C5-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

(3) Window Operations

(a) Opening the window
To call up the search setting window, select the [MORE] key on the menu panel.
(b) Closing the window
To close the window, select the close box with the cursor or a touch operation.
(c) Setting search conditions
To specify search conditions, select the name of an item on the specified window with
the cursor or a touch operation. The block cursor ( ) is displayed at the input location
on the panel. Enter conditions using the alphanumeric character keys and select the entry
key
on the operation keyboard. The wild card (*: any string) can also be used
as input. If this wild card is specified in an alarm item, this indicates a search for tags
currently in alarm.
(d) Initializing search conditions
Select the [CANCEL] button to initialize the window and delete the settings.
(e) Starting the search
Select the [DISPLAY] button to start a search under the specified search conditions.
The specified search conditions are maintained until an initialization operation is
performed.
(f) Registering user search conditions
Up to three sets of search conditions specified from the window can be registered as
user-defined conditions. Select the desired user button ( [USERS1] , [USERS2] , or
[USERS3] ) to register the conditions

TIP
When you specify the search conditions in the search setting window, the main panel
becomes invalid status. Only the conditions being specified in the window are effective.
For instance, when you want to search the process alarm message, specify the message
number 11xx of the process alarm message in the [Message No.] of the window without
selecting the [Process Alarm] in the historical message report menu panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-7

5.2

Process Status Report Menu Panel

5.2.1

Overview
The process status report menu panel is used to perform setup of the output conditions
for process status reports. It is also where reports are output to a printer or CRT. The
historical message report menu panel is accessed through this panel.
There are the following types of process status reports:
Instrument status report
Annunciator status report
Process I/O status report
Software I/O status report

Figure C5.2.1

C5-8

Display Format of Process Status Report Menu Panel and Search

Setting Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

5.2.2

Setting Output Report Conditions

(1) Selecting Output Report

Select one of the following items from the menu panel:
TAG:

Instrument status report

ANN: Annunciator status report

PI/O:

Process I/O status report

SI/O:

Software I/O status report

Only one item can be selected at a time.

(2) Setting Output Conditions
After selecting the desired report, perform the output condition setup:
1

Specify the search conditions.

If printing the output, specify the printer.

See the following table for detailed information concerning search and display
conditions for individual reports.
Table C5.2.1

Specifications for Report Search Conditions

Report Type /
Display

Search/Display Target

Instrument status
report
TAG

Search/Display Conditions
Specify the following search conditions :
1. Station name (* and ALL can be used)

Function blocks having tag

names

2. Tag name (* can be used)

3. User-defined conditions
4. Whether currently in alarm
5. Whether operation mark present or absent

Annunciator status
report
ANN

Specify the following search conditions :

1. Station name (* and ALL can be used)
Annunciator

2. Tag name (* can be used)

3. User-defined conditions
4. Whether currently in alarm

Process I/O status

Contact input
report
Contact output
PI/O
Software I/O
status report
SI/O

IM 33G2C20-11E

Common switch (%SW)

Global switch (%GS)

Specify the following search conditions :

1 St
1.
Station
ti name
2. User-defined conditions

Annunciator message (%AN)

C5-9

(3) Search Condition Detail Specifications for Each Report

The following table shows the relationship between report types, and the search items
for which specifications can be entered in the search setting window.
Table C5.2.2

Report Types and Items for which Specifications can be Entered

Report Name
Instrument status
report
Annunciator status
report
Process I/O status
report
Software I/O status
report

: Applicable

5.2.3

Stn /
Area

Plant
ID

Tag

Batch
ID

User

Alarm

Message

Message
No.

: Not applicable

Specifying Search Conditions

(1) Specifying Search Conditions for the Instrument Status Report

(a) Report specification
To request an instrument status report, select the [TAG] button on the menu panel.
Use the cursor or a touch operation.
(b) Station specification
To specify the station name, use the cursor or a touch operation to select the [ ] or
[ ] button on the panel until the desired station name appears, or enter the station
name from the keyboard. If ALL is specified, all stations are targeted in the search. The
search setting window can be used to enter more than one setting.
Select one of the following:
*: All of the stations that belong to the operation group in OFF mode.
ALL: All of the stations registered in system independently of operation group.
System-specified station name
(c) Tag specification
To specify desired tag name(s) for the search, first select the tag name input box to
display the block cursor. Then use the one-line input method to enter the tag name. If an
* is selected, then all of the tags are included in the search. Multiple specifications can
be made from the search setting window.

C5-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

(d) User-defined conditions specification

See Also
See Subsection 5.1.4, Search Setting Window.
User-defined conditions are defined from the search setting window. Use the cursor or a
touch operation to select the desired item from the following conditions:
NON : No user definition
USERS1 : User-defined condition 1
USERS2 : User-defined condition 2
USERS3 : User-defined condition 3
(e) Alarm specification
If the [ALARM] key is selected when the search is performed, only function blocks
currently in alarm are included in the search.
(f) Operation mark specification
Select the [OPM] key to only search for function blocks with an operation mark.
(g) Detailed search condition specification
Select the [MORE] key to open the search setting window to specify detailed search
conditions. Use the following reference for instructions on operating the search setting
window.

See Also

See Subsection 5.1.4, Search Setting Window.

(2) Specifying Search Conditions for the Annunciator Status Report
Specify the following for the search.
Station name
Tag name
User-defined conditions
Alarm setting
Detailed search conditions
The operations used to specify these search conditions are the same as those for the
instrument status report.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-11

(3) Specifying Search Conditions for the Process I/O Status Report
Specify the following for the search:
Station name
The operations used to specify the search condition are the same as those for the
instrument status report.
(4) Specifying Search Conditions for the Software I/O Status Report
Specify the following for the search:
Station name
The operations used to specify the search condition are the same as those for the
instrument status report.

5.2.4

Specifying Destination Printer

To specify the destination printer, use the [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the desired
printer name from the following choices: prt, lbp, msg1 to msg4.
For printing with the serial printer, select [prt]. The printing by selecting msg1 to msg4
is also available, however, because the turning page for the message printout is also
executed automatically, the skip process for perforation of the printer form cannot be
executed correctly.
The printout printer assignments for the individual printers are listed on the own station
status display panel.

See Also

See Section 1.6 of Part D, Own Station Status Display Panel.

C5-12

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

5.3

Process Status Report

5.3.1

Instrument Status Report Panel

(1) Overview
The instrument status report panel is used to search and display the current statuses of
the function blocks that have tag names. Up to 20 function block reports can be
displayed on the panel. If there are additional pages in a report, * More * is displayed at
the bottom of the panel.

Figure C5.3.1

Display Format of Instrument Status Report Panel

(2) Display Items

The items listed next all appear on the instrument status report panel.
Tag mark (this is not output to printer)
Tag name
Tag comment
Alarm status
If more than one search condition or an * (wild card) is specified, the single status
of the highest importance is indicated.
Process value (PV)
Engineering unit
Block mode
Service ON/OFF (applicable only to the existing systems such as CENTUM-XL and
CENTUM-V which can be connected to CENTUM-CS)
Operation mark comment
IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-13

 System tag name

11

Print start time (appears only on printout)

(3) Change of Display

Scroll operation
If all the reports cannot be contained on a single page, * More * is displayed in the
bottom right corner of the panel. The reports can be scrolled by the scroll operation.
Page change
Although the scroll operation changes reports one by one, the page change operation
changes the display on a page basis (20 reports).
Panel switching
Using softkeys, the operator can switch to either a process status report menu panel
or a historical message report menu panel.

C5-14

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

5.3.2

Annunciator Status Report Panel

(1) Overview
The annunciator status report panel is used to search and display the current statuses of
the annunciator messages. Up to 20 annunciator messages can be displayed on the panel.
If there are additional pages in a report, * More * is displayed at the bottom of the
panel.

Figure C5.3.2

Display Format of Annunciator Status Report Panel

(2) Display Items

The items listed next all appear on the annunciator status report panel.
Tag mark (this is not output to printer)
Annunciator message
System tag name
Print start time (appears only on printout)
(3) Change of Display
Scroll operation
If all the reports cannot be contained on a single page, * More * is displayed in the
bottom right corner of the panel. The reports can be scrolled by the scroll operation.
Page change
Although the scroll operation changes reports one by one, the page change operation
changes the display on a page basis (20 reports).
Panel switching
Using softkeys, the operator can switch to either a process status report menu panel
or a historical message report menu panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-15

5.3.3 Process I/O Status Report Panel

(1) Overview
The process I/O status report panel displays the current statuses of the contact inputs and
contact outputs. Status information for up to 1024 points can be displayed on the panel.
The displayed statuses are updated in a given cycle.

Figure C5.3.3

Display Format of Process I/O Status Report Panel

(2) Display Items

The items listed next all appear on the process I/O status report panel.
Element type
Element number
Element status (1 for ON or . for OFF)
Print start time (appears only on printout)
(3) Change of Display
Station change
Using the [STATION] softkey, the operator can switch to the panel for a different
station.
Page change
If there are more than 1024 allocated points, the
used to switch to other pages.

and

keys can be

TIP
Using the testing function, the operator can switch to a process I/O entry panel. For
further details, see the Test Function Manual (IM 33G4N10-11E).
C5-16

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

5.3.4

Software I/O Status Report Panel

(1) Overview
The software I/O status report panel displays the I/O statuses of the following internal
switch types.
Common switches (%SW)
Global switches (%GS)
Annunciator messages (%AN)
Annunciator messages are shown on an area basis.
Status information is displayed on an individual panel for each switch type. Element
status for up to 1000 points can be displayed on the panel.

Figure C5.3.4

Display Format of Software I/O Status Report Panel

(2) Display Items

The items listed next all appear on the software I/O status report panel.
Element type
Element number
Element status (1 for ON or . for OFF)
Print start time (appears only on printout)

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-17

(3) Change of Display

Switching between internal switches
Changes to the switch for which the software I/O status is reported. Select the softkey
appropriate for the switch, either a common switch, global switch or annunciator.
Station, area change
Using the [STATION] softkey, the operator can switch to the panel for a different
station or area.
Page change
If a report contains data items that cannot be displayed on a single page, the
and

keys can be used to switch to other pages.

TIP
Using the testing function, the operator can switch to a software I/O entry panel. For
further details, see the Test Function Manual (IM 33G4N10-11E).

C5-18

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

5.4

Historical Message Report Menu Panel

5.4.1

Overview
The historical message report function is used to search through the operation records
and process alarms stored in the ICS hard disk. It then displays and prints a report
containing previously generated messages associated with various events relating to the
system or process, depending on the users search criteria.
The historical message report menu panel is the operating panel used to set up and
output the historical message reports. The process status report menu panel can be
accessed from this panel.

Figure C5.4.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Display Format of Historical Message Report Menu Panel and

Search Setting Window

C5-19

5.4.2

Setting Output Report Conditions

(1) Setting Output Conditions

The following output conditions are specified at the menu panel:
1

Specify the report content, and the range to be output.

If printing the report, specify the printer.

See the following table for detailed information concerning search and display
conditions for the historical message report.
Table C5.4.1

Specifications for Historical Message Report Search Conditions

Search/Display Target

Search/Display Conditions

Specify the following message types

(Can specify more than one)
Specify the following search conditions:

1. Process alarm message

2. Status change message
3. Process operation record message

1. Station name (* or ALL can be used)

4. Sequence message

2. Tag name (* can be used)

5. Operator guide message

3. User-defined condition (1 condition can be

specified from among 3)

6. Utility operation record message

7. Builder operation record message
8. System operation record message
9. System alarm message

4. Search direction
5. Search range
6. Search condition detail specification

10. All messages

TIP
If an operation group has been set up, the search will be restricted to stations in that
group that are in the same operational mode.
(2) Search Condition Detail Specifications for Each Reports
The following table shows the relationship between message types and the search items
that are the target of the detailed specifications.
Table C5.4.2
Message Type
Process alarm message
Status change message
Process operation record message

Message Types and Items for which Specifications can be Entered

Stn/Area

Plant ID

Tag

Batch ID

User

Alarm

Message

Message No.

Sequence message
Operator guide message
Utility operation record message
Builder operation record message

System operation record message

System alarm message
All messages

: Applicable

C5-20

: Not applicable

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

(3) Message Storage Format

The following table shows how historical messages are stored on the ICS hard disk.
Table C5.4.3

Historical Message Storage Specifications

Item
Storage format

Rotary format (when file becomes full, new data are written over
oldest data)

Number of messages stored

Up to 10,000 messages

Note:

5.4.3

Specification

The maximum number of messages that can be stored varies with the length of each message
generated, usually ranging from 6000 to 7000 messages on an average.

Specifying Search Conditions

(1) Report Specification

Use the cursor or a touch operation to select the types of messages to be targeted by the
search. More than one type of message can be specified at the same time.
If ALL MESSAGES is the search target selected, messages not attributed to the
operation group are also included in the search.
Select from the following choices displayed on the menu panel:
Process Alarm: Process alarm message
Status Changed: Status change message
Operation: Process operation record message
Sequence: Sequence message
Guidance: Operator guide message
Utility: Utility operation record message
Builder: Builder operation record message
Maintenance: System operation record message
System Alarm: System alarm message
All: All messages
Note: There are no messages available for the search items, Utility and Builder.
(2) Station Specification
To specify the station name, use the cursor or a touch operation to select the [ ] and
[ ] buttons on the panel until the desired station name appears, or enter the station
name from the keyboard. If ALL is specified, all stations are targeted in the search. The
search setting window can be used to enter more than one setting.
Select one of the following.
*
ALL
System-specified station name

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-21

(3) Tag Specification

To specify desired tag name(s) for the search, first select the tag name input box to
display the block cursor. Then use the one-line input method to enter the tag name. If an
* is selected, then all of the tags are included in the search. Multiple specifications can
be made from the search setting window.
(4) User-defined Conditions Specification

See Also
See Subsection 5.1.4, Search Setting Window.

User-defined conditions are defined from the search setting window. Use the cursor or a
touch operation to select the desired item from the following conditions:
NON: No user definition
USERS1: User-defined condition 1
USERS2: User-defined condition 2
USERS3: User-defined condition 3
(5) Search Direction Specification
Select one of the following softkeys to specify a search direction:
Select [BACKWARD] to search backward into the past from the specified time.
Select [FORWARD] to search forward to the present from the specified time.
(6) Search Start Time and End Time Specification
The search start time and end time are specified. If no date and time are specified, all
messages in the file are searched. Use the following procedures and formats to specify
start and end times: first select the start time or end time box to display the block cursor.
Then use the one-line input method to enter the date and time. Be sure to separate the
numbers with decimal points.

Figure C5.4.2

C5-22

Date and Time Setting Operation

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

(7) Detailed Search Condition Specification

Select the [MORE] key to open the search setting window to specify detailed search
conditions. Use the following reference for instructions on operating the search setting
window.

See Also
See Subsection 5.1.4, Search Setting Window.

5.4.4

Specifying Destination Printer

To specify the destination printer, use [ ] and [ ] buttons to select the desired
printer name from the following choices: prt, lbp, msg1 to msg4
For printing with the serial printer, select [prt]. The printing by selecting msg1 to msg4
is also available, however, because the turning page for the message printout is also
executed automatically, the skip process for perforation of the printer form cannot be
executed correctly.
The printout printer assignments for the individual printers are listed on the own station
status display panel.

See Also
See Section 1.6 of Part D Own Station Status Display Panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-23

5.5

Historical Message Report

5.5.1

Historical Message Report Panel

(1) Overview
The historical message report panel displays the messages searched according to the
search criteria specified from the historical message report menu panel. Up to 20
messages of a report can be displayed on one panel page. If there are additional pages in
a report, * More * is displayed at the bottom of the panel.
The following figure is an example of process alarms displayed in a historical message
report.

Figure C5.5.1

Display Format of Historical Message Report Panel

(2) Display Items

The items listed next all appear on the historical message report panel.
Message number
Date and time of message occurrence
Historical message:
Display: 80 standard-width characters
Printout: 100 characters
Print start time (appears only on printout)

C5-24

IM 33G2C20-11E

5. Process Reporting

(3) Change of Display

Scroll operation
If all the reports cannot be contained on a single page, * More * is displayed in the
bottom right corner of the panel. The reports can be scrolled by the scroll operation.
Page change
Although the scroll operation changes reports one by one, the page change operation
changes the display on a page basis (20 reports).
Panel switching
Using softkeys, the operator can switch to either a process status report menu panel
or a historical message report menu panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C5-25

6. Trend Recording

6.

Trend Recording
The trend recording function acquires and records process data. This data is then displayed in trend graph formats so that the operator can monitor the process state. This
chapter presents an overview of trend recording.
Also refer to Section 1.6, Trend Group Panel, Section 1.7, Trend Point Panel, and
Section 2.4, Trend Window.

6.1

Overview

6.1.1

Types
Trend recording presents the operator with a visual feel for process conditions. It acquires and records process data and displays it as trend graphs. The data acquired can
also be used in the management of plant operations. There are the following types of
trend recording.

(1) Realtime Trend

The user specifies the variables to be acquired (pen assignments), and the acquisition
mode, sampling period, and recording time. The acquired trend data are stored in the
hard disk to allow the user to display the data on a trend group panel or trend point
panel or in a trend window.
(2) Saved Trend
This trend records realtime trend data in the hard disk saved trend area. As with a
realtime trend, the saved trend can be displayed on a trend panel, or in a trend window.
(3) Other Station Trend
This trend displays realtime trend data acquired by another ICS on a trend panel or in a
trend window.
(4) Tuning Trend
On a tuning panel, it causes the ICS to begin data acquisition and trend display for the
PV and certain other values of that function block. Acquisition is started and stopped
automatically.

See Also

See Section 1.5, Tuning Panel, and Section 2.5, Tuning Trend Window.
The following table lists types of trend recording and their characteristics.
Table C6.1.1
Type

Trend Recording Types

Data Recorded

Realtime trend

User-defined

Saved trend

1 Acquisition method and amount o

1.
of
data to store are specified in builder

Numeric data

Other station
trend
Tuning trend

IM 33G2C20-11E

Data Acquisition
q
Method Specification

2. Pen assignments are specified

from the operator utility
PV (CPV), SV,
MV (SW), FV

Determined by the system automatically

Data Disp
Display
ay Scree
Screen

Trend group panel

Trend point panel
Trend window

Tuning panel

C6-1

The following subsections describe trend recording data acquisition functions. For descriptions of the panel displays, panel calls and how to use them, see the individual
panel and window descriptions.

6.1.2

Trend Recording Data Flow

The following figure illustrates the flow of trend recording data.
Control
station

Data
acquisition

Trend recording

Trend graph display

Tuning trend

Tuning panel

Pen
assignment
Trend start/stop

Trend window

Realtime trend
Trend point panel
Trend group
panel
Saved trend

From other ICS

Figure C6.1.1

6.1.3

Other station
trend

To other ICS
Application

Trend Recording Data Flow

Display Formats for Acquired Data

Acquired data is displayed as a trend graph. This subsection describes the display
formats of trend graph. For further details on display formats, see Section 1.6, Trend
Group Panel.

(1) Analog Trend Graph

For analog trend graphs, the acquired data is displayed using a data axis of 0% to 100%
of signal span.

Figure C6.1.2
C6-2

Example of Analog Trend Graph

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Trend Recording

(2) Discrete Trend Graph

The discrete trend graph is used to trend ON/OFF switch values. It displays discrete
variables with fixed offsets on the data axis, using a step width of 6 percent per unit of
value.

Figure C6.1.3

Example of Discrete Trend Graph

(3) Program Pattern

The program pattern displays the pattern of a program set block. It is displayable only as
a tuning trend.

Figure C6.1.4

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Program Pattern

C6-3

6.2

Data Acquisition Function

6.2.1

Recorded Data and Data Acquisition Format

(1) Recorded Data

Trend recording operates on data items that take numeric values (PV, SV, MV, FV, etc.).
(2) Data Acquisition Format
The acquisition mode, sampling period, recording time (number of data samples), and
amount of data to be retained are defined in 16-page units (128 recording points).
There are the following trend data acquisition modes.
Rotary Trend
This method stores acquired data cyclically. When the available recording area
becomes full, new data is recorded one sample at a time over the previously acquired
data samples. This erases the oldest data, beginning from the oldest data sample.
Data acquisition starts automatically when the ICS goes into operation. This mode
does not delete any of the previous data at the start of acquisition.
Batch Trend
a. Automatic stop
This method allows data acquisition to be started and stopped on command. If no
stop command is given, data acquisition stops when the available recording area is
full.
b. Continuous acquisition
This method also allows data acquisition to be started and stopped on command.
However, if no stop command is given, data acquisition continues when the available
recording area is full. As with a rotary trend, the oldest data is erased and overwritten
one sample at a time by new data.

6.2.2

Data Acquisition Methods

(1) Trend Block

The sampling period is set for unit groups of 128 recording points (pens). The base
recording time is the time required to acquire 1440 samples. Data recording area is measured in block units (1 block = 128 recording points x 1440 samples).
(2) Data Sampling Period
Table C6.2.1
Sampling period

Sampling Periods
1 sec, 10 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min and 10 min

The sampling period is set in common for unit groups of 128 recording points.
The trends with a sampling period of one or ten seconds are referred to as high-speed
trends.
(3) Relationship between Recording Data Time and Blocks Used
The recording time is the time required to acquire 1440 points of data. The sampling
period is set for unit groups of 128 points. Recording time is allocated in units of one
block (128 recording points).
C6-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Trend Recording

By connecting multiple blocks in the time axis direction, the available recording time
can be extended in integer multiples of one block. Time can be extended for up to six
times the base recording time, as shown in the following table. This feature is useful for
recording a prolonged period.
Since doubling the recording time uses two blocks of the available recording area, it also
reduces the number of different points that can be recorded by 128 points (one blocks
worth).
Block containing acquisition assignments for pens
Trend A
group

Block 1

Block 2

Trend B
group

Block 7

Block 8

Block 3

Block 4

Block 5

Block 6

Time Axis direction (maximum of 6 blocks)

Trend A group : Composed of 6 blocks
Trend B group : Composed of 2 blocks
Note: Specify the number of sampling points as 1440 x number of blocks when setting the number
using the ICS builder. Conceptually, the recording points of the same data item are allocated
to each block; that is, the data item allocated to the 128 recording points of block 1 is the same
as that allocated to blocks 2 through 6.

Figure C6.2.1
Table C6.2.2

Number of
Poi
ts
Points

Block Connection
Relationships between Sampling Periods, Recording Time Span
and Number of Blocks Used
Recording
g Time
(Number of Blocks Connected in Time Axis Direction)

Sampling
Samp
ing
Period
1 second

(1 trend block)

24 min

48 min

5
120 min

72 min

96 min

4 hours

8 hours

12 hours

16 hours

20 hours

1 minute

1 day

2 days

3 days

4 days

5 days

6 days

2 minutes

2 days

4 days

6 days

8 days

10 days

12 days

5 minutes

5 days

10 days

15 days

20 days

25 days

30 days

10 minutes

10 days

20 days

30 days

40 days

50 days

60 days

10 seconds
128 recording
points

144 min
24 hours

(4) Relationship between Maximum Number of Recording Points and Blocks Used
The following table shows the relationship between the maximum number of recording
points and the number of blocks used.
Table C6.2.3

Relationship between Sampling Periods, Recording Time Span and

Number of Blocks Used

Number of Blocks
Proportional to Recording Time

Number of
B
ocks *
Blocks

Number of
Recording
P i
Points

128

256

10

12

512

12

16

20

768

12

18

1024

16

16

2048

16

18

2304

18

*:

IM 33G2C20-11E

Comment
6
High-speed trend limited to 256 recording
points maximum

Maximum number of recording points is 2304

Typical values are shown. The number can be increased on a block basis (128 recording points
[pentraces] per block).

C6-5

(5) Data Acquisition Using Double-length Data

After trend acquisition, data is normally stored at six significant digits of resolution. If
this is too few significant digits, specify double length data. When double-length data is
specified, each pen uses two pens worth of area (the next consecutively numbered pens
area is used).

6.2.3

Trend Recording Memory Capacity

The following table shows the maximum for the number of trend recording pens, and for
memory capacity.
Table C6.2.4

Trend Recording Memory Capacity

Item

Specifications

Number of
acquisition pens

Maximum number of recording points:

cludes high-speed trends)

2304 recording points (18 blocks; in-

Number of points with a 1-second or 10 second period: 256 recording points

(2 blocks) maximum

Maximum memory Maximum of 20 blocks (where one block is 1440 samples by 128 pens; includes
capacity
saved trends)

6.2.4

Trend Block and Trend Group Number (Page Number)

The basic relationship between trend block and trend group number (page number) is
fixed as shown in the following table. Any of these trend blocks can also be assigned to
other station ICS trend data.
Table C6.2.5

Trend Block and Trend Group Numbers (Page Numbers)

Trend Block Number

Page Number

Trend Block Number

Page Number

1 to 16

21

321 to 336

17 to 32

33 to 48

46

721 to 736

49 to 64

47

737 to 752

65 to 80

48

753 to 768

49

769 to 784

20

305 to 320

50

785 to 800

The following figure is an example of six blocks connected to extend the recording time.
Trend block

Page number

Storage of acquired data

1 to 16

17 to 32
33 to 48

Data for one block

2
3
4

Data for six blocks

5
6
1

C6-6

Data for one block

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Trend Recording

6.2.5

Batch Trend
Trend recording which functions in the batch mode is called batch trend recording.

(1) Types of Batch Trends

There are the following types of batch trend recording: automatic stop and continuous
acquisition.
Automatic stop
This mode allows data acquisition to be started and stopped on command. If no stop
command is given, data acquisition stops when the available recording area is full.
Continuous acquisition
This mode also allows data acquisition to be started and stopped on command.
However, if no stop command is given, data acquisition continues even after the
available recording area is full. As with a rotary trend, the oldest data are erased and
overwritten one sample at a time by the new data.
(2) Reference Patterns
With batch trends, users can assign a reference pattern for each recording point. This
pattern serves as a simulation for an actual trend graph, displayed together with the trend
data at the same time. For example, the reference pattern for a batch temperature control
application could be used to display the pattern of increase and decrease in the temperature set point. This is useful when monitoring how the temperature is being controlled.
Trend
data

Reference pattern

Figure C6.2.2

Batch Trend and Reference Pattern

Assigning a reference pattern consumes one trend points worth of data recording area
per reference pattern. This means that the available recording pen data area is reduced
by that amount. Thus recording time is half that for a normal trend.
Whether or not reference patterns are to be used is specified in block units (128 point
unit groups).
The reference patterns for batch trends are recorded using the operator utility.

See Also
See Section 3.11 of Part D, Trend Reference Pattern Registration Panel.

(3) Data Acquisition

Batch trend recording starts acquiring data upon an external start command. Given the
command, batch trend recording first clears out stored data and then starts acquiring new
data.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C6-7

6.2.6

Saved Trend
Any desired trend or trends among the realtime trends can be saved to the hard disk
files. They are saved in units of one trend block (128 recording points) or one group (8
recording points). The stored data is called a saved trend. The saved trend data can be
recalled and displayed at any time.
The storage area for saved trends is allocated from among the 20 blocks provided for
trend recording. The saved trends can be specified on the operator utility trend data save
panel.

See Also
See Section 3.10 of Part D, Trend Data Save Panel.

6.2.7

Effect of Power Failure on Trend Recording

If power fails, then the system stores one sample of data as a power failure indicator.
The sample contains the time that power failed, and the number of data samples lost as a
result of the power failure. After ICS startup, data acquisition resumes in approximately
five minutes.

C6-8

IM 33G2C20-11E

6. Trend Recording

6.3

Handling Data Acquired by Other Stations

An ICS can display data from another ICS if they can communicate via an E-net or
Ethernet. (E-net has priority over Ethernet.) Trend data from other stations is displayed
in the same way as trend data from the owing station. The trend data display can have
a maximum of up to 50 blocks, including the 20 blocks of data that own ICS has
acquired.
The data to be displayed from another ICS is specified from the ICS builder trend configuration definition panel. The station name of the other ICS and the block numbers are
specified one block at a time.
Trend data from the other ICS is displayed by specifying the page number for those
trend group.

TIP

For specifying the data to be displayed, other ICSes and own ICSes may exist together.
(Example)
Block1: Own ICS data
Block2: Other ICS data
Block3: Other ICS data
Block4: Own ICS data
Furthermore, other ICS data is not always required to be allocated to block number 21
and after.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C6-9

7. Graphics

7.

Graphics
Graphics is the facility that allows the user to draw pictures at the users discretion. Not
only can the user draw still pictures, but the user can also modify the colors and/or
shapes of graphic images or characuCs according to the state the process is in as well as
have these display elements blink. Process data can be displayed along with those
images.

Figure C7.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Graphic Panel

C7-1

7.1

Overview
This section presents you with an overview of ICS graphics.

7.1.1

Graphic Components
The components that configure graphic images are shown below.

(1) Primitives
The minimum unit of a component that configure a graphic is called a primitive. The
following table lists major primitives.
Table C7.1.1

Primitives

Primitive

C7-2

Function

Drawing Sample

Text

Displays a character string at the specified position.

Heater A

Fill Area

Fills a specified area.

(Maximum number of vertices = 64)

Polyline

Draws a line as a series of line segments connecting

sequentially specified points. It is also possible to specify that alternate line segments be skipped.
(Maximum number of vertices = 128)

Polymarker

Displays markers at the specified positions.

(Maximum 128 points/primitive)

Rectangle

Draws a rectangle or square. Inside of figure can be

filled if desired.

Circle

Draws a circle. Two methods: specify radius, or specify

diameter. Inside of figure can be filled if desired.

Fan

Draws a fan (sector). Inside of figure can be filled if

desired.

Arc

Draws a circular arc.

Ellipse

Draws an ellipse. Inside of figure can be filled if desired.

Pattern Block

Draws a user-defined graphic pattern at a specified

position. (Maximum of 128 blocks / project)

Process Data Bar

Displays control station process data as rectangular bar

or circular bar at specified position.

see subsection 7.4.1

Process Data
Character

Displays control station process data and formula as

numerical or character string at specified position

see subsection 7.4.2

Graphic Data

Displays relationships of multiple process data values in

graphic form.
Line-segment graph
Step graph
see subsection 7.4.3
Bar graph
Radar chart graph
two-dimensional graph (X-Y graph)

Touch Target

Defines a function as being associated with a specified

area, so that it can be executed by a touch panel or cursor selection operation.

see subsection 7.6.1

Push Button

Defines a function for a push button at a particular position, so that it can be executed by pressing that pushbutton switch on the operating panel.

see subsection 7.6.1

Softkey

Defines functions for 8 softkeys (at fixed positions)

see subsection 7.6.2

Instrument

Displays an instrument faceplate at a specified position. see subsection 7.6.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

Primitive

Function

Drawing Sample

Window Display

Displays a window in a specified area automatically in

response to external conditions.

see subsection 7.6.3

Group Setting

Sets or changes simultaneously as a group the values

of multiple data items displayed at various positions
around a graphic panel (must be on same panel).

see subsection 7.6.4

Message

Automatically displays on the graphic panel the most

recent message occurred (alarm summary, operator
guide message, system alarm message) by the system.

see subsection 7.6.5

Operating Sequence
(OSP Instruction)

One of the electrical control support functions. For details see the Operation Sequence Support Package
Manual (IM 33G2N21-11E).

(2) ISA Symbols

The ISA symbols shown in the following figure can also be used as primitives. These
are the standard symbols prescribed by the ISA for instrumentation applications.

Figure C7.1.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

ISA Symbols

C7-3

(3) Graphic Components and an Example of a Configured Panel

Primitives can be used in varied combinations, so the following capabilities are made
available to the user.
Depict instruments, plant equipment, and piping using combinations of primitives
such as lines and circles.
Display live process data on graphic panels. Selectable display formats include bar
(rectangular or circular), character, and graphic data representations.
Define panel manipulation and switching functions for graphic panels. For example,
you can define functions for the callup of instrument faceplates or windows, or
switching to other panels. You can also set up definitions for the automatic display
of messages as they are occurred.
Define changes in primitive shapes and attributes according to process or system
conditions. For example, you can have primitives change color, change between
continuous-on and blinking statuses, change in displayed shape, change to inverse
video, or shift display position.
With functions such as the above, you can create graphic panels that make operation and
monitoring simple and intuitive.

Figure C7.1.2

C7-4

Example of Graphic Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.1.2

Panel Name
The user can give a graphic panel or graphic window a desired name, in addition to the
system-specified name, at the users option.
System-specified name
Graphic panel:

.GRxxxx

Graphic window:

.GWxxxx

xxxx : page

User-defined name
Specify using no more than 16 alphanumeric characters.

7.1.3

Sizes of Panels Displayed

A panel showing graphics can be one of the following sizes.
Window size
Half size
Full size (Detail size)
1.5 times larger
Quad size
4 times width
4 times height
Window size

Half size

60 to 442 dots

Full size

442 dots

943 dots

90 to 640 dots

640 dots

1280 dots

1.5 times larger

Quad size

4 times width

4 times height

943 dots
1180 dots

3772 dots

1886 dots
5120 dots

1600 dots
2560 dots
1280 dots
: indicates the size of a full size panel.

Figure C7.1.3

Panel Sizes

TIP
To view a panel 1.5 or 4 times larger on the screen, you must have installed the optional
software package, SIH4120 Graphic 4 Times Size Panel Display Package, in the ICS.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-5

7.1.4

Panel Call
The following table lists the names of panels that have been resized. These names are
then used to call up panels of the corresponding sizes on the ICS.
Table C7.1.2

Panel Callup Name

Panel Size
Window

.GWXXXX

Half size

.GRXXXX

Full size

.GRXXXX

1.5 times larger

.GRXXXX

Quad size

.GRXXXX

4 times width

.GRXXXX

4 times height

.GRXXXX

XXXX : page

C7-6

Name Called
-H

: space

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.2

Common Attributes
A graphic is composed of a variety of primitives. This section describes the attributes
common to these primitives. There are three common attributes: color, line, and interior
style.

7.2.1

Color
The ICSs graphics allow the following colors shown in the table below.
Table C7.2.1

7.2.2

CRT Display Colors

Black

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue

Magenta

Cyan

White

Steel blue

Pink

Spring
green

Orange

Yellow
green

Violet

Deep sky
blue

Gray

Line

Figure C7.2.1

Example of Line

The user can select a desired line style and line width.
(1) Line Style
The following line styles are allowed:

Double-dotted chain line

Single-dotted chain line
Dotted line
Dashed (broken) line
Solid line

Figure C7.2.2

Line Styles

(2) Line Width

There are several different line widths: 1 dot through to 8 dots wide.
1 dot line
2 dot line
3 dot line
4 dot line
5 dot line
6 dot line
7 dot line
8 dot line

Figure C7.2.3
IM 33G2C20-11E

Line Widths
C7-7

(3) Disjoint
Figure C7.2.4

Disjoint Line

Disjoint is a function to make the skip of the line at intervals of one point. It is
convenient to disjoint the line when the valve etc. exist in a piping line as shown in the
following example.

Figure C7.2.5

Use of Disjoint Line (Example)

(4) Arrow
Not only displays a line as a straight line, but displays an arrow at the end of the line.

Figure C7.2.6

7.2.3

Arrow

Interior Style
The user can specify a desired interior style and/or type of frame for graphics with filled
interiors.

(1) Interior Style

The following interior styles are allowed:

Figure C7.2.7

Types of Fill Areas

(2) Edge
The edge is the frame of a graphic element. The user can select the desired type of line
and color from those discussed earlier, independent of the graphic element itself.
However, the width of the edge is fixed at a single dot.

C7-8

Figure C7.2.8

Edge Line Types

Figure C7.2.9

Example of Setting the Edge

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.3

Display of Characters and Graphics

This section explains the following graphic components. For other components, see
Table C7.1.1

7.3.1

Text
The text function is used to create character strings.

(1) Characters Used

ASCII character set
(2) Sizes of Characters
Standard width: 8 x 16 dots, 12 x 24 dots
Small: 5 x 8 dots
Note that 8 x 16 dots, and 5 x 8 dots characters used on a full size panel are not reduced
in size if the panel is converted to a half size panel.

Figure C7.3.1

Examples of Size of Characters

(3) Magnify
Character strings can be displayed on a magnified scale. There are some magnifications
(width x height):
1x1
1x2
2x1
2x2
The following figure shows how each magnification looks.

Figure C7.3.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

Examples of Magnification

C7-9

(4) Text Path (Direction)

There are the following directions in which the text can be read.
Right: Pump

Figure C7.3.3

p
Up: m
u
P

P
Down: u
m
p

Left: pmuP

Example of Text Paths

(5) Up Vector

Figure C7.3.4

Up: Valve

Left:

Down:

Valve

Valve

Right:

Valve

There are the following positions in which the text can be oriented.

Example of Up Vector

(6) Background Color

When graphic panel is displayed on the ICS, the background color becomes black. On
the other hand, the background color can be specified for each text (for each primitive).
Select the color required among display colors of the ICS.

Figure C7.3.5

7.3.2

Example of Background Color

Polymarker
There are some symbols available as polymarkers. Polymarkers are helpful when the
user wants to draw the viewers attention to the text or as marks which the operator
touches on a panel.

(1) Types of Markers

The following markers are available:

Figure C7.3.6

Types of Polymarker

(2) Size
There are the following sizes: standard (5 x 5 dots) to 5 times the standard. The
marker can be used only in the standard size.

Figure C7.3.7

Size of Polymarkers

(3) Maximum Points

128/primitive

C7-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.3.3

Pattern Block
Pattern blocks are graphical patterns which the user can create at the users discretion.
These are useful when used to graphically represent instruments, such as pumps, valves
or sensors. In addition, equipment such as tanks, can be drawn by combining pattern
blocks.

(1) Size
Size: 16 x 16 and 24 x 24 dots.

Figure C7.3.8

Example of Pattern Block (24 X 24 dots)

(2) Array of Blocks

More than one pattern block can be combined to form a new pattern.
For an array up to 8 x 8 (horizontal x vertical) pattern blocks are permitted.
For 1x 1 (horizontal x vertical) array

Figure C7.3.9

For 1x 2 (horizontal x vertical) array

Arrays of Pattern Blocks

(3) Background Color

The background color can be specified for each pattern block (for each primitive). The
background colors are the same as display colors of the ICS.
In case of pattern block with 24 x 24 dots and 1 x 2 array, see the following figure :
24
Pattern block
24
24

Background color

Figure C7.3.10 Example of Background Color

(4) Number of Pattern Blocks able to be Registered
The maximum number of pattern blocks that can be registered for each project is 128
each for the 16 x 16 and 24 x 24 dots patterns. Different patterns can be specified for the
16 x 16 and 24 x 24 dots size of a particular pattern block. However considering the
case where a particular pattern block is used with both full size and half size panels, it is
recommended that the user always try to allocate the same pattern for the 16 x 16 and
24 x 24 dots sizes of the pattern block.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-11

7.4

Data Display
The ICSs graphics have the capability to show process data which are specified and
used by a control station. The mode in which process data are displayed can roughly be
classified into the following formats:
Bars or circles
Character strings
Graphic data

7.4.1

Process Data Bar

Process data can be shown in the following forms: a rectangular bar or a circular bar.

(1) Rectangular Bars

The following figures show the several different types of rectangular bars.

C7-12

Figure C7.4.1

Example of Zero-point Based Bars

Figure C7.4.2

Example of Center-point Based Bars

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

Figure C7.4.3

Example of Arrow Bars

(2) Circular Bars

The circle has the min value limit at its center, and the max value as its maximum radius,
and changes in size in proportion to the data value.
Point on circumference
(max value)

Center of circle
(min value)
49
30

Display example for

Display data :
Max value :
Min value :
Process value (PV) :

Figure C7.4.4

PIC100.PV
49kPa
0kPa
30kPa

Example of Circular Bars

(3) Display Data

The methods to specify the data to be displayed are as follows :
Tag name and data item
Computational expression
(4) Max Value and Min Value
The maximum value and minimum value can be specified for each process data.
Because these specifications are limitations for the graphic display, these specifications
are not related to those of the control station.
IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-13

7.4.2

Process Data Character

The process data character function displays process data used by the control station in
numerical or character string format.

(1) Size and Text Path of Characters

The same as for text. See Subsection 7.3.1, Text.
(2) Data Type
The following table shows the data types used in the process data character function.
Table C7.4.1

Summary of Data Types

Integer

Decimal

Display Example

Real

Type

Indicates numeric data

Description

50.0

Percentage

Indicates a display of relative

value of numeric data

50.0

Character

Indicates character string

data

NR

Hexa

Indicates numeric data in

hexadecimal display

0x0000032

Date

Indicates a date data

Jan. 01.

Time

Indicates a time data

09:00:5

Default

Uses default value of the tag

list

50.0

: No. of digits can be specified

: No. of digits cannot be specified

(3) Digits
The digits of a process data item can be specified separately for both a whole number
and a decimal. This method of specification is exclusively used for the ICS graphics and,
therefore, will not affect or be affected by the instrument files of the control station.
The following restrictions on the number of digits apply.
Integer: max. of 9; min. of 1
Decimal: max. of 7; min. of 0
Example:

Type: Real

Number of digits in integer: 4

Number of digits in decimal: 2

Displayed data: 5212.27

TIP

Numeric data can have up to a maximum of 9 digits, including both the integer and
decimal. For character string data, the maximum is 16 characters.
(4) Display Data
Process data and formulas can be displayed. For process data, tag names and
computational expressions can be specified as display data. But, when the data types
include character strings, date and time, or default values, computational expressions
cannot be specified as data.

C7-14

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.4.3

Graphic Data
The graphic data functions are used to show the interrelationships between process data.
Graphic data formats can be classified into those discussed in subitem 1 below.

(1) Types of Graphs

Line-segment graph (position is user-defined)
The user can select the X and Y coordinates of each data item appropriate for the upper
and lower limits of the indicated range, respectively. That is, the user can specify the
range over which the indication of each data value can move.
1

7
9

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Figure C7.4.5

10

10

: First upper limit:

: First lower limit:
: Second upper limit:
: Second lower limit:
: Third upper limit:
: Third lower limit:
: Fourth upper limit:
: Fourth lower limit:
: Fifth upper limit:
: Fifth lower limit:

10m
0m
10m
0m
10m
0m
7m
0m
5m
0m

Example of Line-segment Graph (position is user-defined)

If the X and Y coordinates are set up as shown in the figure above, the value of each
data item is indicated as one of the points over the range set by coordinates and ,
and , and , and , or and . These points are then all connected to form
a line-segment graph.
1

5
7
9

A dashed line (not displayed) indicates

the range set off by the upper and lower
limits over which the data value moves.
2

Figure C7.4.6

IM 33G2C20-11E

10

Example of Line-segment Graph (position is user-defined)

C7-15

 Line-segment graph
Unlike the line-segment graph discussed in subitem 1 above where the user can specify
the range of indication for the respective data items, the line-segment graph discussed
here uses the same range of indication (the same span) for all of the data items.
1
1

10

3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3

: Upper limit of data value

: Lower limit of data value
: LIC200.PV: 0 to 10m
: LIC210.PV: 0 to 10m
: LIC220.PV:
0 to 7m
: LIC230.PV:
0 to 5m
: LIC240.PV:
0 to 5m
: LIC250.PV:
0 to 6m
: LIC260.PV:
0 to 3m
: LIC270.PV:
0 to 6m

Figure C7.4.7 Example of Line-segment Graph

Step graph
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3

10

10

: Upper limit of data value

: Lower limit of data value
: TIC100.SV: 0 to 100C
: TIC110.SV: 0 to 100C
: TIC120.SV: 0 to 90C
: TIC130.SV: 0 to 90C
: TIC140.SV: 0 to 90C
: TIC150.SV: 0 to 85C
: TIC160.SV: 0 to 80C
: TIC170.SV: 0 to 80C

Figure C7.4.8 Example of Step Graph

Bar graph
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

10

: Upper limit of data value

: Lower limit of data value
: PIC400.PV: 0 to 4900Pa
: PIC410.PV: 0 to 4700Pa
: PIC420.PV: 0 to 4400Pa
: PIC430.PV: 0 to 4900Pa
: PIC440.PV: 0 to 3520Pa
: PIC450.PV: 0 to 3520Pa
: PIC460.PV: 0 to 3130Pa
: PIC470.PV: 0 to 2940Pa

Figure C7.4.9 Example of Bar Graph

C7-16

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

Radar chart graph

3

: position of cursor

2
8
3
4
5
6

: Low limit
: First upper limit
FIC500.PV: 10 to 500m3/h
: FIC510.PV: 10 to 500m3/h
: FIC520.PV: 15 to 450m3/h
: FIC530.PV:
5 to 400m3/h
: FIC540.PV:
0 to 600m3/h
: FIC550.PV:
0 to 750m3/h
: FIC560.PV: 20 to 1100m3/h

Figure C7.4.10 Example of Radar Chart

Two-dimensional graph
This graph applies two different data items to the X and Y axes to show the
interrelationship between the two items.
3

PIC100.PV

2
3

: Reference of X-Y coordinates (lower limit)

: X axis upper limit
: Y axis upper limit

TIC100.PV

Figure C7.4.11

Example of Two-dimensional Graph

Marker type:
Marker size: Standard through 5 times standard. is in standard size only.
Graph type: Rewrite or refresh
a. Rewrite:

New points are overwritten on the pre-existing display. (Graph

display starts when the graphic panel with the X-Y graph is
displayed.)

example:

b. Refresh:

Displays the current point only.

example:

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-17

(2) Maximum Number of Data

The following table shows the maximum number of data available for each graph.
Table C7.4.2

Maximum Number of Data

Graphic

Maximum Number of Data Items

Line-segment graph (position is user-defined)

60

Line-segment graph

60

Step graph

60

Bar graph

60

Radar chart graph

60

Two-dimensional graph (X-Y graph)

(3) Maximum Number of Graphic Data

The maximum number of four graphic data items can be displayed on one panel.
(4) Display Data
The methods to specify the data displayed by graphic data are as follows :
Tag name and data item
Array data

TIP
The computational expression cannot be specified for the display data.

C7-18

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.5

Graphic Computation
The ICSs graphics have the capability to compute. The primitives which can carry out a
graphic computation are:
Process data bar
Process data character
Coordinate modification
The following is an example of a graphic computation.
To display the average of process values TIC100, TIC200, and TIC300:
(TIC.100.PV+TIC200.PV+TIC300.PV)/3 (TIC100, TIC200, TIC300: Tag names)
Restrictions on computational expressions
Number of data items:

Maximum of 8

Operators that can be used:

+, -, x, /, (, )

Number of bytes that can be input:

Maximum of 200

In the example above, for (TIC100.PV + TIC200.PV + TIC300.PV) / 3

Number of data items: 3 (TIC100.PV, TIC200.PV, TIC300.PV)
Number of bytes used: 33

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-19

7.6

Operating and Switching Graphic Panels

The ICSs graphics allow the operator to open instrument faceplates or windows with one
touch and to switch to other panels. The graphics also enable occurred messages to be
shown automatically and data to be set in a group.

7.6.1

Touch Target and Push Button

Touch targets execute pre-assigned functions when actuated by a panel touch or by
selection via the cursor keys. Push buttons are graphic representations of operating panel
push-button switches, which appear as push-button images on the graphic panel and
implement the functions of push buttons.

Control Panel
Figure C7.6.1

Example of Touch Target Display

(1) Function Definition

Touch targets and push buttons provide the functions shown in the following table. For
more information on the functions, see Chapter 5 of Part B, One-touch Operations.
Table C7.6.1
Menu

Touch Target and Push Button Function Overview

Function Symbol

Function

Call Panel

Call up panels and windows

Panel Set

Call up panel sets

Panel Sequence

Starting panel display sequence

System Function

Execute system function keys (group setting only)

User Program

Starting user programs

Signal Notification

Signal notification to user programs

Trend

Starting, stopping, and resuming trend

Tag Operation

Instrument command operation

OSP Instruction

Executing operation sequence commands

File Program

Executing programs by file name

Data Entry

Call up data entry window

Menu Entry

Call up menu window

Switch Display

Change graphic display data

Dataitem Menu

Call up data item dependent menu

(2) Order of Cursor Movement

The user can specify the order in which the cursor is placed in each of the touch targets
or push buttons. By specifying the order, you can move the cursor in a given sequence
irrespective of where in the X-Y coordinate system the cursor is positioned when
operating the cursor keys on the ICS. You will find it convenient if you specify the order
according to the frequency of use. You can have positions both with and without a
specified order of cursor movement at the same time on the same panel. The cursor first
moves to the positions with a specified order of cursor movement and then to the
positions without a specified order of cursor movement.

C7-20

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

(3) Functions Specific to Push Buttons

Push buttons present the following unique features which touch targets do not.
Selection of either lit or unlit buttons
This selection specifies which color is used and whether any modification is set for a
particular push button.
Color setting
The color of a push button changes according to the selection made in subitem 1
above.
Lit: User-defined color
Unlit: Always gray
Selection of guarded or unguarded buttons

With guard:
The push button must be pressed twice. Pressing the button once removes the
operation prohibition frame; pressing a second time executes the function.
Without guard:
The push button need be pressed only once. Pressing the button executes the function.

Example of push button with guard

Example of push button without guard

Operation prohibition frame

Trend
Figure C7.6.2

Trend
Example of Push-buttons Guard

Label Text
Push buttons can be labeled as follows:
Allowed number of characters: Max. of 8 standard-width characters.
Display color : lit: white
unlit: black
Labeled text

Heating
Figure C7.6.3

Example of Label Text Display

(4) Faceplate
This is the function to display the label character string of the switch in a push button
format. Data that can be assigned are batch status indicator blocks and faceplate blocks
(switch instrument blocks cannot be assigned).

ON
Figure C7.6.4

Example of Faceplate Block Display

Displayed character strings, label colors, display with or without flashing, and guarded
or unguarded buttons are specified using the tuning panel. Guard display colors are also
specified.
IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-21

7.6.2

Softkey and Instrument

(1) Softkey
Softkeys are push buttons assigned to fixed positions on the panel. In contrast to the
push buttons of the former subsection, which you can freely place anywhere in the
panel, the softkeys are displayed in a fixed area at the bottom of the panel.
Functionally, softkeys present the same features as push buttons with regard to functions,
selection of guarded or unguarded buttons, and labels. For details, see Subsection 7.6.1,
Touch Target and Push Button.

Figure C7.6.5

Softkey Display Area

Unguarded

Guarded

Cont/mon
panel 1
Figure C7.6.6

C7-22

Cont/mon
panel 2

Examples of Softkey

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

(2) Instrument
The instrument function displays an instrument faceplate in a preselected position on the
graphic panel. The faceplate display positions correspond to softkey positions.
Assigning an instrument faceplate to a display position automatically reserves the
softkey.Up to eight instrument faceplates can be allocated at the same time.

Figure C7.6.7

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Instrument

C7-23

7.6.3

Display Window
The display window function allows you to predefine windows for automatic display on
a graphic panel. The predefined windows automatically appear when specified
conditions are true.

(1) Window Type

Initial display:
Window is displayed when graphic panel is called up.
Conditional display:
Window is displayed when the display condition is satisfied, and removed when it is
not satisfied.

TIP
The types of the windows to be called are not restricted.
Refer to Table C2.1.1, and Table C2.1.2 for the types of the windows.
(2) Frame
The user has the option of giving the displayed window a frame or not giving it one.
Window display (with frame)
.AW
Aug. 25
Aug. 25
Aug. 25
Aug. 25
Aug. 25

10:02:47
10:02:47
10:02:33
10:02:33
10:02:07

02TIC002
02TIC002
02TIC001
02TIC001
02FIC016

Thermal control 2
Thermal control 2
Thermal control 1
Thermal control 1
Flow control 16

NR
LL
RECOVER
NR
DV+ RECOVER
NR

Thermal control 2
Thermal control 2
Thermal control 1
Thermal control 1
Flow control 16

NR
LL
RECOVER
NR
DV+ RECOVER
NR

Window display (without frame)

Aug. 25
Aug. 25
Aug. 25
Aug. 25
Aug. 25

10:02:47
10:02:47
10:02:33
10:02:33
10:02:07

Figure C7.6.8

02TIC002
02TIC002
02TIC001
02TIC001
02FIC016

Examples of Display Window

TIP
(1)

If you have selected a window without a frame, you cannot use window based
operations (for example, a touch screen operation).
(The window scrolls as you scroll through the panel.)

(2)

If you have selected a window without a frame, the window is incorporated into
the panel and can no longer be deleted (it is deleted automatically when the panel
is closed).

(3) Window Size

The user can define the size of a displayed window.
However, only the window which have resize corner can be specified the size of a
displayed window.
(4) Positioning
For window positioning, see Subsection 2.1.5, Window Configuration and Location.

C7-24

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.6.4

Group Setting
The group setting function allows the setting or changing of the values of multiple data
entities on a graphic panel (all on the same panel) simultaneously as a group. Each data
item is associated with a touch target.

(1) Data Type

The following table shows the data types applicable to group setting.
Table C7.6.2

Summary of Data Types

Type
Real
Percentage
Character
Hexa
Default

Description

Integer

Decimal

Indicates numeric data

Indicates a display of relative value of numeric data

Indicates character string data

Indicates numeric data in hexadecimal display

Uses default value of the tag list

: No. of digits can be specified

: No. of digits cannot be specified

TIP

The computational expressions cannot be specified to data.

(2) Size, Text Path, Digits, and Max and Min Value
These are the same as for process data character. See Subsection 7.4.2, Process Data
Character.
(3) Checks during Data Input
The group setting has a function to check new data items entered in place of the data
items that have been set in a group. For example, if you enter
FIC100.SV + FIC200.SV + .......... + FIC700.SV
700
to keep the sum of the input values smaller than the preset value, then a computation
error will result if the sum of the values exceeds 700. The failed data item will not be
accepted even if the [SETD] is selected.
(4) Data Confirmation
The user can specify the method for confirming data at the time of input.
With a confirmation operation
A confirmation message similar to that of the instrument faceplate operation is
provided to each operation as required.
Example: FIC100, AUT?
With execution confirmation
An OK? confirmation message is used for each operation.
Example: OK?
With no confirmation

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-25

(5) Displayed Color

There are the following colors used to show the data:

Color for entered data

Color for unentered data

Color for faulty data (applicable only when setting the maximum and minimum
values)

To indicate that data items have been entered and accepted, the user can set colors
different from the one used for unentered data items (data items showing process data),
for data items which have already been entered and those which have failed due to
overranging after an entry is attempted.
(6) Order of Cursor Movement
See Subsection 7.6.1, Touch Target and Push Button.
(7) Data Setting
After having selected new values for each data item, use the system function keys to set
these values in the control station.
[SETD]: Writes the data
[SCNC]: Cancels the data
Operating either of these system function keys causes the confirmation window to
appear.

Figure C7.6.9

Confirmation Window for Group Setting

Figure C7.6.10 Confirmation Window for Canceling Group Setting

C7-26

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.6.5

Message
The message function is used to automatically display the most recent message(s) on the
graphic panel when occurred. This function only displays the message; confirmation and
panel switching are not supported. Deletion of the message must be performed from the
graphic panel. There is no linkage to operations performed on other panels.

(1) Message Type

The types of messages that can be displayed are:

Process alarm message

Operator guide message
System alarm message
Dialog name

Process alarm message

Aug. 25 15:47:06 02PIC003 Pressure control 3
Aug. 25 15:47:06 02PIC003 Pressure control 3

NR
HH

RECOVER

Operator guide message

Aug. 25 15:45:30
Raw Material completely charged
System alarm message

0504 Aug. 25 15:43:58

0504 Aug. 25 15:39:18
0504 Aug. 25 15:39:18
Figure C7.6.11

Data Base Load from HP9000

File = GR0014.grf

Data Base Load from HP9000

File = SDFCS0102.odb

Data Base Load from HP9000

File = OGFCS0102.odb

Examples of Message

(2) Displayed Messages

Specification of message
Messages to be displayed can be specified. The following table shows the relationship.
Table C7.6.3

Message Definition

Message Type

Plant Name

Station Name

Area Name

Tag Name

Alarm summary

Operator guide

System alarm

Dialog name

: Can be specified

: Cannot be specified

System alarm message

The targeted message among system alarm messages can be specified by the message
number. For details on the message number, see the ICS Messages (IM 33G2H02-11E).
Dialogue name
Display a dialog name for the specified tag name. When a dialog name is specified
using a SEBOL program, if the corresponding dialog arises, the related dialog name
is displayed on the ICS graphic panel. This enables you to confirm the dialog. After
confirmation, the dialog will be deleted. To call up the corresponding dialog, use the
touch target function with this function for your convenience.
(3) Position
The user can define, at the users choice, the position where the specified message appears.
IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-27

7.7

Modification
The modification function is used for modifying images on the screen by changing their
colors, blinking status, or shapes. The user can set at the users discretion the conditions
that trigger modification.

7.7.1

Functions

(1) Modification Type

There are the following types of modification:
At change
Modification is executed when the true condition of the specified modifying condition is changed.
Every
Modification is executed not only at the change in the true condition of the specified
modifying condition as in above, but modification is always executed when
modifying condition is true.
Initial
When the graphic panel is called up, if the modifying condition is true, modification
is executed only once with no periodic updating of data required.
(2) Change in Color
The user can specify a different color to which the color of a particular graphic changes
when modification is executed. The change in color enables the user to readily and
visually identify equipment that has malfunctioned during operation.
For example, specify Tag name.ALARM = * to set the alarm color of a particular
instrument.
(3) Change in the Way a Graphic Lights Up or Blinks
The user can set a graphic so, in addition to a change in color, a change takes place in
the way it lights up or blinks. The state in which a graphic turns on and off is called
blinking. Blinking is classified into the following types:
No blinking
The graphics color changes to the selected one when the modification conditions are
true. Only a change in color takes place and the graphic remains lit.
Blinking (with no acknowledgment)
The graphics color changes to the selected one and starts blinking when the modification conditions are true. If the modification conditions become untrue, the
graphics color changes back to the first one and the graphic stays turned on.
Blinks with an alarm
Color: depends on the modifying condition
Blinking: depends on the instrument status
Blink with an alarm is a functional action in which a graphic blinks according to the
alarm status of the instrument. This blinking takes place depending on the alarm
status of the instrument stated in the conditional expression for modification,

C7-28

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

irrespective of whether the modification conditions are true or not. Using

the
key, the operator can confirm the status of the instrument and stop the
graphic from blinking. The way a graphic changes in color when blink with an alarm
is selected follows the modification conditions set in the conditional expression for
modification. (The change in color follows the same rules of action as regular
modification.)
The following paragraphs give examples of a change in the color of a graphic.
Example where the color changes to the alarm color
If you specify an asterisk * in place of ALRM, the color of the graphic changes
to the alarm color (the same color as the tag mark) specified for that instrument
when the instrument enters the alarm state.
Example:
If the expression is specified as TIC100.ALRM=*, then the color of the graphic
changes to the same color as that of the mark of the TIC100 tag when the tag
enters the alarm state.
Example where the color changes to the color specified for modification
If you specify the alarm state ALRM rather than an *, then the color of the
graphic changes to the user-defined color when the instrument enters the alarm
state.
Example:
If the expression is specified as TIC100.ALRM=HI with the change in color for
modification set as R (red), then the color of the graphic changes to red when
the tag enters the HI state.
Both of the examples above comply with the state of the instrument in terms of
blinking.
Blinks according to the panel
Unlike the blinks with by an alarm, this type of blinking does not correspond to the
tag status. Operation of the
key is allowed within a graphic panel, and
confirmation can be made only when the graphic panel is on the display. If the
graphic panel is cleared and called up again, the blinking will restart as long as the
modifying condition is met.
Example:
If FIC100.PV > 150.0 with the change in color for modification set as M (magenta), the display color will change and start blinking when the process value of the
FIC100 instrument exceeds the value of 150.0
When the
key is selected, only the graphic goes back to stay lit. The display
colors of the graphic and tag mark as well as whether or not to return to the state of
blinking depend on whether or not the modification condition are true and in what
condition the corresponding instrument is.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-29

(4) Inverse Video

The inverse video displays graphic elements in inverse video. This function is available
only if the graphic element is either a character string or a pattern block.
A

Figure C7.7.1

Example of Inverse Video

(5) Change Pattern

The change pattern allows an exchange of shapes between pattern blocks.
24 dots

24 dots

24 dots

Figure C7.7.2

24 dots

Example of Change Pattern

(6) Change Text

The change text allows changes in targeted character strings when modifications take
place. This function is available only when the graphic element is a character string.

7.7.2

Feeding tank

Heating tank

Figure C7.7.3

Example of Change Text

Number of Modification Conditions

Up to 8 conditions per graphic image (primitive) and up to 200 conditions per panel can
be set. (If 10 primitives with 8 conditions each are set, it turns out that 80 conditions out
of the maximum of 200 have already been set.)

C7-30

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.8

Coordinate Modification
The coordinate modification function allow a graphic image to move according to a
change in a process data. To implement this function, the initial display position and the
maximum variation display position must be specified, and the X- and Y-coordinate
positions must be set as process data. Coordinate modification can be set for general
primitives, pattern block, and process data.
The following table shows the reference points with which graphics elements move.
Table C7.8.1

Reference Point of Graphic Images (for Coordinate Modification)

Reference

Primitives

Starting point of drawing

Polyline, fill area, polymarker

Starting point of drawing in a counterclockwise

direction

Arc

Center

Circle, fan, ellipse, process data circle bar

Upper left

Pattern block, rectangle, process data rectangle

bar

Lower left

Text, process data characters

(Example)

Arc

Starting point of drawing

in a counterclockwise
direction

Polyline

Starting point of drawing

in a counterclockwise
direction

Starting point of
drawing
Starting point of drawing
Starting point of drawing

Fill area

Center
Fan

Figure C7.8.1

Reference Points of Graphic Images

TIP

IM 33G2C20-11E

(1)

If either the X or Y coordinate alone is specified, the graphic image moves in one
direction.

(2)

Background images are cleared from the coordinate modification area (range of
movement for the graphic image).
C7-31

The following figure shows an example of coordinate modification. The figure applies
the process values of the PIC100 tag to the X axis and the process values of the PIC200
tag to the Y axis.
Defined range of movement for the graphic (defined by the builder)

Maximum value

PIC100.PV

PIC200.PV
Minimum value

Range of movement for the graphic

(actual range of movement)

If the graphic is created using a pattern block, the reference point of the
graphic is set at the upper left corner of the defined area.

Figure C7.8.2

C7-32

Example of Coordinate Modification

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.9

Def. Communication Table

The def. communication table menu allows only data items to change on the ICS with
no changes in on-screen graphics. The def. communication table menu provides the
function to specify data to which existing data are switched. Data items that can be
switched are those used to specify the following:
Modification conditions
Process data bars
Process data characters
Graphic data
Group settings
Since the menu item def. communication table requires that a tag name be specified as a
data item, it switches all of the corresponding tags on the same graphic panel. For
example, if the same tag is used for indicating both the modification conditions and
process data, both of them change in their display.
The following table shows examples of def. communication tables.
Table C7.9.1
Disp ay
Display
Location

Note:

Example of Def. Communication Table

Tag Name after Switching

Def. Communication
Table 2

Def. Communication
Table 3

Def. Communication
Table 4

FIC2001B.PV

FIC2001C.PV

FIC2001D.PV

FIC2002B.PV

FIC2002C.PV

FIC2002D.PV

FIC2003B.PV

FIC2003A.PV

FIC2003D.PV

Remarks

See the following figure for display locations to 13 .

When the table is set up as shown in this table, the graphic panel will appear as shown
below (the screen is the same as before since changes are made only to the displayed
data and modification conditions).

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-33

Figure C7.9.1

C7-34

Example of Def. Communication Table

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.10 Display of Panels 1.5 or 4 Times Larger in Size

The CENTUM CS system can present the user with panels 1.5 or 4 times larger in size,
in addition to full size panels, half size panels, and windows. These larger panels are
useful when monitoring the overall state of a plant or a continuous process. However,
these larger sizes are available only when viewing graphic panels. To display panels in
these sizes, the optional software package, SIH4120 Graphic 4 Times Size Panel
Display Package, must be installed in the ICS in addition to the basic software package.

7.10.1 Panel Size

In addition to a panel quad size with both its width and height doubled, panels that are 4
times width or 4 times height are available. The following figure shows the sizes of
these panels.
1.5 times

Full size
943 dots

1180 dots

1280 dots
1600 dots
4 times height
Quad size

4 times width
943 dots
3772 dots

1886 dots
5120 dots
2560 dots

1280 dots

: indicates the size of a full size panel.

Figure C7.10.1 Panel Sizes

7.10.2 Scrolling
Panels that are 1.5 or 4 times larger allow the operator to scroll through them. Only the
scroll bar moves during scrolling; the display switches when the scroll bar has been
brought to a stop. Since the scrolled display of the panel is retained, the operator will
have the same scrolled view of the panel when it is next recalled.
Retention of scrolled displays on panels: Up to 30 panels/CRT
Table C7.10.1 Panel Size and Scrolling
Full size panel

Half size panel (created

from object file of full
size panel)

Standard size

1.5 times larger

4 times larger

Window

: can be scrolled
: cannot be scrolled

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-35

The display on a panel can be scrolled either with the scroll keys on the operation
keyboard or with the scroll bars on the panel.
(1) Using Scroll Keys
Use the scroll keys on the operation keyboard to scroll through the panel. These keys
scroll through the display on the panel in 12 dots increments.

Figure C7.10.2 Scroll Keys

(2) Using Scroll Bars

Use the scroll bars on a panel to scroll. The scroll bar scrolls through the display on the
panel in single dot increments. It is also possible to jump scroll through an extended
area of the display at one time. The presence or absence of the scroll bars must be
selected using the graphic builder. Even though the presence of the scroll bars has been
selected, a scroll bar for a direction that is unnecessary does not appear. (For example,
the panel that is 4 times width is shown only with the horizontal scroll bar; the vertical
scroll bar does not appear.)
Location of scroll bars
: The edge at the right and/or the bottom of the panel. If there are softkeys on the
panel, the scroll bar appears just above them.
Selection of the presence or absence of scroll bars
: By default, the absence of the scroll bars is selected.
(3) Graphic Element Scrolled
The graphic elements that can be scrolled are the contents of a panel with the exception
of softkeys and instrument faceplates. That is, softkeys or instrument faceplates do not
scroll even while on the screen during scrolling.
(4) Half Size Panels
No half size panels (those panels which have the object file for a half size panel) can be
created from panels that are 1.5 times or 4 times larger. A half size panel with the object
file for a full size panel appears when the half size panel for any of these larger size
panels is called. Consequently, the contents of a newly created half size panel remain the
same as those of a full size panel, though the size is halved.

7.10.3 Number of Graphics

The number of graphics, such as the number of communication data items or modification conditions handled by a panel that is 1.5 or 4 times larger is the same as that
handled by a full size panel (a panel 4 times larger does not have the capacity to hold
four times more data than a full size panel). For more information on the number of
graphics, see Section 7.11, Graphic Numbers.

C7-36

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Graphics

7.11 Graphic Numbers

The following shows the maximum numbers of the graphic functions.
Number of graphic panel pages: Maximum of 800/ICS
There are the following types of graphic files, each being stored in a different
directory.
Table C7.11.1 Types of Files
Type

Description

Half size

Specifies the half size panel appropriate for a standard full size panel.

Full size

Specifies panels with the standard, 1.5 times and quadruple times size for
use with ICS.

Window

Specifies the graphic window.

Example: If you have specified 300 graphic panels and 50 graphic windows on an ICS, you can define
300 full size files (for all panels with the standard, 1.5 times and quadruple times size), 300 half
size files of half size panels for each of the graphic panels, and 50 window files. This means
that you have used 300 panels out of 800 maximum available panels (windows are excluded
from this count).

Communication data count: Maximum of 400 data/panel

Number of modifications:
Maximum of 8 conditions/primitive; maximum of 200 conditions/panel
Since eight conditions can be specified per primitive, ten primitives each with eight
specified conditions means 80 conditions out of the 200 conditions/panel are used,
which is the overall maximum limit. When the same condition is specified for
different primitives, the number of conditions increments by the number of the
primitives.
Graphic data count: Maximum of 4 items/panel
Number of graphic computational expressions: Maximum of 50/panel
Number of touch targets: Maximum of 100/panel
Number of windows displayed at the same time: Maximum of 10/panel
Number of linked user programs: 1/panel
Display update intervals:
One second in the normal mode (up to several seconds can be specified.)
Graphic panel size: Standard, 1.5 times, quadruple size, and half size.
Number of graphic windows: Maximum of 500/ICS

IM 33G2C20-11E

C7-37

8. Operation Group

8.

Operation Group
Equipment connected to a bus system on the same communication line can be
configured into a group according to the morphology of the operation so that system
operation and monitoring are implemented on a group-by-group basis. This group is
referred to as an operation group. This chapter gives details on the operation group.

8.1

Overview

8.1.1

Overview
In addition to being physically connected, system components comprising two or more
ICS stations, control stations and printers that are linked to each other through a
communications bus can be configured into a group for the optimal patterns of plant
operation. They can be operated and managed on a group-by-group basis. The individual
groups are called operation groups. By setting up an operation group, the user can attain
specific features of system operation in which the user may:

inhibit the operation of instruments in a control station that does not belong to the
operation group,

decline to notify alarms sent from a control station that does not belong to the
operation group,

perform acknowledgment operations from one particular ICS within the operation
group,

shut down buzzers of ICSs within the operation group from one particular
location, and

have messages for a process operation sent to a printer connected to another ICS.

The setup of operation groups is done on a station-by-station basis for each ICS using
the operation group definition builder when the system is configured. One particular
control station may be registered to more than one operation group at the same time.
Operation groups can also be set up on an area basis. The following figure shows an
example of the configuration of an operation group.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C8-1

Figure C8.1.1

Example of Operation Groups

In this figure, system components are configured into two operation groups, A1 and A2.
In this configuration, specific features of system operation can be achieved in which:

8.1.2

no access is possible either from ICS4 within group A1 to instruments in FCSs

a1-1, a1-2, and a1-3, or from ICS1 through ICS3 within group A1 to instruments
in FCSs a2-1 and a2-2 within group A2;

alarms from instruments in FCS a1-1 within group A1 are not notified to ICS4
within group A2; likewise, alarms from instruments in FCSs a2-1 and a2-2 within
group A2 are not notified to ICS1 through ICS3 within group A1;

if acknowledgment is made on ICS1 within group A1, then so is it done automatically also on ICS2 and ICS3;

if the buzzers in ICS1 within group A1 are shut down, then the buzzers in ICS2
and ICS3 are also shut down; and

if entry of process data is made on ICS2 within group A1, then the record of the
data entry is output to the printers connected to ICS1. However, it is not output to
the printers connected to ICS4.

Specifications
The following table shows the specifications of the operation group setting.
Table C8.1.1 Specifications of Operation Group Setting
Item

C8-2

Specification

Number of groups

1 group per ICS

Operating modes

3 operating modes (Off, A, and B) per group

IM 33G2C20-11E

8. Operation Group

8.2

Group Identifier
The operation group can be attached with a group identifier. The group identifier is
specified by two arbitrary alphanumeric characters.
A1 and A2 in figure C8.1.1 correspond to group identifier. This group identifier is
common to each mode (OFF, A or B mode). ICSs that belong to the same operation
group must have the same group identifier. Otherwise, a reset buzzer signal from one
ICS will not reach other ICSs with different group identifiers.
The wild card * can also be used as a group identifier. If a group identifier is specified
as A*, messages (buzzer stoppage, FCS operation record, etc.) from operation groups
with the group identifier A (: any character) will be accepted. Furthermore,
messages from operation groups with the group identifier A* will reach operation
groups with the group identifier A.

Figure C8.2.1. Data Transmission between Operation Groups

TIP
The specification of the operation group operating mode on the own station status
display panel of the system maintenance function to other ICS is not transmitted
between A* and A. (It is transmitted only between ICSs of the same group.)

IM 33G2C20-11E

C8-3

8.3

Operating Modes
An operation group has three operating modes: the OFF mode, the A mode, and the B
mode. Stations (areas) can be grouped in such a way that they configure different
operation groups for each of these operating modes. This enables change in the
configuration of operation groups simply by switching the operating mode. The
operating mode can be switched on-line using the system maintenance function. If the
operating mode is changed on one of the ICSs that belong to the same operation group,
the operating mode of the other ICSs in that group also change accordingly.

8.3.1

Types of Operating Mode

There are the following operating modes for operation groups: Off mode, A mode, and
B mode. The A and B modes are subsets of the OFF mode. There is no functional
difference between A mode and B mode.
Off mode
The set of stations which is to belong to the operation group is set up in the OFF mode.
When running in OFF mode, all stations that were specified in this mode are subject to
operation and monitoring.
A mode and B mode
These modes are set when one wishes to further group the set of stations specified in
OFF mode, as fits the plant operating patterns. This could involve removing certain
stations from the operating set, or specifying (restricting) the actions of those stations
belonging to the group. When in these modes, the following actions can be specified
individually for stations belonging to a group:
Monitoring enable/disable
Operator manipulation enable/disable
Acknowledgement operation enable/disable
Process alarm acceptance enable/disable
Note that system alarm acceptance is always enabled.

8.3.2

Grouping by Mode
Depending on the patterns of plant operation, the user can select a different set of
stations that configure an operation group for each operating mode. The user does not
always need to use all of the operating modes. Up to 500 stations (areas) can be
specified for each operating mode.
In the OFF mode, the range of stations covered by an operation group must be specified.
The stations that are being selected to run in the A or B mode must already be set in the
OFF mode.
In the A and B modes, stations subject to operation and monitoring in either the A or B
mode must be selected from those stations which have been specified to run in the OFF
mode.

C8-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

8. Operation Group

8.3.3

Actions Taken by Stations

The choices for the functional capabilities of stations set to each operating mode are
classified as follows:
Enabled or disabled in the reading of data:
Determines whether or not data can be read from the selected station.
Enabled or disabled in the writing of data:
Determines whether or not data can be written to the selected station.
Enabled or disabled in the acceptance of process alarm:
Determines whether or not process alarm messages from the selected station are
accepted.
Enabled or disabled in the acknowledgment of messages:
Determines whether or not acknowledgment is possible for process alarm
messages from the selected station.
Enabled or disabled in the acceptance of system alarms:
System alarms are always accepted.

8.3.4

ICS Operations at Time of Operating Mode Change

The system maintenance function is used to change the operating mode (the OFF, A, or
B mode) of an operation group when the system is on-line.

See Also
See Section 1.6 of Part D, Own Station Status Display Panel.
When the operating mode of an operation group is changed, ICS operations and message
are immediately subjected to the new operating mode. If any acknowledgment operation
has been made before the operating mode is changed, that operation is maintained for
the new operating mode.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C8-5

8.4

Behavior of Process Alarms

When an operation group is set up, process alarms are notified to the ICSs within the
operation group to which the FCS, where the alarms have occurred, belongs. Process
alarms are notified as shown in the following figure if the setting of the operation group
remains valid.

Figure C8.4.1

Relationship between Operation Groups and Process Alarm

Notification

TIP
If the same FCS belongs to both group A1 and group A2, process alarms are notified to
the ICSs within both groups. If, after the notification of an alarm, acknowledgment is
made on one of the ICSs, the status of acknowledgment is notified to the rest of the
ICSs. This is because the FCS retains the status of acknowledgment of process alarms.

C8-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

8. Operation Group

8.5

Messages and Electronic Sounds

8.5.1

Output of Messages
For each operating mode, the user can specify the destination printer and the starting
point of printing (any position selected with integer multiples of an 8 character tab
between 0 and 72 characters) on the basis of a message class. The starting point of
printing defaults to the start of the first line.
The messages that can be printed are:
Process alarm message
Operation message
Sequence message
Operator guide message
System alarm message
Note that, if the user specifies that all message outputs are to be printed in each
operating mode, then there will be multiple printouts of the same output. Normally,
printer output is performed in the OFF mode to avoid such inconvenience. Since there
are typically multiple ICS units in the same operation group, printouts should be handled
by the representative ICS of the group.

TIP

The ICS builder can be used to specify whether or not printing is performed in the
unselected operating mode of an operation group.

8.5.2

Electronic Sounds
For each type of message, the user can specify the number appropriate for the electronic
sound which will be activated when that message is generated. The following table
shows the interrelationship between the number of the electronic sound and the tone and
default type of message it outputs. In addition, the user can select the type of electronic
sound, either a continuous sound (C) or an intermittent sound (P). The type of sound
defaults to C (or defaults to P only for a message upon recovery from a process
alarm).
Continuous sound: keeps ringing until the operator confirms with the buzzer reset key
.
Intermittent sound: ringing automatically stops after fixed time elapsed. The time that
the sound rings is fixed in the system . The user cannot specify it.
Table C8.5.1

Electronic Sounds

Number

IM 33G2C20-11E

Tone

Default Type of Message

brrr

beep

Confirmation prompt message

paaa

Message for invalid operation

bing-bong

Operator guide message

Buzzer

Process alarm (high priority alarm)

Intermittent buzzer

Process alarm (medium and low priority alarms)

Bell

System alarm message

C8-7

8.6

Specifying the Range of Pages

For each operation group, the user can specify the range of pages of a panel accessible
on the CRT screen. The pages outside the range are not accessible on an ICS. The user
can specify up to two page ranges for the same panel. For example, the user can specify
pages 1 to 100 and pages 151 to 200 of a control group panel. By default, all of the
pages are covered for display on the screen.
Table C8.6.1

Page Ranges

Type of Panel or Window

Number of Pages

Overview panel

1 to 32

Control group panel

1 to 800

Graphic panel

1 to 800

Trend group panel

1 to 800

Graphic window

1 to 500

Help window

1 to 500

Computer window

1 to 500

TIP
Use the ICS configuration definition builder, operation group definition builder, or other
builders to set up specifications related to messages, printers, electronic sound, displayed
screens, etc.

8.7

Setting Modes Using the System Maintenance Function

As noted earlier, an operation group has three operating modes. To switch between these
modes, the system maintenance function can be used. A change in an operating mode
can be made on-line (while the system is in operation) on an ICS-by-ICS basis.

See Also
See Section 1.6 of Part D, Own Station Status Display Panel.

C8-8

IM 33G2C20-11E

8. Operation Group

8.8

Example of Configured Operation Group

This section discusses the configuration shown in the following figure as an example. In
the OFF mode, all of the stations in the figure are subject to operation by the operator.
In the A mode, ICS30, ICS31 and FCS1 to FCS3 are included in operation group A1;
ICS32, FCS4 and FCS5 are included in group A2. In this example, the B mode is not
used. (See the following table)
Table C8.8.1 Example of Configured Operation Group
OFF mode

A mode

Configuration definition on ICS30

All stations

ICS30, ICS31, and FCS1 to FCS3

Configuration definition on ICS31

All stations

ICS30, ICS31, and FCS1 to FCS3

Configuration definition on ICS32

All stations

ICS32, FCS4 and FCS5

Note: As in the example shown in the following figure, do not select the printer attached to ICS30 when
specifying a printer (by software) using the ICS configuration builder. The printer will be shared by
all of the ICSs within the same operation group. Consequently, two printouts of the same messages
will be given.

Figure C8.8.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Configured Operation Group

C8-9

9. Security

9.

Security
The ICS security function restricts the range of routine operation and monitoring
applicable to an ICS to protect the system from possible problems, such as erroneous
operation, and to ensure the security of the system.
This chapter explains how system security is ensured, along with the security levels.

9.1

Types of Security Functions

The security function referred to here is a feature that places restrictions (permits or
inhibits) on the range of functions available in operation and monitoring (displaying) at
an ICS. Using the function, the user can protect the system from erroneous operations or
inhibit operation by persons other than authorized personnel. The following paragraphs
list the functions available at an ICS for security purposes.

(1) Security Based on the Position of the Keylock Mode Switch

The CENTUM CS system uses a level number to specify the security level when setting
the range of functions available for display or operation at an ICS. The security level set
for display or operation at an ICS in combination with the position of the keylock mode
switch restricts the range of access. A security level can be set on each CRT display,
panel, or instrument using the appropriate builder so that, during system operation, the
user can switch between the states in which operation or monitoring is enabled or
disabled by means of the keylock mode switch. In addition, by setting a security level to
the operator utility function, the user can also provide security in determining whether or
not the definition panel is displayed or definition itself is possible. As with the security
function for ICS operation, this security function restricts the scope of the users
operation for the display or change of data on an ICS by means of the position of the
keylock mode switch in combination with the method for calling up the specified
definition panel.
(2) Security Based on an Operation Group

See Also
See Chapter 8, Operation Group.

This type of security function can inhibit access to stations that do not belong to the
operation group or restrict the types of panels that can be viewed or manipulated. The
system first refers to the setting of the operation group to check if the given panel or
instrument can be displayed or manipulated on the CRT screen. The system then
determines if the panel or instrument can be displayed or manipulated according to the
position of the keylock mode switch.
(3) Security Based on the Importance of a Tag
The importance of a tag can be determined by specifying the type of tag mark which is
attached to each function block. If the tag mark is specified as one requiring
acknowledgment, then the operator must confirm his/her operation at each input of
data.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C9-1

(4) Security against Data Entry

The system checks the validity of data during entry. If the data are valid, then the system
accepts them.
(5) Security Provided by Checking Users
Some engineering functions can be protected by means of a password.

C9-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

9. Security

9.2

Keylock Mode Switch and Security

The functions of an ICS can roughly be classified into two categories: the operating
function (operation and monitoring function) and the engineering function. Available
functions can be changed by means of types in combination with the position of the
keylock mode switch.
There are the following types of keylock mode switch keys:
Engineer key: Can select any of the positions (ENG, MODE-ON, and MODE-OFF).
Operator key: Can select two of the positions, MODE-ON and MODE-OFF.

Figure C9.2.1

Operation Keyboard and Keylock Mode Switch

The following table shows the functions available for each operating mode set with one
of the keylock mode switch keys noted above, in relation to the switch position.
Table C9.2.1
Operating Mode

Security Provided by the Keylock Mode Switch Keys

Switch
Position

Available Functions

Operator mode

OFF

Functionally restricted in operation and monitoring (Notes 1 and 2)

Operator mode

ON

Same functions as above plus authority to change control parameters and use the utility functions.

Engineer mode

ENG

All operating functions including the use of the station maintenance

key.

Note 1: The term operation here refers to one used for individual instruments (blocks), such as a change
in the setting or the loop status.
Note 2: The type of security provided depends on the position of the keylock mode switch when a panel
or other display elements are called up on the screen. Consequently, if the user wishes to change
the key position from MODE-OFF to either MODE-ON or ENG to remove restrictions and then
manipulate the panel, place the key in the MODE-ON or ENG position and then call up the panel
again to manipulate it.

TIP
With the keylock mode switch key in the OFF position, the operator can also perform
acknowledgment operations against those tags which do not have any user-defined name
(security level: 4).

IM 33G2C20-11E

C9-3

9.3

Security Levels for Operation and Monitoring of ICS

Functions
A required security level can be set for the CRT display, instruments (function blocks),
or control data in conjunction with the position of the keylock mode switch. The security
level must be set separately for each ICS function according to the table that shows the
interrelationship between the key position and the feasibility of operation and monitoring
on an ICS. In some cases, more than one security level may be set for a particular
element to be displayed or operated. For example, when displaying or operating a
function block, restrictions are imposed both by a security level set for the block itself
and by a security level set for the CRT being used. In that case, the level with a higher
degree of restriction on operation and monitoring will precede. The following paragraphs
explain each of the security levels.

(1) ICS Functions

Display on CRT screen
Set the desired level for each CRT using the ICS configuration definition builder. For
stacked-CRT, you can set a desired security level for the upper CRT independent of the
lower CRT.
For this ICS function, the indications under monitoring in the following table show
whether or not operation panels or instrument faceplates (function blocks) can be
viewed, while the indications under operation show whether or not data can be entered
or the block status can be changed.
Table C9.3.1

Security Levels for CRT Operation and Monitoring Functions

Level
Leve

Monitoring

Operation

OFF

ON

ENG

OFF

ON

ENG

: Can be executed

X: Cannot be executed

For example, if the ICS security level is set to 4, the operator can gain access to
panels or instruments in any key positions to view them on the CRT screen. However,
no operations are allowed on them.

C9-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

9. Security

Operation panels
For each of the operation panels listed here, the user can set the desired security level
according to Table C9.3.1. Use the panel name definition builder to set the level.
Overview panel
Control group panel
Trend group panel
Graphic panel
For this ICS function, the indications under monitoring in Table C9.3.1 show whether
or not operation panels can be viewed, while the indications under operation show
whether or not operations are allowed on each operation panel.
Windows
For each of the windows listed here, the user can set the desired security level according
to Table C9.3.1 Use the window information definition builder or the computer window
information definition builder to set the level.
Help window
Graphic window
Computer window
For this ICS function, the indications under monitoring in Table C9.3.1 show whether
or not windows can be opened, while the indications under operation show whether or
not operations are allowed in each window.
Acknowledgment of process alarms on a CRT display
The feasibility of acknowledging process alarms on an CRT can be determined
independent of the ICS operation and monitoring functions. Use an appropriate builder
to set the access level. The following table shows the interrelationship between the
access levels and the acknowledgment operations.
Table C9.3.2

Security Levels for CRT Acknowledgment Operation

Level
Access Leve

: Can be executed

Acknowledgement Operation
OFF

ON

ENG

X: Cannot be executed

TIP
Buzzer resetting is allowed at any and all access levels.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C9-5

(2) FCS Functions

Depending on the position of the keylock mode switch, the user can set one of the eight
access levels for the display or operation of an instrument faceplate or the input of
process data.
Table C9.3.3

Security Levels for Instruments

Level
Leve

Monitoring

Operation

OFF

ON

ENG

OFF

ON

ENG

**1
**2

6
7

: Can be executed
X: Cannot be executed
Note: For the above access levels at which monitoring can be executed, alarms can always be confirmed.
**1: Only the alarm settings, SV, MV, and block mode can be changed.
**2: Only the SV, MV, and block mode can be changed.

Process input/output
The following I/O signals can each be labeled with a tag name (user-defined label),
allowing the user to set a desired security level as with instruments according to Table
C9.3.3 Use the process I/O definition builder to set the level.
Digital output
Communication data (digital data)
For this FCS function, the indications under monitoring in Table C9.3.3 show whether
or not each I/O signal can be viewed, while the indications under operation show
whether or not operations are allowed on each I/O signal.
Internal switches
The common and global switches can each be labeled with a tag name, allowing the user
to set a desired security level as with instruments according to Table C9.3.3. Use the
software switch definition builder to set the level.
For this FCS function, the indications under monitoring in Table C9.3.3 show whether
or not each internal switch can be viewed, while the indications under operation show
whether or not operations are allowed so each internal switch can be turned on or off.
Annunciator messages
Annunciator messages can each be labeled with a tag name, allowing the user to set a
desired security level as with internal switches according to Table C9.3.3. Use the
message definition builder to set the level.
For this FCS function, the indications under monitoring in Table C9.3.3 show whether
or not each annunciator message can be viewed, while the indications under operation
show whether or not operations are allowed so each annunciator message can be turned
on or off.

C9-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

9. Security

TIP
If you do not label any of the FCS functions to with a tag name, the given default
security level remains unchanged, resulting in a failure of the function to work as
specified. When setting a security level other than the default, always assign a tag name
(user-defined label).
Even if the tag name (user-defined label) is assigned by the builder, if the system tag
name is used to use the tag, default (4) is used for the security level. Moreover, the
display of the tag mark of the instrument faceplate on the ICS also becomes the default
(2 : general tag).
Function blocks
Function blocks can each be assigned a security level according to Table C9.3.3. Use the
control drawing simplified entry definition or detail specification definition panel to set
the level.
For this FCS function, the indications under monitoring in Table C9.3.3 show whether
or not a particular function block and its data can be viewed, while the indications under
operation show whether or not operationsinput of data or a change in the block
modeare allowed on that function block.
In cases where the function block access level and CRT access level differ, the more
restrictive of the two access restrictions is operative.
Example1: If the CRT access level is 3 and the function block access level is 1, the
function block can only be monitored as dictated by CRT access level 3.
Example2: If the CRT access level is 1 and the function block access level is 2,
monitoring and operation functions can only be performed as dictated by the function
block access level.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C9-7

9.4

Security Based on Importance of a Tag

The level of importance assigned to a tag determines the tag mark given to a function
block. Depending on the tags level of importance, different confirmation operations are
used to change data values. In the case of an important tag, a confirmation operation is
required even when changing those data items which could otherwise be done without
confirmation at the time of a data input operation. Thus, the requirement for
confirmation arises at the time of the data input operation to safeguard the system from
erroneous operations.
The following table shows the relationship between a tags importance and the
confirmation operations.
Table C9.4.1

Importance of
tag
Type of tag mark
Tag mark
Confirmation
operation

1
1
Important
tag

5
1

General tag Auxiliary tag Auxiliary tag

1
2

Important
tag

: Necessary

C9-8

Tag Marks and Confirmation Operations

General tag Auxiliary tag Auxiliary tag

1
2

: Unnecessary

IM 33G2C20-11E

9. Security

9.5

Security against Data Entry

A data value is verified for validity at the time it is input the entry window. If the data
value is found to be valid after verification, it is accepted. In some cases, however, data
input is disabled after verification. In other cases, data input involves confirmation
operations.

(1) Disabled Data Input

An operator error message will be given and no data values accepted when:
the security system provided by the access level and the position of the keylock
mode switch inhibits the given operation,
the given operation is disabled because it is exercised on a facility that does not
belong to the operation group,
the data value input overranges the limits, or
the block mode in question is a mode which does not allow any change in data
values.
(2) Data Input with Confirmation Operation
A confirmation window appears if you have entered a data value exceeding the limit.
The data value is accepted when the operator confirms it. The system asks the operator
to confirm his/her operations when attempts are made to do the following:
Operations in an attempt to input overranging data values
Example: Input of an SV data value exceeding the range set between PH and PL, HH
and LL, or SVH and SVL; input of an MV data value exceeding the range set between MH and ML
Operations in an attempt to change the block mode
Operations against a function block which is an important tag requiring a confirmation operation

Figure C9.5.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Confirmation Window

C9-9

9.6

Security Provided by Checking Users

When using the engineering function to log in the system generation builder or system
utility (on an ICS), the user can allocate a password for the user name entered. This
ensures security for the settings provided using the engineering function. Remember the
password since it never appears on the CRT screen.
A password must be assigned by observing the rules listed below:
Only alphanumeric and special characters (except for the backspace, CTRL-d, @ and
# signs) can be used for a password.
Use more than six characters to assign a password. Only the first eight characters are
read; the ninth and subsequent characters are ignored.
The password must contain more than two alphabetical characters and one or more
numerals or special characters. Alphabetical characters here refer to both uppercase
and lowercase characters.
The password must not be the same as the users name. Do not use a password
created by reversing the users name or by deleting the first few characters of the
name and adding characters to the end of the name. When the password is verified,
the same uppercase and lowercase letters are interpreted as identical.
If the password is changed, the new password must contain at least three characters
different from the old one.

C9-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

9. Security

9.7

Security for Operator Utility

The operator utility allows the operator to easily allocate operation panels or
functionality, which are necessary for system operation, to the operation and monitoring
functions configured using the system generation builder.
For more information on security for the operator utility, see Chapter 3 of Part D,
Operator Utility.

IM 33G2C20-11E

C9-11

Part D
ICS System
Maintenance
This part explains the system maintenance.
The panels to adjust an abnormality of the system in plant operation and an operating
environment are prepared.

Content
1. System Maintenance
1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

Overview ................................................................................................... D1-1

1.1.1 Position and Function Composition ............................................. D1-1
1.1.2 Panel Types .................................................................................. D1-2
1.1.3 Security ......................................................................................... D1-3
1.1.4 Accessing System Maintenance Functions .................................. D1-4
1.1.5 Panel Hierarchy and Panel Switching .......................................... D1-5
1.1.6 Common Characteristics of Maintenance Panels ........................ D1-6
System Maintenance Menu Panel ............................................................. D1-7
1.2.1 Display Format ............................................................................. D1-8
1.2.2 Panel Operation ............................................................................ D1-9
System Status Overview Panel ............................................................... D1-10
1.3.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... D1-11
1.3.2 Display Format ........................................................................... D1-12
1.3.3 Softkeys ...................................................................................... D1-15
1.3.4 Acknowledgment of Messages .................................................. D1-16
1.3.5 Panel Access ............................................................................... D1-16
1.3.6 Change of Display ...................................................................... D1-17
System Alarm Message Panel ................................................................ D1-18
1.4.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... D1-19
1.4.2 Display Format ........................................................................... D1-19
1.4.3 Softkeys ...................................................................................... D1-21
1.4.4 Acknowledgment of Messages .................................................. D1-22
1.4.5 Change of Display ...................................................................... D1-22
Control Station Status Display Panel ..................................................... D1-23
1.5.1 Overview .................................................................................... D1-23
1.5.2 Display Format ........................................................................... D1-24
1.5.3 Softkeys ...................................................................................... D1-30

D-i

1.6

1.7

1.8

1.9

Own Station Status Display Panel .......................................................... D1-32

1.6.1 Overview .................................................................................... D1-32
1.6.2 Display Format ........................................................................... D1-33
1.6.3 Softkeys ...................................................................................... D1-43
Equalization Function Panel ................................................................... D1-44
1.7.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D1-45
1.7.2 Softkeys ...................................................................................... D1-46
1.7.3 Change of Display ...................................................................... D1-46
Operating Preferences Setup Panel ......................................................... D1-47
1.8.1 Overview .................................................................................... D1-47
1.8.2 Display Format ........................................................................... D1-48
1.8.3 Softkeys ...................................................................................... D1-52
Date and Time Setup Panel .................................................................... D1-53
1.9.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D1-54
1.9.2 Equalization of Set Date and Time ............................................ D1-55
1.9.3 Notice on Time Setup ................................................................ D1-55
1.9.4 Softkeys ...................................................................................... D1-57

2. Status Display Panel

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

D-ii

Control Drawing Status Display Panel ..................................................... D2-2

2.1.1 Panel Specifications ..................................................................... D2-3
2.1.2 Panel Call ..................................................................................... D2-4
2.1.3 Display Format ............................................................................. D2-5
2.1.4 Panel Access ................................................................................. D2-6
2.1.5 Change of Display ........................................................................ D2-7
2.1.6 Half Size Panel ............................................................................. D2-7
Sequence Table Status Display Panel ...................................................... D2-8
2.2.1 Panel Specifications ..................................................................... D2-9
2.2.2 Panel Call ................................................................................... D2-10
2.2.3 Display Format ........................................................................... D2-11
2.2.4 Panel Access ............................................................................... D2-15
2.2.5 Half Size Panel ........................................................................... D2-17
Logic Chart Status Display Panel ........................................................... D2-19
2.3.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... D2-20
2.3.2 Panel Call ................................................................................... D2-21
2.3.3 Display Format ........................................................................... D2-22
2.3.4 Panel Access ............................................................................... D2-24
2.3.5 Change of Display ...................................................................... D2-24
2.3.6 Half Size Panel ........................................................................... D2-24
SEBOL Status Display Panel ................................................................. D2-25
2.4.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... D2-25
2.4.2 Panel Call ................................................................................... D2-26
2.4.3 Display Format ........................................................................... D2-27
2.4.4 Detail Display Window .............................................................. D2-31
2.4.5 Panel Access ............................................................................... D2-33
2.4.6 Half Size Panel ........................................................................... D2-34
SFC Status Display Panel ....................................................................... D2-35
2.5.1 Panel Specifications ................................................................... D2-35
2.5.2 Panel Call ................................................................................... D2-36
2.5.3 Display Format ........................................................................... D2-37
2.5.4 Panel Access ............................................................................... D2-41
2.5.5 Half Size Panel ........................................................................... D2-43
2.5.6 SEBOL Status Display Panel ..................................................... D2-44
2.5.7 Detail Display Window (Step) ................................................... D2-45
2.5.8 Detail Display Window (Transition) .......................................... D2-47

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility
3.1

3.2

3.3
3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

3.9

3.10

3.11

3.12

3.13

3.14

3.15

3.16

3.17
3.18

IM 33G2C20-11E

Overview ................................................................................................... D3-1

3.1.1 Positioning and Function Composition ........................................ D3-1
3.1.2 Operating Restrictions .................................................................. D3-1
3.1.3 Panel Hierarchy ............................................................................ D3-4
Shared Setup Items ................................................................................... D3-6
3.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................... D3-6
3.2.2 Colors and Color Symbols ........................................................... D3-6
Operator Utility Menu Panel .................................................................... D3-7
Operation Mark Definition Panel ............................................................. D3-8
3.4.1 Display Format ............................................................................. D3-8
3.4.2 Security ......................................................................................... D3-8
Function Key Assignment Panel .............................................................. D3-9
3.5.1 Display Format ............................................................................. D3-9
3.5.2 Security ......................................................................................... D3-9
3.5.3 Setup Procedures ........................................................................ D3-10
3.5.4 Panel Access ............................................................................... D3-10
Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Assignment Panel ................................ D3-11
3.6.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-11
3.6.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-12
3.6.3 Panel Access ............................................................................... D3-12
Extension Key Assignment Panel ........................................................... D3-13
3.7.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-13
3.7.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-14
3.7.3 Panel Access ............................................................................... D3-14
Trend Pen Assignment Panel .................................................................. D3-15
3.8.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-15
3.8.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-17
3.8.3 Setup Procedures ........................................................................ D3-17
External Recorder Output Assignment Panel ......................................... D3-18
3.9.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-18
3.9.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-18
3.9.3 Setup Procedures ........................................................................ D3-19
Trend Data Save Panel ........................................................................... D3-20
3.10.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-20
3.10.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-20
Trend Reference Pattern Registration Panel .......................................... D3-21
3.11.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-21
3.11.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-21
3.11.3 Setup Procedures ........................................................................ D3-22
Panel Display Sequence Definition Panel .............................................. D3-23
3.12.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-23
3.12.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-24
Panel Set Definition Panel ...................................................................... D3-25
3.13.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-25
3.13.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-26
Overview Assignment Panel ................................................................... D3-27
3.14.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-27
3.14.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-28
3.14.3 Setup Procedures ........................................................................ D3-29
Control Group Assignment Panel ........................................................... D3-30
3.15.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-30
3.15.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-31
Help Window Information Definition Panel .......................................... D3-32
3.16.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-32
3.16.2 Security ....................................................................................... D3-33
3.16.3 Panel Access ............................................................................... D3-33
Help Message Edit Panel ........................................................................ D3-34
Voice Input Panel .................................................................................... D3-35
3.18.1 Display Format ........................................................................... D3-35
3.18.2 Voice Input ................................................................................. D3-36
3.18.3 Test Output of Registered Voice ............................................... D3-36

D-iii

4. Workbench
4.1

4.2
4.3

D-iv

Overview ................................................................................................... D4-1

4.1.1 Functional Overview .................................................................... D4-1
4.1.2 Function Configuration ................................................................ D4-2
4.1.3 Display Format ............................................................................. D4-2
4.1.4 Panel Access ................................................................................. D4-3
Message Window ...................................................................................... D4-4
Configuration Files ................................................................................... D4-5
4.3.1 File Types ..................................................................................... D4-5
4.3.2 Example of File ............................................................................ D4-5

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.

System Maintenance
The system maintenance functions are the functions which supervise and manage the
statuses of the system, such as the ICS and FCS, during operation. This chapter
describes the functions used to monitor and maintain the system.

1.1

Overview

1.1.1

Position and Function Composition

(1) Position of System Maintenance Functions

The system maintenance functions described in this chapter are part of the overall system
maintenance functions included in the engineering functions. The overall maintenance
functions are divided into the following general types based on their purpose:
Functions for managing system statuses during operation
Functions for maintaining and managing files configured using the builders.
(2) System Maintenance Objectives
Use the system maintenance panels to access functions that maintain system components
during operation. Statuses that are monitored and maintained include:
Each stations intelligent status (CPU, communication, etc.)
Peripheral devices and I/Os
Equalization functions
Operating preferences setup

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-1

1.1.2

Panel Types
The system maintenance function includes the following panels:
Table D1.1.1

System Maintenance Function Panels

Actions Allowed

Panel Name
System status
overview panel

Display by selecting the

key on

See
Sectio
Section

Entry

O*

E*

O*

E*

1.3

the operation keyboard. Shows statuses

of all stations and communication buses
making up the system with the most recent system alarm messages. Also provides means to call up detailed information and the system maintenance menu
panel.

System maintenance
menu panel

Provides menu for calling up the panels

of individual system maintenance
functions.

1.2

System alarm
message panel

Displays system alarm messages in order of occurrence, beginning with the

most recent.

1.4

Control station status Displays control station operational

display panel
statuses and I/O and communication
bus statuses.

1.5

Own station status

display panel

Displays status information for the own

ICS, including connected devices, fan
rotation and temperature.

1.6

Equalization function
panel

Compares information in own ICS with

definition information in currently
operating control stations, and rewrites
definition information if any differences
are found.

1.7

Operating
preferences setup
panel

Used to change settings for mouse and

touch screen preferences.

1.8

Date and time setup

panel

Sets up or changes time displayed on

the ICS.

1.9

Y:
:
*:

D1-2

Display

Description

Action allowed N: Action not allowed

Action allowed when the operator mode is on. Action not allowed when the operator mode is off.
O represents the operator mode and E represents the engineer mode.

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.1.3

Security
Unlike general operation panels, the system sets the security on the system maintenance
panels by way of the keylock mode switch in order to restrict the personnel and
conditions for accessing the maintenance functions. Details of such restrictions based on
the position of the keylock mode switch are as follows.

(1) Display Restrictions

The following panels can only be displayed either in engineer mode or when the
operator mode is on.
Equalization function panel
Operating preferences setup panel
(2) Setting Change Restrictions
Changes to the following panels are allowed only in engineer mode:
Control station status display panel
Own station status display panel
Equalization function panel
Operating preferences setup panel
Date and time setup panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-3

1.1.4

Accessing System Maintenance Functions

The system maintenance panels can be retrieved using the method described below.
Select the
key on the operation keyboard to retrieve the system status
overview panel. And then select the [MENU] softkey on the system status overview
panel to retrieve the system maintenance menu panel.
This menu panel allows access to any panels associated with the system maintenance
functions.

System status
overview panel

System
maintenance
menu panel

Figure .D1.1.2

Figure D1.1.1

Accessing System Maintenance Panels

TIP
Entering the panel name .SM calls the system status overview panel.

D1-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.1.5

Panel Hierarchy and Panel Switching

The panel hierarchy for the system maintenance panels and their switching sequence are
illustrated below.

Figure D1.1.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

Panel Hierarchy

D1-5

1.1.6

Common Characteristics of Maintenance Panels

(1) Panel Call

Use the softkeys displayed at the bottom of each panel to move among the system
maintenance panels.
Table D1.1.2

Panel Call Softkeys

Key Name

Destination Panel

Function

[MENU]

System maintenance menu

panel

Calls up the system maintenance menu panel.

[SYSTEM]

System status overview panel

Calls up the system status overview panel.

[ALARM]

System alarm message panel

Calls up the system alarm message panel.

[SELFVIEW]

Own station status display

panel

Calls up the own station status display panel.

[PREFERNC]

Operating preferences setup

panel

Calls up the operating preferences setup panel

(2) Operations Available on Every Panel

The following table lists the operations available on all panels. Information on
operations that are panel specific is included with the panel descriptions. Selecting any
of these keys calls a window.
Table D1.1.3

Softkeys for Function Operations

Category

Acknowledgement
operations

Key
Name

Display Window

Function

[HELP]

Help window

Select after selecting a display block with the

cursor or touch operation to call up the help
window showing the detail information.

[ACK_W]

Individual
acknowledgment
window

Displayed only in situations where individual

acknowledgment operations are allowed. Select
this key after selecting a message with the cursor
or touch operation to call up a special window
used for system alarm message acknowledgment.
Acknowledgement operations can also be
performed from this window.

TIP

The [ACK_W] appears in the system only where individual acknowledgment has been
defined for an alarm acknowledgment. In this case, all alarm acknowledgments must be
made through the system alarm window. The
key on the operation keyboard
does not acknowledge system alarms where individual acknowledgment has been
defined.

D1-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.2

System Maintenance Menu Panel

The system maintenance menu panel lists all component panels included in the system
maintenance functions and allows the user to access them.

Figure D1.2.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

System Maintenance Menu Panel

D1-7

1.2.1

Display Format
Use the system maintenance menu panel to access panels for the following system
maintenance functions. Use the cursor or touch operation to make selections from the
system maintenance menu panel.
1.

[System Overview]: System status overview panel

2.

[System Alarm Message]: System alarm message panel

3.

[Control Station]: Control station status display panel

4.

[Operator Station]: Own station status display panel

5.

[Equalization]: Equalization function panel

6.

[Preference]: Operating preferences setup panel

7.

[Date,Time Set]: Date and time setup panel

Panels 5, 6 and 7 can only be displayed in engineer mode.

See Also

See Table D1.1.1, System Maintenance Function Panels.

The following figure shows the display format of the system maintenance menu panel.

Figure D1.2.2

D1-8

Display Format of System Maintenance Menu Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.2.2

Panel Operation

(1) Switching to Individual System Maintenance Panels (except for the control station status display
panel)
Simply select a desired panel from the menu using the cursor or a touch operation.
(2) Switching to the Control Station Status Display Panel
Select [Control Station] from the menu using the cursor or a touch operation, and then
enter the station name. Be careful to enter the station name not the station number.

Figure D1.2.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Switching to Control Station Status Display Panel

D1-9

1.3

System Status Overview Panel

The system status overview panel displays the status of stations connected to the VHFbus. Select the system status overview panel key
call this panel.

Figure D1.3.1

D1-10

on the operation keyboard to

Examples of System Status Overview Panel (with Group Acknowledgment)

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

Figure D1.3.2

1.3.1

Examples of System Status Overview Panel (with Individual

Acknowledgment)

Panel Specifications

(1) Specifications
Number of stations displayed:

Maximum of thirty-two per page

By switching between two pages, the statuses of sixty-four stations in total can be
supervised.
(2) Overview
The system status overview panel displays the status for the following:
All stations
Communication buses
The most recent two system alarm messages (allowing acknowledgment)
IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-11

To access the detailed display panel for a station, select the display block for that station.
Control station: Calls the control station status display panel
Own station:

Calls the own station status display panel

V-net bus:

Calls the system status overview panel for the domain to which
the bus converter is connected.

HF-bus gateway: Calls the HF-bus system status overview panel.

In addition to the CENTUM CS system, this also supports earlier generations of
CENTUM systems.

1.3.2

Display Format

(1) Display Format

The following figure shows the display format of the system status overview panel.

Figure D1.3.3

Display Format of System Status Overview Panel

The station status display block represents the status of each station (sixty-four stations
maximum) within the domain. A maximum of thirty-two stations are represented per
page.

D1-12

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

(2) Station Name

Displays the station name defined by the user during system generation.
Station name
OPS2
11 READY

Station number

OPS1
10 READY

Own ICS (own station)

The user-defined station number and station name are displayed. The station name of the
own ICS appears in reverse video.
(3) Station Status Display Block
Depicts the status of each station as follows.
(a) Normal
FCS1
1 READY

Green

(b) Failure
At a CPU failure of a non-duplexed control station or dual CPU failure of a
duplexed control station
CGW1
32 FAIL

Red

At a failure of the left CPU of a duplexed control station (single CPU failure)
FCS01
1 READY
L-FAIL

Green
Red

At a failure of the right CPU of a duplexed control station (single CPU failure)
FCS01
1 READY
R-FAIL

IM 33G2C20-11E

Green
Red

D1-13

(c) During maintenance

The character string for the status indication (e.g., READY) does not change, but the
status indication block and the string appear in a different color during maintenance.
READY

Cyan

When switched to the maintenance mode from the READY status

(d) During execution of test function
FCS01
1 READY

Green

L-FAIL

Red

TEST

Cyan

(e) During node maintenance

Execution of the maintenance of a node is indicated in the control station status display
panel.
See Also

See Section 1.5, Control Station Status Display Panel.

TIP
The status indication for stations in an HF-bus system is the same as at an EOPS
operator station.
(4) Communication Bus Status Display
The V-net bus communication status appears at the lower right of the panel. If the bus is
duplexed, separate status displays appear for lines 1 and 2.
(1) Normal
V net
1
2

Green

(2) Failed
<Failure on Line 1>
V net
Red
Failure indication
X 1

Green

Green

(3) Disabled
<Bus 1 disabled>
V net
1
2

Cyan
Green

(5) System Alarm Message Display

The two most recent system alarm messages appear in the panel. The message format is
the same as that for the system alarm message panel. The user can acknowledge a
system alarm in this system status overview panel in the same way as in the system
alarm message panel.
See Also

See Section 1.4, System Alarm Message Panel.

Number of characters displayed: up to 80 alphanumeric characters per line.

D1-14

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.3.3

Softkeys
The softkey display on this panel depends on which method has been defined for alarm
acknowledgment.
MENU

ALARM

Figure D1.3.4
MENU

[MENU]:

SELFVIEW

SYSTEM

Softkeys for Group Acknowledgment

ALARM

Figure D1.3.5

HELP

HELP

ACK_W

SELFVIEW

SYSTEM

Softkeys for Individual Acknowledgment

Switches to the system maintenance menu panel.

See Also

See Section 1.2,System Maintenance Menu Panel.

[ALARM]:

Switches to the system alarm message panel.

See Also

See Section 1.4, System Alarm Message Panel.

[HELP]:

Figure D1.3.6
[ACK_W]:

Calls up the help window, which provides detailed information on the

system alarm selected.

Example of Help Window

Calls up the system alarm window to acknowledge and delete
system alarm messages.

See Also

See Subsection 2.2.6 of Part C, System Alarm Window.

[SELFVIEW]:

Switches to the own station status display panel.

See Also
See Section 1.6, Own Station Status Display Panel.
[SYSTEM]:

IM 33G2C20-11E

Switches to the system status overview panel.

D1-15

1.3.4

Acknowledgment of Messages
System alarm messages can be acknowledged in the same way as in the system alarm
message panel. For the procedure, see Subsection 1.4.4, Acknowledgment of
Messages.

1.3.5

Panel Access
In addition to panel switching with softkeys, selecting a display block switches the
display to the detailed status display panel for that station (or system).

(1) Control Station

Selecting a station status display block switches the display to the control station status
display panel for that station.
(2) ICS
(a) Own ICS
Selecting the own station display block switches the display to the own station status
display panel.
(b) Other ICSs
The status display for another ICS is not provided; however the user can use these
display blocks to assign the desired panel to be switched to.
(3) V-net Bus Converter
Selecting a converter block switches the display to another system status overview panel
for the domain connected to that bus converter. In the example shown in the figure
below, selecting bus converter no. 1 switches the display to the system status overview
panel for domain no. 2.

Figure D1.3.7
D1-16

Example of Multi-domain System

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

(4) HF-bus Converter

Selecting a HF-bus converter switches the display to the system status overview panel
for the HF-bus system connected to that converter.
(5) Ethernet
No status display is provided for any system over the Ethernet even if connected to the
Ethernet.
(6) User-defined Switching
In addition to the system-specified panel switching functions mentioned above, the users
can define their own switching function using the system configuration definition
builder.

1.3.6

Change of Display
For a system with more than thirty-two stations, the up/down scroll keys and previous/
next page keys on the operation keyboard are effective in bringing hidden stations into
view. The page keys change the thirty-two stations (all the stations on a page) at once,
while the up/down scroll keys move eight station (one column) at a time.

Figure D1.3.8

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of System Status Overview Panel after Scrolling Up One

Column with Scroll Key

D1-17

1.4

System Alarm Message Panel

The system alarm message panel informs the user of system related messages such as a
hardware failure or communication error. These system messages are not user definable,
but provided with the system software beforehand.

Figure D1.4.1

D1-18

Examples of System Alarm Message Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.4.1

Panel Specifications
The following table lists system alarm message panel specifications.
Table D1.4.1

System Alarm Message Panel Specifications

Item

Specification

Number of messages displayed

20 per page (For more than 20 per page, scrolling is

available.)

Number of messages retained

5 pages (100 messages) per ICS

For details of messages, refer to the ICS Messages (IM 33G2H02-11E).

1.4.2

Display Format
The system alarm message panel lists system alarm messages in order of occurrence,
with the most recent listed first. The softkey display on this panel differs slightly
depending on the alarm acknowledgment system. The following figures show the display
format of the system alarm message panel.

Figure D1.4.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

Display Formats of System Alarm Message Panel(1/2)

D1-19

Figure D1.4.2

Display Formats of System Alarm Message Panel(2/2)

200083 Mar. 08 13:29:46 FCS1

IOM Configuration Error RI01 NODE 01 UNIT 02 SLOT 01

Date and time of

alarm message occurrence
System alarm message mark
Display order number
Message number

System alarm message

(a) System alarm message mark

The alarm mark is the system-specified symbol block to identify a system alarm and is
effective for visual identification by the user upon occurrence of an alarm.
Occurrence of alarm: Red (flashing)
Recovered: Green
After acknowledgment: No flashing
(b) Message number
System alarm messages are not messages that can be defined by users, but are provided
with the system software. The message numbers are the identification numbers for the
alarm types.
Color: white (fixed)
(c) Date and time of alarm message occurrence
System alarm messages are displayed in the order of occurrence and immediately
updated, with the date and time of occurrence indicated for each. However, the date
format is the system common format defined by the user.
Color: white (fixed)

D1-20

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

(d) System alarm message

Informs the user of a system problem with an audible alarm.
Color: white (fixed)
(e) Number of alarms on the current panel/Number of alarms occurred
The number of alarms on the current panel and the total number of messages remaining
are shown in the form of a fraction.

1.4.3

Softkeys
The softkey display on this panel depends on which method has been defined for alarm
acknowledgment.
MENU

Figure D1.4.3
MENU

Figure D1.4.4

HELP

DELETE

PAUSE

SYSTEM

Softkeys for Group Acknowledgment

HELP

ACK_
_W

PAUSE

SYSTEM

Softkeys for Individual Acknowledgment

[MENU]: Switches to the system maintenance menu panel.

See Also

See Section 1.2, System Maintenance Menu Panel.

[HELP]:

Calls up the help window. The detailed messages which help to realize
the system alarm messages selected are being displayed.

[DELETE]:

Deletes messages which have been already acknowledged in the panel.

key on the operation keyboard to acknowledge the
Use the
alarms.

[PAUSE]:

Pauses updating of the display of a system alarm message panel for five
seconds. This function is canceled automatically after five seconds.
Alarm messages occurred during the pause appear upon resumption of
the display.

[SYSTEM]:

Switches to the system status overview panel.

See Also

See Section 1.3, System Status Overview Panel.

[ACK_W]:

Calls up the system alarm window to acknowledge and delete system

alarms.

See Also

See Subsection 2.2.6 of Part C, System Alarm Window.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-21

1.4.4

Acknowledgment of Messages
System alarm messages can be acknowledged by group acknowledgment or individual
acknowledgment. During system configuration, the user must select group or individual
acknowledgment using the ICS builder. It should be noted that this specification of
acknowledgment also applies to other messages such as process alarm messages and
operator guide messages.
Table D1.4.2
Keylock mode
switch position

Restrictions on Alarm Acknowledgment/Deletion with Keylock

Mode Switch
Group acknowledgment

Individual acknowledgment

Acknowledge

Delete

Acknowledge

Delete

ON

OFF

ENG

: Allowed
: Not allowed
Note:
In case of individual acknowledgment, the alarm acknowledge key on the operation keyboard
does not function.

For details of the acknowledgment of messages, refer to Section 3.3 of Part C, Acknowledgment of messages.

TIP

1.4.5

(1)

Once acknowledged, even if an alarm status has not yet been recovered (the alarm
message mark is in red), deletion by the user deletes the alarm on the panel.

(2)

Alarm messages with the same message number are acknowledged with one
action regardless of whether they are all displayed on the current page.

(3)

The users acknowledgment and deletion is transmitted to other ICSs within the
same operation group, where the same process is executed to equalize the alarm
status indication.

Change of Display

(1) Scroll Operation

If all messages cannot be contained on a single page, MORE is displayed in the
bottom right corner of the panel. The message can be scrolled by the scroll operation.
(2) Page Change
Although the scroll operation changes messages one by one, the page change operation
changes the display on a page basis (20 messages).

D1-22

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.5

Control Station Status Display Panel

The control station status display panel provides a list of running statuses for a control
station. For an effective visual identification on the entire list of station statuses, each
status, such as hardware, I/O, or communication, is represented in a different color
depending on the condition.

Figure D1.5.1

1.5.1

Example of Control Station Status Display Panel

Overview
The control station status display panel shows the following control station status
information:
Station configuration
Station status
Area status
Communication bus status
Node status
I/O module status
If the operator station cannot read the control station status when the panel is called up,
no display is provided for the control nest and I/O. It is also possible to start/stop the
control station or save parameters using an appropriate softkey.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-23

1.5.2

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the control station status display panel.

Figure D1.5.2

Display Format of Control Station Status Display Panel

(1) Control Station Information

Station name

FCS1
Station model code
Project name
System software
revision number
Generation date
and time
CPU loading

Figure D1.5.3

Station comment

Domain, physical station number

Control Station for Demo

(02-01)

AFH20D
Project: newpro
Rev. : R2.01.00
Generation
95.01.06 14:48
CPU Idle Time
18 sec
Example of Control Station Information

For the generation date and time, the most recent from those dates of the stations
common database and control areas within this station.

D1-24

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

(2) Control Station Status Display

This display shows the environmental conditions for the control station, such as
temperature, fan operation and power supply condition. Green indicates normal
conditions. If a problem occurs, the color changes to red and an X appears at the
indication.
The information displayed is as follows.

Red

TEMP
AIR IN
AIR OUT
BATTERY (L, R)
FAN
FCU (N1, N2)
DOOR (X1, X2, 3, 4)
BATTERY (L, R)
Upon failure of door fans

TEMP
AIR IN
AIR OUT
BATTERY (L,R)
FAN
FCU (N1, N2)
DOOR (1, 2, 3, 4)
BATTERY (L, R)
Normal

Normal: Green
Abnormal: Red with an X

Figure D1.5.4

Example of Control Station Status Display

TEMP
AIR IN
AIR OUT
BATTERY (L, R)
FAN
FCU (N1, N2)
DOOR (1, 2, 3, 4)
BATTERY (L, R)
EPSU (1, 2)

: Temperature
: Intake air temperature
: Exhaust air temperature
: Battery temperatures
: Fan operation status
: Field control unit fans
: Door fans (Not shown for rack-mounted FCU)
: Battery conditions
: Power supply units
(Displayed only for the specific system of an electric
power station)

(3) I/O Expansion Cabinet Status Display

The I/O expansion cabinet status is displayed as shown below. Green indicates normal
conditions. If a problem occurs, the color changes to red and an X appears at the
indication.
-TBCTEMP
AIR IN
AIR OUT
FAN
DOOR (1, 2, 3, 4)

Figure D1.5.5
-TBCTEMP
AIR IN
AIR OUT
FAN
DOOR (1,2,3,4)

IM 33G2C20-11E

Normal: Green
Abnormal: Red with an X

Example of I/O Expansion Cabinet Status Display

: Temperature
: Intake air temperature
: Exhaust air temperature
: Fan operation status
: Door fans (1, 2, 3, 4)

D1-25

(4) Control Station Configuration Display

The control unit card configuration and card statuses are displayed. For a non-duplexed
configuration, only the right side (R) card set appears on the display. Optional card
names are displayed based on builder definition information.
Start condition
switch position

V-net bus status

MAN

V net

1
C
P
U

R
I
O
1

P
S
U

V net 1

V net 2

Non-duplexed configuration
MAN

P
S
U

V net

R
I
O
1

C
P
U

1
C
P
U

R
I
O
1

P
S
U

V net 1

V net 2

Duplexed configuration

Figure D1.5.6

Examples of Control Unit Configuration Display

(a) Control unit status

Table D1.5.1

Display of Control Unit Configuration

Display

Display
comment

On
stand-by

Under
maintenance

Failed

Green

Yellow
with a

Red with
an X

Green

Yellow
with a

Red with
an X

Yellow
Cyan
with a

Normal

PSU
(Note)

Power supply unit

RIO1

Remote I/O communication cards

RIO2

(If duplexed process I/O communication)

CPU

Processor card

Green

Program copy

Blinks in white while copying

COPY
V net
1 2

Note:

D1-26

Name

Red with
an X

V-net bus status display

1 : Displayed Line 1 status
2 : Displayed Line 2 status

Green

Red with
an X

If both PSUs are disconnected when V-net bus is duplexed, the PSU disconnected first is
displayed in red and the PSU disconnected later is in green.

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

See the example of the status display below.

Stand-by
MAN

Failed

Normal

P
S
U

V net

R
I
O
1

C
P
U

1
C
P
U

R
I
O
1

P
S
U

V net 1

V net 2

Figure D1.5.7

Example of Control Unit Status Display

TIP
If the I/O units are disconnected, the RB cards (RIO1 and RIO2) of the right side card
set (R) are displayed in green, and L in yellow. This is fixed and does not reflect the
actual card conditions.
(b) Start condition switch position
The start condition at power on is displayed on the upper left side of the control unit
configuration display.
Table D1.5.2

Start Condition at Power-on of Control Station

Symbol
AUT
AUT 2

Description
Continuous start
Continuous start 2

MAN

Initialized start

TIM

Continuous start: When recovered from an instantaneous power failure

Initialized start: When recovered from a longer power failure

(c) V-net bus status

Normal: Green
Failed: Red with an X
Disabled: Cyan
(5) Control Area Status Display
The status of the control area in the FCS is displayed.
Area Condition
FCS0101 :RUN
FCS0102 :RUN
Figure D1.5.8

Example of Control Area Status Display

Area Condition
AREA01 : RUN
AREA02 : STOP
:
:
AREA0S : RUN

IM 33G2C20-11E

Area name and STOP/RUN status

RUN: Running
STOP: Stopped

D1-27

(6) Node Status Display

This shows the statuses of the nodes connected to the remote I/O bus. Only the number
of nodes defined with the builder is displayed. Up to 8 nodes per I/O bus are available in
the FCS.
1

01

02

XCOMXCOM
PSU

PSU

COM COM
PSU

PSU

I/O-FAIL

Figure D1.5.9

Example of Node Status Display

(a) Remote I/O bus status

For non-depulexed bus configuration, only line 1 is displayed. Green indicates normal
conditions. If a problem occurs, the color changes to red and an X appears at the
indication.
Normal
1

Green

Failed
Failure on Line 2
X 2
1

Normal: Green
Abnormal: Red with an X

Green

Green

Red

Figure D1.5.10 Example of Remote I/O bus Status

(b) Node status
The node status is displayed as shown in the following figures. Green indicates normal
conditions. If a problem occurs, the color changes to red and an X appears at the
indication.
Failed
01

02

XCOM XCOM
PSU

Normal

PSU

COM COM
PSU

PSU

I/O-FAIL

Figure D1.5.11

D1-28

Example of Node Status Display

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

Remote I/O bus

Line 1
Node
number

Line 2

n
COM

COM

PSU

PSU

I/O FAIL
TEMP

FAN

Node display
Normal: Green
Failed: Red with an X
Maintenance: Cyan
PSU status
Normal: Green
Failed: Red with an X
Input unit status (representative display)
Not displayed if normal.
I/O FAIL displayed in red if failed.
Node status (TEMP, FAN)
Not displayed for rack-mounted unit.
Normal: Green
Failed: Red with an X

Figure D1.5.12 Display Format of Node Status (for Duplexed RIO bus)

(7) I/O Unit Status Display

A maximum of five I/O units can be connected per node. Use the cursor or touch
operation to select a node status block and to call up a display of the I/O unit statuses
for the node.

Figure D1.5.13 Example of I/O Unit Status Display Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-29

Figure D1.5.14 Display Format of I/O Unit Status Display Window

1.5.3

Softkeys
The following figure shows the softkeys on the control station status display panel.
STN_RUN

STN_STOP

_ SAVE
P_

_ LOAD
I/O_

SYSTEM

Figure D1.5.15 Softkeys

[STN_RUN]:

Executes the startup operation on the control station whose status

is currently displayed. A confirmation window appears.

Figure D1.5.16 Example of Confirmation Window

[STN_STOP]:

D1-30

Executes the shutdown operation on the control station whose

status is currently displayed. A confirmation window appears.

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

Figure D1.5.17 Example of Confirmation Window

TIP

This station run/stop operation is available at control stations belonging to domains other
than the domain to which the own ICS belongs.
[P_SAVE]:

Saves the parameters of the control station.

When this softkey is selected, a confirmation window appears.

Figure D1.5.18 Example of Confirmation Window

[I/O LOAD]: Executes loading to an I/O module. Information such as range specifications which were defined using the builder is then installed in the module.
Select one module in the I/O unit status display window and select on
this softkey. A confirmation window then appears.

Figure D1.5.19 Example of Confirmation Window

[SYSTEM]:

Switches to the system status overview panel.

See Also
See Section 1.3, System Status Overview Panel.

TIP

All softkey operations are enabled only when the keylock mode switch is in the engineer
mode.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-31

1.6

Own Station Status Display Panel

The own station status display panel displays status information concerning the own ICS, in
other words, the ICS at which you are looking at this panel. In a manner similar to the way
the control station status display panel provides status identification, colors enhance visual
identification of the statuses in this panel, too.

Figure D1.6.1

1.6.1

Example of Own Station Status Display Panel

Overview
This panel displays status information and provides setting functions concerning the own
ICS as outlined below.
Status display
ICS station configuration
ICS station status
Connected device statuses
Communication bus status
Communication port connection status
Setting functions
Printer mode setting
Operation group operating mode setting
Alarm summary panel display mode setting
SCSI port setting

D1-32

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.6.2

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the own station status display panel.

Figure D1.6.2

Display Format of Own Station Status Display Panel

(1) ICS Information Display

ICS information is displayed as shown in the following figure.
Station name

ICS02
Station type
Project name
Software
revision number
Builder master
Panel assignment
master

Figure D1.6.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Station comment

Domain number

ICS for Demo

Station number

(02-11)

AIH21C
Project: newpro
REV. : R2.06.00
Builder: EWS64
Assign: ICS02
Example of ICS Information Display

D1-33

(2) ICS Status Display

The ICS status display area shows the following information about the ICS operational
environment. The display is in green if normal, or in red with an X if not normal.

TEMP
HDD
CPU
AIR IN
AIR OUT
BATTERY
PSU
FAN
NEST (L, R)
DOOR (L, C, R)
BATTERY
NR
Normal

Figure D1.6.4

Battery low

Example of ICS Status Display

TEMP
HDD
CPU
AIR IN
AIR OUT
BATTERY
PSU
FAN
NEST (L, R)
DOOR (L, C, R)
BATTERY
NR
XLOW

D1-34

Red

TEMP
HDD
CPU
AIR IN
AIR OUT
BATTERY
PSU
FAN
NEST (L, R)
DOOR (L, C, R)
BATTERY
XLOW

: Temperature
: Temperature near hard disk
: Temperature near processor card
: Intake air temperature
: Exhaust air temperature
: Temperature near battery
: Temperature of the power supply unit
: Fan operation status
: Nest fans (1, 2)
: Door fans (1, 2, 3)
: Battery condition
: When it is normal, NR is displayed.
: When the battery is low, LOW is displayed in red
and an X appears.

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

(3) ICS Configuration Display

The ICS card configuration and mirrored disk status are displayed in this area as shown
below.

H
D
D

P C
S P
U U

lbpCN

V net

H
D
D

RS0

centro

V net

lbp00

H
D
D

P
S
U

chuCN

E
N
7
1

prt00
RS1

lbp01
RS2

R
S
7
1

RS0

centro

RS1

VO

C
P
U

lbp01
Mirrored disk

lbp02
RS3
eruc
Standard disk

Figure D1.6.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

Examples of ICS Configuration Display

D1-35

 Nest Status Display

The display contents for the nest status are as shown in the figure below.
ICS card configuration
Hard disk status
Normal: Green
Failed: Red with an X

V net

1
V-net bus status
Normal: Green
Failed: Red with an X
If non-duplexed bus,
only bus line 1 is displayed.

H
D
D

P
S
U

C
P
U

R
S
7
1

E
N
7
1

Serial outputs (RS-232C x4)

for LBP and serial printers
Parallel output
(Centronics x1)
for hard copy unit

centro
chuCN

RS0
prt00
RS1

Devices connected to communication port

lbp01
VO
Voice output function status
Provided: Displayed
Not provided: No display

Figure D1.6.6

Example of Nest Status Display

Mirrored Disk Status Display

Figure D1.6.7

D1-36

Example of Nest Status Display with Mirrored Disk

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

a. Accessing mirrored disk operation window

In mirrored disk configuration, select HDD in the nest on the display.

Figure D1.6.8

Selecting HDD

The mirrored disk operation window appears.

Figure D1.6.9

Example of Mirrored Disk Operation Window

b. Turning on/off power to a mirrored disk

Use this window to turn on/off the power to either disk when the disk is removed or
installed.
CENTUM CS
software
Note: HDD is yellow while
being copied
HDD *1
(Green)

HDD
*2
(Red with an X)

Hard disk

Hard disk

online *3
(Power on)

X
H
D
D

H
D
D

P
S
U

C
P
U

R
S
7
1

E
N
7
1

*1 *2

offline *4
(Power off)

Power supply
unit

Figure D1.6.10 Mirrored Disk and Operation Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-37

online * 3 : Denotes the current disk status. Use this button to place it offline .
offline * 4 : Denotes the current disk status. Use this button to place it online .

When one of the above buttons is selected, the window appears to prompt the confirmation.

Figure D1.6.11

Example of Confirmation Window

This switching operation is only valid while the object disk is down (when XHDD is
red*2). Your switching operation to the other status will lead to the following help
message.

Figure D1.6.12 Help Window

c. Equalizing a mirrored disk
If any discrepancy appears in the contents of disks, e.g., the maintenance of one disk,
this operation is needed to keep a mirrored configuration.
Select the COPY button. The window appears for confirmation.

Figure D1.6.13 Confirmation Window

This equalizing operation is allowed only when the status indications are as follows:
One disk: HDD (Green), and
The other: XHDD (Red)
Namely, operation under the following statuses are deemed a wrong operation:
One disk: HDD (Green)
The other: HDD (Yellow)

D1-38

One disk: HDD (Green)

The other: HDD (Green)

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

V-net Bus Status

When Normal

When abnormal
<Line 1 failure>
V net

V net

X 1

1
2

H
D
D

Green

P C R E
S P S N
U U 7 7
1 1

H
D
D

Red
Green

P C
S P
U U

Normal: Green
Failed: Red with an X
Disabled: Cyan

Figure D1.6.14 Example of V-net Bus Status Display

(4) Operation Group Operating Mode

See Also
See Chapter 8 of Part C, Operation Group.

This area displays the operating mode of the operation group. The user can switch the
mode from this display. The operation group configuration and its actions must have
been previously defined using the ICS builder.
(a) Display and switching of operation group for own ICS

Figure D1.6.15 Example of Operation Group Operating Mode Display

When an operating mode switch is intended, a window appears for confirmation.

Figure D1.6.16 Example of Confirmation Window

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-39

(b) Setting operating mode for other ICSs in the same group
The operating mode of the other ICSs within the same operation group can be equalized
to the own ICSs mode from the own ICS.

Figure D1.6.17 Example of Other ICSs Operating Mode Setup Button

Select the

button. The window as shown below appears for confirmation.

Figure D1.6.18 Example of Confirmation Window

(5) Alarm Summary Panel Display Mode

See Also

See Section 1.10 of Part C, Alarm Summary Panel.

This area shows the alarm suppression mode selected for displaying alarms on the alarm
summary panel. The mode can be switched in this display.

Figure D1.6.19 Example of Alarm Summary Panel Display Mode

ALL:

All alarms (process alarms and annunciator messages) are displayed.

TAG:

Only one alarm for one instrument block (tag) is displayed. This
representative alarm has the highest priority among the alarms occurring
and associated with that tag.

Emergency:

Only high priority alarms are displayed.

High:

Only high and medium priority alarms are displayed.

TIP
The ALL and Emergency modes described above can also be selected on the alarm
summary panel. (The Emergency mode corresponds to IMPORTAN in the alarm
summary panel). However, selection on the alarm summary panel applies to the scope of
alarms specified in this panel. For example, if the High mode is selected in this panel
and the ALL mode is selected in the alarm summary panel, the alarm summary panel
can display only high and medium priority alarms.

D1-40

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

When it is intended for the mode to be changed, the window as shown below appears
for confirmation.

Figure D1.6.20 Example of Confirmation Window (When Emergency Mode is

Selected)

(6) Printer Mode

This specifies the following items concerning a message output request from the ICS to
printer devices:

Figure D1.6.21 Example of Printer Mode Display

Message output mode
The message output modes determine whether or not output requests by messages are
processed.
ON : processed
OFF : not processed
Default : ON
Message output destination
For each message, destination printer device connection status is either Master or
Backup. The printer device currently in use is also indicated. This selection must be
made beforehand using the ICS configuration definition builder. Note that this
processing is handled on the basis of the printer class name.

IM 33G2C20-11E

msg 1: message1

msg 2: message2

msg 3: message3

msg 4: message4

chu: hard copy output

lbp: laser beam printer output

prt: serial printer output

D1-41

Figure D1.6.22 Display Format of Printer Mode Display

When a master/backup changeover is intended, a window as shown below appears for
confirmation.

Figure D1.6.23 Example of Confirmation Window

D1-42

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.6.3

Softkeys
The following figure shows the softkeys on the own station status display panel.
MENU

PREFERNC

_DIS
PORT_

_ ENA
PORT_

SYSTEM

Figure D1.6.24 Softkeys

[MENU]:

Switches to the system maintenance menu panel.

See Also

See Section 1.2, System Maintenance Menu Panel.

[PREFERNC]: Switches to the operating preferences setup panel.

See Also
See Section 1.8, Operating Preferences Setup Panel.

TIP
Switching to the operating preferences setup panel is allowed only when the keylock
mode switch is in the engineer mode.
[PORT_DIS]: Disables the connection between the SCSI port and an external device.
The window as shown below appears for confirmation.

Figure D1.6.25 Confirmation Window

[PORT_ENA]: Enables the connection between the SCSI port and an external device.
The window as shown below appears for confirmation.

Figure D1.6.26 Confirmation Window

TIP
The SCSI port is the connection port for an external device such as streamer tape. While
not being used, the SCSI port must be disabled. The status of the SCSI port is also
indicated by the LED on the SCSI port.
[SYSTEM]: Switches to the system status overview panel.

See Also

See Section 1.3, System Status Overview Panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-43

1.7

Equalization Function Panel

Use this panel to enforce consistency in database files between the master station
(managing the system engineering and databases) and its subordinate ICSs. When the
ICS is started, the system compares the creation time and date of files in the own ICS
with those in the master station. If there is a discrepancy between them, the ICS issues
an equalization request message to the user. If this message appears, the ICS data in the
concerned file should be equalized with data in the master station.

Figure D1.7.1

D1-44

Example of Equalization Function Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.7.1

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the equalization function panel.

Figure D1.7.2

Display Format of Equalization Function Panel

(1) ICS Information

Station name

61ALL

Station comment

Domain and station numbers

Operation and Monitoring

Project: U-PLANT

(03-61)

Project name

Figure D1.7.3

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of ICS Information

D1-45

(2) File Information

1

File
1 OGFCS01111.odb
2 SDFCS01111.odb
3 SDARAE01.odb
Figure D1.7.4

Self
94.02.10 16:34
70.01.01 09:00
70.01.01 09:00

System
94.02.03 11:00
94.02.03 11:00
94.02.25 11:37

Example of File Information

Number of files displayed: maximum of 20 per page

The names of files requested for equalization and the creation date and time for the
files in the own ICS change color to show the equalization processing status.
Equalization requested: Red
Equalization completed: Green
The creation date and time for the files in the master station are fixed in cyan.

1.7.2

Softkeys
The following figure shows the softkeys on the equalization function panel.
MENU

Figure D1.7.5
[MENU]:

START

SYSTEM

Softkeys
Switches to the system maintenance menu panel.

See Also
See Section 1.2, System Maintenance Menu Panel.
[START]:

Figure D1.7.6
[SYSTEM]:

Executes equalization. The window appears for confirmation.

Confirmation Window
Switches to the system status overview panel.

See Also
See Section 1.3, System Status Overview Panel.

1.7.3

Change of Display
The files requiring equalization can be scrolled on the display.

D1-46

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.8

Operating Preferences Setup Panel

Use this panel to control own ICS settings.

Figure D1.8.1

1.8.1

Example of Operating Preference Setup Panel

Overview
Use the operating preferences setup panel to select the following aspects of the ICS
operating environment:
Touch screen behavior
Key click
Alarm beep types
Alarm beep speaker volume control

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-47

1.8.2

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the operating preferences setup panel.

Figure D1.8.2

Display Format of Operating Preferences Setup Panel

(1) ICS Information Display

The display contains the following information about the ICS:
Station name

OPS1
Station type
Project name
Software
revision number

Figure D1.8.3

D1-48

Station comment

Test Data 2

Domain and station numbers

(02-10)

AIH21C
Project: newpro
REV. : R2.01.00
Example of ICS Information Display

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

(2) Touch Screen Behavior Mode

The touch screen behavior setting area indicates and is used to change the mode of touch
screen behavior.

Figure D1.8.4

Example of Touch Screen Behavior Mode

Touch down mode: Function is activated when a finger touches the CRT screen.
Lift off mode: Function is activated when a finger is removed from the CRT screen.
When it is intended for the mode to be changed, the window as shown below appears
for confirmation.

Figure D1.8.5

Example of Confirmation Window

(3) Availability of Touch Screen Function

The touch screen function setting area indicates and is used to change whether or not the
function is available. The selection is made for each CRT.

Figure D1.8.6

Example of Yes/No Indication for Touch Screen Function

When it is intended for the function to be switched on/off, the window as shown below
appears for confirmation.

Figure D1.8.7

Example of Confirmation Window

(4) Initialization of Touch Screen

Use the following button to initialize the internal status of the touch screen.

Figure D1.8.8

Touch Screen Initialization Button

Selecting this button calls the window as shown below for confirmation.

Figure D1.8.9
Selecting [
IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Confirmation Window

] calls the initialization panel and initialization is executed automatically.
D1-49

(5) Adjustment for Parallax Touch Screen

Use the following button to compensate for parallax error between the actual touch
position and sensing position.

Figure D1.8.10 Touch Screen Calibration Button

Selecting this button calls the window as shown below for confirmation.

Figure D1.8.11
Selecting [

Example of Confirmation Window

] calls the calibration panel. Perform calibration in this panel.

TIP
Periodic initialization and calibration are required for error-free operation of the touch
screen.
(6) Setting Items (3), (4), and (5) on CRT2
The display/setting functions of Items (3), (4), and (5) are provided for CRT2; item (2)
is common to CRT1 and CRT2.

Figure D1.8.12 Examples of Touch Screen Setup Display for CRT2

(7) Alarm Beep (Electronic Tone)

The alarm beep tone and volume control area is shown below. Each specified beep can
be tested separately.
Alarm Beep
1

3 12

4 18

5 24

6 30

7 36

Figure D1.8.13 Example of Alarm Beep Setup

D1-50

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

(a) Tone type

There are forty-two types of tones (nos. 0-41) available. Select seven of them to assign
to separate alarm tone numbers.
Default: 0, 6, 12, 18, 24, 30, and 36
(b) Testing the beeps
The assigned tones and volume can be tested using the test button separately. Select the
test button () beside the tone number to generate an audible five-second test.
(c) Volume
Specify the volume separately from four levels.

Figure D1.8.14 Display Format of Alarm Beep

TIP

Turn off the electronic alarm beep prior to changing the setting.
(8) Key Click
The key click control area controls whether the station should generate valid operation
and invalid operation key click tones to indicate the acceptance or rejection of key
stroke or touch operations.

Figure D1.8.15 Example of Key Click Yes/No Status Display

Yes: An audible sound is emitted.
No: No sound is emitted.
Default: Yes

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-51

(9) Volume Control

The control area for electronic tone volume is shown in the figure below. Both internal
and external speaker volume is controlled from eight levels (0-7).
Volume Control
Alarm Beep

E_Alarm Beep

Figure D1.8.16 Example of Volume Control Display

Alarm Beep: Controls the volume of the built-in alarm speaker.
E_Alarm Beep: Controls the volume of an external alarm speaker.

TIP
These volumes control the all alarm beeps specified in Item (7) as a group. The volume
can also be changed via the system maintenance panel.
(10) Voice Volume
The control area for voice output volume is shown in the figure below. This area is
displayed only when the optional voice output function is provided.
Voice Volume
Voice Output

E_Voice Output

Figure D1.8.17 Example of Voice Output Volume Display

The display and volume control schemes are the same as Item (9).

1.8.3

Softkeys
The following figure shows the softkeys on the operating preferences setup panel.
MENU

SELFVIEW

SYSTEM

Figure D1.8.18 Softkeys

[MENU]:

Switches to the system maintenance menu panel.

See Also
See Section 1.2, System Maintenance Menu Panel.
[SELFVIEW]: Switches to the own station status display panel.
See Also

See Section 1.6, Own Station Status Display Panel.

[SYSTEM]:

Switches to the system status overview panel.

See Also
See Section 1.3, System Status Overview Panel.
D1-52

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.9

Date and Time Setup Panel

The date and time setup panel sets or changes the time displayed on the ICS. Only an
ICS and FCS on a V-net as well as computers via the communication gateway unit
(ACG) are influenced by time set changes.

Figure D1.9.1

Example of Date and Time Setup Panel

NOTE

Time changes may be executed once or twice a month to compensate for approximately
one minute in hardware accuracy. If the time changes are used to speed up the
application test regarding starting the scheduler, the corresponding operation and test
results are not assured.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-53

1.9.1

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the date and time setup panel.

Figure D1.9.2.

Display Format of Date and Time Setup Panel

Analog time display: Clock indicates the time. Updated every second.
Date display:
Date is indicated in digital form. The display format can be
defined in the system definition builder. Updated every second.
Digital time display: Time is indicated in digital form. The display format can be
defined in the system definition builder. Updated every second.

TIP
The update period may be greatly different depending on the loading status of the ICS.

D1-54

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.9.2

Equalization of Set Date and Time

The date and time set or changed by the ICS are sent to other stations.
Where the time changes have been specified in the bus converter builder, the set or
changed date and time are sent to an ICS on the other V-net bus. The time on the
same V-net bus will be changed without specifying a time change in the bus converter builder. For the bus converter builder, see the separate Bus Converter
Function Manual, Bus Converter Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G5C20-11E).
The date and time set or changed by the ICS are not sent to existing systems such as
CENTUM-XL.
The operation to change the date and time on the master ICS is the same as that on
other ICSs.

1.9.3

Notice on Time Setup

When adjusting the time, exercise care in the following points:
(1)

Do not set the time while the builder is being executed.

(2)

Before changing the time, always terminate the operator utility with the related
ICS as well as all ICSs on the same domain.

(3)

Trend data display

If you change the current time to a time in the past, the trend data for the interval
will be duplicated. Note that part of the system data including the trend data may
be lacking.
If you advance the current time, the trend data for the interval will be skipped,
thereby displaying the data discontinuously.

(4)

The date and time of the message will be updated after modification, but the date
and time for historical messages remain unchanged.

(5)

Scheduler
If you advance the current time:
less than five minutes, the data for the time difference are output immediately
after changing the time.
more than five minutes, the data for the time difference are no longer output.
If you change the current time to a time in the past:
by less than five minutes, the data that were already output during the time
difference are no longer output.
by more than five minutes, the data that were already output during the time
difference will be output again.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-55

(6)

MIF function
MIF instruments (TR_SM, TR_CP)
The statistical amounts of data such as total values and standard deviations will
increase or decrease with the time changed. This increment or decrement takes
place only when the statistical amounts of data are first computed after setting
the time.

If you advance the current time:

The input data acquisition intervals decrease; thus, the total values decrease.
Similarly, other statistical amounts of data are also influenced by decreasing the
acquisition intervals.

If you change the current time to a time in the past:

The input data acquisition intervals increase, thus the total values increase.
Similarly, other statistical amounts of data are also influenced by increasing the
acquisition intervals.

Data acquisition processing

The MIF stores the acquired data in the database. The acquired data are stored
in the order of acquisition, and if the database is full, the oldest data will be
discarded. Therefore, even if data are missing or duplicated with time, there
will be no individual data records or there will be two individual data records.
The report functions using these data handle the data so that if there are no
data records, data are missing, and if there are two data records, the data record
stored last is used.
Schedule processing
If you set the current time ahead:
In cases where data processing on the hour is missing because of time changes,
schedule processing is executed just before the hour. For example, if you
change from 14:23 to 16:10, closing processing is executed at 16:00.
If you change the current time to a time in the past:
The defined schedule is not executed until the updated time. To avoid this, load
the file into the ICS from the MIF builder after changing the time.
(7)

CS Batch
If the application software is processing to find the time, for example, in the
case where statistical data processing is required by finding the unit execution
time from the time required when the unit starts until it stops, special care
should be exercised.
When the schedule management package uses automatic batch start functions,
if you set the time ahead of the batch start time + 5 minutes or more than 5
minutes, batch operation is not executed. For example, where there is a formula
to be started at 10:00, if you advance time after 10:05, the required recipe will
not be executed.

D1-56

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. System Maintenance

1.9.4

Softkeys
The following figure shows the softkeys on the date and time setup panel.
MENU

Figure D1.9.3
[MENU]:

DATE

TIME

SYSTEM

Softkeys
Switches to the system maintenance menu panel.

See Also

See Section 1.2, System Maintenance Menu Panel.

[Date]:

Calls up the date change window.

[TIME]:

Calls up the time change window.

[SYSTEM]:

Switches to the system status overview panel.

See Also

See Section 1.3, System Status Overview Panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D1-57

2. Status Display Panel

2.

Status Display Panel

The status display panels provide the status of the process controls in different colors so
that users can visually comprehend the progress of the controls. Not all the panels within
this group of functions are equipped for all systems, but the following panels are
available.
Control Drawing Status Display Panel
Sequence Table Status Display Panel
Logic Chart Status Display Panel
SEBOL Status Display Panel
SFC Status Display Panel
When you read this chapter, read the FCS Builder Operation Manual (IM 33G4L20-11E)
and the Field Control Station Function Manual (IM 33G3C10-11E) together with this
chapter.

TIP
Except for the sequence table status display panel, the optional software packages are
essential in order to have the above panels available at an ICS.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-1

2.1

Control Drawing Status Display Panel

The control drawing status display panel is used to visually comprehend a plants control
status and is typically effective in comprehending continuous process statuses.

Figure D2.1.1

Example of Control Drawing Status Display Panel

TIP
To have the control drawing status display panel available at an ICS, the status display
functions must be created using the builder operation utility.

D2-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.1.1

Panel Specifications
The following table lists control drawing status display panel specifications.
Table D2.1.1

Control Drawing Status Display Panel Specifications

Item

Capacity
p
y

Display

Number of display blocks

Total number of pages

Corresponds to the control drawing builder

Panel size

1600x1000 dots

Display elements

Function blocks, wiring, data, alarm statuses, block comments, comments

Panel access

Sequence table status display panel, logic chart status

display panel (depending upon a function block)

Window call up

Faceplate window

Displayed data

Satisfied-condition status

An example of the function block diagram editing panel in the control drawing builder is shown
below. This entire control drawing is shown in a page of the control drawing status display panel.

Figure D2.1.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

Specification
Number of function blocks defined in the control drawing
builder per page *

Example of Function Block Diagram Editing Panel

D2-3

2.1.2

Panel Call
Follow any one of the procedures below to call up the control drawing status display
panel. In either case, specify the function block, which must be included in a control
drawing.
Access from the softkey provided on the tuning panel for a function block

Figure D2.1.3

Example of Tuning Panel for Function Block

Panel call with a panel name

Tag name DRAW
: space
Example :
To call up the full size panel, enter:

FIC300 DRAW or
FIC300 DRAW -F (-F is omissible)
To call up the half size panel, enter:
FIC300 DRAW -H
To call up the panel of the same size as the one already opened, enter:
FIC300 DRAW -S

Panel call with one-touch operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

D2-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.1.3

Display Format
This panel shows the statuses and progress of a process in a function block diagram.

Figure D2.1.4

Display Format of Control Drawing Status Display Panel

The display elements used in this panel to represent the various statuses in the control
drawing are as follows.
Function block
This is an instrument to be control object.
Color: white
Wiring
This is the data connection line between function blocks and denotes the flow of a
process. Different colors can be used to identify the progress status of the process. The
colors should be defined by the user beforehand (user-definable). The type of line for
each portion of wiring is as defined in the control drawing builder. Different colors can
be assigned for the following items:
a fixed line
a line being used or a condition being satisfied
a line not being used or a condition not being satisfied
However, the color may be changed only in the following wiring types:
when software I/O connection is connected to a sequence connection by a connection
terminal
when a function block is connected to a function block with a switching function
(e.g., SW-33, SW-91, SS-H/M/L, AS-H/M/L, or SS-DUAL).

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-5

 Data value
The data equivalent to the process value (PV) is displayed. The displayed data depends
on the block type.
Data value for each function block are displayed on the top line above the instrument
faceplate in the control group panel.
Color: cyan
Alarm status
The alarm status of a function block is displayed near a block only for regulatory control
blocks and switch instrument blocks.
Color: cyan
Block comment
The block comment assigned for the block in the control drawing builder is displayed.
Color: white
Comment
Comments written in the control drawing builder are displayed.
Color: color specified in the control drawing builder.
Color of wiring
Depending on whether a process is executed or not, the wiring is displayed in a color
specified by the user.
Scroll bar
Used to scroll the display and is always displayed on the panel.

TIP
Only the color of the wiring can be changed. Data items and alarm statuses are
displayed in a fixed color.

2.1.4

Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel

Selecting either of the following function blocks accesses the panel.
Sequence table block
Switches to the sequence table status display panel of that block.
Logic chart block
Switches to the logic chart status display panel of that block.
(2) Call Up Window
Selecting a function block other than sequence table blocks or logic chart table blocks
calls up the faceplate window of that block.

TIP
Selecting an analogue PIO block neither accesses the panel nor opens the faceplate
window.

D2-6

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.1.5

Change of Display
Use either of the following procedures to scroll the display.

(1) Scroll Keys

Use the scroll keys
,
,
, and
and on the operation
keyboard to scroll through the display items. Each selection of the key scrolls twelve
dots.
(2) Scroll Bars
Use the scroll bars to scroll through the display items.

2.1.6

Half Size Panel

The control drawing status display panel is displayed in a half size. However, the size of
the display items is the same as that of a full size panel. This half size control drawing
status display panel is not equipped with a scrolling function.

Figure D2.1.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Half Size Control Drawing Status Display Panel

D2-7

2.2

Sequence Table Status Display Panel

This panel displays the sequence table status which is useful for monitoring and
controlling processes.

D2-8

Figure D2.2.1

Example of Sequence Table Status Display Panel (with Signal

Comments)

Figure D2.2.2

Example of Sequence Table Status Display Panel (with Tag

Comments)

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.2.1

Panel Specifications
The following table lists sequence table status display panel specifications.
Table D2.2.1

Sequence Table Status Display Panel Specifications

Item

Capacity
p
y

Display

Specification

Number of display
blocks
Total number of pages

Corresponds to function blocks (tags)

Display elements

Tag mark, tag name, tag comment, processing timing, condition/

action signals, condition/action signal comments, step labels,
rules, rule satisfaction status, next step labels, and extension
table label

Panel access

Tuning panel, extension table panel (destination), extension

table panel (source)

Window call up

Faceplate window

Displayed data

Operation

Softkeys

Operation group setting

*:

1
2

Rules (Y/N pattern display)

Rule satisfaction status

Switches to the tuning panel in the source sequence tableblock

Switches signal displays

Scrolls condition and action signal displays

Changes display areas where condition and action signals are

displayed

Switches to the control drawing status display panel

Only the function blocks belonging to the operation group are

displayed

The following figure shows examples of function block diagrams. Each of them corresponds to one
individual status display panel.

Figure D2.2.3
IM 33G2C20-11E

One function block* per page

Example of Function Block Diagram Editing Panel

D2-9

TIP
When existing system is connected, the following stations sequence table can be
displayed.
EFCD, EFCS, EMCD, EMCS, EFCE, EFUS, EFUD, EMCSH4, EFCSH2, EFCEH2,
EMCDH4, EFSD, EFCDH2, EFMS, CFCD2, CFCS2, CFSD, CFSS, CFMS2, CFCDE

2.2.2

Panel Call
Follow any one of the procedures below to call up the sequence table status display
panels.
Access from the softkey provided on the tuning panel for a sequence table
block

Figure D2.2.4

Example of Tuning Panel for Sequence Table Block

Panel call with a panel name

Tag name TABLE
: space
Example :
To call up the full size panel, enter :

02ST0003 TABLE or
02ST0003 TABLE -F
(-F is omissible)
To call up the half size panel, enter:
02ST0003 TABLE -H
To call up the panel of the same size as the one already opened, enter:
02ST0003 TABLE -S

Panel call with one-touch operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

D2-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.2.3

Display Format
The sequence table status display panel displays the scanning status of sequence table
blocks, rule satisfaction status, condition signal status and others.

Figure D2.2.5

Display Format of Sequence Table Status Display Panel (with

Signal Comments)

Tag name and comment

The tag name including the tag mark and tag comment for a sequence table block
(ST16/ST16E) is displayed.
02ST0003

Accept Control
Tag comment (Up to 24 characters)

Tag mark

IM 33G2C20-11E

Tag name (up to 16 characters)

D2-11

 Processing timing
A sequence table block is processed based on timing, control period, and control phase.
The timing is represented as a combination of execution timing and output timing as
shown in the following table.
Table D2.2.2

Combinations of Processing Timing and Output Timing

Symbol

Description

TSC

Periodic execution (T), standard speed scanning period (S), to output only if the
status changes (C)

TMC

Periodic execution (T), medium speed scanning period (M), to output only if the
status changes (C)

THC

Periodic execution (T), high speed scanning period (H), to output only if the
status changes (C)

TSE

Periodic execution (T), standard speed scanning period (S), to output whenever
specified conditions are true (E)

TME

Periodic execution (T), medium speed scanning period (M), to output whenever
specified conditions are true (E)

THE

Periodic execution (T), high speed scanning period (H), to output whenever
specified conditions are true (E)

Execution at initial start up or continuous start, to output once if specified conditions are true

Execution at initial start up, to output once if specified conditions are true

OC

One shot execution, to output only if the status changes

OE

One shot execution, to output whenever specified conditions are true

Control period: From 1 to 16 sec (in seconds only)

Control phase: From 0 to 15 sec (in seconds only)
However, the control period and phase are displayed only when the timing is TSC or
TSE.
The timing, control period, and control phase are displayed in this order as shown below.
TSC 01 00
Control phase
Timing

Control period

Rule number
The rule numbers are displayed in this area. The numbers 1 through 32 are fixed.
According to the rule number, conditions are judged and the corresponding actions are
output. Therefore, the rule satisfaction status 11 differs depending on individual rules.
Step label
A step label consists of two alphanumeric characters, and is used when sequence control
is performed in the sequence table.
Condition signal number
Up to 64 condition signal numbers (C01 to C64) are available.

D2-12

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

Condition signal name

This consists of an element symbol, data item name, and condition specifications. Up to
64 signals can be specified per table. However, a maximum of 24 signals (the sum of
condition and action signals) can appear on the screen simultaneously. When the
sequence table status display panel is called up, 12 each of the condition and action
signals are on the display.
Action signal number
Up to 64 action signal numbers (A01 to A64) are available.
Action signal name
This consists of an element symbol, data item name, and action specifications. Up to 64
signals can be specified per table. However, a maximum of 24 signals (the sum of action
and condition signals) can appear on the screen simultaneously. When the sequence table
status display panel is called up, 12 each of the action and condition signals are on the
display.
Tag comment/signal comment
The comments displayed here are either signal comments or tag comments. Signal
comments are not data comments, but are comments defined in the sequence table
editing panel in the control drawing builder. Use the softkey in 16 to switch between
signal comments or tag comments for display.
Rule
A rule (Y/N pattern) is applied to both condition and action signals. In the case of
condition signals, a rule is considered true if the condition signals agree with the
specified pattern (Y: true; N: false). Action signals are then processed according to the
result of the condition signals. That is the process is executed according to the pattern
specified in the same rule which satisfied the condition signals. A satisfied rule (a
pattern) is indicated by a change in color (true: red; false: cyan).
In a sequence table with step labels, only a rule (pattern) in the current step can change
the color if it is fulfilled. Rules in other steps are indicated in cyan (false). Even if a
pattern is indicated in red (true), the color will change back to cyan (false) when the
execution advances to the next step.
11 Rule satisfaction status
The following statuses of a rule are indicated by display colors:

True:

red

False:

green

Not being executed: yellow (for a sequence table with step labels)
12 Scroll bar
This is used for scrolling the condition signal display area or action signal display area.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-13

13 Next step label

There are two types of next step labels: THEN and ELSE. The THEN label indicates the
next step to take if the condition is met. The ELSE label indicates the next step if the
condition is not met.
14 Extension table label
For an extension destination table, the name of an extension source table (PREV)
appears on the upper line, and for an extension source table, the name of an extension
destination table (NEXT) appears on the lower line.

The following are the softkeys located at the bottom of the panel. Use these softkeys to
operate the status display panel.
15 TUNING
Select this key to switch back to the tuning panel for the sequence block.
16 COMMENT/TAG_COMT
Select this key to switch alternately the display of comments and tag comments.

COMMENT: Display signal comments in which have been defined on the sequence
table editing panel in the control drawing builder.
TAG_COMT: Display tag comments in .
17 CONDITIN
This key selects a scroll function in the condition signals. However, this key selects the
condition signal side only. Use the scroll key or scroll bar for actual scrolling.

18

This key selects a scroll function in the rule satisfaction status area for either condition
signals or action signals in 11 above. While 17 CONDITION or 19 ACTION scroll only
the signals, this key changes the display area itself. However, this softkey selects only
the rule satisfuction status area. Use the scroll key or scroll bar for actual scrolling.
Scrolling will stop if the number of condition or action signals displayed is reduced to 2.
19 ACTION
This key selects a scroll function in the action signal display area. However, this softkey
selects the action signal side only. Use the scroll key or scroll bar for actual scrolling.

20 DRAW
Select this key to switch to the control drawing status display panel which includes the
sequence table block being displayed.
21 FACEPLAT
The faceplate window of the sequence table block which is being displayed is displayed.
However, in case of the extension table (NEXT), the faceplate window of the sequence
table block (PREV) is displayed.

D2-14

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.2.4

Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel

Figure D2.2.6

Panel Access

(a) Tuning panel

The sequence table status display panel can be switched back to the tuning panel by
selecting an appropriate softkey.
(b) Control drawing status display panel
The sequence table status display panel can be switched to the control drawing status
display panel which includes the sequence table block being displayed by selecting an
appropriate softkey.
(c) Extension destination table
If an extension destination table has been defined in the builder, select [NEXT] to switch
to that table.

Figure D2.2.7

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Sequence Table Status Display Panel (with Extension

Source Table)

D2-15

(d) Extension source table

If an extension source table has been defined in the builder, select [PREV] to switch to
that table.

Figure D2.2.8

Example of Sequence Table Status Display Panel (with Extension

Destination Table)

(2) Call Up Window

(a) Calling up the faceplate window of the individual signal
If individual signals are represented by tags, the corresponding faceplate window can be
called up by selecting the tag name.
(b) Calling up the faceplate window of the sequence table block
The faceplate window of the sequence table block being displayed can be called up by
selecting an appropriate softkey.
However, in case of the extension destination table, the faceplate window of the
extension source sequence table block can be called up.

D2-16

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.2.5

Half Size Panel

The sequence table status display is also displayed in a half size panel. This panel has
the same display functions including the scrolling function as the full size sequence table
status display panel.

Figure D2.2.9

Example of Half Size Sequence Table Status Display Panel (with

Tag Names)

Figure D2.2.10 Example of Half Size Sequence Table Status Display Panel (with
Signal Comments)

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-17

Figure D2.2.11

Example of Half Size Sequence Table Status Display Panel (with

Tag Comments)

Use the softkeys to change the display information in the comment columns as follows:
STAB: Signal names are displayed for the condition and action services.
TAG_COMT: Tag comments are displayed for the condition and action services.
COMMENT: Signal comments are displayed for the condition and action services.

TIP
Unlike a full size panel, either signal names, tag comments, or signal comments can be
displayed to identify the condition and action signals.

D2-18

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.3

Logic Chart Status Display Panel

Like the other status display panels, this panel is also effective in comprehending a
plants control status.

Figure D2.3.1

Example of Logic Chart Status Display Panel

TIP
To have the logic chart status display panel available at an ICS, the status display
functions must be created using the builder operation utility.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-19

2.3.1

Panel Specifications
The following table lists logic chart status display panel specifications.
Table D2.3.1

Logic Chart Status Display Panel specifications

Item

Capacity
p
y

Display

Number of display blocks

Total number of pages

Corresponds to the control drawing builder

Panel size

1600x1000 dots

Display elements

Logic chart type, block modes, element symbols, data,

connecting lines, and comments

Panel access

Control drawing status display panel

Window call up

Faceplate window

Displayed data
Operation group setting

Satisfied-condition status
Only the function blocks belonging to the operation group
are displayed

An example of the function block diagram editing panel in the control drawing builder is shown
below. This entire control drawing is shown in a page of the logic chart status display panel.

Figure D2.3.2

D2-20

Specification
Number of element symbols defined in the control drawing
builder* per page

Example of Function Block Diagram Editing Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.3.2

Panel Call
Follow any one of the procedures below to call up the logic chart status display panel. In
either case, specify the function block, which must be included in a control drawing.
Access from the softkey provided on the tuning panel for a logic chart block

Figure D2.3.3

Example of Tuning Panel for Logic Chart Block

Panel call with a panel name

Tag name LOGIC
:space
Example :
To call up the full size panel, enter:

LC001
LOGIC or
LC001 LOGIC -F
(-F is omissible)
To call up the half size panel, enter:
LC001 LOGIC -H
To call up the panel for the same size as the one already opened, enter:
LC001 LOGIC -S

Panel call with one-touch operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-21

2.3.3

Display Format
This panel displays the statuses of blocks and the progress status of a process.

Figure D2.3.4

Display Format of Logic Chart Status Display Panel

The figure shows the status of the logic chart generated by the FCS control drawing
builder.
Tag name
The name of the logic chart block is displayed in this area. This is the same tag name
used to call up this status display panel.
Timing
The control period on which control drawing execution is based is displayed in this area.
Type
The type of the logic chart status display panel is displayed in this area. The following
types of logic charts are available:
LC16 and
LC64.
Mode
The block mode of the logic chart block represented in is displayed in this area.
DRAWING
This is the touch target area to switch the panel to the control drawing status display
panel which includes this logic chart block.

D2-22

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

FACEPLATE
The touch target area to access a faceplate window for the logic chart block represented
in is displayed in this area.
ActiveLine
Depending on whether the process is executed or not, the wiring is displayed in a
different color specified by the user.
Element symbol
These are the instruments controlling or controlled by this logic chart. The types of
elements are shown below.
-1:
-2:
-3:

Input element symbol: describes a condition signal.

Output element symbol: describes an action signal.
Logical element symbol: executes a logical computation against a condition
signal and outputs an action signal.

Color: white
Connecting line
This is the line to connect the element symbols and shows the flow of a process. The
process status can be identified by different colors. These colors must be defined
beforehand by the user (user-definable). The line type is as defined in the control
drawing builder. The colors specified by the user are as follows.
Color while the condition is satisfied
Color while the condition is not satisfied
Data value
This value shows whether a condition is satisfied.
0: false; 1: true
Color: cyan
Comment
Comments specified in the control drawing builder are displayed.
11

Color: as specified in the control drawing builder.

12 Scroll bar
Used to scroll the display and is always on the panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-23

2.3.4

Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel

Selecting DRAWING ( in the previous subsection) on the panel switches the panel to
the control drawing status display panel which includes the logic chart block displayed
in the tag name ( ).
(2) Call Up Window
Selecting an element symbol accesses the corresponding faceplate window. The faceplate
window of the block represented in the tag name ( ) can be accessed by selecting
FACEPLATE ( ).

2.3.5

Change of Display
Use either of the following procedures to scroll the display.

(1) Scroll Keys

,
,
, and
on the operation
Use the scroll keys
keyboard to scroll through the display items. Each selection of the key scrolls twelve
dots.
(2) Scroll Bars
Use the scroll bars to scroll through the display items.

2.3.6

Half Size Panel

The logic chart status display panel is displayed in a half size. However, the size of the
display items is the same as that of full size panel. This half size logic chart status
display panel is not equipped with a scrolling function.

LC001 Transfer Exec. 1

Timing: TSE-1-0

Tagname: LC001

LIC001.ALRM.HH

LIC002.ALRM.HI
Level alam 2

Figure D2.3.5

D2-24

%SW0001.PV.L
0

Level alam 1

Type: LC16

I.L SW No.1

%SW0002.PV.L
I.L SW No.2

Example of Half Size Logic Chart Status Display Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.4

SEBOL Status Display Panel

This section explains the SEBOL status display panel. This panel displays the status of
the program that is specified with the control drawing builder.
When you read this section, see the SEBOL Function Manual (IM 33G3C20-11E) and
the SEBOL Block Function Manual (IM 33G3C21-11E) together with this section.

Figure D2.4.1

2.4.1

Example of SEBOL Status Display Panel

Panel Specifications
The following table lists SEBOL status display panel specifications.
Table D2.4.1

SEBOL Status Display Panel Specifications

Item

p
y
Capacity

Number of display programs

Total number of pages
Display elements

Display
Panel access
Window call up

IM 33G2C20-11E

Specification
Number of programs defined in the control
drawing builder per page
Corresponds to the control drawing builder
Tag mark, tag name, tag comment, block
mode, block status, alarm status, dialogue
name, program, executing step indication
(triangle)
Tuning panel
Detail display window

D2-25

2.4.2

Panel Call
Follow any one of the procedures below to call up the SEBOL status display panel.
Specify the function block, which must be included in the control drawing.
Access from the softkey provided on the tuning panel for a SEBOL block

Figure D2.4.2

Example of Tuning Panel for SEBOL Block

Access from the SFC status display panel

See Section 2.5, SFC Status Display Panel.
Panel call with a panel name
Tag name SEBOL
: space
Example :
To call up the full size panel, enter:

SBP200 SEBOL or
SBP200 SEBOL -F (-F is omissible)
To call up the half size panel, enter:
SBP200 SEBOL -H
To call up the panel of the same size as the one already opened, enter:
SBP200 SEBOL -S

Panel call with one-touch operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

D2-26

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.4.3

Display Format
The SEBOL status display panel displays which step in the processing of the SEBOL
program is being executed.

Figure D2.4.3

Display Format of SEBOL Status Display Panel

Tag mark
The tag mark of the SEBOL block currently on the screen is displayed.
Tag name
The tag name of the SEBOL block currently on the screen is displayed.
Tag comment
The tag comment defined for the SEBOL block currently on the screen is displayed.
Block mode
The block mode of the SEBOL block currently on the screen is displayed.
Alarm status
The alarm status of the SEBOL block currently on the screen is displayed.
Block status
The block status of the SEBOL block currently on the screen is displayed.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-27

 Dialog
If the SEBOL program currently retrieved on the screen contains a defined operator
guide message, the dialog name of that message is displayed while the SEBOL program
is running.
SEBOL program
The SEBOL program generated using the control drawing builder is displayed.
Executing step indication mark
This mark, which appears only while the program is running, points at the program step
currently being executed and moves according to the progress of program execution.
Color: cyan

TIP
The screen does not scroll automatically in synchronization with program execution. Use
the scroll bar and/or scroll key to view the step currently executed.

Scroll bar
This is displayed all the time and used for scrolling the steps on the panel. Note that the
first three steps always remain on the panel.
Access to the tuning panel
Use this softkey to access the tuning panel of the SEBOL block whose execution status
is currently displayed on the panel.
11

12 Indication of step currently executed

Using this softkey scrolls the step display to place the currently executed step at the fifth
line from the top. If the currently executed step is earlier than the fifth step, the steps
from the first step are displayed.

Figure D2.4.4

D2-28

Indication of Step Currently Executed

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

TIP
(1) Even though tabs are used in a program description when generated using the
builder, this status display panel does not present that description in the same
format (namely, the text will not be displayed in the well-arranged manner that
the user intended in the builder).
(2)

If the text strings in one step are longer than the panel display limit, the excess to
the right is not displayed.

13 Calls up detail display window

This softkey is used for calling up the window for more detailed information for the step
currently being executed.
14 Displaying functions
When a function callup line is selected, a SEBOL function status display panel is
displayed at half size. If there are multiple functions on a line, the function selection
window appears. Select a function name with a detail display.

Figure D2.4.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of SEBOL Status Display Panel

D2-29

Figure D2.4.6

Example of Function Selection Window

SBP150 ABC charging

SBP150 ABC charging
MODE =AUT
ALRM :NR
DIALOGUE:

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

FUNC1
BSTS =RUN

[TM501.PH.OP = TIMER01,START]
wait until (TM501.BSTS = = "HI")
drive [BLOWER = ON];error ERR
[TM501.PH.OP = TIMER02,START]
wait until (TM501.BSTS = = "HI")
drive [HAND = ON];error ERR
compare (PIA.AS = = "NR"),error ERR
wait until (PIA.AS = = "LO")
B=FUNC5(PIA)

* More *
Tuning

Figure D2.4.7

Current

Detail

Return

Example of SEBOL Function Status Display Panel

Select the 19th line calling up the function in Figure D2.4.5.

Figure D2.4.6 is then displayed.
Select [FUNC1] in Figure D2.4.6.
Figure D2.4.7 displaying the FUNC1 status display panel then apperars.
Select the 19th line in Figure D2.4.7.
The FUNC5 status display panel is then displayed. Repeat the above steps to
display up to six steps of the SEBOL function status display panel.

D2-30

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

Select [Detail] in Figure D2.4.7 while the 19th line is selected.

The detail display window then appears. This window displays the execution
contents of the step currently being executed and the variables and data accessed
by that step.

See Also
See Section 2.4.4, Detal Display Window.

2.4.4

Detail Display Window

This window displays the execution contents of the step currently being executed and
the data accessed by that step.
Tag name

Tag comment

Type of
the executed line

Function name (1 to 3)
Function name (4 to 6)

SBP201 Feed additive A

3
Number of
the executed line
Executing step
indication mark

dialogue stop; improper reactor operating conditions! %dkpa %dc,

PIC100.PV, TIC200.PV; confirm
PIC100.PV
TIC200.PV

:
:

10.5
125.3

* End *

Detailed information on
the process under testing

Figure D2.4.8

Scroll bar

Display switching button

Display Format of Detail Display Window

The display on the first line generally contains:

[Number of the executed line]

[Type of the executed line] [Function name],

but they differ depending on the execution. In the example in the figure above, only the
line number is displayed.
(1) Display Priority
When a common error handling step and ordinary step are being executed at the same
time, the priority for execution information is as follows. Use the display switching
button in the window to call the information not displayed.
Priority 1: common error handling step
Priority 2: ordinary step

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-31

(2) Number of the Executed Line

The line number pointed at by the executing step indication mark is displayed.
(3) Type of the Executed Line
The display differs depending on the step status.
During common error handling: ERROR
In other cases: blank
(4) Function Display
While a function is being executed, the detailed information of that function is
displayed.
The function name and currently executed step are displayed. For supervising the
execution status, the display switching button allows the displayed step to be switched
from the highest priority level to a lower one in turn.
The function names and the line number of the step currently being executed on the
detail display windows are displayed in cyan.
Total number of function names displayed: up to six (SEBOL function status display
panel)
(5) Executing Step Indication Mark
This mark, which appears only while the program is running, points at the program step
currently being executed and moves according to the progress of program execution.
Color: cyan
(6) Execution of Interruption Step
When an interruption step described in a sequence table or logic chart is executed, the
status is displayed as follows:
Activated by a sequence table: Sequence Table in progress
Activated by a logic chart: Logic Chart in progress
(7) Scrolling
The display information pauses during the scroll operation and for five seconds
afterward.
(8) Data Update
Display data update period: five seconds

D2-32

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

(9) Restoration Character String

Reserved word
Reserved words use lower case characters except for OG, PR, VM, RQ, M3, CP which
are specified with messages.
Variable name
Variable names such as local variable names, tag names, and data items are displayed
upper-case characters.
Comment
No comment is displayed.
Local generic name
Simple variables and array elements with local generic names are the corresponding tag
names. However, if tag names are not assigned to a local generic name (assignment
statement is not executed yet), ******** is then displayed.
Source: compare [gen01 [i] .pv == 10]
Display: compare [TAG001.PV == 10]
Local generic name array list
The local generic name array list is always displayed as a generic name [*].
Source: compare [gen01 [*] .pv == 10,10,10]
Display: compare [GEN01 [*] .PV == 10,10,10]
$A000 in hexadecimal is displayed in decimal.
The detailed information under inspection in a function block specified in a drive
statement is displayed as the data item PV.
Local Variables Arrangement
Local variables and their arrangement elements are not displayed.

2.4.5

Panel Access

(1) Access to Panel

Selecting the [Tuning] softkey switches the panel to the tuning panel of the SEBOL
block whose status is currently being displayed.
(2) Call Up Window
Selecting the [Detail] softkey calls up the detail display window.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-33

2.4.6

Half Size Panel

The SEBOL status is displayed in a size half that of the SEBOL status display panel.
The panel is half the normal size; however, its functions are the same as the full size
panel.

Figure D2.4.9

D2-34

Example of Half Size SEBOL Status Display Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.5

SFC Status Display Panel

There are two types of SFC status display panels:
Panel which displays the running status of the unit procedure of a unit, and
Panel which displays the status of an SFC block.
This section describes the latter type only. For the panel which displays the status of a
unit, see the Unit Supervision Function Operation Manual (IM 33G2R30-11E).

Figure D2.5.1

2.5.1

Example of SFC Status Display Panel

Panel Specifications
The following table lists SFC status display panel specifications.
Table D2.5.1

SFC Status Display Panel Specifications

Item
Number of display programs

Number of programs defined in the SFC

editing panel

Total number of pages

Corresponds to the SFC editing panel

Display elements

Tag mark, tag name, tag comment, block

mode, alarm status, block status, dialogue
name, SFC status indication

Panel access

Tuning panel

Window call up

Detail display window

Capacity
p
y

Display

IM 33G2C20-11E

Specification

D2-35

2.5.2

Panel Call
Follow any one of the procedures below to call up the SFC status display panel.
Access from the softkey provided on the tuning panel for an SFC block

Figure D2.5.2

Example of Tuning Panel for SFC Block

Panel call with a panel name

Tag name SFC
: space
Example :
To call up the full size panel, enter:

SF205A SFC or
SF205A SFC -F (-F is omissible)
To call up the half size panel, enter:
SF205A SFC -H
To call up the panel for the same size as the one already opened, enter:
SF205A SFC -S

Panel call with one-touch operation

The panel can be called with a function key or touch target.

D2-36

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.5.3

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the SFC status display panel.

Figure D2.5.3

Display Format of SFC Status Display Panel

Tag name
The tag name of the SFC block currently on the screen is displayed.
Tag comment
The tag comment defined for the SFC block currently on the screen is displayed.
Block mode
The block mode of the SFC block currently on the screen is displayed. Each control
status is displayed.
Alarm status
The alarm status of the SFC block currently on the screen is displayed.
Block status
The block status of the SFC block currently on the screen is displayed. This is
information on the running status. This block status and the block mode above together
represent the overall running status of the SFC block.
Dialog
The program is so defined that operator guide messages can be displayed on the SFC
status display panel; the DIALOGUE field indicates the name of that operator guide
message. The corresponding operator guide message window can be called up by
selecting the dialogue name.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-37

 Phase status
The phase status currently on the screen is displayed.
SFC status
The current status of phases is indicated in the following colors so that you can visually
comprehend the processing status:
Before execution:
the initialization phase (phase number 1) blinks in white.
Under execution:
the phase under execution or the symbol for the transition conditions being
passed is indicated in cyan.
After execution:
the phases that have already been executed and the symbol for the transition
conditions being passed are indicated in green.
No execution:
the phases that were not executed, and the symbols for the transition conditions
that were not passed are indicated in white.
Scroll bar
This is displayed all the time and used for scrolling the steps in the panel. Note that the
first three phases always remain on the panel.
Accesses to the tuning panel
Use this softkey to access the tuning panel of the SFC block whose execution status is
currently displayed on the panel.
AOF
Use this softkey to change the mode of the SFC block whose execution status is
currently displayed on the panel to the AOF (alarm off) mode.
11

Indication of phase currently executed

Using this softkey scrolls the phase display to place the currently executed phase at the
fifth line from the top. If the currently executed phase is earlier than the fifth, the phases
are displayed from the first.
12

D2-38

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

Figure D2.5.4

Indication of Phase Currently Executed

TIP
Although selecting the [Current] softkey automatically scrolls the display upward or
downward so that the phase under execution is placed on the fifth line on the screen, the
display cannot be scrolled to the left or right. Therefore, the phase under execution is
placed on a line outside the display frame, the phase cannot be viewed in the ICS
display. To view it, the user must manually scroll the display to the right or left after
selecting the [Current] softkey.

Figure D2.5.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

Display to be Scrolled to the Right (1/2)

D2-39

Figure D2.5.5

Display to be Scrolled to the Right (2/2)

13 Jump
You can transit the execution phase to the specified phase when the SFC block is
paused.
14 Magnification and reduction display of the SFC status display
The SFC status display in the panel can be magnified or scaled down as below.

1,
1,

D2-40

2/3 (for the full size panel)

1.5 (for the half size panel)

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.5.4

Panel Access

(1) Return to Source Tuning Panel

Selecting the [Tuning] softkey accesses the panel to the tuning panel of the SFC block
from which the SFC status display panel was called.
(2) Call Up Status Display Panel
Selecting a phase in the SFC status display calls up the status display panel for the
corresponding SEBOL, sequence table, or logic chart.
SEBOL: The (full size) SEBOL status display panel is called.
Sequence table: The (half size) sequence table status display panel is called.
Logic chart: The (half size) logic chart status display panel is called.

Figure D2.5.6

IM 33G2C20-11E

Calls up Status Display Panel

D2-41

(3) Panel Access in Case of Interruption Processing

The figures below show the panel access sequence in the case of interruption processing.
The size of the panel from which the panels is accessed determines the size of the panel
to be called.
SFC status display panel
(full size)

Panel switching
in interruption processing

Status display panel (full size)

SEBOL

Panel switching

Status display panel (half size)

Sequence table
Logic chart

SFC status display panel

(full size)

Panel access

When Accessed from a Full Size Panel

SFC status display panel

(half size)

Panel access
in interruption processing

Status display panel (half size)

SEBOL
Sequence table
Logic chart

Panel access

SFC status display panel

(half size)

When Accessed from a Half Size Panel

Figure D2.5.7

D2-42

Panel Access Sequence in Interruption Processing

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.5.5

Half Size Panel

The SFC status is displayed in a size half that of the SFC status display panel. The panel
is half the normal size; however, its functions are the same as the full size panel.

Figure D2.5.8

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Half Size SFC Status Display Panel

D2-43

2.5.6

SEBOL Status Display Panel

The SFC status display panel enables you to select any sequential step to switch the
SEBOL status display panel.

Figure D2.5.9

Example of SFC Status Display Panel

94.10.05 13:51
SF205A

SF205A Tank A start of AG

MODE
=AUT
ALRM
DIALOGUE :
PHASE
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

:NR
:Initialize

BSTS

2
=RUN

Step number

[TM301.PH.OP = TIMER01,START]
wait until (TM301.BSTS = = "HI")
drive [BLOWER = ON];error ERR
[TM301.PH.OP = TIMER02,START]
wait until (TM301.BSTS = = "HI")
drive [HAND = ON];error ERR
compare (PIA.AS = = "NR"),error ERR
wait until (PIA.AS = = "LO")
A = FUNC1(PIA) + FUNC2(PIA) + FUNC3(TM301)

Tuning

Current

Detail

Figure D2.5.10 Example of SEBOL Status Display Panel

Select sequential step 2 in Figure D2.5.9
The SEBOL status display panel as shown in Figure D2.5.10 is then displayed.
When the SEBOL status display panel is switched from the SFC status display panel, the
step number is displayed at the upper right of the panel. The items other than the step
number display are same as in the SEBOL status display panel switched from the
SEBOL block. For more information, see Section 2.4, SEBOL Status Display Panel.

D2-44

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

2.5.7

Detail Display Window (Step)

The detail display window can be displayed by selecting a softkey [Detail] on the
SEBOL status display panel. This window displays the execution contents of the step
currently being executed on the SEBOL status display panel and the data accessed by
that step.

Figure D2.5.11

Display Format of Detail Display Window

The display on the first line generally contains:

[Step number], [Number of the executed line], [Type of the executed line], and
[Functionname], but they differ depending on the execution contents.
(1) Display Priority
When an interruption step and ordinary step are executed simultaneously, the detail
display window displays the execution contents in accordance with the following display
priority. Use the display switching button to select the desired display contents.
Priority 1:
common error handling
Priority 2:
processing after changing statuses
Priority 3:
interrupt signal handling
Priority 4:
ordinary step
(2) Number of the Executed Line
The line number pointed at by the executing step indication mark is displayed.
(3) Type of the Executed Line
The display differs depending on the step status.
During common error handling: ERROR
Processing after changing statuses: STATUS
Interrupt signal handling: SIGNAL
Ordinary step: blank

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-45

(4) Function Display

While the function is being executed, the detailed information of that function is
displayed. The function name and currently executed step are displayed. For supervising
the execution status, the display switching button allow the displayed step to be switched
from the highest priority level to a lower one in turn. The function name and the line
number of the step currently being executed on the detail display window are displayed
in cyan.
Total number of function names displayed: up to six
(5) Executing Step Indication Mark
This mark, which appears only while the program is running, points at the program step
currently being executed.
Color: cyan
(6) Execution of Interruption Step
When an interruption step described with a sequence table or a logic chart is executed, the status is displayed as follows:
Activated by a sequence table: Sequence Table in progress
Activated by a logic chart: Logic Chart in progress
When an interruption occurs at the last execution line in the SFC block steps, the
display color of the SFC step turns cyan, and nothing is displayed in the detail
display window.
(7) Scrolling
The display information pauses during the scroll operation and for five seconds
afterward.
(8) Data Update
Display data update period: five seconds
(9) Restoration Character String
Reserved word
Reserved words use lower-case characters except for OG, PR, VM, RQ, M3, and CP
which are specified with messages.
Variable name
Variable names such as local variable names, tag names, and data item names are
displayed in upper-case characters.
Comment
No comments are displayed.

D2-46

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

Generic name
Simple variables and array elements that are generic names are the corresponding tag
names. However, if tag names are not assigned to generic names, ******** is displayed.
Source: compare [gen01 [i] .pv = = 10]
Display: compare [TAG001.PV = = 10]
Generic name array list
The generic name array list is always displayed as a generic name [*].
Source: compare [gen01[*] .pv = = 10,10,10]
Display: compare [GEN01[*] .PV = = 10,10,10]
$A000 in hexadecimal is displayed in decimal.
The detailed information under inspection in a function block specified in a drive
statement is displayed as the data item PV.

2.5.8 Detail Display Window (Transition)

Selection of transition in the SFC status display panel allows you to display the detail
display window. This window displays the transition conditions and data accessed by
those conditions.

Figure D2.5.12 Example of SFC Status Display Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-47

Figure D2.5.13 Example of Detail Display Window

Select transition in Figure D2.5.12
The detail display window as shown in Figure D2.5.13 then appears.
When transition is being displayed, the first line on the detail display window includes:
step number. transition condition number.
When interruption processing is being displayed, the first line on the detail display
window includes: step number number of the executed line type of the executed line
function name
(1) Display Priority
When an interruption step and transition step are executed simultaneously, the detail
display window displays the execution contents in accordance with the following display
priority. Use the display switching button to select the desired display contents.
Priority 1: common error handling
Priority 2: processing after changing statuses
Priority 3: interrupt signal handling
Priority 4: transition step
(2) Phase Number (Transition Condition Number)
When the detail display window is called, the phase number or transition condition
number pointed to by the cursor in the SFC status display panel is displayed. Note that
the display is blank when execution of the called up step and transition is complete.
(3) Number of the Executed Line
The line number pointed at by the executing step indication mark is displayed.

D2-48

IM 33G2C20-11E

2. Status Display Panel

(4) Type of the Executed Line

The display differs depending on the status of the line currently being executed.
During interrupt signal handling: SIGNAL
During processing after changing statuses: STATUS
During common error handling: ERROR
Transition step: blank
(5) Function Display
When the interraption line is to be displayed, while the function is being executed, the
detailed information of that function is displayed. The function name and currently
executed step are displayed. For supervising the execution status, the display switching
button allows the displayed step to be switched from highest priority level to a lower
one in turn. The function name and the line number of the step currently being executed
on the detail display window are displayed in cyan.
Total number of function names displayed: up to six
(6) Execution Step Indication Mark
This mark, which appears only while the program is running, points at the program step
currently being executed.
Color: cyan
For the SFC block transition condition display, if the specified step number (transition condition number) is not being executed, the transition condition source user
specified is displayed as it is, without displaying the executing step indication mark.
In this case, the function block name and data item, and local variable name and
value are not displayed.
(7) Execution of Interruption Phase
When an interruption phase described with a sequence table or a logic chart is
executed, the status is displayed as follows:
Activated by a sequence table: Sequence Table in progress
Activated by a logic chart: Logic Chart in progress
When an interruption occurs at the last execution line in the SFC block steps, the
display color of the SFC step turns cyan, and nothing is displayed in the detail
display window.
(8) Scrolling
The display information pauses during the scroll operation and for five seconds
afterward.
(9) Data Update
Display data update period: five seconds
(10) SFC Block Transition Condition Display
If the specified step number (transition condition number) is not being executed,
since the source is displayed, the generic name written in the transition condition
expression is displayed as it is.
In the case of source display, the associated project of the engineering function must
be in operation.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D2-49

3. Operator Utility

3.

Operator Utility
The operator utility is used to assign functions or items to an operation and monitoring
panel at an ICS on-line.

3.1

Overview

3.1.1

Positioning and Function Composition

The operator utility is used to specify detailed information on the functional specifications defined by the ICS builder and is composed of the following functions.
Operation mark definition
Key assignment: function key, auxiliary contact I/O and extension key
Trend pen assignment
External recorder output assignment
Trend data save
Trend reference pattern registration
Panel display sequence definition
Panel set definition
Overview assignment
Control group assignment
Help window definition and help message edit
Voice input

TIP
The function of the trend data save, trend reference pattern registration and the voice
input can be executed only for the currently executing project on the own ICS. These
functions cannot be called up from other ICS or the work station builder.

3.1.2

Operating Restrictions

(1) Access Methods and Operating Environment

(a) Access methods
Use one of the methods below to call up the operator utility. The range of operations
permitted differs with the method used.
Method 1: Direct call up from keyboard
Select the

key on the operation keyboard.

Method 2: Call up from the builder menu

From the builder menu or the ICS builder menu panel, select Operator Utility.
IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-1

 Method 3: Call up some functions from the ICS builder definition panel
From the ICS builder, access certain operator utility assignment panels using the
associated function definition panels:
From the trend record definition panel or the trend group panel information
definition panel, access the trend pen assignment panel.
From the overview panel information definition panel, access the overview
assignment panel.
From the control group panel information definition panel, access the control
group assignment panel.
(b) Operational restrictions according to the access method
The operator utility menu panel appears when either Method 1 or Method 2 is used for
access. When Method 1 is used, functions not installed on the ICS are displayed with
shading.
The following table lists the functions available for each access method.
Table D3.1.1

Functions Available for Access Methods

key
(Method 1)

From Builder
Menu
(Method 2)

From ICS
Builder
(Method 3)

Operation mark definition

Function key assignment

Trend pen assignment

External recorder output assignment

Trend data save

Trend reference pattern registration

Panel display sequence definition

Panel set definition

Overview assignment

Control group assignment

Help window definition

Voice input

Y: Available
N: Not Available
L: Available for own ICS only
M: Available only at an ICS (or EWS) having a master assignment file

(c) Revision operation restrictions according to the access method

When Method 1, the
key is used for access, revisions apply to the program
currently executing (the own ICS data of the currently executed project).
When Method 2 or 3 is used for access, revisions apply to the project specified when the
builder was started.

D3-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

(2) Security
(a) General
As for operator utility, both the display and operation of the assigned panel are restricted
by method of access, position of the keylock mode switch at the time of access, and
security level. This can be used to restrict the range of entry and modification by specified personnel, and the range of on-line entry in the operation mode by operators.
(b) Direct access using
key (Method 1)
Allowing/restricting changes to setup data depends on security level and keylock mode
switch position at access. See Table C9.3.1 of Part C for the security level.
(c) Access from builder menu (Method 2, Method 3)
Changes to setup data are allowed regardless of security level.
Table D3.1.2

Operation Restrictions Depending on Method of Access

key

Operation

From builder menu

Operation mark definition

1, 4

Function key assignment

1, 4, 5

Trend pen assignment

1, 2, 3, 4, 5

External recorder output assignment

1, 2, 4, 5

Trend data save

Trend reference pattern registration

Panel display sequence definition

1, 2, 4, 5

Panel set definition

1, 2, 4, 5

Overview assignment

1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Control group assignment

1, 2, 3, 4, 5

Help window definition

1, 2, 3, 4

Voice input
:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

All modification/entry operations are allowed.

Modification of security levels is not allowed.
Modification on functions belonging to pages is not allowed.
Entry to pages outside its own operation group is not allowed.
Security check by the position of the keylock mode switch functions.
Check for existence/nonexistence of entry items, such as tag names, is performed.

(3) Operation on Stacked-CRT ICS

The upper CRT on a stacked-CRT ICS cannot display or access the operator utility.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-3

3.1.3

Panel Hierarchy

(1) Panel Hierarchy

The operator utility includes the following operation panels. Use any of the three access
methods for any panel. Access method controls restrictions on the range of operations.

Figure D3.1.1

D3-4

Operator Utility Panel Hierarchy

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

(2) Panel Types

The operator utility consists of the following panel types, as listed below.
Table D3.1.3

Operator Utility Functions and Panels

Panel Name

Description

Restrictions

See
Section

Operator utility menu panel

This is the menu panel.

3.3

Operation mark definition panel

Used to define instrument faceplate operation marks that indicate operating status information befitting the system and process operating conditions.

3.4

Function key assignment panel

Auxiliary contact input/output
assignment panel
Extension key assignment panel

Calling these from the operator utility menu panel displays the function key
assignment panel. Select Ch.
Ch. view
view on the menu bar to call up the auxilia
auxiliary contact input/output assignment panel or the extension key assignment
panel. These panels assign functions to function keys and their LED
lamps provided on the operation keyboard
keyboard, and to auxiliary input/output
and extension keys.

3.5
3.6
3.7

Trend pen assignment panel

Used to specify data item names to be acquired and displayed for trend
recording. Also displays trend block numbers, trend types, acquisition
periods, and sampling point counts, in addition to the specified items.

3.8

External recorder output

assignment panel

Used to specify data items to be output to external recorders.

3.9

Trend data save panel

Used to save trend data to a file on the hard disk.

3.10

Trend reference pattern

registration panel

Used to register trend reference patterns.

3.11

Panel display sequence definition

panel

Used to set up panel display sequences for automatic panel call-up functions. The user defines display panel name, their sequence, duration of
display, and startup method.

3.12

Panel set definition panel

Used to define a set of panels, allowing predefined multiple panels to be

called to multiple CRTs.

3.13

Overview assignment panel

Used to specify elements on an overview panel and panels called up from

that overview panel.

3.14

Control group assignment panel

Used to assign display function blocks that control group panels. The assigned tags must belong to the same operation group.

3.15

Help window information

definition panel

Used to register and delete help message windows used for operating
procedure documentation.

3.16

Help message edit panel

Allows user to edit and add information to help message windows.

3.17

Voice input panel

Used to register voice messages for the voice unit. Available in the on-line
maintenance mode for an ICS with a voice unit connected.

3.18

Restriction A: Not useable except for a currently executing project. Cannot be called up from a builder
running on a remote ICS or WS.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-5

3.2

Shared Setup Items

3.2.1

Overview
The following setup items are common to entry operations in various operator utility
functions. This section describes these items and identifies the panels where they apply.
Table D3.2.1

Shared Setup Items

Name

Description

Security level

Specifies whether the display appears on the upper

CRT of a stacked-CRT
ICS and whether the entry
and modification operation
can be done in the operator utility panels.

Color

3.2.2

See Section

Affected Panels

Specifies colors for display.

Operation mark definition panel

Function key assignment panel

2.1.2

Auxiliary contact I/O assignment panel

Extension key assignment panel

Trend pen assignment panel

External recorder output assignment panel

Panel display sequence definition panel

Panel set definition panel

Overview assignment panel

Control group assignment panel

Help window definition panel

Operation mark definition panel

2.2.2

Colors and Color Symbols

The following table lists color symbols used on the operation mark definition panel and
other builders.
Table D3.2.2
Number

D3-6

Colors and Color Abbreviations

Abbreviation

Number

Black

Color

Steel blue

Color

Abbreviation
SB

Red

Pink

PK

Green

10

Spring green

SG

Yellow

11

Orange

OR

Blue

12

Yellow green

YG

Magenta

13

Violet

VO

Cyan

14

Deep sky blue

DB

White

15

Gray

GR

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.3

Operator Utility Menu Panel

The operator utility menu panel is displayed on the ICS CRT when the operator utility is
called, unless call-up is from the ICS builder. Access to some menu items may not be
allowed. Use the cursor or touch screen to select any of the following operator utility
functions:
Operation mark definition panel
Function key assignment panel
Trend pen assignment panel
External recorder output assignment panel
Trend data save panel
Trend reference pattern registration panel
Panel display sequence definition panel
Panel set definition panel
Overview assignment panel
Control group assignment panel
Help window information definition panel
Voice input panel

Figure D3.3.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Operator Utility Menu Panel

D3-7

3.4

Operation Mark Definition Panel

3.4.1

Display Format

(1) Overview
This panel lists operation mark definitions. Operation marks define attributes, such as
status labels and whether operator manipulation is allowed or restricted. A maximum of
64 operation marks can be defined at each ICS.

Figure D3.4.1

Example of Operation Mark Definition Panel

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
No.: Operation mark number (1 to 64)
Tag label: Comment on the operation mark (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)
Default: OPMARKxx (xx : 2-digit numeral)
Color: Operation mark color
Default: W (white)
Level: Security level for the operation mark (1 to 8)
Default: 1
Permission to assign/remove: Specify whether assignment/removal of the operation mark
is to be permitted or not while the keylock mode switch is in the off position.
Yes: Assignment/removal permitted while off
No: Not permitted while off
Default: Yes

3.4.2

Security
These operations are not allowed if the operator utility is accessed with the
with the keylock mode switch in the OFF position.

D3-8

key

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.5

Function Key Assignment Panel

3.5.1

Display Format

(1) Overview
Use this panel to assign functions to function keys and their LEDs provided on the operation keyboard. A maximum of 64 function keys can be assigned.

Figure D3.5.1

Example of Function Key Assignment Panel

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
No.: Function key number (F001 to F064)
Function: Function assigned to the function key (up to 48 alphanumeric characters)
Level: Security level for the function key (1 to 8)
Default: 1
LED: Conditions for turning on the indicator lamp on the function key (up to 28
alphanumeric characters)

3.5.2

Security
None

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-9

3.5.3

Setup Procedures

(1) Function
Specify the functions for the function keys. Refer to the following table for valid function symbols.
See Also
See Chapter 5 of Part B, One-touch Operations.

Table D3.5.1 Function Listing

Function Abbreviation

Description

Calling up panels and windows

Calling up panel sets

Starting panel display sequences

Executing system function keys

Starting user programs

Signal notification to user programs

Starting / stopping / resuming trending

Executing operation sequence commands

Executing programs by file name (Display of non-standard panel)

Starting standard batch report

(2) Condition that will Light the LED

The user specified conditions allows the user to light/flash/turn off the LED on a function key. The LED flashes when the condition is newly generated, is steady during
alarm, and turns off upon return to normal.
Alarm display based on the specified tag name or annunciat
Alarm display based on the control group panel name
Alarm display based on the overview panel name
Alarm display based on the graphic panel name
Alarm display based on the alarm summary name

TIP
In addition to these alarm conditions, a sequence message (request message) can also
cause the LED to light up.

3.5.4

Panel Access
This panel can be switched to either:
the auxiliary contact input/output assignment panel ; or
See Also
See Section 3.6, Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Assignment Panel.

the extension key assignment panel.

See Also
See Section 3.7, Extension Key Assign-ment Panel.

D3-10

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.6

Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Assignment Panel

3.6.1

Display Format

(1) Overview
Use this panel to assign the auxiliary input/output points.
This panel is called up by selecting Ch. view from the pull-down menu on the
function key assignment panel.
Number of auxiliary contact input/output points: up to two sets (each set consists of one
input point and one output point)

Figure D3.6.1

Example of Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Assignment Panel

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
No.: Auxiliary contact number (A001 to A002, one output plus one input for each)
Function: Function assigned to the auxiliary input key
When an input signal is applied to the input terminal, executes the function
assigned to the auxiliary function key, and outputs the condition assigned to
the auxiliary output key.
Level: Security level for the auxiliary contact (1 to 8)
Default: 1

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-11

Output: Conditions for turning on the output contact on the auxiliary contact set
(example)
Function:

When the following are assigned,

O

Output:

.CG1

: space

If an input signal is applied to the corresponding input terminal,

CG1 panel is displayed, and
If an alarm occurring tag exists in CG1, DO is output.
However, different from LED, the output state doesn't turn on/off repeatedly. In alarm
occurring state, DO turns ON, and in alarm restoring state, it turns OFF.

TIP
The output signal is not a condition to light the LED of the function key.

3.6.2

Security
Similar to the function key assignment panel.

3.6.3

Panel Access
This panel can be switched to either:
the function key assignment panel ; or

See Also
See Section 3.5, Function Key Assignment Panel.
the extension key assignment panel.

See Also
See Section 3.7, Extension Key Assign-ment Panel.

TIP
This function is executed by using the terminal board unit provided at the front of the
ICS.
For details of the hardware, refer to the Information Command Unit Hardware Manual
(IM33G6B30-01E).

D3-12

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.7

Extension Key Assignment Panel

3.7.1

Display Format

(1) Overview
Use this panel to set up the extension key (option) function assignments.
This panel is called up by selecting Ch. view from the pull down menu on the
function key assignment panel.
Number of extension keys: up to 96 sets (each set consists of one input and one output)

Figure D3.7.1

Example of Extension Key Assignment Panel

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
No.: Extension key number (E001 to E096)
Function: Function assigned to the auxiliary contact input
Level: Security level for the extension key (1 to 8)
Default: 1
Output: Conditions for turning on the output contact on the extension key
The function is the same as that of the auxiliary contact I/O. Refer to Section 3.6
Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Assignment Panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-13

3.7.2

Security
Similar to the function key assignment panel.

3.7.3

Panel Access
This panel can be switched to either:
the function key assignment panel ; or

See Also
See Section 3.5, Function Key Assignment Panel.
the auxiliary contact input/output assignment panel.

See Also
See Section 3.6, Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Assignment Panel.

TIP
To implement this function, optional hardware must be prepared. Prepare the external
I/O interface master unit which is to be mounted on the ICS rear panel and the AEX101
external I/O remote nest.
For detailed information, refer to the Information Command Unit Hardware Manual
(IM33G6B30-01E) and the External I/O Remote Nest Hardware Manual
(IM33G6G80-01E).

D3-14

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.8

Trend Pen Assignment Panel

3.8.1

Display Format

(1) Overview
Use this panel to specify the data items for the pen traces that are acquired and displayed
in trend recording. Assignable data items are those which belong to the own ICS, and
this is irrespective of how these data items are accessed. In addition to trend pen assignments, this panel also allows the user to specify the detailed display of a trend block or
set up the detailed specifications (panel name, higher order panel name, etc.) for the
trend group (page).
Number of pen traces: 8/page (up to 800 pages)

Figure D3.8.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Trend Pen Assignment Panel

D3-15

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
Block: Trend block number
Trend type: Trend type
Specify any of the display types shown below by the ICS builder.
R:

Rotary type, without reference pattern

B:

Batch type, Automatic end type, without reference pattern

B/:

Batch type, Automatic end type, with reference pattern

B&R: Batch type, Acquisition contiguous type, without reference pattern

B&R/: Batch type, Acquisition contiguous type, with reference pattern
D:

Disk save trend

Acquired period: Trend data acquisition period

Select any of 0, 1, 10seconds, 1, 2, 5, and 10 minutes by the ICS builder
No. of sampling points: Number of sampling points for trend data
Select any of 0, 1440, 2880, 4320, 5760, 7200, and 8640 points by the ICS builder
Page: Trend panel page number (1 to 800)
Panel name:

Trend group panel name on a page basis

Panel name: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Default:

.TGxxxx (xxxx : page)

Level: Security level (1 to 8) for the trend group

Default: 1
Upper panel: The panel which is called up by selecting the higher order panel key
Upper panel name: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Help: Help message number (4 digits of 9001 to 9999). When the trend group panel is
displayed, by selecting the
key, the specified help window is displayed.
However, only the user help messages are definable.
Comment: Comment on the trend group panel (up to 24 alphanumeric characters)
Default: %TGxxxx (xxxx : page number)
Pen: Number of trend pen in a group. Up to 8pens can be assigned to group
Acquired data: Data to be acquired for the pen
Scale low: Low limit value for graph scales
Scale high: High limit value for graph scales
Selected item: Specify the data display format

D3-16

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.8.2

Security
When the operator utility is accessed with the
key, no information appears for
trend groups outside the current operation group. For other trend groups, the display
shows ****** in the group name area.
Direct startup using

key

When omitted, the lower and upper values of a data item are automatically entered as
the trend graph display scale limits when acquisition data are specified. In case of the
process value (PV) of timer, the trend graph scale low value is 0, and the scale high
value is the PH value.
Deleting an acquisition data also deletes the scale low and high values.
If a double precision data type is selected, no data item can be assigned for the next pen.

3.8.3

Setup Procedures

(1) Acquired Data

Assign a data item to each pen on each page (using a maximum of 42 characters). If
only the tag name is specified with its data item omitted, the data item name defaults to
the process value (PV).
(2) Scale Low Limit
Using a maximum of seven characters, specify the scale low value for the trend graph.
(3) Scale High Limit
Using a maximum of seven characters, specify the scale high value for the trend graph.

TIP
(1) It is not always necessary to take a value for the scale high value that is larger
than the scale low value. For the trend graph, you may set the scale high value so
that it is less than the scale low value.
(2) When the PV, SV or MV is used as a data item, the scale high and low values may
be omitted. In this case, the values in the tag list are used for the scale high and
low values.
(4) Selected Item
Select the display format for acquired data. Assign the double precision data type only to
odd numbered pens.
Double: Double precision, analog trend display
Analog: Analog trend display
OnOff: Discrete variable display

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-17

3.9

External Recorder Output Assignment Panel

3.9.1

Display Format

(1) Overview
Use this panel to specify the data to be output to external recorders.
Number of record data: 8/group
Number of groups: up to 4 groups

Figure D3.9.1

Example of External Recorder Output Assignment Panel

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
Level: Security level (1 to 8) for the recorded data item
Default: 1
Record data: Data to be output to an external recorder
Scale low: Low limit value for graph scales
Scale high: High limit value for graph scales

3.9.2

Security
None

D3-18

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.9.3

Setup Procedures

(1) Record Data

Assign a data item to each output point in each group (using a maximum of 32
characters). If only the tag name is specified with its data item omitted, the data item
name defaults to the process value (PV).
(2) Scale Low Limit
Using a maximum of seven characters, specify the scale low limit for the graph. This
specification cannot be omitted.
(3) Scale High Limit
Using a maximum of seven characters, specify the scale high limit for the graph. This
specification cannot be omitted.

TIP
To implement this function, optional hardware must be prepared. Prepare the external
I/O interface master unit which is to be mounted on the ICS rear panel and the AEX 101
external I/O remote nest.
For detailed information, refer to the Information Command Unit Hardware Manual
(IM33G6B30-01E) and the External I/O Remote Nest Hardware Manual
(IM33G6G80-01E).

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-19

3.10 Trend Data Save Panel

3.10.1 Display Format
(1) Overview
Use this panel to save previously acquired trend data to a saved trend block. Trend data
are saved in either block or group units.

Figure D3.10.1 Example of Trend Data Save Panel

(2) Display Elements
Specify the following items on the panel:
Specification of saving block (block number for save destination):
Block No. (1 to 50)
Specification of save data (data to be saved):
Block No. (1 to 50)
Trend group name
Entry is valid only when Group is specified in the block number entry box.

3.10.2 Security
These operations are allowed only if the operator utility is accessed with the
key.
The saving operation is disabled if the keylock mode switch is in the off position.

D3-20

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.11 Trend Reference Pattern Registration Panel

3.11.1 Display Format
(1) Overview
Use this panel to register the reference patterns which is a function related to the trend
data.
The security level follows that of the trend group.

Figure D3.11.1

Example of Trend Reference Pattern Registration Panel

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
Specification of target destination:
Trend group name
Pen No.
Specification of reference data:
Trend group name
Pen No.
File name

3.11.2 Security
These operations are allowed only if the operator utility is accessed with the
key.
A target destination group must be the group which has been set to with reference
patterns in the trend record definition builder. Only the trend in the own ICS can be
registered as the destination.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-21

3.11.3 Setup Procedures

(1) Target Destination
(a) Trend group name
Select the name of a target destination group (up to 16 alphanumeric characters) from
the menu.
(b) Pen number
Select the pen number for a reference pattern (1 to 8) from the menu. If specifying the
entire group, select All from the menu.
(2) Reference Data
(a) Group registration
In the same group as target destination
Trend group name: Self
Pen No. : All
In another group (can be in another station)
Trend group name: Panel name of the trend group
Pen No. : All
(b) Registration by pen
In the same group as target destination
Trend group name: Self
Pen No. : 1 to 8
In another group
Trend group name: Panel name of the trend group
Pen No. : 1 to 8
(c) Registration of file data
*** This function cannot use ***

D3-22

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.12 Panel Display Sequence Definition Panel

See Also
See Subsection 5.2.3 of Part B, Panel Display Sequence.

3.12.1 Display Format

(1) Overview
Use this panel to setup panel display sequences for an automated panel callup capability.
Define each panel to be displayed, sequence of panels, display duration and start command.
Number of sequences: 30 steps/sequence
up to 32/ICS

Figure D3.12.1 Example of Panel Display Sequence Definition Panel

(2) Display Elements
Specify the following items on the panel:
Startup method: Starting method, either:
Panel: Started by means of a panel, or
Message: Started by a message
Default: Panel
Level: Security level (1 to 8) for the panel display sequence
Default: 1
Display panel name: Name of the panel to be displayed and its parameters.
Hard copy output can be specified instead of the panel name.
Time: Display duration for the panel
Duration for the panel (up to 4 digits, in units of seconds)

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-23

TIP
(1)

If the panel display sequence start/advance key

is used to start the panel
display sequence, the first possible panel that can appear is a full size panel only.

(2)

If the duration time is omitted, the system waits for the

selected to advance.

key to be

3.12.2 Security
None

D3-24

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.13 Panel Set Definition Panel

See Also
See Subsection 5.2.2 of Part B, Panel Set.

3.13.1 Display Format

(1) Overview
Use this panel to define the panel sets. Multiple panels defined as a panel set can be
called to multiple CRTs simultaneously with a single action.
Number of panel sets: 4 panels/set
up to 200/ICS

Figure D3.13.1 Example of Panel Set Definition Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-25

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
Name: Panel set name (up to 8 alphanumeric characters)
Default: Serial number 001 to 200
Level: Security level (1 to 8) for the panel set
Default: 1
Type: Specify whether notice to another ICS is to be given or not.
Yes: Notice to be sent; No: No notice to be sent
Default: Yes
Display panel name: Names of the panels to be displayed simultaneously

TIP

If the same name is defined in the first panel name column for two or more different
sets, the panel set having the least set number is called.

3.13.2 Security
Table D3.13.1 Functional Restrictions by Security Level
Keylock mode SW
position
Security level
eve
1
2

Operation
OFF

ON

ENG

3
4
5

7
8
(Note) Operation: Availability of setting operation in the operator utility function panels.

D3-26

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.14 Overview Assignment Panel

3.14.1 Display Format
(1) Overview
Use this panel to specify the display elements for the overview panel pages, panels
called from the display elements, whether alarm annunciation is performed.
Number of assignable blocks: 32 blocks/page
32 pages/ICS

Figure D3.14.1 Example of Overview Assignment Panel

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-27

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
Panel name:

Panel name for each overview page (up to 16 alphanumeric characters)

Default: .OVxxxx

(xxxx : page)

Level: Security level (1 to 8) for each overview page

Default: 1
Upper panel: The panel which is called up by selecting the higher order panel
key
Upper panel name: up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Help:

Help message number (4 digits of 9001 to 9999). When the overview panel is
displayed, by selecting the
key, the specified help window is
displayed. However, only the user help messages are definable.

Comment:

Comment on the panel (up to 24 alphanumeric characters)

Default: %OVxxxx (xxxx : page)

Assignment element: Display element for the block

Type: Display format for the block
Expanding panel: Name of the panel that can be called up from the block
Data value/On-demand character: Data or a comment that are displayed on the block.

3.14.2 Security
If the operator utility functions are called directly by the
key, only the
pages belonging to the current operation group can be displayed.
If an assigned element is changed, its setup data are initialized.
When specifying the panel to be displayed, its display size and location cannot be
designated.

D3-28

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.14.3 Setup Procedures

(1) Assignment Element
Specify the element to assign to the overview in one of the following items:
Function Block
Panel
Comment
To specify no alarm annunciation, enter [ ][N] after the element. When N is specified, even if an alarm occurs in the element, no alarm notification passes to the display
block on the overview panel and the display block will not flash. If the element is a
comment, this specification has not effect.
: space
(2) Type
Specify the display format for the function block.
N: Display tag name
C: Display tag comment
Default: C
(3) Expanding panel
Specify the name of the panel to call up.
The default is the assigned element, except in the case of comment assignment, in which
case there is no callup destination.
(4) Data Value/On-demand Character
Specify the value to display, or an arbitrary character string.
(a) Data value
Specify the data item to display.
If the item name is omitted, the process value (PV) of the specified tag is displayed.
(b) On-demand character
Enter a character string as a comment to be displayed using a maximum of 16
characters.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-29

3.15 Control Group Assignment Panel

3.15.1 Display Format
(1) Overview
Use this panel to assign the function blocks (tags) displayed on the control group panel
pages. Only tags in the current operation group can be assigned.
Number of assignable instrument faceplates: 8/panel

Figure D3.15.1 Example of Control Group Assignment Panel

D3-30

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
Panel name: Panel name for each control group (up to 16 alphanumeric characters)
Default: .CGxxxx (xxxx : page)
Level: Security level (1 to 8) for each control group page
Default: 1
Upper panel: The panel which is called up by selecting the higher order panel
key
Upper panel name : Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Help: Help message number (4 digits of 9001 to 9999). When the control group panel is
displayed, by the selecting the
key, the specified help window is
displayed. However, only the user help messages are definable.
Comment: Comment on the panel (up to 24 alphanumeric characters)
Default: %CGxxxx (xxxx : page)
Tag name: Tag name to be assigned to the control group
Parameter: Specify whether instrument faceplate trend data are to be displayed or not.
Representation tag: Specify a representative tag
(If the same tag has been assigned to multiple control group panels, calling a
control group panel by the tag name switches to the one where that tag is
specified as the master (representative).
If the specification is omitted, one in the lowest control group number automatically becomes the master.)

3.15.2 Security
When the operator utility is accessed with the
key, no information appears for
control groups outside the current operation group. For such control groups, the display
shows ****** in the group name area.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-31

3.16 Help Window Information Definition Panel

3.16.1 Display Format
(1) Overview
Use this panel to edit help messages provided as on-line user manual material and operating instructions, or to register new help messages.
Number of help windows: up to 500/ICS

Figure D3.16.1 Example of Help Window Information Definition Panel

D3-32

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

(2) Display Elements

Specify the following items on the panel:
Window Name: Help window name (up to 16 alphanumeric characters)
Default: .HWxxxx (xxxx : page)
LEV: Security level (1 to 8) for each help window
Default: 1
File Name: Name of the file containing the help message (up to 14 alphanumeric
characters)
Default: HWxxxx (xxxx : page)
Comment: Comment on the help window (up to 24 alphanumeric characters)
Default: %HWxxxx (xxxx : page)

3.16.2 Security
When the operator utility is accessed with the
operation group appear.

key, no pages outside the current

3.16.3 Panel Access

This panel can be switched to the help message edit panel.

See Also
See Section 3.17, Help Message Edit Panel.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-33

3.17 Help Message Edit Panel

(1) Overview
Use this panel to enter and edit the text of a help window.
Message length: 70 characters by 21 lines (including any escape sequence characters
used to specify text color.)

Figure D3.17.1 Example of Help Message Edit Panel

(2) Display Element
Only the message entry area is displayed. If some character(s) has (have) already been
entered, the character(s) is (are) displayed in this area.
(3) Editor Operations
For details on editor operation, refer to the Builder Common Operation Manual
(IM33G4H10-11E).

D3-34

IM 33G2C20-11E

3. Operator Utility

3.18 Voice Input Panel

3.18.1 Display Format
(1) Overview
Use this panel to register voice messages into the voice output unit. This function requires that the ICS have a voice output unit connected.
Applicable voice:
up to 250 syllables
Duration of each group: up to 290 seconds
The message must be created first using the ICS definition builder.
Also use this panel to test output of the registered voice messages.
For further details of this function, refer to the Voice Output Function Operation Manual
(IM33G2N15-11E).

Figure D3.18.1 Example of Voice Input Panel

(2) Display Elements
The following items are displayed in the panel:
I/O Option:
Select the appropriate function concerning voice message registration from the following
items:
Status: displays the remaining time for registration and the number of syllables
remaining for registration
Input: voice registration

Out Msg: message output

Out Into: syllable output

Init: initialize

Voice Input:
Specify the syllable number to be registered.
Voice Output:
Specify the syllable number to be output.
Message Output:
Specify the voice message number to be output.

IM 33G2C20-11E

D3-35

3.18.2 Voice Input

Specify the starting number and ending number for the syllables to be registered in the
voice unit. When the ending number is omitted, the ICS automatically detects the end.
The maximum number of syllables is 250, with a maximum total duration of 290 seconds.

3.18.3 Test Output of Registered Voice

(1) Overview
The information registered in the voice output unit can be output as
Voice Output
Message Output
(2) Voice Output
Specify the starting number and ending number (3-digit numbers, 1 to 255) for the syllables to be output.
This item outputs syllables (or information in the form of a clause) only, and may not
give information in the form of a complete message depending on the way this item is
set up. If you have specified the starting number only, only the syllable with that number
is output. If ALL is specified as the starting number, the syllables that have been
registered are all output.
(3) Message Output
Specify the starting number and ending number of the voice messages to be output.
Unlike setup item (2) above that outputs syllables only, this item delivers voice
messages (spoken sentences). If you have specified the starting number only, only the
voice message with that number is output. If ALL is specified as the starting number,
the voice messages that have been registered are all output.

D3-36

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Workbench

4.

Workbench
This chapter describes how to operate the workbench necessary when using the
application functions at an ICS.

4.1

Overview

4.1.1

Functional Overview
The workbench is software that activates or deactivates any of the application function
units used at an ICS. The user can select any of the buttons representing application
function units (builder packages or optional packages such as MIF software package) in
the workbench menu window with the mouse to activate or deactivate it. Such
application function unit (that can be activated/deactivated from the workbench window)
are user definable. Use the configuration file to make any addition or change to the
application function units in the menu.
Maximum number of application function units that can be assigned to the menu: 32
Number of characters allowed for the label on a button: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

Figure D4.1.1

Examples of Workbench Menu Window (Left) and Message

Window (Right)

TIP

IM 33G2C20-11E

(1)

The workbench is a software that activates or deactivates the functions. Each

function is executed by the corresponding software.
The operation and others of the workbench after activating each function are the
same as those of the work station.

(2)

When the software of our company is used, by installing the software package in
the ICS, the functions are automatically assigned and displayed in the workbench
menu window.
D4-1

4.1.2

Function Configuration
The function configuration of the workbench is shown in the following figure. The
workbench reads the information of the application functions described in the configuration file, and display the menu window and message window as shown in the previous
figure.
When the user select the toggle buttons in the menu window, each application function
displayed on the menu is activated.
The message window displays the messages and errors of the workbench itself along
with the standard messages and error messages at activation or deactivation time of
application functions.

Figure D4.1.2

4.1.3

Workbench Function Configuration (Overview)

Display Format
The following figure shows the display format of the workbench menu window.

Figure D4.1.3

Display Format of Workbench Menu Window

Number of escape buttons : 1

Number of menu buttons : up to 32
(Up to 8 menu buttons can be displayed .When 9 or more
buttons are assigned, use the scroll bar to scroll the display.)
D4-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Workbench

4.1.4

Panel Access
The panel access is enabled between the workbench panel and operation and monitoring
panel.

(1) Switching between Workbench Panel and Operation and Monitoring Panel
The panel can be switched to the operation and monitoring panel from the workbench
panel by selecting the escape button in the menu window. Furthermore, use of the
workbench key

and panel erase key

on the ICS allows the panel

switching between the workbench panel and operation and monitoring panel.

Figure D4.1.4

Panel Access between Workbench Panel & Operation and Monitoring Panel

(2) Keeping Workbench Active

After the application function has been activated from the workbench panel, even if
another panel is called while the workbench menu is open, the workbench remains
active. In such a case, the system message area indicates the [
shown in the following figure.

Figure D4.1.5

IM 33G2C20-11E

] workbench mark, as

Indication of Workbench Activation Status

D4-3

4.2

Message Window
The configuration of the message window is shown in the following figure.

Figure D4.2.1

Message Window Configuration

The message window displays the messages related to the standard output and standard
error of each application function, that is, the activation error, and error caused by
option, etc. are displayed in the message window entirely.

D4-4

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Workbench

4.3

Configuration Files
Use the configuration files to assign the application functions to be accessed from the
workbench window.

4.3.1

File Types
Configuration file for the user is shown below.
/users0/opdata/wkbench/Wbench. conf
The configuration file for the user (Wbench. conf) does not have to be registered if not
required. The figure below shows an example of a configuration file.

Figure D4.3.1

4.3.2

Example of Configuration File

Example of File
An example of configuration file Wbench. conf accessed from the menu window (Figure
D4.3.2) is shown in Figure D4.3.3.

Figure D4.3.2

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Workbench Menu Window

D4-5

Part E
Desktop ICS
In addition to the console ICS discussed in parts A through D, a desktop ICS is available
as a variant of the information and command station. This part highlights the points in
which the desktop ICS differs from the console ICS. For details on the hardware
configuration of the desktop ICS, refer to the Information Command Unit Hardware
Manual (IM 33G6B40-01E).

Content
1. Overview ................................................................................................ E1-1
2. Operation Keyboard .............................................................................. E2-1
3. Operation on Instrument Faceplate ....................................................... E3-1
3.1
3.2

Display ...................................................................................................... E3-1

Operation ................................................................................................... E3-2

4. Function Keys ........................................................................................ E4-1

5. Operating Preferences Setup Panel ....................................................... E5-1
6. Own Station Status Display Panel ........................................................ E6-1
6.1
6.2

Display Format .......................................................................................... E6-2

Voice Output Function .............................................................................. E6-2

7. Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Functions............................................ E7-1

8. Application Capacities ........................................................................... E8-1

IM 33G2C20-11E

E-i

1. Overview

1.

Overview
The desktop ICS comes in hardware different from the console ICS. This makes a little
difference in user operation; however, fundamentally the desktop ICS is functionally the
same as the console ICS.
The major differences between the console ICS and desktop ICS are as follows.

(1) Discrepancies in Hardware

Arrangement and key set in the operation keyboard
Equipped with track ball and has no provision for touch operation
For information on how to use the track ball, see the ICS Operation Manual
(IM33G2H20-11E)
Connection procedure for the voice output function
(2) Discrepancies in Software and Operation
Operation procedure on the instrument faceplate due to the different keyboard design
Display format of the own station status display panel in the system maintenance
functions
Auxiliary contact I/O function (operator utility)

IM 33G2C20-11E

E1-1

2. Operation Keyboard

2.

Operation Keyboard
The following figure shows the layout of the operation keyboard for the desktop ICS. In
spite of the different key set and key arrangement, the labels on the keys and the
operating procedures are still the same as those of a keyboard for a console ICS.

Figure E2.1

Operation Keyboard Layout

(1) Function Keys

A desktop ICS has forty-eight keys, while a console ICS has sixty four. In order to
enable direct access to the operator utility function panel, assign the operator utility
panel call up function to one of these function keys, because the desktop ICS does not
have a

key.

(2) Control Keys

The control keys are in a different location. In addition to this, there is only a single key
set for a faceplate window (while there are eight key sets for eight faceplates on a
console ICS).

IM 33G2C20-11E

E2-1

3. Operation on Instrument Faceplate

3.

Operation on Instrument Faceplate

For operating the control group panel, etc., a console ICS has eight sets of control keys to
correspond to each instruments, whereas a desktop ICS has only one set of control keys,
and it is used in common for all faceplates on the panel. Selecting the softkey associated
with an instrument faceplate automatically calls up the faceplate window together with the
data entry window (The faceplate window appears on the selected instrument faceplate).
The operating procedure after this is the same as that at a console ICS.

3.1

Display

IM 33G2C20-11E

Figure E3.1.1

Example of Control Group Panel with Faceplate Window

Figure E3.1.2

Example of Tuning Panel with Faceplate Window

E3-1

TIP
At a console ICS, selecting the softkey associated with an instrument faceplate does not
call up the faceplate window but just the entry window.

3.2

Operation
Follow the procedure below to operate an instrument faceplate at a desktop ICS.
Select the softkey if the entry window is not already on the screen.
The entry window appears.
Change the data or mode from the keyboard as you wish.
TIP

Not only in the case of direct numerical entries, but also in the case of using the data
increase/decrease keys, follow the procedure above.

Figure E3.2.1

E3-2

Control Key Set (on Operation Keyboard)

IM 33G2C20-11E

4. Function Keys

4.

Function Keys
Due to the different operation keyboard, a desktop ICS has a different number of
function keys and different kinds of available system function key functions.
Number of function keys: 48
The table below lists the available system function key functions and their names.
Table E4.1
Classification

System Function Key Functions

Name

Function

ISOL

Prohibits switching of panels from another ICS.

RECF

Displays the next page of the previously viewed panel.

RECB

Displays the previous page of the previously viewed panel.

PSET

Activates panel set function. This is the same function as

that of the panel set key in a console ICS.

UTIL

The same function as the operator utility key

FACE

Displays the faceplate window which was last viewed.

TRDW

Displays the trend group window which was last viewed.

TRPW

Displays the trend point window which was last viewed.

PROC

Displays the process window which was last viewed.

GRPW

Displays the graphic window which was last viewed.

OVRW

Displays the overview window which was last viewed.

CRDW

Moves the topmost window to the bottom.

CRUP

Moves the bottommost window to the top.

ERFS

Removes the full size panel being displayed.

ERWD

Removes all half size panel, window, but not the full size
panel, being displayed.

HALF

Changes a full size panel to a half size panel (half size panel
display).

FULL

Changes a half size panel to a full size panel

VOIC

Discontinues voice output for confirmation.

ACKN

Performs the same functions as the alarm acknowledge key.

BUZZ

Performs the same function as the buzzer reset key.

Setting
g and canceling data

SETD

Performs data setting operation.

SCNC

Cancels setting operation.

Others

FOCS

Transfers input between the full size panel and the top window.

Panel display &

hard copy
cop

Window display
p y

Voice & buzzer

LED
R

Note) R: if R is assigned to a function key, the LED (lamp) will light up.
Codes ACKN, BUZZ can be assigned only to extension keys.

IM 33G2C20-11E

E4-1

5. Operating Preferences Setup Panel

5.

Operating Preferences Setup Panel

Figure E5.1

Example of Operating Preferences Setup Panel

Desktop ICSs do not support the following functions.

Specifying touch screen operation mode
Specifying whether touch screen functions are provided or not
Initialization of touch screens
Calibration of touch screens
Specifying audible alarms
Controlling speaker tone

TIP
Desktop type ICS does not have the volume adjusting function, so sound volume cannot
be adjusted on the operating preference setup panel (In console type ICS, it can be
adjusted). The sound volume is set to the maximum. To adjust it, use the volume control
on the system maintenance panel (operation keyboard).

IM 33G2C20-11E

E5-1

6. Own Station Status Display Panel

6.

Own Station Status Display Panel

Due to the difference in hardware configuration from a console ICS, the own station
status display panel for a desktop ICS is slightly different from that for a console ICS.

Figure E6.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Example of Own Station Status Display Panel

E6-1

6.1

Display Format
In comparison to a console ICS, the following items are not provided on the own station
status display panel at a desktop ICS because they are not provided in its hardware.
Indication of temperature near battery
Door fans status
Battery condition
All others are the same as those at a console ICS.

6.2

Voice Output Function

For a console ICS, to incorporate the voice output function, the voice output unit is
mounted in front of the station control nest (SCN) inside the console. On the other hand,
for a desktop ICS, a mounting nest for the voice output unit must be prepared external to
the ICS hardware. Consequently, the unit must be connected to the desktop ICS body.
This can be done simply by connecting the RS71 card to the voice output unit using the
RS-232C cable as shown below.

RS-232C

RS71

Voice Output Unit

Figure E6.2.1

Connection between RS71 and Voice Output Unit

TIP

E6-2

(1)

There are four ports on the RS71 card. Use the no. 3 port for this purpose.

(2)

The model name of the voice output unit attached to a desktop ICS is different
from that for a console ICS.

IM 33G2C20-11E

7. Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Functions

7.

Auxiliary Contact Input/Output

Functions
These functions are specified by the auxiliary contact input/output assignment panel in
the operator utility. A console ICS has two individual input/output contacts where as a
desktop ICS has only one input contact because of its hardware restriction.

RDY

AUX

DI
Auxiiary contact input (for standard models)
Auxiiary contact output (for special orders)
Status contact oputput

Figure E7.1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Contact Input/Output Terminals

E7-1

8. Application Capacities

8.

Application Capacities
The application capacities of a desktop ICS depends on the size of the hard disk mounted
inside. The table below shows the recommended maximum capacities for each disk size.
Table E8.1

Application Capacities
Item

Number of control stations to be supervised

Number of tags
Number of trend acquisition points
Number of overview panel pages

1-Gbyte disk

20

50

10000

50000

2304

2304

32

32

Number of control group panel pages

800

800

Number of trend group panel pages

800

800

Number of graphic panel pages

300

800

Number of graphic windows

100

500

Number of help windows

100

Use of builder functions

IM 33G2C20-11E

500-Mbyte disk

Not available

500
Available

E8-1

Appendix

Content
1. ICS Display Update Periods .......................................................................... App.1-1

IM 33G2C20-11E

App.-i

1. ICS Display Update Periods

Appendix 1. ICS Display Update Periods

The general update periods of ICS display panels are shown in the following table. If the
update period of any particular display panel is changed through custom ordered
software, that tailored specification governs.
Table App.1.1 Panel Display Update Periods (Standard)
Display update period (seconds)
Panel name

Full size panel

Half size panel

Lower CRT

Upper CRT

Lower CRT

Upper CRT

Overview panel
Control group panel
Tuning panel
Trend group panel
Trend point panel
Operator guide message panel
Graphic panel (standard)
Graphic panel (4 times larger panel)
Alarm summary panel
Computer message summary panel

1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
-

2
2
2
1
1
2
4
2
-

4
4
4
1
1
4
4
-

4
4
4
1
1
4
4
-

Instrument faceplate
Tuning trend
Image panel

1
1
-

2
1
-

4
1
N/A

4
1
N/A

Process status report menu panel

Instrument status report panel
Annunciator status report panel
Process I/O status report panel
Software I/O status report panel
Historical message report menu panel
Historical message report panel

1
1
-

2
2
-

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

Control drawing status display panel

Sequence table status display panel
Logic chart status display panel
SEBOL status display panel
SFC status display panel

4
1
4
5
5

4
2
4
5
5

4
4
4
10
10

4
4
4
10
10

System maintenance menu panel

System status overview panel
System alarm message panel
Control station status display panel (VHF)
Control station status display panel (HF)
Own station status display panel
Equalization function panel
Operating preferences setup panel

1
1
5
2
-

2
2
5
2
-

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

-: Not updated periodically; updated only upon change of message status, or not updated after called.
N/A: The half size panel is unavailable.

IM 33G2C20-11E

App.1-1

Note 1 - Tuning panel:

For the tuning trend display in the tuning panel, refer to the columns for the Tuning
trend.
Note 2 - Trend group panel, trend point panel:
The display is updated in the same period as the trend data sampling period. The
update period is one second for high speed trend.
Note 3 - Graphic panel:
The numbers in the update period columns do not denote the update periods but the
magnifications.
Update period = user-defined period (using the builder) 1, 2, or 4
Full size panel:
On lower CRT: user-defined update period 1
On upper CRT: user-defined update period 2
Half size panel:
User-defined update period 4
Note 4 - Graphic panel (4 times larger panel):
The display update period is the user-defined update period or four seconds, whichever is longer. This means that periods less than four seconds cannot be specified as
user-defind periods.
Note 5 - Instrument faceplate:
Applied to the faceplates in tuning panels and control panels.
Note 6 - Tuning trend:
Denotes the trend display in a tuning panel. Always updated every second.
Note 7 - Control drawing status display panel, logic chart status display panel
Always updated every four seconds. (The internal algorithm to determine the update
period is the same as that for 4 times larger graphic panels. The user-defined update
periods are defined in the specifications for the status display panel generation tool
on the EWS.)

App.1-2

IM 33G2C20-11E

1. ICS Display Update Periods

Table App.1.2 Window Display Update Periods (Standard)

Display update period (seconds)
Window
Wi
dow name
ame

Lower CRT

Upper CRT

System message window

Process alarm window
System alarm window
Operator guide message window
Computer message window

1
-

1
-

Faceplate window
Trend window
Process window
Overview window
Graphic window
Graphic window scrolled
Help window
Confirmation window
Menu window
Computer window

1
1
1
1
1
1
-

2
1
2
2
2
2
-

Data entry window

Image file operation window
Detail display window
ITV window

1
5
-

1
5
-

-: Not updated periodically; updated only upon change of message status, or not updated after called.

Note 1 - Trend window:

The display is updated in the same period as the trend data sampling period. The
update period is one second for high speed trend.
Note 2 - Graphic window:
Update period = user-defined period (using the builder) 1, or 2
Note 3 - Graphic window scrolled:
The same as the graphic window above.
Note 4 - Detail display window:
For the SEBOL status display and SFC status display panels.

IM 33G2C20-11E

App.1-3

Table App.1.3 Panel Display Update Periods (CS Batch Functions)

Display update period (seconds)
Panel name

Product overview panel

Product control panel
Formula setup panel
Unit procedure status display panel
Recipe list panel
Recipe setup panel
Server station switching panel

App.1-4

Full size panel

Half size panel

Lower CRT

Upper CRT

Lower CRT

Upper CRT

5
5
5
5
5

5
5
5
5
5

10
10
10
10
10

10
10
10
10
10

IM 33G2C20-11E

Index

Index
A

A mode.................................................................... C8-4
Acknowledgment of Messages ............................... C3-9
Alarm Messages ................................................... C3-16
Alarm Processing .................................................... C4-1
Alarm Statuses ...................................................... B3-20
Alarm Summary Panel ......................................... C1-61
Alarm SuppressionAlarm-Output-Off
Mode ........................................................... C4-17
Analog Display Instrument Faceplate .................... B3-4
Annunciator Messages ......................................... C4-18
Annunciator Status Report Panel .......................... C5-15
AOF .......................................................... C1-31, C4-17
Application Capacities ............................................ E8-1
Arc .......................................................................... C7-2
Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Assignment
Panel ............................................................ D3-11
Auxiliary Contact Input/Output Functions ............. E7-1

Ellipse ..................................................................... C7-2

Engineering Keyboard ............................................ B1-6
Entry Window Input ............................................... B6-4
Equalization Function Panel ................................ D1-44
Equalizing a mirrored disk .................................. D1-38
Executable Functions with One-touch Operation ... B5-1
Extension Key Assignment Panel ........................ D3-13
External Recorder Output Assignment Panel ...... D3-18

B
B mode.................................................................... C8-4
Bar graph .............................................................. C7-16
Batch Trend ............................................................ C6-7
Block Modes ......................................................... B3-18
Block Statuses ...................................................... B3-19
Built-in-Speaker ................................................... B10-1

C
CAL ...................................................................... C1-32
Circle ...................................................................... C7-2
Color ....................................................................... C7-7
Computer Message Summary Panel ..................... C1-69
Computer Message Window ................................. C2-20
Computer Window ................................................ C2-52
Configuration File ................................................. D4-5
Confirmation Window .......................................... C2-47
Control Drawing Status Display Panel .................. D2-2
Control Group Assignment Panel ........................ D3-30
Control Group Panel ............................................. C1-22
Control Station Status Display Panel .................. D1-23
Coordinate Modification ...................................... C7-31
CRT Output ............................................................. C3-5

F
Faceplate Block .................................................... B3-14
Faceplate Window ................................................ C2-22
Fan .......................................................................... C7-2
File Names .............................................................. B4-7
Fill Area ........................................................ C7-2, C7-8
Full Size Panel ........................................................ B2-1
Function Key .............................................. B5-14, E4-1
Function Key Assignment Panel ........................... D3-9

G
Graphic Computation ........................................... C7-19
Graphic Data ......................................................... C7-15
Graphic Panel ....................................................... C1-59
Graphic Window ................................................... C2-40
Graphics .................................................................. C7-1
Group Acknowledgment ....................................... C3-10
Group Identifier ...................................................... C8-3
Group Setting ........................................................ C7-25
Group Setting Input ................................................ B6-8

H
Half Size Panel ........................................... B2-1, C1-73
Handing Data Acquired by Other Stations ............. C6-9
Hard Copy Function ............................................... B8-2
Help Message Edit Panel ..................................... D3-34
Help Window ........................................................ C2-43
Help Window Information Definition Panel ....... D3-32
Hierarchical Plant Configuration .......................... B3-21
Historical Message Report ................................... C5-24
Historical Message Report Menu Panel ............... C5-19
Historical Message Report Panel .......................... C5-24

D
Data Item .............................................................. B3-16
Date and Time Setup Panel .................................. D1-53
Def. Communication Table ................................... C7-33
Direct Input ............................................................. B6-5
Discrete Display Instrument Faceplate ................... B3-8
Display of Panels 1.5 or 4 Times Larger in Size .. C7-35
Display Window ................................................... C7-24
IM 33G2C20-11E

I
I/O Unit Status Display ....................................... D1-29
ICS Capacities ...................................................... B11-1
ICS Display Update Periods ............................. App.1-1
Image File ............................................................... B8-4

Index-1

Individual Acknowledgment ................................ C3-10

Input Operations ..................................................... B6-1
Instrument Faceplates ............................................. B3-4
Instrument Status Report Panel ............................ C5-13
ISA Symbols ........................................................... C7-3

K
Keylock Mode Switch and Security ....................... C9-3

L
Line ......................................................................... C7-7
Line-segment graph .............................................. C7-16
Logic Chart Status Display Panel ........................ D2-19

M
Menu Selection Input ............................................. B6-7
Menu Window ...................................................... C2-49
Message ................................................................ C7-27
Message Outputting ................................................ C3-1
Message Window .................................................. C2-12
Modification ......................................................... C7-28
Mouse ..................................................................... B1-6

P
Page Number Input ............................................... B6-10
Panel Copying ........................................................ B8-1
Panel Display Sequence ......................................... B5-8
Panel Display Sequence Definition Panel ........... D3-23
Panel Names ........................................................... B4-5
Panel Operation on Stacked-CRT ........................... B7-1
Panel Set Definition Panel ................................... D3-25
Panel Set Names ..................................................... B4-6
Panels Displayed at Magnifications of 1.5x or 4x .. B2-2
Pattern Block .............................................. C7-2, C7-11
Plant Names ............................................................ B4-3
Polyline ................................................................... C7-2
Polymarker ................................................. C7-2, C7-10
PRD ...................................................................... C1-30
Printed Message .................................................... C3-12
Printer Output ......................................................... C3-8
Printing Configurations .......................................... B9-1
Process Alarm Window ........................................ C2-14
Process Alarms ....................................................... C4-2
Process Data Character ......................................... C7-14
Process I/O Status Report Panel ........................... C5-16
Process Reporting ................................................... C5-1
Process Status Report ........................................... C5-13
Process Status Report Menu Panel ......................... C5-8
Process Window ................................................... C2-34

N
Name Input ........................................................... B6-11
Non-locking ............................................................ C4-8

O
Off mode ................................................................. C8-4
One-line Input ......................................................... B6-6
Ongoing-alarm-dependent ...................................... C4-8
Operating and Switching Graphic Panels ............. C7-20
Operating Preferences Setup Panel ............ D1-47, E5-1
Operation Group ..................................................... C8-1
Operation Group Names ......................................... B4-7
Operation Keyboard ..................................... B1-2, E2-1
Operation Mark .................................................... C1-33
Operation Mark Definition Panel .......................... D3-8
Operation marks ..................................................... B3-7
Operation on Instrument Faceplate ........................ E3-1
Operation Panels ..................................................... C1-1
Operator Guide Message ...................................... C3-13
Operator Guide Message Panel ............................ C1-53
Operator Guide Message Window ........................ C2-18
Operator Input ........................................................ B6-1
Operator Utility ..................................................... D3-1
Operator Utility Menu Panel ................................. D3-7
Overview Assignment Panel ................................ D3-27
Overview Panel .................................................... C1-13
Overview Window ................................................ C2-37
Own Station Status Display Panel .............. D1-32, E6-1

Index-2

R
Radar chart graph ................................................. C7-17
Rectangle ................................................................ C7-2
Representative Alarm ........................................... C4-11
Request Message .................................................. C3-15
Rewarning Alarm ...................................... C4-10, C4-20

S
Saved Trend ............................................................ C6-8
Search Setting Window .......................................... C5-5
SEBOL Status Display Panel .............................. D2-25
Security ................................................................... C9-1
Self-acknowledgment ............................................. C4-8
Sequence Message ................................................ C3-11
Sequence Table Status Display Panel .................... D2-8
SFC Status Display Panel .................................... D2-35
Softkey .................................................................. B5-15
Softkey and Instrument ......................................... C7-22
Software I/O Status Report Panel ......................... C5-17
Status Display Panel .............................................. D2-1
Step graph ............................................................. C7-16
System Alarm Message Panel ................. D1-18, C1-68
System Alarm Window ......................................... C2-16
System Alarms ...................................................... C4-21
System Function Key ........................................... B5-10
System Function Key Names ................................. B4-6
System help message ............................................ C2-43

IM 33G2C20-11E

Index

System Help Messages ......................................... C2-44

System Maintenance .............................................. D1-1
System Maintenance Menu Panel ......................... D1-7
System Maintenance Panel ..................................... B1-4
System Status Overview Panel ............................ D1-10
System Tag Names ................................................. B4-2

T
Tag Comments ........................................................ B3-2
Tag Marks ............................................................... B3-3
Tag Names .................................................... B3-2, B4-2
Text ......................................................................... C7-9
Touch Target and Push Button .............................. C7-20
Touch Target/Push Button ................................... B5-16
Track Ball ............................................................... B1-7
Trend Block and Trend Group Number .................. C6-6
Trend Data Save Panel ........................................ D3-20
Trend Group Panel ................................................ C1-35
Trend Instrument Faceplate .................................. B3-10
Trend Operation Window ..................................... C1-43
Trend Pen Assignment Panel ............................... D3-15
Trend Point Panel ................................................. C1-47
Trend Recording ..................................................... C6-1
Trend Recording Memory Capacity ....................... C6-6
Trend Reference Pattern Registration Panel ........ D3-21
Trend Window ...................................................... C2-25
Tuning Panel ......................................................... C1-27
Tuning Trend Window .......................................... C2-29
Two-dimensional graph ........................................ C7-17
Two-line Input ........................................................ B6-7

U
User Help Messages ............................................. C2-44
User Program Names .............................................. B4-7
User-defined Tag Names ........................................ B4-2

V
Voice Input Panel ................................................. D3-35
Voice Message ...................................................... C3-14

W
Window Input ......................................................... B6-9
Window Names ...................................................... B4-6
Windows ................................................................. C2-1
Workbench ............................................................. D4-1

IM 33G2C20-11E

Index-3

 Readers Comment Form

We welcome your comments or suggestions that will help us improve our manuals for
the CENTUM CS system. We would like to recommend that you copy this form to
note your comments or suggestions. We ask that you be as specific as possible when
making comments or suggestions.
Please fill in the form and send it to the following address via facsimile.

Attention

: Solution Center
IA Systems Business Div.
Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Facsimile No.

: 81-422-52-9802

From

: (Name may be omitted.)

Name

Date

Company
Div. & Sect.
Address

Phone No.

Ext.

Fax. No.

Manual No.
Title
Pages

: IM 33G2C20-11E (4th Edition)

: ICS Operation and Monitoring Function Manual
Line

Comments and Suggestions

.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

 Revision Record
Manual No. : IM 33G2C20-11E
Title
: ICS Operation and Monitoring Function Manual
Edition

Date

1st

Jan. 1995

2nd

Aug. 1995

Revised Item
New publication
Part D
Changes in Section 1.2, System Maintenance Menu
Panel
Addition of Section 1.9, Date and Time Setup Panel
Addition of functions in Section 2.4, SEBOL Status
Display Panel, and Section 2.5, SFC Status Display
Panel

Release. No. *
R2.01 or later

R2.03 or later

Part F
Deletion of ICS-EL
Part A
Model change and deletion in Chapter 2,
ICS Equipment
Part B
Addition of model to Subsection 3.3.4,
Faceplate Block
Addition of explanation to Section 3.6,
Hierarchical Plant Configuration
Addition of FULL, and deletion of ICPY to and from
Subsection 5.2.4, System Function Key
3rd

Jul. 1996

Part C
Addition of CAL display to Section 1.5,
Tuning Panel

R2.06 or later

Addition of explanation for other station trend to

Section 1.6, Trend Group Panel
Deletion of Table C3.3.1 in Section 3.3,
Acknowledgment of Messages
Change of search setting window, and Addition of
explanation for specifying destination printer to
Chapter 5, Process Reporting
Addition of explanation to Section 9.3,
Security Levels for Operation and Monitoring of ICS
Functions

IM 33G2C20-11E

Edition

Date

Revised Item

Release. No. *

Part D
Addition of AUT 2 to Section 1.5,
Control Station Status Display Panel
Change of panel display in Section 1.6,
Own Station Status Display Panel
Addition of softkey [DRAW] to Section 2.2,
Sequence Table Status Display Panel
3rd

Jul. 1996

The detail display window of the status display panel has

been changed in Section 2.4,
SEBOL Status Display Panel and Section 2.5,
SFC Status Display Panel

R2.06 or later

Chapter 4, Workbench has been entirely revised

Addition of FULL, and deletion of ICPY to and from
Chapter 4, Function Keys
Part E
Panel display changed in Chapter 6,
Own Station Status Display Panel
Part B
Addition of comments for new instrument faceplate types
to Subsection 3.3.2, Instrument Faceplate Types
Change in Table B5.1.1, Functions of One-touch
Operations
Part D
Addition of the existing stations that can display sequence
tables to Subsection 2.2.1, Panel Specifications
4th

Apr. 2000

Addition of Local Variables Arrangement to Restoration

Character String in Subsection 2.4.4, Detail Display
Window

R2.06.50 or later

Change in the output example in Section 3.6, Auxiliary

Contact Input/Output Assignment Panel
Deletion of the Ch.view menu from Section 3.11, Trend
Reference Pattern Registration Panel
Part E
Addition of TIP on volume adjusting on the Desktop type
ICS to Chapter 5, Operating Preferences Setup Panel
* : Denotes the release number of the software corresponding to the contents of this instruction manual.
The revised contents are valid until the next edition is issued.

Written by

Solution Center
IA Systems Business Div.
Yokogawa Electric Corporation

Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation

2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN
Printed by

ii

Yokogawa Graphic Arts Co., Ltd.

IM 33G2C20-11E